# API connections
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/api-tokens
Create API tokens and connect Slant to MCP clients and Zapier.
API connections let you connect Slant to external tools. Use the **API** tab to create personal access tokens, the **MCP** tab to connect MCP-compatible clients, and the **Zapier** tab to connect Zapier automations.
Personal access tokens let you read your Slant data from outside the app — useful for spreadsheets, custom dashboards, AI assistants, and other integrations. Each token is tied to your user account and inherits your access.
Tokens are read-only by default. To enable write access for a token, click **Enable write access** on the token's row and tell us how you'll use it — see [Enable write access](#enable-write-access).
## Connect an MCP client
Use Slant's remote MCP server to connect Claude, ChatGPT, or another MCP-compatible client to the Slant data you can access.
Go to **Settings** → **API connections**, then select **MCP**.
Copy `https://mcp.slant.app`.
Paste the URL when your client asks for a remote MCP server.
Complete the sign-in prompt. The connection uses your Slant account and follows your current book access.
You do not need to create or paste a personal access token for this connection.
## Create a token
To open the token list, go to **Settings** → **API connections**, then select the **API** tab.
The **Create API token** form opens.
Use a name that describes where the token will be used (for example, "Tax export spreadsheet" or "Personal Zapier"). The name only helps you recognize the token later.
Slant generates a token that starts with `slnt_pat_` and shows it under **Your new API token**.
Copy the token before leaving the page. After you navigate away, the full value cannot be viewed again — only the first few characters are stored.
Click **Copy** next to the token, then paste it into the tool that needs API access.
## Token list
Each token you create appears in the table below the create button:
* **Name** — the label you gave the token
* **Token** — the first few characters, for identification only
* **Access** — **Read only** or **Read & write** — read-only by default
* **Created by** — the user who issued the token
* **Created** — the date the token was issued
* **Last used** — the most recent time the token made a request, or **Never** if it hasn't been used yet
## Enable write access
Click **Enable write access** on the token's row in the list. (Only appears for read-only tokens.)
In the **Enable write access** dialog, fill in **Why do you need write access?** with a short description of how you'll use it.
A toast confirms "Write access enabled" and the token changes to **Read & write** immediately.
## Revoke a token
Revoke a token any time you no longer need it, or as soon as you suspect it's been exposed.
Match the **Name** or first few characters of the token.
The **Revoke token** confirmation appears.
The token stops working immediately. Any tool using it will lose access.
Revoking a token cannot be undone. Tools using the revoked token need a new one before they'll work again.
## Use a token
Pass the token in the `Authorization` header of every API request:
```
Authorization: Bearer slnt_pat_
```
For full request and response details, see the [API reference](/api-reference/overview).
## FAQ
Yes. Tokens are read-only by default. Click **Enable write access** on the token's row, fill in the reason, and click **Enable write access**. Write access is enabled immediately.
Your tokens are tied to your user account. When your account is removed, the tokens stop working.
No. The full token is only shown once, right after it's created. Revoke the old token and create a new one.
Yes. A token inherits the same book access as your user account. If you're added to or removed from a book, the token's access changes with it.
## Next steps
Authentication, endpoints, and request examples.
Connect Slant to thousands of apps without writing code.
# Automatic sign-out
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/automatic-sign-out
Sign users out after a period of inactivity to protect client data on shared or unattended devices.
Automatic sign-out logs users out of Slant after a period of no activity. Once enabled, Slant clears the page and signs the user out across every open tab when the timeout is reached.
Only admins can change this setting. It applies to every user in the company.
## Configure the timeout
Go to **Settings** → **Company settings**.
Look for **Automatic sign-out** with the description "Sign users out after a period of inactivity."
Use the dropdown to pick **Never**, **15 minutes**, **30 minutes**, **1 hour**, **4 hours**, **8 hours**, or **12 hours**. The change saves automatically.
Set the dropdown back to **Never** to turn the feature off.
## What users see
About a minute before the timeout fires, Slant shows a **Still there?** warning with a live countdown and two buttons:
* **Stay signed in** — resets the timer and keeps the session active
* **Sign out now** — signs the user out immediately
If no action is taken, Slant blanks the page, clears local data, and signs the user out. Any other tabs they have open are signed out at the same time.
## What counts as activity
Slant resets the timer on clicks, keystrokes, touches, and scrolling (including the mouse wheel). Mouse movement on its own does **not** count as activity.
## FAQ
No. Automatic sign-out only applies to interactive browser sessions. [API tokens](/account-settings/api-tokens) continue to work until they are revoked.
Slant saves most edits as you go, but anything in a draft state (for example, a half-written email) can be lost when the session is signed out. Set the timeout long enough that your team won't be surprised in the middle of a task.
No. The timeout is set once per company and applies to everyone. Set it to **Never** if you don't want any automatic sign-out.
# Book profile
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/book-profile
Update a book's name, icon, scheduling link, time zone, and client tiers.
Book profile settings identify a book throughout Slant and control book-specific defaults. Go to **Settings** → **Book profile**, then select the book you want to update.
## Book icon
The book icon appears with the book name in Slant. Select the current icon to change it.
You can enter up to two letters or numbers, use one emoji, or select **Upload image**. Uploaded images must be PNG, JPEG, or WebP files under 10 MB. Slant crops uploaded images to a square.
Select **Save** when the preview looks right.
## Book details
Use the remaining fields to update the book's name, scheduling link, time zone, and client tiers. These settings apply only to the selected book.
Your personal photo and scheduling link are managed separately under [Profile](/account-settings/profile).
## Next steps
Update your personal information and default book.
Manage team members and book access.
# Brand kit
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/brand-kit
Configure the logos, fonts, disclosures, and company profile used on branded forms and deliverables.
The brand kit controls the visual identity and voice used on branded PDFs and forms.
Brand kit changes apply across your company.
Go to **Settings** → **Brand kit**.
## Brand assets
On the **Brand kit** tab, configure:
* **Light mode logo** and **Dark mode logo** — Upload the logo variants used against different backgrounds.
* **Favicon** — Upload the square browser icon.
* **Fonts** — Choose the typefaces used in branded output.
* **Brand profile** — Review the brand guidance Slant extracts from your company website and supplied materials.
## Company disclosures
The **Disclosures** setting provides company-wide language for generated deliverables.
On the **Brand kit** tab, click **Click to add** or **Edit disclosures**.
Paste or write the text that should appear on client deliverables.
Click **Save**.
When set, this language replaces the last-page disclosure language on every deliverable. Leave it empty to keep each template's original language.
## Company profile
Open the **Company profile** tab to manage the firm information Slant uses in branded content.
## Related
* [Company settings](/account-settings/company-settings)
* [Document filler](/records/households/document-filler/overview)
* [Intake forms](/platform/intake-forms/overview)
# Company settings
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/company-settings
Manage company-wide identity, record defaults, security, and email import settings.
Company settings apply across every book in your company.
Only admins can change company settings.
Go to **Settings** → **Company settings**.
## Company details and record defaults
* **Company name** — The company name shown across Slant.
* **Company website** — Used where Slant needs your firm's website or brand context.
* **Default household name** — Sets how new clients and prospects are named.
* **Lock new notes by default** — Creates new notes as locked until an admin unlocks them.
* **Default country** — Sets the initial country for new phone numbers and addresses. It does not rewrite existing records.
The country picker places your default first when you add an address or phone number. Slant uses the United States when no company default has been selected.
## Security and email import
* **Automatic sign-out** — Signs users out after the selected period of inactivity.
* **Blacklisted emails** — Prevents messages from listed addresses or domains from importing for anyone in the company.
Click **Save changes** after updating company settings.
## Related
* [Brand kit](/account-settings/brand-kit)
* [Email and calendar](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar)
* [Automatic sign-out](/account-settings/automatic-sign-out)
# Custom fields
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/customization/custom-fields
Create custom fields to track data unique to your practice on households, people, businesses, opportunities, and trusts.
Custom fields let you add your own data points to records in Slant. Define fields once at the company level, and they become available on every record of that type across all books.
For information on viewing and editing custom field values on a record, see [custom fields on households](/records/households/custom-fields).
## Create a custom field
Go to **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Custom fields**.
* **Field name** — the label shown on records (e.g., "Last meeting at" or "Risk tolerance")
* **Object** — the record type this field applies to: Household, Person, Business, Opportunity, or Trust
* **Field type** — the kind of data this field stores (see [field types](#field-types) below)
The field is immediately available on all records of the selected type.
## Field types
| Type | Description |
| ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Text** | Short text value |
| **Rich text** | Formatted text with bold, lists, and links |
| **Number** | Numeric value. Choose a format: Number, Currency, or Percentage. Currency supports US Dollar (USD), Euro (EUR), Australian Dollar (AUD), and Canadian Dollar (CAD) |
| **Date** | A calendar date |
| **Yes/No** | A true/false toggle |
| **Single select** | Choose one value from a list of options you define |
| **Multi select** | Choose any number of values from a list of options you define. Selected values appear as pills on records and list pages. |
| **Relationships** | Link to another record — Household / Client / Prospect, Business, or User. The picker searches records in the current book. |
| **User reference** | Link to a team member. Optionally restrict which teammates are selectable. |
| **URL** | A web link |
## Reorder custom fields
Drag the handle on the left of a row to reorder fields within their object group. The order is shared across your company and controls how fields appear on record detail pages and in the custom fields widget on the overview layout.
## Edit a custom field
From the custom fields list, click the row to open the edit form. You can change the field name, add or remove select options, and update relationship settings.
The field type and object cannot be changed after creation. If you need a different type, create a new field and delete the old one.
For single select and multi select fields, you can add new options at any time. Options that are already in use on records cannot be removed.
### Restrict a User reference field to specific teammates
User reference fields default to **All users** — anyone in your company can be selected. To narrow the list, open the field and switch **Selectable users** to **Selected users**, then pick the teammates who should be eligible. The change applies everywhere the field is set, including bulk edits and inline edits on list pages.
You can't remove a teammate from the allowed list while they're set as the value on any record. Reassign or clear those records first.
## Delete a custom field
Click the delete icon on the field row and confirm. Deleting a custom field removes all stored values for that field across every record.
Deleting a custom field permanently removes all of its values. This cannot be undone.
## Fill with AI
For custom fields on households, you can use AI to populate values in bulk.
On the custom fields list, click the icon on a household-type field.
Describe what value the AI should generate for each household (e.g., "Summarize this client's investment goals based on their meeting notes").
Select whether to overwrite existing values or only fill blank ones, and which household types to include (clients, prospects, or both).
Click **Fill with AI**. The AI processes each household in the background. You can continue using Slant while it runs. When complete, you'll receive a notification and a summary in [book chat](/dashboard/book-chat) with links to the updated records.
## Field keys
Every custom field gets an auto-generated field key based on its name (e.g., "Risk Tolerance" becomes `risk_tolerance`). Field keys are used in automations and reports. They cannot be changed after creation and are shown on the edit form as a read-only value.
## Custom fields as columns
Custom fields can be added as columns on list pages like [clients](/records/clients/overview), [prospects](/records/prospects), [businesses](/records/businesses), and [trusts](/records/households/trusts). When adding a column to a [data view](/records/data-views), select an existing custom field from the dropdown or create a new one directly from the column picker.
Multi select fields support inline editing, bulk updates, and filtering. In filters, you can match or exclude records that contain any selected option.
## FAQ
No. Custom fields are defined at the company level and apply to all books. The same fields appear on every record of that type, regardless of which book it belongs to.
Yes. Custom fields appear as filter options on list pages. You can filter by exact match, contains, blank/not blank, and other operators depending on the field type.
There is a limit of 63 characters for field keys (derived from the field name). In practice, you can create as many fields as you need.
Yes. Custom field values can be used as conditions in [automations](/platform/automations/overview) and as variables in task templates.
## Next steps
View and edit custom field values on households
Add custom field columns to your list views
# Data customizations
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/customization/data-customizations
Manage email, SMS, note, and task templates, pipelines, meeting types, custom fields, and workflow settings.
The data customizations page is the central hub for managing templates, pipelines, meeting types, custom fields, and workflow settings. Go to **Settings** → **Data customizations** to access it.
The page is organized with **Company** and book tabs at the top. Company-wide items are available across all books. Book-specific items are available only in the selected book.
## Templates
Templates pre-fill forms with standardized values so your team stays consistent.
* **[Task templates](/account-settings/customization/task-templates)** — reusable task definitions with titles, descriptions, assignees, deadlines, priorities, labels, and attachments. Available on both company and book tabs.
* **[Note templates](/account-settings/customization/note-templates)** — standardized note formats with rich text content. Available on both company and book tabs.
* **[Email templates](/account-settings/customization/email-templates)** — pre-written emails with subject lines, body content, and attachments. Available on both company and book tabs.
* **[SMS templates](/account-settings/customization/sms-templates)** — reusable text messages with variables that personalize the message for its recipient. Available on both company and book tabs.
* **[Mail merge](/records/mail-merge)** — Word templates for printed letters, envelopes, and labels, with merge fields that pull household data into the document. Available on both company and book tabs.
## Pipelines
[Pipelines](/account-settings/customization/pipelines) define the stages that opportunities move through. Create pipelines scoped to prospects, clients, or both, and customize stage names, colors, probabilities, and auto-advance behavior. Available on both company and book tabs.
## Custom fields
[Custom fields](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields) let you track data unique to your practice on households, people, businesses, opportunities, and trusts. Choose from text, number, date, yes/no, single select, relationships, and more. Available on the company tab only.
## Meeting types
Meeting types categorize meetings and help Slant tailor meeting AI. Slant includes locked defaults, and your team can add custom company-wide types with a name, color, and AI description. Archived custom types are hidden from future pickers but remain on existing meetings and prompt customizations. Available on the company tab only.
## Nudges
The **Nudges** card lets your team limit which [nudges](/dashboard/daily-overview#nudges) each user sees by linking nudges to a household custom field that points to a user.
Go to **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Custom fields** and add a custom field on **Household** with type **User reference** (for example, "Lead advisor"). Set this field on each household to the user responsible for that client.
Go to **Settings** → **Data customizations** and click **Nudges** on the **Company** tab.
Under **Assigned advisor field**, select the custom field you created. To turn the filter off, choose **None — show all nudges to everyone**.
When set, each user only sees nudges for clients where this field equals them. Nudges with no client and clients with a blank value remain visible to everyone. Users can override the filter from the nudges panel using the **My nudges** / **All nudges** toggle.
Any team member can manage company-wide items and items in books they can access. Locked system meeting types can be edited only by admins.
# Email templates
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/customization/email-templates
Create reusable email templates with pre-written subjects, bodies, and attachments.
Email templates let you save pre-written emails that your team can reuse. Each template includes a name, subject line, body, and optional attachments.
## Company-wide vs book-specific
* **Company templates** are available across all books. Any user can create, edit, or delete them.
* **Book templates** are available only in a specific book. Any user can manage book-level templates.
Use the **Company** and book name tabs at the top of the page to switch between scopes.
## Create an email template
Go to **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Email templates**.
Choose the **Company** tab for a company-wide template, or a book tab for a book-specific template.
* **Name** — an internal label to identify the template
* **Subject** — the email subject line
* **Body** — the email content, with font family and size, bold, italic, underline, strikethrough, text color, bullet and numbered lists, and indentation
* **Attachments** — files included with every email sent from the template
## Template variables
Variables are placeholders you drop into a subject or body that fill in automatically when the template is applied or rendered. For example, **HoH: first name** becomes the head of household's first name for whoever the email is tied to.
In the **Subject** or **Body**, click where you want the value to appear.
Pick a variable from the list, or type `/` in the body to search inline.
Variables are grouped into categories:
* **General** — values that don't depend on the recipient, like **Current date**
* **Household** — the household name, leader first names, and meeting dates
* **Head of household** — the primary person's name and job title
* **Spouse/partner** — the partner's name and job title
* **Sender** — the name and scheduling link of the person sending the email
* **Company** — the company name and the book's scheduling link
* **Custom fields** — any custom fields your book has added
**Current date** inserts today's date, formatted like "June 18, 2026" and using your book's timezone. Use it for dated messages so the template stays current without editing.
Company variables, like the company name, fill in everywhere templates are used — including email drafts that tasks generate automatically.
When you select a template while composing an individual email, Slant renders the variables immediately and inserts the finished subject and body into the draft. Bulk sends and automated send-time flows render variables for each recipient when they run.
A variable only fills in where its data exists. **Household** and **Head of household** variables resolve when a template is used from a client or prospect, but stay empty in a general email that isn't tied to a household.
## Edit an email template
Click a template in the list to open the editor. Make your changes and save.
## Clone a template
Click the clone action on a template to create a copy. When cloning, you can choose a target book or keep it at the company level. Cloning requires a new name for the copy.
## Delete an email template
Click the delete action on a template and confirm. Deleting a template does not affect emails that were already sent using it.
Slant prevents deletion while the template is referenced by a task, task template, create-task automation, or send-email automation. Remove those references before deleting the template.
## Using templates
Email templates can be used in several places:
* **Composing emails** — select a template when writing a new email to pre-fill the subject and body
* **Task templates** — link an email template to a [task template](/activity/tasks/task-templates) so the email is ready when the task is opened
* **Automations** — use email templates in [send email actions](/platform/automations/actions)
* **Sequences** — email steps in [sequences](/platform/sequences/overview) use templates
## FAQ
Yes. The email templates page has a search bar at the top that filters by template name and subject.
Templates support the same file types as regular emails, including PDF, DOCX, XLSX, and image files.
Yes. When cloning, a dropdown lets you select the target book. You can also clone to **All books** to create copies in every book at once.
## Next steps
Link email templates to task templates
Use email templates in automated sequences
# Engagement
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/customization/engagement
Configure review cadences and touchpoint tracking to stay on top of client relationships.
Engagement settings control how often you meet with clients for formal reviews and how you track touchpoints between reviews. These settings are configured per book.
To access engagement settings, go to **Settings** → **Engagement**, then select the book you want to configure.
## Client reviews
The client reviews section controls how Slant identifies and tracks formal client reviews.
### Review title keywords
Meetings with specific keywords in the title are automatically classified as client reviews. By default, the keyword "review" is included.
To add a keyword, type it in the input field and click **Add**. To remove one, click the **x** on the keyword badge.
Add keywords like "strategy session" or "annual meeting" if your firm uses those terms for reviews.
### Review strategy
Choose how reviews are scheduled:
* **Rolling reviews** — each client is reviewed on a recurring frequency. You set how often reviews should happen (e.g., annually or quarterly).
* **All clients in specific months** — all clients are reviewed during designated months of the year.
#### Rolling reviews
When you select **Rolling reviews**, choose a review frequency. You can set a single frequency for all clients or different frequencies per [tier](/records/households/overview#service-tiers).
Toggle **Same frequency for all tiers** to switch between a single frequency and per-tier frequencies.
Available frequencies: Monthly, Quarterly, Trimesterly, Semi-annual, and Annual.
#### Surge reviews
When you select **All clients in specific months**, choose which months to target. All clients are expected to have a review during those months, regardless of tier.
## Touchpoint cadence
Touchpoints are interactions with clients between formal reviews — emails, calls, meetings, and messages. The touchpoint cadence section controls which interactions count and how often you want them to happen.
### Activity types that count as touchpoints
Select which interactions count toward your touchpoint goals:
* Meetings
* Sent emails
* Received emails
* Sent SMS
* Received SMS
* Incoming calls
* Outgoing calls
Email touchpoints are dated by the email's delivery date, not when the record was created in Slant.
### Exclude email senders from touchpoints
Use **Email senders excluded from touchpoints** when newsletters or shared mailboxes should not count as direct client engagement. Add each sender address, such as `newsletters@firm.com`. Leave the list empty to count mail from every sender.
Only sent email from the listed addresses is excluded; other selected touchpoint activity continues to count.
### Touchpoint frequency
Set how often you want to be in contact with each client between reviews. Like review frequency, you can set a single frequency for all tiers or different frequencies per tier using the **Same frequency for all tiers** toggle.
Available frequencies: Monthly, Quarterly, Trimesterly, Semi-annual, and Annual.
Click **Save** on **Client reviews** to apply changes to review settings. Click the separate **Save** button on **Touchpoint cadence** to apply changes to touchpoint settings. Each button becomes available when its section has unsaved changes.
## How engagement tracking works
Once configured, Slant uses these settings to track whether each client is on track for their review and touchpoint goals. You can monitor engagement status on the [review manager](/records/clients/reviews) and in the client list views.
## FAQ
Yes. Engagement settings are configured per book, so each book can have its own review strategy, frequencies, and touchpoint tracking.
Changing from rolling to surge (or vice versa) updates how Slant calculates review status going forward. Past reviews are not affected.
No. Slant automatically tracks touchpoints from your connected [email](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar), [phone](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone), and calendar integrations. Only the interaction types you select in the settings are counted.
Trimesterly means every four months — three times per year.
## Next steps
Monitor review status and manage the review cycle
Learn about service tiers and household management
# Tags & labels
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/customization/labels-and-tags
Create color-coded labels for tasks, notes, and opportunities, and tags for households and businesses.
Labels and tags help you categorize and filter records. Labels are color-coded and apply to tasks, notes, and opportunities. Tags apply to households and businesses.
Any user can create, edit, or delete labels and tags.
## Labels vs tags
| | Labels | Tags |
| ---------------- | -------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------- |
| **Record types** | Tasks, notes, opportunities | Households, businesses |
| **Color** | Yes — each label has a color | No |
| **Purpose** | Categorize individual activities | Group records for filtering and reporting |
## Access tag and label settings
Go to **Settings** → **Tags & labels**, then select the tab you want to manage:
* **Households**
* **Businesses**
* **Tasks**
* **Notes**
* **Opportunities**
## Create a label or tag
If the list already has items, click the **Add new label** or **Add new tag** row at the top of the table.
Type the label or tag name.
Click the color circle to open the color picker and select a color.
Press `Enter` or click the checkmark.
## Edit a label or tag
Click the icon on a row to edit the name inline. For labels, click the color circle to change the color.
Each table includes a **#** column that shows how many records use each label or tag.
## Delete a label or tag
Click the icon on the row and confirm in the dialog. Deleting a label or tag removes it from all records it was applied to.
Deleting a label or tag is permanent and cannot be undone. The label or tag will be removed from all records where it was applied.
## Where labels and tags are used
* **Filtering** — labels and tags appear as filter options on list pages and in [data views](/records/data-views)
* **Creating records** — select a label or tag when creating or editing tasks, notes, opportunities, households, or businesses
* **Note cards** — applied labels appear as colored badge chips in the card footer, on a row beneath the user name and timestamp
* **Note label picker** — the picker on a note is searchable (**Search labels...**) and scrolls, which helps when a book has many note labels
* **Bulk note labeling** — in a record's **Notes** tab, switch to **Table view**, select unlocked notes, and click **Add label**. The new label is added without removing existing labels.
* **Automations** — use labels and tags as conditions or actions in [automations](/platform/automations/overview)
* **Sequences** — [task steps](/platform/sequences/creating-sequences) in sequences can include a label
## FAQ
Yes. Task labels, note labels, and opportunity labels are managed separately. You can have a "Follow-up" label in each category.
Yes. Any user can apply labels and tags to records or create, rename, and delete them from settings.
Yes. Labels and tags are defined at the company level and are available in every book.
## Next steps
Apply labels when creating or editing tasks
Apply tags to households
# Note templates
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/customization/note-templates
Create reusable note templates with pre-written content for consistent documentation.
Note templates let you define standardized note formats that your team can apply when creating notes. Each template includes a name and rich text content.
## Company-wide vs book-specific
* **Company templates** are available across all books. Any user can create, edit, or delete them.
* **Book templates** are available only in a specific book. Any user can manage book-level templates.
Use the **Company** and book name tabs at the top of the page to switch between scopes.
## Create a note template
Go to **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Note templates**.
Choose the **Company** tab for a company-wide template, or a book tab for a book-specific template.
* **Name** — an internal label to identify the template
* **Content** — the note body (supports rich text formatting with headings, lists, tables, and links)
## Edit a note template
Click a template in the list to open the editor. Make your changes and save.
## Clone a note template
Click the clone action on a template to create a copy. When cloning, you can choose a target book or keep it at the company level.
## Delete a note template
Click the delete action on a template and confirm. Deleting a template does not affect notes that were already created using it.
## FAQ
When creating a new note on a household, click the template icon to choose from available templates. The note content is pre-filled with the template's text.
Yes. Applying a template pre-fills the note content, but you can edit it freely before or after saving.
No. Editing a template only affects notes created from it in the future. Existing notes keep their content unchanged.
## Next steps
Organize notes with color-coded labels
Create reusable email templates
# Notetaker
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/customization/notetaker
Configure the AI notetaker that joins your meetings to record and summarize conversations.
The notetaker settings let you configure the AI bot that joins your meetings to record and generate notes. You can customize the bot's name and avatar, set recording retention policies, manage phone recording numbers, and control behavior for recurring meetings.
Go to **Settings** → **Notetaker** to access these settings. The page has **Company** and book tabs — company settings control defaults across all books, while book settings can override them.
A broker-dealer or company policy can lock **Recording retention** for compliance reasons. When locked, the retention options are disabled and read-only for advisors, and a lock message such as "Recording retention is locked for this company." appears below the setting.
For full details on configuring and using the notetaker, see:
How the notetaker works, turning it on/off, and phone recording
Notetaker settings, meeting prompts, and recording retention
# Customization overview
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/customization/overview
Configure how Slant works for your practice — templates, labels, engagement rules, AI prompts, and more.
The **Customization** section in **Settings** lets you tailor Slant to match your practice's workflows. You can define templates, configure AI behavior, set engagement goals, and organize records with labels and tags.
To access customization settings, click **Settings** in the sidebar, then look under the **Customization** heading.
## Notetaker
Configure the AI notetaker that joins your meetings to record and summarize conversations. Set the bot's name and avatar, choose how long recordings are retained, and manage phone recording numbers.
Learn how the notetaker works and how to configure it
## Project types
Define reusable project templates with milestones, task templates, outcomes, and form fields. Project types standardize workflows like client onboarding or annual reviews across your team.
Create and manage project types
## Engagement
Set review and touchpoint cadence goals for your clients. Choose a review strategy — rolling reviews on a set frequency, or surge reviews in specific months — and configure which interactions count as touchpoints.
Configure review and touchpoint cadences
## Prompts
Customize the AI prompts that power meeting summaries, meeting preparation, meeting notes, meeting tasks, and household summaries. Create reusable prompt snippets that can be inserted directly into [AI chat](/records/households/chat).
Customize meeting summary, prep, notes, and task prompts
Household summary prompt and reusable prompt snippets
## Data customizations
The data customizations hub brings together templates, pipelines, meeting types, custom fields, and workflow settings in one place. Go to **Settings** → **Data customizations** to manage all of these.
Manage templates, pipelines, meeting types, custom fields, and workflow settings
## Tags & labels
Create company-wide tags and labels for organizing records. Go to **Settings** → **Tags & labels** to switch between object tabs and manage each list.
Manage tags and labels for organizing records
## Document filler
Manage PDF form templates that can be auto-filled with client data. Enable or disable templates and configure where completed documents are stored.
Manage document filler templates and storage
# Pipelines
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/customization/pipelines
Define the stages that opportunities move through with customizable pipelines.
Pipelines define the stages that [opportunities](/activity/opportunities/overview) move through. Each pipeline has a set of stages with names, colors, probabilities, and optional time tracking. You can create pipelines scoped to prospects, clients, or both.
Go to **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Pipelines** to manage them. Pipelines can be company-wide (available to all books) or book-specific. Use the **Company** and book tabs to switch between scopes.
For full details on creating and configuring pipelines, see:
Create pipelines, configure stages, and manage pipeline settings
# Project types
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/customization/project-types
Define reusable project templates with milestones, tasks, outcomes, and form inputs.
Project types are reusable templates that define the structure of a project — the milestones it moves through, the tasks created at each milestone, and optional outcomes and form inputs. Go to **Settings** → **Project types** to manage them.
Project types are listed in one table. Use **All owners** to show every project type or filter the table to **Company** or a specific book.
Each row's three-dot menu includes:
* **Edit** — open the manual editor and project type chat
* **Duplicate** — create a copy in the same scope
* **Delete** — permanently remove a project type that has no active projects
Click **New project type**, choose **Company** or a book, and use the **Projects library** to start. **Start from scratch** creates a starter project type and opens chat, where you can describe the workflow you want. You can also edit it manually or install a ready-made project type.
For full details on creating and configuring project types, see:
Create project types with milestones, tasks, outcomes, and form inputs
# Prompts
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/customization/prompts
Customize AI prompts for household summaries, email voice, and reusable prompt snippets for AI chat.
The prompts settings page lets you customize how Slant's AI generates content and create reusable snippets for [AI chat](/records/households/chat). All prompt settings are configured per book.
To access prompt settings, go to **Settings** → **Prompts**, then select the book you want to configure.
The prompts hub has four sections:
* **Email voice** — customize the tone and style Slant uses when drafting emails for the book
* **Meeting prompts** — customize AI prompts for meeting summaries, preparation, notes, and tasks. See [customizing meeting AI](/activity/meetings/customizing-meeting-ai) for details.
* **Household summary** — customize the prompt used to generate household summaries
* **Prompt snippets** — create reusable prompts that can be inserted into AI chat
## Email voice
The email voice controls the tone and style Slant uses when drafting emails and replies for a book. It's a book-level setting — every teammate on the book shares the same voice profile, and any book member can edit it.
If you belong to more than one book, the email voice page shows a tab for each book so you can configure them independently.
You can write a voice profile from scratch or have Slant generate one by analyzing the book principal's recent sent emails.
### Edit the email voice
Go to **Settings** → **Prompts** → **Email voice**.
Click the tab for the book you want to configure.
Type directly in the editor to describe how emails from this book should sound. Changes save automatically as you type.
### Generate the voice from sent emails
Slant can draft a starting voice profile by analyzing recent emails the book principal has sent.
The book **principal** must have a connected email integration that's syncing emails. Generation samples from the principal's primary email integration — no other teammate's mailbox is used. If the principal hasn't connected one, generation returns an error. See [email and calendar](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar) for setup.
Go to **Settings** → **Prompts** → **Email voice**, then select the book's tab.
Click **Generate email voice** (or **Regenerate email voice** if a voice profile already exists). Slant analyzes the principal's recent sent emails and writes a voice description. This runs in the background and typically finishes in under a minute.
If the current voice was manually edited, Slant opens a **Generate new email voice profile?** dialog warning that your edits will be lost. Click **Continue** to proceed or **Cancel** to keep the current voice.
Once generation finishes, the new voice appears in the editor. Tweak anything that doesn't match the tone you want — edits save automatically.
Regenerating replaces the current voice profile for the selected book. If the voice has been hand-tuned, copy the text somewhere safe before regenerating.
## Household summary
The household summary prompt controls how the AI generates summaries on household records. You can edit the prompt to adjust the tone, focus areas, or structure of generated summaries.
On the prompts hub, click **Household summary**.
Modify the prompt text to match your preferences.
## Prompt snippets
Prompt snippets are reusable text blocks that can be inserted directly into AI chat conversations. They save time when you frequently ask the AI to perform the same type of analysis or task.
Each snippet has:
* **Title** — the name shown in the snippet picker
* **Chat type** — which type of chat the snippet appears in: Client, Prospect, Meeting, or Book
* **Content** — the prompt text that gets inserted into the chat
In [AI chat](/records/households/chat), type `/` in the composer to open every snippet for that chat type. Keep typing to filter, then select one to run it. Snippets also appear as buttons above the composer at the start of a new thread.
### Create a prompt snippet
Go to **Settings** → **Prompts** → **Prompt snippets**.
Enter a title, select the chat type, and write the prompt content.
### Edit a prompt snippet
Click a snippet in the list to open the editor. Make your changes and save.
### Delete a prompt snippet
Click the delete action on a snippet and confirm.
### Default snippets
Slant includes several pre-built prompt snippets that serve as starting points. You can edit these to match your practice's style, or create your own from scratch. Editing a default snippet creates a book-level override — the original is preserved and can be restored by deleting your override.
## FAQ
No. Changing a prompt only affects future AI-generated content. Existing summaries, notes, and chat responses are not regenerated.
Yes. If you've customized a prompt, you can view the prompt history and restore a previous version. For prompt snippets based on defaults, deleting your override restores the original.
Prompt snippets are configured per book. Each book can have its own set of snippets. Default snippets from Slant are available in every book unless overridden.
## Next steps
Learn how to use AI chat with your clients and prospects.
Customize meeting summary, prep, notes, and task prompts
# SMS templates
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/customization/sms-templates
Create reusable text messages and personalize them with client, sender, and company information.
SMS templates help your team send consistent text messages without rewriting common responses and reminders. Applying a template fills the message composer, where you can review and edit the text before sending.
## Company-wide vs book-specific
* **Company templates** are available in every book.
* **Book templates** are available only in the selected book.
Any team member can manage company-wide and book-specific SMS templates. Use the **Company** and book tabs at the top of the page to switch between scopes.
## Create an SMS template
Go to **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **SMS templates**.
Choose **Company** for a company-wide template, or select a book for a book-specific template.
Click **New SMS template**.
Add a **Name** that helps your team recognize the template, then enter the reusable text in **Message**.
Click **Create**.
The new template appears in the selected scope.
## Personalize a template with variables
Variables fill in details when you apply a template from a record's **Phone** tab. Place your cursor in **Message**, click **Insert variable**, and select a value.
Available variables include:
* **General** — the current date
* **Household** — the household name, leader names, and meeting dates
* **Head of household** and **Spouse/partner** — names and job titles
* **Contact** — the other contact's full name or first name
* **Sender** — your name and scheduling link
* **Company** — the company name and book scheduling link
* **Custom fields** — supported household custom fields
A variable fills only when that information exists on the record where you apply the template. Review the personalized message before sending it.
Messages can contain up to 1,000 characters. If personalization makes the finished message longer than 1,000 characters, Slant does not apply the template.
## Edit or find a template
Use **Search templates...** to filter templates by name or message. Click **Edit template**, update the **Name** or **Message**, then click **Save**.
Changes affect future uses of the template. They do not change messages that were already sent.
## Clone a template
Click **Clone template** to create a copy with a new name.
* From **Company**, leave **Book** set to **All books** to keep the copy company-wide, or select one book to create a book-specific copy.
* From a book, the copy stays in that book.
## Delete a template
Click **Delete template**, then click **Delete** to confirm.
Deleting an SMS template is permanent. Messages already sent from the template remain in their conversations.
## Apply a template to a message
Company-wide templates and templates from the current book appear in the SMS composer.
Open the **Phone** tab on a client, prospect, other contact, or business, then select a recipient.
Click **Apply template** beside the message field.
Search by name or message, then select a template. Slant fills its variables using the current record.
Edit the personalized text as needed, then send it normally.
If the composer already contains text, click **Replace** to replace it with the selected template or **Cancel** to keep your draft.
Sending a text still requires an SMS-capable [phone integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone), a recipient phone number, and an available sending number.
## Next steps
Connect a phone provider and send text messages from Slant
Create reusable emails with subjects, formatting, and attachments
# Task templates
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/customization/task-templates
Create reusable task templates to ensure consistency across your practice.
Task templates let you define standardized tasks once and reuse them when creating new tasks. Templates pre-fill the title, description, priority, label, assignee, an optional due date, and attachments.
Go to **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Task templates** to manage them. Templates can be company-wide (available to all books) or book-specific. Use the **Company** and book tabs to switch between scopes.
For full details on creating, applying, and managing task templates, see:
Create templates, convert existing tasks, and apply templates when creating tasks
# Notification settings
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/notifications
Control which events send you email and how frequently email notifications arrive.
Notification settings control how Slant delivers email notifications to you. You can toggle summary emails, set a batching window, and choose exactly which notification types generate emails.
Notification settings are per-user. Each team member controls their own email preferences independently.
To configure your notifications, go to **Settings** → **Notifications**.
## Daily digest emails
Toggle **Daily digest emails** to receive a daily summary of your upcoming tasks, meetings, and nudges. This email gives you a snapshot of your day ahead.
Use **Daily digest timezone** to choose when the digest arrives. **Use primary book timezone** follows your primary book; you can select another timezone when your workday follows a different location. Daily digests send around 8 AM in the selected timezone.
## Meeting prep emails
Toggle **Meeting prep emails** to receive a prep email before upcoming meetings you are responsible for. These emails help you review relevant client information before the meeting.
## Batched notification emails
Instead of sending a separate email for every event, Slant groups notifications into a single summary email. Use the **Batch window** dropdown to control how long Slant waits before sending the summary. The default is 15 minutes.
A shorter window means more frequent emails with fewer notifications each. A longer window means fewer emails with more notifications grouped together.
## Email notification types
The **Send me emails when...** section lists every notification type with an **Email** checkbox. Toggle each one independently to control which events send you an email:
| Notification type | Triggers when |
| --------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Account departures** | A linked [custodian account](/records/accounts/custodian-accounts) transfers out or drops to \$0 |
| **Mentions** | Someone @mentions you in a comment or note |
| **Comment replies** | Someone replies to your comment |
| **Task assignments** | A [task](/activity/tasks/overview) is assigned to you |
| **Task collaborator added** | You are added as a collaborator on a task |
| **Task comments** | Someone comments on a task you are associated with |
| **Task completion** | A task you are associated with is completed |
| **Task creation** | A task is created for a record you own |
| **Task reassignment** | A task you are associated with is reassigned |
Typing `@` in a note brings up your teammates alongside records, so **Mentions** fires for notes just as it does for comments.
All email notification types are enabled by default. Changes save automatically.
These settings only control email delivery. [In-app notifications](/dashboard/notifications) always appear regardless of your email preferences.
## FAQ
No. There is no single toggle to disable all emails. Uncheck each notification type individually, and turn off daily digest and meeting prep emails separately.
Disabled notification types are excluded from the batched summary email. Only enabled types appear in the summary.
No. In-app notifications always appear in the [notifications panel](/dashboard/notifications) regardless of your email settings.
## Next steps
Learn how to view and manage in-app notifications.
Update your name, photo, and scheduling link.
# Profile
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/profile
Update your name, profile picture, phone number, scheduling link, and default book.
Your profile stores the personal information that identifies you across Slant. Other team members see your name and photo on tasks, comments, and meetings.
To edit your profile, go to **Settings** → **Profile**.
## Profile picture
Upload a photo so team members can identify you at a glance. Slant supports PNG and JPEG files under 10 MB.
The image appears immediately after upload.
To remove your photo, click the button on the image. Slant displays your initials when no photo is set.
## Name
Enter your **First name** and **Last name**. These appear everywhere your name is shown — task assignments, comments, meeting attendees, and more. Changes save automatically when you leave the field.
## Email address
Your email address is read-only and managed through your login provider. It cannot be changed from this page.
## Phone number
Enter your phone number in the **Phone number** field. Slant formats it automatically.
## Scheduling link
Paste your personal scheduling URL (e.g., a Calendly link) into the **Scheduling link** field. This link is used in email templates and AI-generated content so clients can book time with you.
## Default book
If you have access to more than one [book](/help/glossary), a **Default book** selector appears below the scheduling link. Choose which book loads when you log in:
* **All books** — land on the all-books view
* **A specific book** — land directly in that book's workspace
This setting only appears when you have access to multiple books.
## FAQ
Your email is tied to your login account and is managed by your authentication provider. Contact your admin if it needs to change.
Yes. All fields save automatically when you finish editing. You'll see a confirmation when changes are saved.
Your scheduling link is not directly visible to other users. It is used in email templates and AI-generated content when Slant creates messages on your behalf.
## Next steps
Control which events send you email and how often.
Manage team members and book access.
# User settings
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/user-settings
Manage your profile, notifications, and team from the settings sidebar.
User settings control your personal preferences, notification delivery, and team membership in Slant. Every user can configure their own profile and notifications. Admins can also manage team members, invitations, and teams.
To open settings, click your company name at the bottom of the sidebar and select **Settings**.
## Profile
Your [profile](/account-settings/profile) stores the personal information that identifies you across Slant — your name, photo, phone number, and scheduling link. If you have access to multiple books, you can also set which book loads by default when you log in.
## Notifications
[Notification preferences](/account-settings/notifications) control which events send you email and how often those emails arrive. You can toggle daily digest emails, meeting prep emails, and fine-tune which notification types generate individual emails.
## Company settings and brand kit
Admins can manage company-wide defaults under [Company settings](/account-settings/company-settings) and the visual identity and deliverable language under [Brand kit](/account-settings/brand-kit).
## Users and teams
The [users and teams](/account-settings/users-and-teams) page lets admins invite new team members, manage book access, toggle admin roles, and organize users into teams for task assignment.
## API connections
The [API connections](/account-settings/api-tokens) page lets each user create and manage their own personal access tokens for the Slant API and connect Slant to MCP clients and Zapier.
## FAQ
Book-specific settings (name, timezone, tiers) are under **Settings** → **Book profile**. Company-wide settings are under **Settings** → **Company settings** (admin only). This section covers personal user settings only.
No. There is no bulk reset option. Each setting must be changed individually.
Yes. Profile and notification preferences are account-level — they apply everywhere you use Slant, regardless of which book you're viewing.
## Next steps
Update your name, photo, phone, and scheduling link.
Control which events send you email.
Invite members, manage access, and create teams.
# Users and teams
Source: https://docs.slant.app/account-settings/users-and-teams
Invite team members, manage book access and admin roles, and organize users into teams.
The users and teams page lets admins manage who has access to your firm's Slant account, which books they can see, and how users are organized into teams.
Only admins can invite members, change roles, manage book access, and create teams.
To manage users and teams, go to **Settings** → **Users and teams**.
## Active users
The users table shows every active member in your company with their name, email, role, and book access.
**What you see depends on your role.** Admins see every user in the company and every book each user has access to. Non-admins only see users they share at least one book with, and the **Books** column only lists books they share with that user. You always see yourself.
### Auth method and 2FA
Admins see two extra columns for every user:
* **Auth method** — how the user signs in. Shows **Google** or **Microsoft** (with the provider's icon) for users signed in with those identity providers, or **Password** for users with email and password sign-in. A dash (-) means Slant could not determine the sign-in method.
* **2FA?** — whether the user has two-factor authentication enabled on their account. Shows a **Yes** or **No** badge, or a dash (-) if the status is unavailable.
These columns are visible to admins only and are read-only. Each user manages their own sign-in method and 2FA settings from their **Profile**.
### Change a user's role
Each user has a role of either **Admin** or **Member**. Only admins can manage users, invitations, roles, book access, and teams. Members can manage their own profile and notifications, along with routine settings available to them, including company-wide customizations.
To change a user's role, click the role dropdown in the **Status** column and select **Admin** or **Member**.
You cannot remove admin access from the last remaining admin.
### Manage book access
Each user's books appear as badges in the **Books** column. To remove a user from a book, click the on the book badge and confirm.
To add a user to a book, click **Add to book** at the top of the page, then select the user and the books to grant access to.
You cannot remove a user from a book they own (their principal book).
## Invite a team member
Fill in their **Email**, **First name**, and **Last name**.
Toggle **Create own book** if the new member should have their own book. Use **Grant access to books** to select existing books they should have access to.
The invitation is sent by email. The new member appears in the table with a **Pending** badge until they accept.
### Manage pending invitations
Pending invitations appear in the users table with a **Pending** badge next to the email. For each pending invitation you can:
* **Copy the invitation link** — click the button to copy the sign-up link to your clipboard
* **Resend the invitation** — click **Resend** to send another email
* **Revoke the invitation** — click **Revoke** to cancel the invitation entirely
## Teams
Teams let you group users together so you can assign [tasks](/activity/tasks/overview) to an entire team at once.
### Create a team
A new row appears at the top of the teams list.
Click the color circle to pick a team color from the palette.
Click the members button and select users from the list.
Click the checkmark or press Enter to create the team.
### Edit a team
* **Rename** — click the team name, type the new name, and press Enter
* **Change color** — click the color circle and pick a new color
* **Add or remove members** — click the members button, adjust the selection, and click **Save**
### Delete a team
Click the button next to a team and confirm. Tasks previously assigned to the team will no longer show the team name, but individual collaborators on those tasks remain.
## Switching between firms
If your firm is part of a larger group and you've been given access to more than one firm's Slant account, your firms are listed at the top of the account menu — the button with your firm's logo at the top of the sidebar. The firm you're currently working in shows a checkmark.
Select another firm to switch your entire workspace to that firm, including its books, clients, and settings.
Access, admin rights, books, and teams are separate for each firm. Being an admin in one firm does not make you an admin in another. Access to more than one firm is set up by Slant support — admins cannot grant it themselves.
## FAQ
Yes, but with limited access. Non-admin users can see the list of users and their book access but cannot invite members, change roles, manage book access, or create teams.
The invitation link becomes invalid and the pending entry is removed from the table. The invited person can no longer use the link to join.
Yes. When assigning a [task](/activity/tasks/overview), you can select a team instead of an individual. All team members become collaborators on the task.
## Next steps
Update your personal information and preferences.
Learn how to create and manage tasks for your team.
# Meeting chat
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/meetings/chat
Use AI chat on completed meetings to ask questions about the transcript, attendees, and follow-ups.
AI chat is available on completed [meeting](/activity/meetings/overview) records. It appears as the **Chat** tab alongside the **AI summary** and **Notepad** tabs on the meeting detail page. Meeting chat has the same capabilities as [household chat](/records/households/chat) — sending messages, prompt snippets, uploading files, voice input, choosing a model, and managing threads — but its context is focused on the specific meeting you're viewing.
## What makes meeting chat different
While [household chat](/records/households/chat) focuses on a client or prospect's full history, meeting chat is scoped to a single meeting. It has access to the meeting's transcript, recording, attendees, and any linked households, so you can ask detailed questions about what was discussed.
* "What did we agree on about the Roth conversion?"
* "Summarize the key action items from this meeting"
* "What questions did the client ask about their portfolio?"
* "Draft a follow-up email based on this meeting"
## Quick actions
Meeting chat has its own set of quick action buttons tailored to post-meeting workflows. For example, a quick action might draft a follow-up email to attendees or create a summary to share with the client. Click a quick action to run it immediately.
Quick actions are powered by [automations](/platform/automations/overview), so your team can customize which actions appear on meetings and what they do.
## Start a project from chat
Meeting chat and household chat can start a [project](/activity/projects/overview) on the linked household when the conversation calls for one — for example, after agreeing to begin a money movement or onboarding.
The chat proposes a project type and starting milestones. Click **Start project** on the confirmation card to create it, or **Cancel** to dismiss. Once started, a link to the new project appears in the conversation.
## Using chat
Meeting chat works the same way as household chat — type a message, upload files, use voice input, switch models, and manage threads. For full details on these shared features, see [household chat](/records/households/chat#using-chat).
## FAQ
Meeting chat is available on meetings that have been recorded or had a transcript uploaded. The chat is most useful after AI processing is complete, when the transcript and summary are available for context.
Yes. Meeting chat can access the linked households and their data in addition to the meeting's own transcript, attendees, and AI-generated content.
## Next steps
Full overview of all AI chat capabilities.
Review AI summaries, notes, and transcripts.
# Creating and recording meetings
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/meetings/creating-and-recording-meetings
Start online, in-person, or phone meetings, record them, and upload past recordings or transcripts.
You can create meetings in Slant for any type of conversation — online video calls, phone calls, or in-person meetings. Click **Start meeting** to open the creation form with three tabs: **In person**, **Meeting link**, and **Past meeting**.
You can start a meeting from:
* The **Meetings** page
* A household, [other contact](/records/other-contacts), or [business](/records/businesses) detail page
When you start a meeting from a household, contact, or business, the meeting is automatically filed under that record and the link is locked in the create form.
## Meeting preparation
Slant automatically generates an AI preparation brief for upcoming meetings that have at least one linked household, contact, or business. The prep pulls from the linked record's history, recent notes, past meeting summaries, and upcoming context to give you a quick refresher before the meeting starts.
Prep is generated automatically when a household, contact, or business is linked to an upcoming meeting within the next 7 days. If you create a meeting three days from now and link a household, contact, or business, the prep generates right away. For meetings further out, prep is generated as the meeting enters the 7-day window. The more data Slant has on the linked record — notes, past meetings, tasks, and account details — the more useful the prep will be.
If the prep content is useful, click **Save as notes** to copy it into the meeting's notepad for reference during the meeting. You can [customize the prep prompt](/activity/meetings/customizing-meeting-ai#meeting-prompts) to control what the AI focuses on.
## Online meetings
Online meetings are video or audio calls on platforms like Zoom, Google Meet, Microsoft Teams, Webex, or Slack.
When you have a [connected calendar](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar), online meetings appear automatically on the **Upcoming** tab and the [notetaker](/activity/meetings/notetaker) joins to record them. You don't need to do anything — the notetaker handles recording and transcription.
### Create an online meeting manually
If you have an online meeting that isn't on your calendar, create it manually so the notetaker can join:
On the **Meetings** page, click **Start meeting**. You can also click **Start meeting** from a household, [other contact](/records/other-contacts), or [business](/records/businesses) detail page to file the meeting under that record automatically.
Optionally select a **Household**, **Contact**, or **Business** to file the meeting under, plus a **Meeting type**. Enter a **Title** and paste the meeting URL into the **Meeting link** field.
The meeting is created and the notetaker is invited to join at the link you provided.
## Phone call meetings
Slant can record and transcribe phone calls as meetings. There are two ways phone calls become meetings:
### Call the Slant recording number
Each book has a dedicated recording number. Call **(888) 565-3692** from a phone number linked to your account, and Slant records the call and creates a meeting with a full transcript.
To link your phone number:
Go to **Settings** → **Notetaker** and select your book's tab.
Under **Allowed inbound phone numbers**, click **Add phone number** and enter the number you'll call from.
Once your number is linked, any call you make to the recording number from that phone is automatically recorded and processed.
### Phone integration
If you have a [phone integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone) that transcribes calls, you can create meetings from eligible calls automatically.
Go to **Settings** → **Phone and SMS**, select the book tab, and turn on **Automatically create meetings for transcribed phone calls**. Slant creates one meeting after a call settles and receives a transcript when the phone number matches one person in the book.
This setting applies only to phone calls in the selected book. Calls without a transcript or with an ambiguous person match do not create meetings.
Calls synced from a [phone integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone) appear on the record's **Phone** tab. Open a recording-backed call and click **Convert to meeting**. RingSense transcript-only calls remain on the **Phone** tab and cannot be converted to a meeting without a recording.
## In-person meetings
For meetings that happen face-to-face without a video link, you have two recording options.
### Record on web
Record directly from your browser:
On the **Meetings** page, click **Start meeting**. You can also click **Start meeting** from a household, contact, or business detail page to file the meeting under that record.
Optionally select a **Household**, **Contact**, or **Business** to file the meeting under, plus a **Meeting type**, and **Title**.
Your browser begins recording audio. A recording indicator appears on the meeting page.
Click the stop button to end the recording. Slant processes the audio and generates a transcript.
### Call my phone
Slant can call your phone to record the meeting. This is useful when you want to capture an in-person conversation using your phone's microphone:
On the **Meetings** page, click **Start meeting**. You can also click **Start meeting** from a household, contact, or business detail page to file the meeting under that record.
Optionally select a **Household**, **Contact**, or **Business** to file the meeting under, plus a **Meeting type**, and **Title**.
Slant calls the phone number on your account. Answer the call and place your phone near the conversation to record.
### Record from the meeting detail page
You can also start recording from an existing meeting's detail page. Open any upcoming or current meeting, and use the **Record** button to choose **Record on web** or **Call my phone**.
## Upload a past meeting
If you have a recording or transcript from a meeting that already happened, you can upload it to Slant:
On the **Meetings** page, click **Start meeting**. You can also click **Start meeting** from a household, contact, or business detail page to file the meeting under that record.
Select a **Household**, **Contact**, or **Business** to file the meeting under, plus a **Meeting type**. Enter a **Title**, and set the **Date** and **Time** when the meeting took place.
Under **Attachments**, click **Add recording** to upload an audio or video file, or click **Add transcript** to upload a text file (.txt or .vtt).
Enter any additional context in the **Notes** field.
The meeting is created and Slant begins processing the recording or transcript.
### Upload to an existing meeting
You can also upload a recording or transcript to a meeting that already exists. Open the meeting detail page and click **Upload**, then choose **Upload recording** or **Upload transcript**.
Transcript uploads accept .txt and .vtt files up to 500,000 characters. If a transcript already exists, you'll be asked to confirm the replacement.
## FAQ
**In person** creates a meeting you record live using your browser or phone. **Meeting link** creates a meeting with an online link so the notetaker can join. **Past meeting** lets you log a meeting that already happened and upload a recording or transcript.
Yes. You can create a past meeting without uploading any attachments, or create an in-person meeting and skip recording. You can always add a recording or transcript later from the meeting detail page.
Slant accepts common audio and video formats for recording uploads. For transcripts, use .txt or .vtt files.
## Next steps
Learn how the notetaker automatically records online meetings
Review AI-generated summaries, notes, and tasks after a meeting
# Customizing meeting AI
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/meetings/customizing-meeting-ai
Configure the notetaker bot and customize AI prompts for meeting prep, notes, and tasks.
Slant lets you configure how the [notetaker](/activity/meetings/notetaker) behaves and customize the AI prompts that generate meeting content. All meeting AI settings are in the **Customization** section of **Settings**.
## Notetaker settings
Go to **Settings** → **Notetaker** to configure the notetaker bot. Settings are split into two tabs: **Company** (defaults for all books) and your specific book.
### Company-level settings
These settings apply as defaults across all books in your company:
* **Default bot participant name** — the name the notetaker displays when it joins a meeting (e.g., "Slant Notetaker" or your firm's name)
* **Default bot participant avatar** — upload a JPEG image that appears as the notetaker's profile picture in meetings. Recommended 16:9 ratio, max 10 MB. The image is resized to 640x360 pixels.
* **Recording announcement** — toggle on to have the notetaker play an audible announcement that the meeting is being recorded when it joins. Useful for firms or jurisdictions that require recording consent. The announcement applies to Slant's online-meeting notetaker bots and is not editable.
* **Keep internal meetings private** — toggle on so internal meetings are visible only to people who attended. Other users in the company, including admins who were not in the meeting, cannot see the meeting, its notes, or related chat. The book principal always keeps access. You can still [make a processed meeting private](/activity/meetings/meeting-review#make-a-meeting-private) to hide it from specific attendees.
### Book-level settings
Select your book's tab to configure settings specific to that book. Book-level settings override company defaults.
* **Notetaker status** — toggle the notetaker on or off for this book. When off, the notetaker won't join any meetings in this book.
* **Bot participant name** — override the company-level name for this book
* **Bot participant avatar** — override the company-level avatar for this book
* **Recording retention** — control how long recordings are kept:
* **Keep forever** — recordings are never automatically deleted
* **Delete after specific time** — recordings are deleted after a set period
* **Delete after meeting notes are created** — recordings are deleted once AI has finished generating notes. The AI summary and meeting notes are kept, so the meeting stays on the **Processed** tab after the recording and transcript are removed.
A broker-dealer or company policy can lock recording retention for compliance reasons. When locked, the **Recording retention** options are disabled and read-only for advisors, and a message such as "Recording retention is locked for this company." or "Locked by `{name}` broker dealer settings." appears below the setting.
* **Allowed inbound phone numbers** — add phone numbers that are authorized to record calls to **(888) 565-3692**. See [phone call meetings](/activity/meetings/creating-and-recording-meetings#phone-call-meetings) for details.
* **Skip recurring meetings** — toggle on to prevent the notetaker from joining recurring calendar events. You can still send the notetaker to individual meetings manually from the [meetings page](/activity/meetings/notetaker#turn-off-the-notetaker-for-a-specific-meeting).
## Meeting prompts
Go to **Settings** → **Prompts** → **Meeting prompts** to customize the AI prompts that generate meeting content. You can tailor each prompt to match how you want your meeting output to look.
The page has three prompt sections:
* **Meeting preparation** — controls the pre-meeting brief generated for upcoming meetings
* **Meeting notes** — controls the detailed structured notes generated from the transcript
* **Meeting tasks** — controls how follow-up tasks are extracted from the conversation
### Customize prompts per meeting type
Each prompt section includes a **Meeting type** selector. Set it to **Universal** to apply the prompt to all meeting types, or select any active meeting type to create tailored prompt guidance for that type. Any user can add custom meeting types from **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Meeting types**. Only admins can edit locked default types.
### Require task approval
Enable the **Require task approval before creation** checkbox at the top of the meeting prompts page to review AI-generated [tasks](/activity/tasks/overview) before they appear in your task list. When enabled, tasks from meetings go to a pending state where you can accept or reject each one.
### Edit a prompt
Go to **Settings** → **Prompts** → **Meeting prompts**.
Modify the prompt text in any of the three sections. The prompt tells the AI what to prioritize, what tone to use, and how to structure the output.
Click **Save** next to the section you edited. The new prompt applies to all future meetings of the selected type.
Prompt changes only affect future meetings. Existing AI-generated content is not regenerated automatically. To apply new prompts to a past meeting, regenerate the content from the [meeting detail page](/activity/meetings/meeting-review).
## FAQ
No. Prompts are configured per book. Select the book you want to customize from the book selector at the top of the meeting prompts page.
Yes. Click the **Reset to default** button below the prompt editor. This button appears once you've customized a prompt. You can also click **View history** to see all previous versions of the prompt with timestamps and who made each change.
Company settings apply as defaults across all books. Book-level settings override the company defaults for that specific book. For example, you could set a company-wide notetaker name but override it for a specific book.
## Next steps
Learn how the notetaker records your meetings
Review and edit AI-generated meeting content
# Meeting review
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/meetings/meeting-review
Review AI-generated summaries, notes, tasks, transcripts, and recordings on the meeting detail page.
After a meeting is recorded or a transcript is uploaded, Slant processes the content and generates AI-powered outputs. The meeting detail page is where you review, edit, and act on everything.
## Open the meeting detail page
There are several ways to open a meeting:
* Click a meeting title on the **Upcoming**, **Processed**, or **All meetings** tab
* Click a meeting title in the **All meetings** data table
* Click a meeting from a household's or contact's timeline
The meeting opens in a full page with the title, metadata, and all AI-generated content.
## Meeting details
The top of the page shows editable meeting metadata:
* **Title** — click the title to edit it inline
* **Date and time** — the scheduled or actual meeting time. You can edit the date and time for manually created meetings. Calendar-synced meetings reflect the calendar event time.
* **Meeting type** — click the type label to change it. If AI content already exists, Slant asks whether to reprocess or change the label only. See [meeting types](/activity/meetings/overview#meeting-types).
* **Meeting link** — the online meeting URL, if one exists
* **Users** — team members associated with this meeting. Click **+** to add a user or **x** to remove one.
* **Participants** — calendar event participants shown as email badges. Click **+** on a participant to create a new prospect, client, or [other contact](/records/other-contacts) from that email and link them to the meeting.
* **Notepad** — a rich text area for your own manual notes. This is separate from the AI-generated notes.
## AI-generated content
When a transcript is available, Slant automatically generates three types of content:
### Summary
A concise overview of the meeting's key takeaways, decisions, and action items. The summary appears as a short text block and is designed to be scannable in the meeting list.
### Notes
Detailed, structured notes generated from the transcript. Notes are organized with headings and bullet points covering the main topics discussed, decisions made, and follow-ups mentioned. You can edit the AI-generated notes directly on the meeting detail page.
### Tasks
Recommended follow-up action items extracted from the conversation. These are [tasks](/activity/tasks/overview) linked to the meeting and appear in your task list.
AI-generated tasks can require approval before being added to your task list. Enable **Require task approval before creation** in **Settings** → **Prompts** → **Meeting prompts** to review and accept or reject each suggested task.
While AI content is being generated, a processing indicator appears on the meeting. The page refreshes automatically when processing completes.
## Transcript
The full transcript shows each speaker's contributions with timestamps. Click any line in the transcript to jump to that point in the video or audio recording.
### Rename speakers
If the transcript identifies speakers by generic names, you can rename them. Click a speaker name in the speakers list to edit it. Speaker name changes apply throughout the transcript.
### Find and replace
Use find and replace to correct recurring errors in the transcript — for example, a misspelled name or technical term. Open the **...** menu and choose find and replace, enter the text to find and the replacement, and optionally enable case-sensitive matching. Slant shows how many replacements will be made before you confirm.
## Video and audio playback
If the meeting was recorded, the video or audio player appears at the top of the meeting detail page. The player syncs with the transcript — clicking a transcript line jumps the playback to that moment, and the transcript highlights the current line during playback.
You can collapse the video player to focus on the transcript and notes.
## Attachments
You can attach files to a meeting alongside its recap — for example, the slide deck, an agenda you handed out, or a screenshot taken during the call.
The **Attachments** section appears on past meetings. Click the **+** button to add an attachment:
* **Upload file** — pick a file from your computer.
* **Attach from \[provider]** — open the file picker to select a file from your connected [file storage](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage) provider. Slant stores the link, so the file stays in the provider.
Attachments appear in the meeting header and the review panel and are visible to anyone with access to the meeting.
## Comments
Use the **Comments** tab to discuss the meeting with teammates who can access it. Meeting comments appear in the comment count and can open directly from a notification.
Attach files with the upload button or paste images into a comment. Each comment supports up to 20 attachments at 10 MB each. Click an image to preview it; other files download when opened.
## Download meeting content
Click the button to save meeting content to your computer:
* **Download transcript** — saves the transcript as a DOCX file
* **Download video** — downloads the meeting video recording
* **Download audio** — downloads the audio track only
Download options only appear when the corresponding content exists. A meeting without a recording won't show video or audio download options.
When your [recording retention](/activity/meetings/customizing-meeting-ai#book-level-settings) settings remove a meeting's notetaker media, Slant removes the notetaker video and generated transcript. The AI summary and meeting notes are kept, so the meeting still appears on the **Processed** tab. The transcript area explains that the transcript has been removed according to your retention settings, and download options only appear for content that is still available.
## Share a meeting
You can share a meeting's recording and content with people outside your Slant team through the client portal.
On the meeting detail page, click the **Share** button.
Enter the recipient's email address, and optionally their first and last name.
Click to send an email with the portal link, or copy the link to share it yourself.
Each recipient gets a unique portal link. You can revoke access at any time from the share panel.
## Create a project from a meeting
Open the **...** (three-dot menu) on the meeting detail page and select **Create project** to start a [project](/activity/projects/creating-projects) from the meeting. If the meeting is linked to exactly one household, that household is pre-filled on the create form. After the project is created, a **Project created** message appears with a **View project** link to open it.
## Make a meeting private
For a past meeting, an admin or the book principal can open the **...** menu and choose **Make private**. This is available for meetings processed by the notetaker, and for completed recordings made live from the mobile app or as an in-person instant meeting. In **Meeting privacy**, select the users who should retain access, then click **Save**. The book principal is always selected and cannot be removed.
After privacy is enabled, use **Manage privacy** from the same menu to change access. Excluded users no longer see the meeting in meeting lists, record activity, chat results, or reports.
Companies can also default every internal meeting to attendee-only access. Turn on **Keep internal meetings private** in [notetaker settings](/activity/meetings/customizing-meeting-ai#notetaker-settings) on the company tab. Other users in the company and admins who were not in the meeting cannot see it, even before you use **Make private**. The book principal always keeps access.
## Reprocess a recording with AI
Some processed recordings can be transcribed again once. Open the **...** menu and choose **Reprocess with AI**. In **Reprocess recording with AI?**, add **Additional instructions (optional)** when you want the new transcript and notes to emphasize or correct something, then click **Reprocess recording**.
Reprocessing replaces the current transcript and regenerates the meeting notes. The option disappears after it has been used.
## Reprocess speakers
When several people share one microphone or device, the transcript can label everyone as "Speaker 1." Reprocess the recording with the names of everyone present so the transcript shows real names instead.
Open the **...** menu and choose **Reprocess speakers**. The option appears for an eligible notetaker recording whose media is still retained.
In **Separate voices from one device**, set **Number of people** to the exact count of voices heard in the recording. You can enter 2 to 30.
Fill in the **Names** fields. Every name is required and each one must be different, but order doesn't matter and names can be corrected later. Each field suggests team members on the meeting, members of a linked household, linked [other contacts](/records/other-contacts), and calendar attendees as you type.
Click **Reprocess transcript**.
A **Reprocessing transcript for multiple speakers** message confirms it started. To close **Separate voices from one device** without reprocessing, click **Cancel**.
Use the exact count. Reprocessing speakers replaces the transcript and meeting materials, and can only be done once.
## Delete a meeting
Open the **...** (three-dot menu) in the top-right corner of the meeting detail page and select **Delete meeting**.
Deleting a meeting permanently removes it along with all associated recordings, transcripts, AI-generated content, and tasks. This cannot be undone.
## FAQ
You can regenerate the summary, notes, and tasks from the existing transcript. For an eligible recording, **Reprocess with AI** creates a replacement transcript and regenerates the meeting notes. **Reprocess speakers** does the same while separating the voices recorded on one device. Each reprocessing option is available only once.
Yes. The notes section is fully editable. Changes you make are saved automatically and won't be overwritten unless you explicitly regenerate.
Use the find and replace feature to fix recurring mistakes, or rename speakers that were identified incorrectly. You can also edit the notes directly to correct any AI misinterpretations.
Only the specific person you share the meeting with can access it via their unique portal link. You can revoke access at any time.
## Next steps
Customize the AI prompts for summaries, notes, prep, and tasks
Manage follow-up tasks generated from your meetings
# Notetaker
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/meetings/notetaker
How the AI notetaker automatically records and transcribes your meetings in Slant.
The notetaker is an AI bot that joins your online meetings, records the conversation, and generates a transcript. Once the transcript is ready, Slant automatically produces a [summary, notes, and recommended tasks](/activity/meetings/meeting-review).
## How it works
When you have a [connected calendar](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar), the notetaker monitors your upcoming meetings. If a meeting has an online link (Zoom, Google Meet, Microsoft Teams, Webex, or Slack), the notetaker automatically joins at the scheduled time, records the meeting, and processes the transcript when the meeting ends.
The notetaker appears as a participant in your meeting with a name and avatar you can [customize in settings](/activity/meetings/customizing-meeting-ai#notetaker-settings).
Your company can turn on a [recording announcement](/activity/meetings/customizing-meeting-ai#company-level-settings) so the notetaker plays an audible notice that the meeting is being recorded each time it joins.
Meeting privacy isn't limited to notetaker recordings. Past meetings recorded in person or from the mobile app can also be restricted — see [make a meeting private](/activity/meetings/meeting-review#make-a-meeting-private).
## Turn off the notetaker entirely
If you don't want the notetaker to join any of your meetings:
Go to **Settings** → **Notetaker** and select your book's tab.
The notetaker stops joining all future meetings for that book. You can turn it back on at any time.
## Turn off the notetaker for a specific meeting
You can disable the notetaker for individual meetings without turning it off globally.
On the **Upcoming** tab of the **Meetings** page, each online meeting shows a **Notetaker** toggle. Turn it off to prevent the notetaker from joining that particular meeting.
You can also toggle the notetaker from the meeting detail side panel or full detail page.
The notetaker toggle only appears on meetings that have an online meeting link and are scheduled in the future.
## Two-week scheduling window
The **Notetaker** toggle can only be enabled for meetings that start within the next 14 days. For meetings further out, the toggle is disabled until the start time falls inside the window.
Meetings scheduled more than 14 days from today show a disabled **Notetaker** toggle. Once the meeting moves inside the 14-day window, the toggle becomes available and you can enable or disable the notetaker as usual.
## One notetaker per meeting
When multiple users in your firm are invited to the same calendar event, Slant only sends one notetaker to the meeting — not one per user or book. This prevents duplicate bots from joining the same call and keeps a single, clean recording and transcript.
If a meeting appears on more than one user's calendar, the notetaker still joins once. Each user continues to see the meeting in their own **Upcoming** list and can toggle the notetaker on or off for the shared event.
## Send the notetaker to a meeting not on your calendar
If you have an online meeting that isn't on your calendar, you can still send the notetaker by creating the meeting manually:
On the **Meetings** page, click **Start meeting**.
Optionally select a household and meeting type, enter a title, and paste the meeting link (e.g., a Zoom or Google Meet URL).
The meeting is created and the notetaker is invited to join.
## Send the notetaker to a meeting in progress
If a calendar meeting is already underway and the notetaker didn't join automatically, you can send it manually. Open the meeting from the **Upcoming** tab and click the notetaker toggle or use the **Send bot** option to have the notetaker join the meeting in progress.
## Phone call recording
The notetaker can also record phone calls. See [phone call meetings](/activity/meetings/creating-and-recording-meetings#phone-call-meetings) for setup and usage.
Calls synced from a [phone integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone) appear on the record's **Phone** tab. You can convert a recording-backed call to a meeting. RingSense transcript-only calls remain on the **Phone** tab, where you can search and read the transcript without an audio recording.
## FAQ
The notetaker joins meetings on Zoom, Google Meet, Microsoft Teams, Webex, and Slack.
Yes. In **Settings** → **Notetaker** under your book's tab, enable **Skip recurring meetings** to prevent the notetaker from joining recurring calendar events. You can still send the notetaker to individual meetings manually.
If the meeting link is invalid, the platform is unsupported, or the meeting has already ended, the notetaker won't join. You can still [upload a recording or transcript](/activity/meetings/creating-and-recording-meetings#upload-a-past-meeting) after the meeting.
Yes. Go to **Settings** → **Notetaker** to set a custom bot participant name and avatar. See [notetaker settings](/activity/meetings/customizing-meeting-ai#notetaker-settings) for details.
Yes. The notetaker detects the spoken language automatically and transcribes accordingly, including Spanish and meetings that mix Spanish and English. There's nothing to configure.
## Next steps
Start in-person, online, or phone meetings, or upload past recordings
Configure notetaker settings and customize AI prompts
# Meetings overview
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/meetings/overview
Track, record, and review meetings with clients, prospects, and your team in Slant.
Meetings in Slant capture every conversation — whether it's an online video call, a phone call, or an in-person meeting — and turn it into searchable notes, summaries, and follow-up tasks using AI.
Meetings appear automatically from your [connected calendar](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar), or you can create them manually from a household, [other contact](/records/other-contacts), or [business](/records/businesses). After a meeting is recorded or a transcript is uploaded, Slant generates an AI summary, detailed notes, and recommended [tasks](/activity/tasks/overview).
## Meeting types
Every meeting has a type that helps Slant organize your schedule and tailor AI output. You can set the type manually when creating a meeting, or Slant infers it automatically based on the participants and title.
Slant starts with locked default types: **Client review**, **Client check-in**, **Prospect**, **COI / partner**, **Internal**, and **Other**. Any user can add company-specific meeting types from **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Meeting types**. Only admins can edit locked default types. Custom types include a name, color, and AI description that helps Slant classify meetings and apply the right prompt guidance.
You can change a meeting's type at any time from the [meeting detail page](/activity/meetings/meeting-review#meeting-details).
## The meetings page
Open **Meetings** from the sidebar to see all meetings in your book. The page has three built-in tabs:
Meetings you cancel on your calendar are automatically hidden from every meeting list — the **Meetings** page and the **Meetings** tab on household, other contact, and business records. Cancelling a single occurrence of a recurring series hides only that occurrence. There is no toggle to show cancelled meetings.
### Upcoming
Shows future meetings from your calendar and any manually created meetings, grouped by day. Each meeting card displays the title, type, time, location or link, and participants. Click a meeting to see its details in a side panel where you can edit the title, type, associated households, and users, or add preparation notes.
The message "To see meetings further in the future, check the calendar section" appears at the bottom — meetings beyond the near-term window are visible on the [Calendar](/dashboard/calendar) page.
### Processed
Shows past meetings that have been recorded or transcribed and processed by AI. Use this tab to quickly find meetings with summaries, notes, and tasks ready for review.
### All meetings
A full data table of every meeting in your book, past and present. Columns include:
* **Meeting** — the meeting title (click to open)
* **Type** — meeting type (editable inline)
* **Date** — when the meeting took place
* **Participants** — calendar participants
* **Household** — linked households (editable inline)
* **Users** — team members on the meeting
* **Source** — how the meeting was created (Calendar, Logged, Imported, Instant, Mobile app, or Phone call)
* **AI processed** — whether AI has generated content for this meeting
### All books
If you select **All books** from the book switcher, the **Meetings** page shows meetings from every book you can access. Each meeting shows which book it belongs to — a book label on the card, and a **Book** column on the **All meetings** tab. A calendar event shared across books appears once per book, so you can see each book's copy.
Most of the page — tabs, filters, search, and the meeting details panel — works the same in All books mode.
A couple of things behave differently. Only company-wide custom views appear; views saved to a single book are hidden until you switch back to that book. And you can't add associations to a meeting from All books — open the meeting from its own book to edit them.
### Custom views
Click **+** next to the tabs to create a custom view with your own filters. Each view saves its filter configuration independently. You can rename, reorder, or delete custom views.
Next to the existing tabs at the top of the page.
Pick **Upcoming**, **Processed**, or **All**. **Upcoming** and **Processed** create a card feed like the built-in tabs; **All** creates a data table like the **All meetings** tab.
The layout defaults to whichever tab you're on. If you create a view from the **Upcoming** or **Processed** tab and keep a feed layout, the filters you have set carry into the new view. Choosing the **All** layout starts the view with no filters.
Once a feed view is saved, changing its filters shows the same **Unsaved changes** controls as any other [data view](/records/data-views#save-changes) — save the change for everyone, save it as a new view, or discard it.
## Filtering and search
Use the quick filter chips at the top of the meeting list to filter by:
* **User** — meetings associated with a specific team member
* **Meeting type** — filter by one or more meeting types
* **Date** — filter by date range, before, or after a specific date
On the **Upcoming** and **Processed** tabs, all three chips — including **User** — are part of the view's filters, so they're kept when you save the filters to a custom view.
On the **All meetings** tab, additional filter options include:
* **AI processed** — show only meetings with or without AI content
* **Meeting source** — narrow the list by how each meeting was created: **Calendar** (from your connected calendar), **Logged** (manually logged), **Imported** (migrated from another CRM), **Instant** (ad-hoc recording), **Mobile app**, or **Phone call**. Select more than one to combine sources
* **Filter** — combine multiple conditions for advanced filtering
Use the icon to find meetings by title, household name, or participant name and email.
## How meetings are created
Meetings enter Slant in several ways:
* **Calendar sync** — meetings from your [connected calendar](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar) appear automatically on the **Upcoming** tab. Online meetings with a video link (Zoom, Google Meet, Microsoft Teams, Webex, or Slack) are detected and the [notetaker](/activity/meetings/notetaker) joins automatically.
* **Start meeting** — click **Start meeting** on the meetings page, or from a household, contact, or business detail page, to [create a meeting manually](/activity/meetings/creating-and-recording-meetings).
* **Phone calls** — calls to a dedicated recording number are captured as meetings. See [phone call meetings](/activity/meetings/creating-and-recording-meetings#phone-call-meetings).
* **Imports** — meetings imported from another CRM appear with a source of "Imported."
## Linking meetings to records
Each meeting can be filed under a [household](/records/clients/overview), an [other contact](/records/other-contacts), or a [business](/records/businesses), and linked to team members. Calendar participants are shown as email badges — click the **+** on a participant to create a new prospect, client, or other contact from that email.
Linking a meeting to a record ensures it appears on that record's **Meetings** tab and timeline, and helps Slant generate more relevant AI content. When you click **Start meeting** from a household, contact, or business, the meeting is automatically filed under that record.
## What happens after a meeting
When a meeting has a transcript — from the [notetaker](/activity/meetings/notetaker), a web recording, a phone call, or an uploaded file — Slant automatically generates:
* **Summary** — a concise overview of the key takeaways
* **Notes** — detailed, structured meeting notes
* **Tasks** — recommended follow-up action items linked to the meeting
You can review and edit all of this on the [meeting detail page](/activity/meetings/meeting-review). You can also [customize the AI prompts](/activity/meetings/customizing-meeting-ai) that generate this content.
## Keyboard shortcuts
| Shortcut | Action |
| ------------ | ----------------------- |
| `g` then `m` | Go to the meetings page |
## FAQ
No. You can create meetings manually using the **Start meeting** button, upload past recordings or transcripts, and record phone calls — all without a calendar connection. However, connecting your calendar lets meetings appear automatically and enables the notetaker to join online meetings.
Yes. Open the meeting detail page and click the icon in the top-right corner. Deleting a meeting removes it and its associated AI content permanently.
Users with access to the book can normally access its meetings. For a past meeting with a completed recording — from the notetaker, an in-person recording, or the mobile app — an admin or the book principal can make the meeting private and choose which users retain access. The book principal always has access.
Slant detects meeting links from Zoom, Google Meet, Microsoft Teams, Webex, and Slack. The notetaker can automatically join meetings on any of these platforms.
## Next steps
Learn how the AI notetaker records and transcribes your meetings
Start an in-person, online, or phone meeting, or upload a past recording
Review AI-generated summaries, notes, tasks, and recordings
Configure the notetaker and customize AI prompts
# Managing opportunities
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities
Create, edit, filter, and track opportunities through your pipeline.
Opportunities track potential deals and initiatives as they move through your [pipeline stages](/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages). This page covers the day-to-day workflows for working with opportunities.
## Create an opportunity
You can create an opportunity from the page header or from within a specific stage column.
### From the page header
Click **Opportunities** in the sidebar under **Activity**.
Click the pipeline tab you want to add the opportunity to (e.g., **Prospect Pipeline** or **Client Pipeline**).
Click **+ New opportunity** in the top-right corner.
Enter the opportunity information:
* **Name** — a short description of the opportunity (required)
* **Stage** — the starting stage in the pipeline (defaults to the first stage)
* **Value** — the estimated dollar amount
* **Target close date** — when you expect to close (defaults to one month from today)
* **Related record** — the record linked to this opportunity. Depending on the pipeline's [audience types](/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages#audience-types), you can pick a client, prospect, contact, or business.
* **Assigned to** — the team member responsible (defaults to you)
The opportunity appears in the selected stage column on the board.
### From a stage column
Click **+ New opportunity** at the bottom of any stage column. This opens the same creation form with the stage pre-selected to that column.
You can also click the icon next to a stage name in the column header.
### From a record
When viewing a [client](/records/clients/overview), [prospect](/records/prospects), [other contact](/records/other-contacts), or [business](/records/businesses), you can create an opportunity linked to that record. Open the **Opportunities** section on the **Records** tab (or the **Opportunities** overview widget) and click **Add opportunity**. The record is pre-filled as the **Related record** in the form.
### While creating a prospect
When a new prospect arrives with a deal already attached, create both at once. Check **Also create an opportunity** in the **Create new prospect** window to add **Stage**, **Value**, **Target close date**, and **Assigned to** fields to the form, plus **Pipeline** and **Label** when your book has them. See [create a prospect and an opportunity together](/records/prospects#create-a-prospect-and-an-opportunity-together).
## Edit an opportunity
In **full view** mode, every field on an opportunity card is editable directly. Click any field to update it:
* **Name** — click the opportunity name to rename it
* **Value** — click the dollar amount to change it
* **Probability** — click to set a win probability (0–100%). If left blank, the stage's [default probability](/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages#stage-settings) is used
* **Target close date** — click to pick a new date
* **Related record** — the linked client, prospect, contact, or business; click it to open that record. On a household pipeline you can link a household here when none is set yet
* **Owner** — click to reassign to a different team member
* **Label** — click to apply or change a label
Changes save automatically as you make them.
Switch to full view using the icon in the top-right corner of the board to see and edit all fields on each card.
## Move an opportunity between stages
Drag an opportunity card from one stage column and drop it into another. The stage updates immediately.
When dragging, hidden stages like **Closed lost** and **Archived** appear as drop zones at the bottom of the board. Drop an opportunity there to move it to a hidden stage.
You can also use keyboard navigation: pick up an opportunity with the spacebar, then use the arrow keys to move it between stages.
### Use the card menu
In **full view**, open the **⋮** (three-dot menu) in the top-right corner of an opportunity card and select **Move to stage**. The submenu lists every stage in the pipeline, each with its color dot and name. The current stage shows a checkmark and can't be selected. Choose any other stage to move the opportunity there immediately.
Hidden stages like **Closed lost** appear in the submenu too. Moving to a hidden stage opens a **Move to \[stage name]?** confirmation first.
The **Move to stage** option is only available in full view. In compact view, use drag-and-drop instead.
Each opportunity card displays how long it has been in its current stage — for example, "2d ago." This resets each time the opportunity moves to a new stage.
## Move an opportunity to another pipeline
When a deal belongs in a different workflow — a prospect opportunity that should follow your upsell process, for example — move it without recreating it.
In full view, open the **⋮** (three-dot menu) in the top-right corner of the opportunity card.
It sits directly below **Move to stage**. The **Move to pipeline** window opens.
Pick the destination from the **Pipeline** list. **Stage** fills in with that pipeline's first stage.
Change **Stage** if you want the opportunity to land somewhere other than the first stage. Hidden stages are listed and marked **(hidden)**.
The opportunity moves to the pipeline and stage you picked. Click **Cancel** instead to leave it where it is.
A **Moved to \[pipeline] · \[stage]** confirmation appears and the card moves to the destination pipeline. The opportunity keeps its name, value, probability, target close date, owner, labels, custom fields, and comments.
Only pipelines that support the linked record's type are listed — the window explains this with **Only pipelines that support \[record type] are shown**. An opportunity linked to a prospect can only move to pipelines whose [audience types](/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages#audience-types) include prospects.
If nothing qualifies, the window shows **No compatible pipelines** and explains why. Add the record's audience type to the destination pipeline in [pipeline settings](/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages), then try again.
## Filter opportunities
Filter chips appear below the pipeline tabs. Pinned filters are always visible:
* **Prospect** or **Client** — filter by linked household (the label matches the pipeline's household type)
* **Label** — filter by one or more labels, or show opportunities with no label
* **Target close date** — filter by relative date ranges: Today, Tomorrow, This week, Next week, This month, Next month, This quarter, Last quarter, or Overdue
* **Owner** — filter by the assigned team member
Click the **Filter** button to add more conditions, including value comparisons and [custom field](#custom-fields) filters.
## Search the board
Click the icon near the view-mode toggle in the top-right corner of the board to open a search box. Type to filter the visible cards by opportunity name, linked household, or owner. The per-column counts and the **Total** and **Weighted** header values update to reflect the matching cards. Clear the box to restore all cards; switching pipelines also clears the search.
Links from global search, the **Opportunities** widget, or a record's **Opportunities** section open the board on the right pipeline and scroll to the linked opportunity, highlighting its card.
## Labels
Labels are color-coded tags you can apply to opportunities for categorization — for example, "Referral," "Upsell," or "High priority."
To apply a label, click the label field on an opportunity card in full view and select from the list.
### Manage labels
Labels are configured in settings.
Go to **Settings** → **Tags & labels** → **Opportunities**.
Click **Add label** or the **Add new label** row, enter a name, and choose a color.
You can edit or delete existing labels from the same page. Deleting a label removes it from all opportunities that use it.
## Comments
Click the icon at the bottom of an opportunity card to open the comments panel. Comments support:
* Threaded replies
* Emoji reactions
* @mentions of team members
* File uploads and pasted images
The comment count is displayed on each opportunity card.
## Custom fields
If your firm has configured custom fields for opportunities, they appear at the bottom of each opportunity card in full view. Custom fields are editable inline, just like standard fields.
Numeric custom fields can also be used with the **Sum by** selector to display totals and weighted values based on that field instead of the default opportunity value.
## Delete an opportunity
In full view, click the three-dot menu on the opportunity card.
Confirm the deletion when prompted.
Deleting an opportunity removes it permanently. This cannot be undone.
## FAQ
Yes. In full view, open the **⋮** menu on the card and select **Move to pipeline**. The opportunity keeps all its data. Only pipelines that support the linked record's type are available — see [move an opportunity to another pipeline](#move-an-opportunity-to-another-pipeline).
Probability represents your estimated chance of winning the opportunity (0–100%). It's used to calculate the **Weighted** total on each stage column. If you don't set a probability, the stage's default probability is used instead.
Yes. The **Related record** field is optional, so you can leave it blank. When you do set it, the picker offers the record types allowed by the pipeline's [audience types](/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages#audience-types) — clients, prospects, contacts, or businesses.
Drag an opportunity toward the bottom of the board — hidden stages like **Closed lost** and **Archived** appear as drop zones there. These stages don't show as columns by default. Opportunities in hidden stages are still counted on the board if the stage is not excluded from totals.
## Next steps
Customize your pipeline stages, colors, and settings
Trigger workflows when opportunities are created or updated
# Opportunities overview
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/opportunities/overview
Track sales and service opportunities through customizable pipeline stages in Slant.
Opportunities let you track potential deals, service initiatives, and other revenue-generating activities through a visual pipeline board. Each opportunity moves through a series of stages — from initial identification to a closed outcome — so you always know where things stand.
Opportunities are organized by [pipelines](/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages). Each pipeline has its own set of stages and targets one or more [audience types](/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages#audience-types) — clients, prospects, contacts, or businesses — so you can match different workflows.
## The opportunities page
Open **Opportunities** from the sidebar under **Activity**. The page displays a pipeline board where each column represents a stage.
### Pipeline tabs
Tabs across the top let you switch between pipelines. Click a tab to view that pipeline's stages and opportunities. Click **+ New** to [create a new pipeline](/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages#create-a-pipeline).
Favorited pipelines show a filled amber star icon on their tab. When you land on the page, Slant opens your first favorited pipeline. If you haven't favorited any pipelines, it opens the first pipeline in your sort order.
How tabs are arranged depends on how many pipelines you have:
* **Fewer than 4 pipelines** — every pipeline appears as a tab in sort order.
* **4 or more pipelines** — favorites are pinned first, followed by the most recently opened non-favorite, then a **View all** dropdown for the rest. The dropdown is searchable. At least two tabs are always shown, so non-favorites fill in if needed.
#### Favorite a pipeline
To favorite the pipeline you're viewing, click the star button in the page header — it sits between the pipeline filter and **Sum by**. The tooltip reads **Favorite this pipeline** when the pipeline isn't favorited and **Remove from favorites** when it is.
Favoriting a pipeline pins it to the front of the tab strip and makes it the default landing pipeline.
### Stage columns
Each column shows the stage name with a color indicator, a count of opportunities in that stage, and running **Total** and **Weighted** values.
* **Total** is the sum of all opportunity values in that stage.
* **Weighted** adjusts each value by its probability (value x probability percentage).
Stages marked as hidden (like **Closed lost** and **Archived**) don't appear as columns — they show as drop zones at the bottom of the board when you drag an opportunity.
Each column loads 50 opportunities at a time and loads the next batch as you scroll toward the bottom. The count, **Total**, and **Weighted** figures in the column header cover every opportunity in the stage, not only the cards loaded so far — so the numbers are accurate before you finish scrolling.
### Sum by
Click **Sum by: AUM** in the top-right corner to change which field the board uses for totals. By default, totals are based on the opportunity value (AUM). If you have numeric [custom fields](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities#custom-fields), you can select one of those instead.
### View modes
Two view modes are available via the toggle icons in the top-right corner of the board:
* **Compact** — shows each opportunity as a slim card with the name, value, linked household, and target close date. Opportunities linked to a contact or business show a dash in place of the household — switch to full view to see their related record.
* **Full** — expands cards to show all fields, including probability, owner, labels, custom fields, and comments. Fields are editable directly on the card.
## What you can do with opportunities
* **[Create opportunities](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities#create-an-opportunity)** — add new opportunities from the page header, from within a stage column, or from a client, prospect, contact, or business record.
* **[Edit inline](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities#edit-an-opportunity)** — click any field on an opportunity card in full view to update it without opening a separate form.
* **[Move between stages](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities#move-an-opportunity-between-stages)** — drag and drop opportunities between columns, including hidden stages.
* **[Move between pipelines](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities#move-an-opportunity-to-another-pipeline)** — send an opportunity to a different pipeline from the card menu, keeping all its data.
* **[Filter opportunities](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities#filter-opportunities)** — use pinned filter chips for quick filtering by household, label, target close date, or owner.
* **[Search the board](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities#search-the-board)** — filter the visible cards by opportunity name, linked household, or owner.
* **[Add comments](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities#comments)** — leave threaded comments on any opportunity for team collaboration.
* **[Assign labels](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities#labels)** — categorize opportunities with color-coded labels.
* **[Use custom fields](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities#custom-fields)** — extend opportunities with additional fields specific to your firm.
* **[Configure pipelines](/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages)** — create and customize pipelines with your own stages, colors, and settings.
* **[Trigger automations](/platform/automations/overview)** — set up automations that run when opportunities are created or updated.
## Keyboard shortcuts
| Shortcut | Action |
| ------------ | ---------------------------- |
| `g` then `d` | Go to the opportunities page |
## FAQ
Yes. Each opportunity can link to a [client](/records/clients/overview), [prospect](/records/prospects), [other contact](/records/other-contacts), or [business](/records/businesses) through the **Related record** field. The pipeline's [audience types](/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages#audience-types) determine which record types appear in the picker.
**Total** is the straight sum of opportunity values. **Weighted** multiplies each opportunity's value by its probability percentage — so a $100,000 opportunity at 50% probability contributes $50,000 to the weighted total. Stages marked to exclude from total are not counted in either number.
Yes. You can create as many pipelines as you need — for example, separate pipelines for prospect conversion and client upsell. Switch between them using the tabs at the top of the page. Favorite the pipelines you use most to pin them to the front of the tab strip, and use the **View all** dropdown to search for any pipeline once you have four or more. See [pipelines and stages](/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages) for setup details.
Any user with access to the book can view, create, edit, and delete opportunities in that book.
## Next steps
Create, edit, filter, and track opportunities day to day
Set up and customize your pipelines and stage workflow
# Pipelines and stages
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages
Create and configure opportunity pipelines with custom stages, colors, and settings.
Pipelines define the workflow that [opportunities](/activity/opportunities/overview) move through. Each pipeline has an ordered set of stages — from first contact to a closed outcome — that represent your process for converting prospects or serving clients.
You can create multiple pipelines for different workflows. For example, a prospect conversion pipeline with stages like **Identified**, **Connected**, and **Meeting scheduled**, and a separate client service pipeline with stages like **Identified**, **In-progress**, and **Reviewing**.
## Audience types
Each pipeline targets one or more **audience types** — set with the **Applies to** field — which control the record types you can link to its opportunities. Select any combination — at least one is required:
* **Clients** — [clients](/records/clients/overview) can be linked
* **Prospects** — [prospects](/records/prospects) can be linked
* **Contacts** — [other contacts](/records/other-contacts) can be linked
* **Businesses** — [businesses](/records/businesses) can be linked
The audience types determine which records appear in the **Related record** picker when creating an opportunity, and which filter chip appears on the [opportunities page](/activity/opportunities/overview) for client and prospect pipelines.
## Default stages
When you create a new pipeline, Slant adds a set of default stages based on its audience types:
**Prospects only:**
Identified, Connected, Meeting scheduled, Qualified, Closed won, Closed lost, Archived
**Clients only:**
Identified, In-progress, Reviewing, Closed won, Closed lost, Archived
**Any other audience** (including contacts, businesses, or a mix):
Identified, Qualified, Reviewing, Closed won, Closed lost, Archived
**Closed lost** and **Archived** are hidden by default — they don't appear as columns on the board but are available as drop zones when dragging opportunities. You can customize all stages after creation.
## Create a pipeline
You can create a pipeline from the opportunities page or from settings.
### From the opportunities page
On the Opportunities page, click the **+ New** tab next to your existing pipeline tabs.
Enter a name, choose one or more [audience types](#audience-types) under **Applies to** (Clients, Prospects, Contacts, Businesses), and configure stages.
The new pipeline appears as a tab on the opportunities page.
### From settings
Go to **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Pipelines**.
Select the **Company** tab to create a company-wide pipeline available in all books, or select your book's tab to create one for that book only.
Configure the pipeline name, audience types, and stages, then save.
Any user can create and edit company-wide or book-level pipelines.
## Edit a pipeline
Click the icon next to **Sum by** on the opportunities page, or click the icon next to a pipeline in **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Pipelines**.
The edit form lets you change:
* **Pipeline name** — rename the pipeline
* **Applies to** — add or remove [audience types](#audience-types) (Clients, Prospects, Contacts, Businesses)
* **Pipeline stages** — add, remove, rename, reorder, and configure stages (see [stage settings](#stage-settings) below)
* **AI auto-update** — toggle automatic stage updates based on meeting activity
Click **Save changes** to apply your edits.
## Stage settings
Each stage in a pipeline has several configurable properties. Edit stages from the [pipeline edit form](#edit-a-pipeline) — click the icon on the opportunities page or the icon in pipeline settings.
* **Name** — the stage label shown on the board
* **Color** — a color indicator dot displayed next to the stage name
* **Visibility** — visible stages appear as columns on the board. Hidden stages (like Closed lost and Archived) appear only as drop zones when dragging. Toggle visibility with the icon
* **Default probability** — a fallback probability percentage (0–100%) applied to opportunities in this stage when no probability is set on the opportunity itself
* **Track time in stage** — set a target number of days for opportunities to stay in this stage. The board shows how long each opportunity has been in its current stage
* **Exclude from total** — when enabled, opportunities in this stage are not counted in the board's Total and Weighted values
### Add a stage
In the pipeline edit form, click **+ Add new stage** at the bottom of the stage list. The new stage is added to the end — drag it to the position you want.
### Reorder stages
Drag stages using the grip handle on the left side to reorder them. On the board, use the **Move left** and **Move right** options in the stage settings menu.
### Delete a stage
Delete a stage from the pipeline edit form by removing it from the list. If the stage has opportunities, they are moved to the first remaining stage in the pipeline.
Deleting a stage moves all its opportunities to the first stage in the pipeline. This cannot be undone.
## Hidden stages
Stages with visibility turned off don't appear as columns on the pipeline board. The default hidden stages are **Closed lost** and **Archived**.
When you drag an opportunity on the board, hidden stages appear as labeled drop zones at the bottom. Drop an opportunity onto one of these zones to move it to that stage.
You can hide any stage and unhide any hidden stage from the [pipeline edit form](#edit-a-pipeline).
Dropping an opportunity onto a hidden stage opens a confirmation prompt before the move is applied. Hidden-stage drop zones are not shown when you're dragging from a hidden stage.
## AI auto-update
When enabled, Slant automatically updates an opportunity's stage based on meeting activity. For example, after a meeting is logged with a linked prospect, the opportunity could advance to the next stage.
Toggle this setting in the [pipeline edit form](#edit-a-pipeline) under **AI auto-update**.
## Company-wide vs book-level pipelines
Pipelines can belong to a single book or be shared across all books in your company.
* **Book-scoped** — visible only in the book where it was created. Any user in that book can create and edit these.
* **Company-wide** — available in every book. Any user can create, edit, or delete company-wide pipelines.
Manage scope from **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Pipelines**. The **Company** tab shows company-wide pipelines, and your book's tab shows book-level pipelines.
### Reorder pipelines
In the pipeline settings page, drag pipelines using the grip handle to change the order they appear as tabs on the opportunities page.
Favorites override sort order on the opportunities page tab strip — favorited pipelines are always pinned first. Sort order still applies to non-favorites and to the filler tabs that appear when you have fewer than two favorites.
### Favorite a pipeline
Click the star button in the opportunities page header — it sits between the pipeline filter and **Sum by** — to favorite the pipeline you're viewing. Favorited pipelines pin to the front of the tab strip, show a filled amber star, and become the default landing pipeline. Click the star again to remove it from favorites.
## Delete a pipeline
To delete a pipeline, open the [pipeline edit form](#edit-a-pipeline) and click the icon in the bottom-left corner.
If the pipeline is the default for one of its audience types, you must select a replacement default pipeline before deleting it. The replacement must share those audience types.
Deleting a pipeline permanently removes the pipeline and all of its opportunities. This cannot be undone.
## FAQ
There is no limit on the number of pipelines. Create as many as you need for different workflows.
Yes. Open the [pipeline edit form](#edit-a-pipeline) and adjust the **Applies to** field. At least one audience type must stay selected.
Opportunities remain in the hidden stage — they don't move. The stage stops appearing as a column on the board. You can still move opportunities to or from hidden stages by dragging.
Yes. Each book can have its own book-level pipelines in addition to any company-wide pipelines shared across all books.
## Next steps
Create, edit, and track opportunities through your pipelines
Trigger workflows when opportunities change stages
# Creating projects
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/projects/creating-projects
Create a new project from the projects page or a household page.
Projects are created from a [project type](/activity/projects/project-types) — a reusable template that defines the milestones and tasks for that kind of work. When you create a project, Slant starts it at the first milestone and creates the associated tasks automatically.
## Create a project
Click **+ New project** on the **Projects** page.
Type a name for the project. If you select an owner, the name defaults to the owner name combined with the project type (for example, "Smith Family Annual review").
Search and select a project type from the **Project type** dropdown. This determines the milestones, tasks, and form fields for the project — and whether the project attaches to a household, a contact, or a business.
Choose what the project attaches to. The owner field follows the project type's **Owner kind**, so you'll pick a **Household**, **Contact**, or **Business**. This field is optional — if left empty, you must provide a project name.
The **Assigned to** field defaults to you. Change it to assign the project to a different team member.
Optionally choose a project-level **Due date**.
If the first milestone has form fields, they appear on the right side of the form. Complete any required fields before creating the project. These values can be used as variables in task templates. **File attachment** fields upload to the household's connected storage folder.
The project is created at the first milestone, and tasks for that milestone are generated automatically.
## Create a project from a record
On any client or prospect page, click **Add project** in the header. The household is pre-filled, and the rest of the form works the same as above.
You can also start a project from a [contact](/records/other-contacts) or [business](/records/businesses) page using **Start project**. The record is pre-filled as the owner, and the project type list is limited to types whose **Owner kind** matches that record.
You can also start a project from a meeting. On the [meeting detail page](/activity/meetings/meeting-review), open the **...** (three-dot menu) and select **Create project**. When the meeting has exactly one linked household, that household is pre-filled as the owner.
## Create projects in bulk
When viewing a list of clients or prospects, you can create projects for multiple households at once. Select the households, then choose **Add to project** from the bulk actions menu. Select a project type and assignee — Slant creates a separate project for each selected household using the default naming convention.
## FAQ
The project is created without a household, contact, or business link. You must provide a project name instead. You can link an owner later from the project detail page.
No. The project type is set when the project is created and cannot be changed afterward. You would need to delete the project and create a new one with a different type.
Yes. Tasks for the first milestone are created as soon as the project is created. Each task's due date uses the template's offset from the milestone start or its configured date form field.
## Next steps
Track progress and complete milestones
Configure project templates and milestones
# Managing projects
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/projects/managing-projects
Track progress, complete milestones, and manage projects through to completion.
Once a project is created, you manage it from the **Projects** page or the project detail page. This includes tracking progress, completing milestones, editing project details, and closing or deleting projects.
## View projects
The **Projects** page shows all active projects in the current book. The **All projects** tab displays a list view with a preview panel on the right. Click any project to see its tasks, form responses, and comments in the panel.
To open the full project detail page, click the project name in the list or click the icon in the panel.
When you select **All books** from the book switcher, the **Projects** page aggregates projects across every book you can access. You can still complete milestones, move between milestones, and complete or delete projects from a project's detail view — each action applies to that project's own book.
### Filtering
Use the quick filter chips at the top of the list to filter by:
* **Status** — in progress, overdue, completed, or cancelled
* **Assignee** — a specific team member or unassigned
* **Project type** — a specific project type
* **Due date** — the project's optional project-level deadline
* **Completed date** — when the project was completed. Choose **Relative** (default) for options like **Last week**, **Last month**, **Last quarter**, and **Last year**, or switch to **Between** to pick a custom date range.
Click **Filter** to add additional filter conditions.
### Sorting
Click **Sort** to change the project order:
* **Start date (newest)** — most recently created first (default)
* **Start date (oldest)** — oldest projects first
* **Next task due (soonest)** — projects with the nearest upcoming task deadline
* **Next task due (latest)** — projects with the furthest upcoming task deadline
* **Pipeline changed (newest)** — projects that most recently changed milestones
* **Pipeline changed (oldest)** — projects that least recently changed milestones
* **Project type (A-Z)** — alphabetical by project type name
* **Project type (Z-A)** — reverse alphabetical by project type name
### Searching
Type in the search bar to find projects by name or client name. Results update as you type.
### Show completed projects
By default, completed and cancelled projects are hidden. To show them, click the icon and toggle **Show completed projects**.
Applying a **Completed date** filter automatically includes completed and cancelled projects, so you don't need to enable **Show completed projects** when using it.
## Project detail page
The project detail page shows the full project with editable fields, tasks organized by milestone, form responses, and comments.
### Project header
Below the project name, a metadata row displays:
* **Project type** — shown with a column-grid icon (for example, **Annual review**)
* **Status badge** — only appears for non-in-progress states: **Overdue** (yellow), **Completed** (green), or **Cancelled** (red). In-progress projects show no badge.
* **Linked household** — if the project is linked to a household
* **Assignee** — an inline avatar you can click to change
* **Created \[short date]** — hover for a tooltip showing the creator's name
### Edit project details
* **Name** — click the project name to edit it inline
* **Description** — click below the name to add or edit a rich text description
* **Assigned to** — click the assignee to change it
* **Due date** — add or change the project-level deadline
* **Client** — if no client is linked, you can add one from the detail page
**Project type**, **Status**, and the creator are visible (read-only) in the header. The project type cannot be changed after creation.
### Tasks by milestone
Tasks are grouped under their milestone in accordion sections. Each section shows the milestone name, a color indicator, and progress (percentage complete and task count).
The current milestone row also shows a clock icon with compact elapsed time (for example, **3d**). Hover the icon for a tooltip reading **In milestone since \[time] on \[Month Day, Year]**. Long milestone titles truncate with the full title shown on hover.
To add a task to a milestone, click the milestone's menu and select **Add task**. You can also move a project to a different milestone from the milestone menu by selecting **Move to milestone**.
When the project type has **Require milestones in order** enabled, future milestones show **Complete the preceding milestone first**. Complete the current milestone before moving ahead. Milestones the project already visited remain available.
## Complete a milestone
When all tasks in a milestone are done (or you're ready to move on), click **Complete milestone** on the current milestone section.
If the milestone still has open tasks, the confirmation shows how many remain and explains whether they will stay on the previous milestone or remain open after the project completes. Select **Mark open tasks as complete** if you want to close them before moving forward.
### Milestones without outcomes
If the milestone has no custom outcomes configured, Slant moves the project to the next milestone in sequence and creates its tasks. If the milestone has form fields for the next stage, you are prompted to fill them in first.
You can optionally check **Mark all tasks as complete** to close any remaining tasks in the current milestone.
### Milestones with outcomes
If the milestone has outcomes configured, you must select one:
* **Move to the next milestone** — advances to the next milestone in order
* **Move to a specific milestone** — jumps to a designated milestone (skipping others)
* **Complete the project** — marks the project as finished
Each outcome can include a default comment that is added to the project when selected. If the destination milestone has form fields, you must complete them before confirming.
### Auto-advance
Milestones can be configured to auto-advance when all tasks are completed. When this is enabled, the project moves to the next milestone automatically as soon as every task in the current milestone is marked done.
## Complete a project
To finish a project manually, click **Complete** on the project detail page. You can optionally check **Mark all tasks in project as complete** to close any open tasks. The project status changes to completed and it is hidden from the default list view.
## Delete a project
Click **Delete** on the project detail page. Confirm the deletion — you can optionally check **Also delete all associated tasks** to remove the project's tasks as well.
Deleting a project cannot be undone. Tasks that are not explicitly deleted remain in your task list but lose their project link.
## Attachments
The **Attachments** section on the project detail page holds files you want to keep with the project — for example, supporting documents, screenshots, or links to working files in cloud storage.
Click the icon to add an attachment:
* **Upload file** — pick a file from your computer.
* **Attach from \[provider]** — open the file picker for your connected [file storage](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage) provider and link a file. Slant stores the link; the file stays in your storage.
Projects support up to 20 attachments, 10 MB each per uploaded file.
## Comments
The **Comments** tab on the project detail page and preview panel provides a threaded discussion space. Use comments to record decisions, share context, or coordinate with team members. Attach files with the upload button or paste images into a comment.
## Form responses
If the project's milestones have form fields, the **Form responses** tab shows all collected values organized by milestone. Click the icon on any milestone section to update form field values.
File-attachment values render as clickable links to the stored file.
## FAQ
Yes, unless the project type has **Require milestones in order** enabled. Otherwise, use **Move to milestone** to jump to another milestone; skipped milestones appear as skipped in the progress display.
Tasks from previous milestones remain in your task list. New tasks are created for the milestone you move to. Tasks are not duplicated if the project has already visited that milestone.
Yes. Change the project status back to in progress from the project detail page.
## Next steps
View projects on a kanban board
Configure milestones, outcomes, and form fields
# Projects overview
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/projects/overview
Organize multi-step processes into milestones and tasks with projects in Slant.
Projects help you manage structured, multi-step processes for your clients. Each project follows a predefined series of milestones, and Slant automatically creates tasks at each milestone to keep the work on track.
Use projects for repeatable workflows like annual reviews, new client onboarding, financial planning engagements, or money movements — any process that follows a consistent set of steps.
## How projects work
Every project is based on a [project type](/activity/projects/project-types) — a reusable template that defines the milestones, tasks, outcomes, and form fields for that kind of work. When you create a project, Slant sets it to the first milestone and creates the tasks defined for that milestone.
As you complete milestones, the project advances through its stages. At each new milestone, Slant creates the next set of tasks automatically. This continues until the project is complete.
## Key concepts
* **Project types** — reusable templates that define the structure of a project. Each project type has a name, description, and a set of milestones. Project types can be company-wide (available to all books) or book-specific. [Learn more about project types](/activity/projects/project-types).
* **Milestones** — the stages a project moves through in sequence. Each milestone has its own set of task templates, optional form fields for collecting information, and optional outcomes that control what happens next.
* **Outcomes** — when a milestone is completed, outcomes let you route the project to different milestones or mark it complete based on the result. Without outcomes, the project moves to the next milestone in order.
* **Form fields** — custom fields attached to a milestone that collect information when the project is created or when a milestone is completed. Field types include text, long text, number, currency, date, select, yes/no, household field, and **file attachment**. Form field values can be inserted into task templates as variables.
* **Pipeline view** — a kanban-style board that shows all projects of a specific type, organized by milestone. [Learn more about the pipeline view](/activity/projects/pipeline-view).
## Project statuses
* **In progress** — the project is active and has work to do
* **Overdue** — the project has tasks past their due date
* **Completed** — all milestones are finished and the project is closed
* **Cancelled** — the project was stopped before completion
## Where projects appear
The **Projects** page is the central hub for viewing and managing projects. You can also view projects linked to a specific record from its page — clients and prospects, as well as [contacts](/records/other-contacts) and [businesses](/records/businesses), each show their projects in a **Projects** widget on the overview. A project type's **Owner kind** determines whether its projects attach to a household, a contact, or a business.
If you select **All books** from the book switcher, the **Projects** page aggregates projects across every book you can access, and you can manage each one from its detail view. See [managing projects](/activity/projects/managing-projects) for details.
## Progress tracking
Each project tracks progress at two levels:
* **Overall progress** — the percentage of all tasks across every milestone that are complete
* **Milestone progress** — the percentage of tasks in the current milestone that are complete
Progress bars appear on project cards in the list and pipeline views, showing completion status for each milestone.
## Automatic task creation
When a project enters a new milestone, Slant creates tasks from the milestone's task templates. Each task inherits:
* The template's title and description (with form field variables filled in)
* Priority, label, and assignee settings
* A due date calculated from the template's deadline offset
* Any attached files
Tasks created by a project are linked to both the project and the milestone, so you can track them from the project detail page.
## Comments
Each project has a comments section for team discussion. Add comments from the project detail page to keep context and decisions alongside the work.
## FAQ
Yes. The owner field is optional when creating a project. If no household, contact, or business is selected, you must provide a project name. You can link an owner later from the project detail page.
Existing tasks remain in your task list. When completing a project, you can optionally mark all remaining tasks as complete.
Yes. From the project detail page, you can move a project to any milestone in its project type using the milestone menu.
Any user with access to a book can create, edit, and delete projects in that book.
## Next steps
Start a new project for a client
Track progress and complete milestones
View projects on a kanban board
Configure project templates and milestones
# Pipeline view
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/projects/pipeline-view
View and manage projects on a kanban board organized by milestone.
The pipeline view displays projects as a kanban board with columns for each milestone in a project type. Use it to see at a glance where every project stands and to move projects between milestones.
## Open the pipeline view
Each Kanban view appears as a tab on the **Projects** page. Click a tab (for example, **Annual review** or **New client onboarding**) to open its board.
Every Kanban view is connected to one project type. Its columns come from that project type's milestones.
### Create a Kanban view
On the **Projects** page, click the button beside the view tabs.
Enter a view name, choose whether the view is **Book only** or **Company-wide** when that option is available, and select **Kanban** under **Layout**.
Choose the project type whose milestones should become the board's columns, then click **Create view**.
Hover over a view tab and click the button to rename the view, move it left or right, or delete it.
## How the pipeline works
Each column represents a milestone in the project type, displayed in order from left to right. Projects appear as cards in the column matching their current milestone.
Each column header shows the milestone name with a color indicator. Cards show the project name, client, assignee, and progress information.
### Compact view
Toggle between full and compact card layouts using the view mode buttons in the pipeline header. **Full** mode shows detailed progress bars for each milestone, comments count, and time in the current milestone. **Compact** mode shows only the project name, client, assignee, and a single progress bar.
## Move projects between milestones
Drag a project card from one column and drop it into another to move the project to that milestone. Slant creates tasks for the new milestone automatically, just as it would when completing a milestone through the normal flow.
For project types with **Require milestones in order** enabled, you cannot drag a project past the next milestone. Move the project through the preceding milestone first.
## Filter and search
The pipeline view has the same filter chips as the list view:
* **Status** — in progress, overdue, completed, or cancelled
* **Assignee** — a specific team member or unassigned
Click **Filter** to add additional conditions, including **Created by** to show only projects you created or that were created by a specific team member, and **Completed date** with relative operators like **Last week**, **Last month**, **Last quarter**, or **Last year**. Use the search bar to find projects by name or client name.
## Preview a project
Click a project card to open a preview panel on the right. The panel shows the project details, tasks, form responses, and comments. Click the icon in the panel header to open the full project detail page.
## FAQ
On the **Projects** page, click **Add view**, select the **Kanban** layout, and choose the project type. You can create more than one named view for a project type.
Column order matches the milestone order in the project type settings. To change the column order, reorder the milestones in the [project type configuration](/activity/projects/project-types).
Yes. Moving a project to a new milestone creates tasks for that milestone, the same as completing a milestone through the standard flow.
## Next steps
Complete milestones and track progress
Configure the milestones used as Kanban columns
# Project types
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/projects/project-types
Configure reusable project templates with milestones, tasks, outcomes, and form inputs.
Project types are reusable templates that define the structure of a [project](/activity/projects/overview). Each project type specifies the milestones a project moves through, the tasks created at each milestone, and optional outcomes and form inputs.
## Company-wide vs book-specific
Project types can apply to a single book or be shared across all books in your company:
* **Company-wide** — available to every book in the company.
* **Book-specific** — available only in that book. Any user with access to the book can manage its project types.
Any team member can manage company-wide project types and project types in books they can access.
## Access project type settings
Click the icon at the top of the **Projects** page and select **Manage project types**, or go to **Settings** → **Project types**.
Use **All owners** to show every project type, or filter the table to **Company** or a specific book.
The project types list is a table showing **Project**, **Owner**, **Milestones**, **Owner kind**, and **Active projects** for each template. The **Owner** column shows whether the template belongs to the company or a book. The **Owner kind** column shows whether its projects attach to a household, contact, or business.
## Create a project type
Click **New project type** at the top right of the project types table to choose its owner and open the **Projects library**. From there, build a project type yourself or install a ready-made one.
Choose **Company** to make the project type available to every book, or choose a book for a book-specific project type.
In **Projects library**, click **Start from scratch**. Slant creates **New project type** with one starter milestone and opens its editor with project type chat.
In **Project type chat**, describe the milestones, tasks, outcomes, form inputs, and settings you want. You can also close chat and configure the starter project type manually.
Check the editor after each change. Changes save automatically, and the status beside the project type name changes to **Saved**.
The new project type is ready to use after you finish its configuration.
### Install from the library
The **Projects library** window also offers ready-made project types you can install with a couple of clicks. Each card shows a title, a short description, and sometimes a cover image or color tint. Project types you have already installed show an **Installed** badge and can't be added again.
In the **Projects library** window, click a ready-made card. The install wizard opens.
The left side shows a read-only preview of the project type's milestones in order. This is what projects of this type will move through.
On the right, fill in any questions the project type asks — for example, **Who should handle this?**. For each, choose a person or an existing team. Admins can also click **Create a new team…** to name a team and pick its members. The **Install** button stays disabled until every question is answered.
The project type is added and you land in its editor, where you can adjust milestones, tasks, outcomes, and form inputs. Click **Back** at any point to return to the library grid.
The owner you choose from **New project type** decides the scope. Choose **Company** to make an installed project type available to every book, or choose a book to install it only in that book.
## Edit a project type
Open the three-dot menu on a project type row and choose **Edit** to open the inline editor. The editor has two panels:
* **Milestone sidebar** on the left — lists every milestone in order, with its color and a summary of its outcomes or auto-advance behavior.
* **Content tabs** on the right — switch between **Tasks**, **Outcomes**, **Form inputs**, and **Settings** for the selected milestone.
The editor also has a **Settings** sidebar pane with template-level options: the **Owner kind** picker (whether projects attach to a **Household**, **Contact**, or **Business**), an **Attachments** section, and a **Danger zone** for deleting the project type.
Changes save automatically. A status indicator at the top of the editor, beside the name and description, shows **Saving...** while a change is in flight and **Saved** once it is stored. If a required field is missing, the indicator changes to **Unsaved changes** and a toast explains what to fix. If the save itself errors out, it shows **Save failed**.
Most changes to a project type affect new projects only. Existing projects keep their current milestone structure and tasks. Removing a milestone is the exception because it can move or complete active projects.
### Edit with project type chat
Project type chat can update the project type through conversation while you keep its configuration visible.
Click **Open project type chat** beside the save status.
Enter the result you want in **Describe the changes you want…**. The chat understands the milestone and tab you are viewing, so you can refer to “this milestone” or “this tab.”
The editor refreshes after the change. Check the updated settings and continue the conversation if you need adjustments.
Use project type chat to:
* Change the project name, description, or owner kind
* Add, edit, remove, or reorder milestones
* Add, edit, remove, or reorder tasks, outcomes, and form inputs
* Copy a milestone from another project type you can access
* Add every milestone from another accessible project type to the current one
Use **New chat** to start a separate conversation. Use **Chat history** to return to an earlier conversation about the project type.
Configure project type attachments and task email prompts, email templates, and attachments in the manual editor.
Removing a milestone can move or complete active projects that currently use it. Project type chat explains the impact and asks you to confirm before removing the milestone.
### Rename or describe a project type
Click the project type name or description at the top of the editor to edit either inline.
To display projects of this type on a Kanban board, create a [pipeline view](/activity/projects/pipeline-view) from the **Projects** page.
Turn on **Require milestones in order** to prevent a project from skipping ahead by more than one milestone. Moving backward remains available.
## Work with milestones
Milestones are the stages a project moves through from start to completion. Each has its own tasks, outcomes, and optional form inputs.
### Add a milestone
In the **Milestones** sidebar header, click the button.
In the **Add milestone** window, enter a **Name**, pick a **Color**, and choose an **Auto-advance** trigger — when all tasks are completed, when a meeting is scheduled, or when a meeting is completed.
The new milestone is added to the end of the list and selected.
On the final milestone, the **All tasks completed** trigger only completes the project once every task on that milestone is closed. If no tasks have been created yet, the project waits rather than auto-completing. To finish a project with open tasks, use the **Complete** button on the milestone or the project detail menu.
### Reorder milestones
Drag the handle on a milestone in the sidebar to change its position. On smaller screens, use the **Reorder** button above the milestone picker to open a **Reorder milestones** window with drag handles. Milestone order determines the default progression sequence for projects.
### Delete a milestone
Open the milestone's **Settings** tab and click **Delete milestone** in the **Danger zone** section.
Removing a milestone moves in-flight projects to the next milestone, or marks them complete if it was the final step. A project type must always have at least one milestone.
## Configure tasks for a milestone
Select a milestone and open the **Tasks** tab. Tasks listed here are templates that will be created when a project enters this milestone.
The task editor window opens.
Each task template includes:
* **Title** and **Description** — supports variables from form inputs and household fields
* **Priority** — urgent, high, medium, or low
* **Labels** — for categorization
* **Due in** — a deadline offset from **Milestone start** or from a date form field on the current or an earlier milestone
* **Assigned** — a specific team member, team, or a field reference
* **Email prompt** and **Email template** — used when the task generates an email (optional)
* **Attachments** — files copied to the task when it is created
* **Conditions** — optional rules that decide whether the task is created
The task appears in the tasks list. The tab label shows the task count — for example, **Tasks (3)**.
To create a task only when certain details match, click the filter icon in the task editor and configure **Only create this task if...**. Conditions can use form responses from the current or an earlier milestone. Household project types can also use household fields, tags, and custom fields.
When a project enters the milestone, Slant creates the task only when every condition matches. Tasks without conditions are created normally.
Use the three-dot menu on a task row to duplicate or delete it. Drag the handle to reorder.
## Configure outcomes
Outcomes control what happens when a milestone is completed. Without outcomes, the project moves to the next milestone in order. With outcomes, the user picks the path.
Select a milestone and open the **Outcomes** tab, then click **Add outcome**.
Type the name shown to the user (for example, "Client approved" or "Needs revision").
Pick **Next milestone**, **Specific milestone**, or **Complete project**. If you choose **Specific milestone**, select which milestone from the dropdown.
Enter a comment that is pre-filled on the project when this outcome is selected.
Drag the handle on an outcome row to reorder. The three-dot menu offers **Duplicate outcome** and **Remove outcome**.
When a milestone has outcomes, the **Auto-advance** setting is replaced with "Managed by outcomes" — the outcome choice determines where the project goes next.
## Configure form inputs
Form inputs are custom fields that collect information when a project enters the milestone. Values can also be used as variables in task titles and descriptions.
Select a milestone and open the **Form inputs** tab, then click **Add field**.
Type the field name shown to the user (for example, "Account number" or "Transfer amount").
Pick the input type: text, long text, number, currency, date, select, yes/no, household field, or **file attachment**.
* For **Select**, add the options.
* For **Household field**, pick the record type: custodian account, person, trust, or address.
* For most types, you can add a **Placeholder**.
Required fields must be filled before the milestone can be completed.
Drag the handle on a field to reorder.
Click **Preview** above the form inputs list to see how the form will appear to users on a live project.
### File attachment fields
A **File attachment** field renders an **Upload file** button on project forms. Uploaded files are stored in the household's connected storage (Google Drive, OneDrive, etc.) and also appear in the household's **Files** section.
The project's household must have a linked storage folder — otherwise the upload is disabled with a gating message. Files are limited to 10 MB, and allowed types are PDF, DOCX, TXT, CSV, XLSX, XLS, PNG, JPEG, and GIF.
## Duplicate a project type
From the project types table, open a template's three-dot menu and choose **Duplicate**. Slant creates the copy in the same scope as the original: company-wide templates stay in **Company**, and book-specific templates stay in that book. The copy includes all milestones, tasks, outcomes, and form inputs.
Duplicating does not move a template between the company and a book.
## Delete a project type
From the project types table, open the three-dot menu and choose **Delete**. You must type the project type's name to confirm.
Deleting a company-wide project type removes it and all associated projects for every book in the company. This cannot be undone.
You cannot delete a project type that has active projects (in progress or overdue). Complete or cancel all active projects first.
## FAQ
Use **All owners** on the project types list, or filter to **Company**. Company-owned project types are available across every book in the company.
Any team member can edit company-wide project types. Book-specific project types are available to team members with access to that book.
Duplicating a company-wide project type creates another company-wide template. To create a book-specific version, click **New project type**, choose the book, and reproduce the settings you need.
Existing projects are not affected. The new milestone only applies to projects created after the change.
Yes. Those projects are automatically moved to the next available milestone, or completed if it was the final step.
There is no fixed limit. Each project type requires at least one milestone.
## Next steps
Start a new project using a project type
View projects on a kanban board by milestone
# Creating tasks
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/tasks/creating-tasks
Create and assign tasks from the tasks page, a record's page, or with a keyboard shortcut.
Tasks can be created manually at any time, or automatically from [meeting](/activity/meetings/overview) transcripts, [email threads](/records/households/email#generate-follow-up-tasks-from-a-thread), [sequences](/platform/sequences/overview), [projects](/activity/projects/overview), and [automations](/platform/automations/overview).
Tasks suggested by AI — for example, from an email thread — are created as suggestions. You must click **Accept** on each one before it joins your task list.
## Create a task
Click **+ New task** on the **Tasks** page, or press `c` then `t` from anywhere in Slant.
Type a clear, action-oriented name for the task. The title supports @mentions to reference team members or records.
Provide detailed instructions or context. The description supports rich text formatting and @mentions. To insert a table, use the table button in the toolbar or type `/` and select **Table** from the menu. You can paste screenshots and images directly into the description.
Use the toolbar buttons to configure:
* **Priority** — urgent, high, medium, or low
* **Label** — a color-coded [task label](/account-settings/customization/labels-and-tags)
* **Assigned** — a team member, team, or user reference field
* **Relationship** — link to a client, prospect, other contact, or business
* **Due date** — an all-day or specific-time deadline
The task is created and assigned. The assignee and collaborators receive a notification.
## Create a task from a record
On any client, prospect, other contact, or business page, click **Add task** in the header. The task is automatically linked to that record.
## Create a task from an email thread
Open any email thread on a client, prospect, or other contact, scroll to the **Tasks** section, and click **Add task** in the section header. The create-task form opens with the email thread already attached, so the task lands in the thread alongside any AI-generated suggestions. See [generate follow-up tasks from a thread](/records/households/email#generate-follow-up-tasks-from-a-thread) for the AI workflow.
## Apply a template
If your team has set up [task templates](/activity/tasks/task-templates), click the icon in the footer of the creation form. Select a template to pre-fill the title, description, priority, label, assignee, and deadline.
## Set up recurrence
Click the icon in the footer to make the task [recurring](/activity/tasks/recurring-tasks). Configure the first due date, repeat interval (1--12), unit (days, weeks, or months), and an optional **Until** end date.
When recurrence is enabled, the due date is set in the recurrence configuration instead of the due date selector.
## Make a task private
By default, every task is **Visible to everyone** in the book. To restrict who can see it, click the icon in the footer to mark the task as **Private**.
Private tasks are visible only to:
* The creator
* The assignee — or every member of the assigned team
* Collaborators
Hover the lock icon on a private task to see the exact list of users who can see it. You can flip the setting later from the **Visibility** row in the task side panel.
Admins do not automatically see private tasks. They must be the creator, assignee, or a collaborator.
## Collaborators
Add collaborators using the **+** button in the top-right corner of the creation form. Collaborators receive notifications when the task is updated. The assignee is automatically added as a collaborator.
## Attachments
Click the icon in the footer to attach files. Tasks support up to 20 attachments, 10 MB each. You can either:
* **Upload file** — pick a file from your computer (PDF, DOCX, TXT, CSV, XLSX, XLS, PNG, JPEG, or GIF).
* **Attach from \[provider]** — open the file picker for your connected [file storage](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage) provider and link a file. Slant stores the link; the file stays in your storage.
## Create more
Toggle **Create more** in the footer to keep the form open after creating a task. The relationship is preserved between tasks so you can quickly create multiple tasks for the same record.
## Pin the form
Click the icon in the top-right corner of the form to keep it open while you navigate. This lets you reference other pages while filling in task details.
## FAQ
Yes. If you have access to multiple books, a book selector appears in the creation form. Select the target book before creating the task.
All members of the team receive a notification. The task appears in each team member's task list when filtered by assignee.
Press `Cmd + Enter` (Mac) or `Ctrl + Enter` (Windows) to create the task without clicking the button.
## Next steps
Edit, complete, and organize tasks
Set up tasks that repeat on a schedule
Create reusable task templates
# Managing tasks
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/tasks/managing-tasks
Edit task details, complete tasks, add comments, and perform bulk actions.
Click any task on the **Tasks** page to open it in a detail panel. From there you can edit properties, add comments, and manage the task lifecycle.
## Edit a task
The detail panel has two tabs: **Overview** and **Comments**. The **Overview** tab displays all editable properties:
* **Title** — click the title text to edit inline
* **Description** — click the description area to edit inline. To insert a table, type `/` and select **Table** from the menu. You can paste screenshots and images directly into the description.
* **Priority** — select urgent, high, medium, or low
* **Visibility** — choose **Visible to everyone** or **Private**. See [task visibility](#change-task-visibility) below.
* **Label** — choose a color-coded [task label](/account-settings/customization/labels-and-tags)
* **Assigned to** — change the responsible team member or team
* **Relationship** — link to a different client, prospect, other contact, or business
* **Due date** — pick a new date or clear it. Select a time to set a specific-time deadline instead of all-day.
* **Project** — click **+ Add to project** to link the task to a [project](/activity/projects/overview) and optionally a milestone. Click the project name to change or remove it.
* **Related records** — click **+ Add record** to link to other records in Slant
* **Attachments** — click **+ Add attachment** to attach files (up to 20 per task, 10 MB each)
Changes save automatically.
## Complete a task
Click the checkbox next to the task title — either in the task list or in the detail panel.
To mark a completed task as incomplete, click the checkbox again.
## AI-generated tasks
Tasks created by Slant — for example, from a meeting transcript or an email thread — show a small badge next to the title once they've been accepted into your task list. Hover the badge to see **Generated by AI**.
The badge only appears after a suggested task has been accepted. You can accept or reject a pending suggestion on the source record, or by opening it in the task detail panel, which shows **Accept** and **Reject** buttons at the top. **Accept** moves the task to your to-do list; **Reject** declines it.
To review several recommendations together, select pending task cards and use the sticky selection bar to **Accept** or **Reject** them in bulk. Only pending recommendations can be selected for these actions.
## Add a comment
Open the task and switch to the **Comments** tab. Type your comment and submit it. Attach files with the upload button or paste images into the comment. Comments are visible to all collaborators on the task.
## Manage collaborators
Collaborators receive notifications when a task is updated. To add or remove collaborators, click the icon in the top-right corner of the detail panel.
The assignee is automatically added as a collaborator.
## Change task visibility
The **Visibility** row in the side panel controls who can see the task. Click the value to switch between:
* **Visible to everyone** — anyone in the book can see the task. This is the default.
* **Private** — only the creator, the assignee (or every member of the assigned team), and collaborators can see the task.
Admins do not automatically see private tasks. They must be the creator, assignee, or a collaborator. Private tasks are also hidden from search, household and contact tabs, and the public API for users without access.
## Make an existing task recurring
You can convert any existing task into a [recurring task](/activity/tasks/recurring-tasks) from the detail panel.
Click the task to open the detail panel.
In the **Repeats** row, click **+ Make recurring**.
Choose the due date, repeat interval (1--12), unit (days, weeks, or months), and an optional **Until** end date. Click **Make recurring** to confirm.
The task becomes the first in the series. Future tasks are scheduled automatically.
## Stop a recurring task
If a task is part of a recurring series, the **Repeats** row shows the recurrence schedule and when the next task is due. Hover over the recurrence badge and click the icon, then confirm by clicking **Stop repeating**.
Existing tasks in the series are not affected — only future tasks stop being created.
## Delete a task
Click the task to open it.
Click the **...** menu in the top-right corner.
Confirm the deletion.
Deleting a task is permanent and cannot be undone.
## Bulk actions
Press `Shift` to toggle multi-select mode, then click tasks to select them. The selection bar at the bottom of the page lets you:
* **Mark complete** or **Mark as incomplete** — toggle the status of selected tasks
* **Assigned to** — reassign all selected tasks to a different user or team, or unassign them
* **Priority** — set a new priority for all selected tasks
* **Label** — apply or clear a label on all selected tasks
* **Update due date** — set or clear a due date for all selected tasks
* **Delete** — permanently delete all selected tasks. You must type a confirmation phrase like `DELETE 5 TASKS` (uppercase, with the count and record name) before the delete button enables.
Press `Escape` to exit multi-select mode.
## Filter tasks on a client or prospect
The **Tasks** tab on a [client](/records/clients/overview) or [prospect](/records/prospects) record has its own filters for narrowing that household's task list.
Two filter chips are always available:
* **Assigned to** — pick one or more of **Current user**, **Unassigned**, individual team members, or teams
* **Project** — pick one of the household's [projects](/activity/projects/overview), or **Not related to a project** to show only tasks that aren't linked to one
Click **Filter** to add more conditions: **Priority**, **Label**, **Due date**, and **Collaborator**. Click the icon to search the household's tasks by title.
When nothing matches, the tab shows **No tasks found** with the message "No tasks match the selected filters." Click **Clear filters** to reset the filters and search at once.
These filters apply only to the household's task list and are not saved. They reset when you reload the page or return to the record. The **Tasks** tab on [other contacts](/records/other-contacts) and [businesses](/records/businesses) has search but no filter chips.
## FAQ
Yes. Use the up and down arrows at the top of the detail panel to move to the previous or next task. The counter shows your position (e.g., "1 of 25").
The assignee and all collaborators receive notifications when the task is updated, completed, or reassigned.
Yes. Click the checkbox again to mark the task as incomplete. The completion timestamp is cleared.
## Next steps
Create and assign new tasks
Set up tasks that repeat on a schedule
Manage task labels
# Tasks overview
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/tasks/overview
Track follow-ups, deadlines, and client activities with tasks in Slant.
Tasks are action items you create, assign, and track across your practice. Use them to manage client follow-ups, project deliverables, team responsibilities, and day-to-day operations.
## Where tasks appear
The **Tasks** page is the central hub for all tasks in your book. You can also view and create tasks from:
* **Client, prospect, other contact, and business pages** — the **Tasks** tab shows tasks linked to that record
* **Projects** — tasks are created automatically from milestone templates when a project enters a milestone
Tasks are also created automatically by [sequences](/platform/sequences/overview), [automations](/platform/automations/overview), [meeting](/activity/meetings/overview) transcripts (as AI-recommended action items), and the AI assistant.
## Task properties
Each task includes the following fields:
* **Title** — a short name for the task (required). Supports @mentions to reference team members or records.
* **Description** — detailed instructions or context. Supports rich text and @mentions.
* **Due date** — optional deadline, set as all-day or a specific time
* **Priority** — urgent, high, medium, or low
* **Label** — a color-coded [task label](/account-settings/customization/labels-and-tags) for categorization and filtering
* **Assigned to** — the team member or team responsible for completing the task
* **Relationship** — link to a client, prospect, other contact, or business
* **Collaborators** — additional team members who receive notifications when the task is updated
* **Related records** — references to other records in Slant via @mentions
* **Project** — link to a [project](/activity/projects/overview) and optionally a milestone
* **Attachments** — files attached to the task (up to 20 files, 10 MB each). Accepted types: PDF, DOCX, TXT, CSV, XLSX, XLS, PNG, JPEG, and GIF.
* **Comments** — threaded discussion on the task
## Task statuses
* **To do** — active tasks that need attention
* **Done** — completed tasks. Shows who completed the task and when.
* **Pending** — tasks recommended by AI from [meeting](/activity/meetings/overview) transcripts that need the assignee's approval before appearing in the task list. The assignee can accept or reject one task, or select several pending recommendations and use the bulk **Accept** or **Reject** actions.
* **Rejected** — tasks that were declined by the assignee. Can be undone to return the task to pending.
Pending and rejected tasks don't appear in the main task list. When you have pending or rejected tasks, a count appears in the top-right corner of the **Tasks** page. Click it to review them.
## Views
The **Tasks** page includes two built-in views: **All tasks** and **My tasks**. Switch between views using the tabs at the top of the page, or create a custom view with the **+** button. Each view saves its own filters, sort order, and grouping.
## Filtering
Use the quick filter chips at the top of the task list to filter by:
* **Assigned to** — a specific user or team
* **Priority** — urgent, high, medium, or low
* **Label** — a specific task label
* **Project** — tasks linked to a specific project
* **Recurring** — recurring or non-recurring tasks
When you set the **Project** filter, a **Milestone** filter becomes available, scoped to the selected project types. It's multi-select, and options display as `{Project type title} · {Milestone title}`.
For more advanced filtering, click **Filter** to combine multiple conditions across fields like status, due date, household type, collaborator, and book.
## Sorting
Click the sort button in the toolbar to change the task order:
* **Due today** — tasks due soonest first (default)
* **Most overdue** — most overdue tasks first
* **Highest priority** — urgent tasks first, then high, medium, low
* **Lowest priority** — low-priority tasks first
* **Alphabetical** — sorted by title
## Grouping
On the **Tasks** page, tasks are grouped by due date into sections: **Today**, **This week**, **After this week**, **No due date**, and **Done**.
When viewing tasks on a client, prospect, other contact, or business page, you can change the grouping to organize tasks by:
* **Due date** — groups by when tasks are due (default)
* **Assignee** — groups by who the task is assigned to
* **Creation date** — groups by when tasks were created
* **Created by** — groups by who created the task
You can also toggle whether completed tasks are visible.
## Search
Type in the search bar to find tasks by title or description. Results update as you type.
## Multi-select and bulk actions
Press `Shift` to toggle multi-select mode. Click tasks to select them, then use the selection bar to:
* **Mark complete** or **mark as incomplete**
* **Change the assignee** — reassign to a different user or team
* **Update priority** — set a new priority level
* **Update label** — apply or clear a label
* **Update due date** — set or clear a due date
* **Delete** — permanently delete selected tasks
After clicking **Delete** in the selection bar, a confirmation prompt asks you to type `DELETE N TASKS` (uppercase, where `N` is the actual count of selected tasks). The **Delete** button stays disabled until the phrase matches exactly.
Press `Escape` to exit multi-select mode.
## Recurring tasks
Set up tasks that repeat automatically on a daily, weekly, or monthly schedule. Each repeat is a separate task linked to the series. [Learn more about recurring tasks](/activity/tasks/recurring-tasks).
## Task templates
Create reusable templates for common tasks to pre-fill the title, description, priority, label, assignee, and deadline offset. Templates can be company-wide or book-specific. [Learn more about task templates](/activity/tasks/task-templates).
## Keyboard shortcuts
| Shortcut | Action |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------ |
| `c` then `t` | Create a new task from anywhere |
| `g` then `t` | Go to the tasks page |
| `Shift` | Toggle multi-select mode on the tasks page |
## Next steps
Create and assign new tasks
Edit, complete, and organize tasks
Set up tasks that repeat on a schedule
Create reusable task templates
# Recurring tasks
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/tasks/recurring-tasks
Set up tasks that repeat on a schedule using days, weeks, or months.
Recurring tasks automatically create new tasks on a schedule. Use them for regular check-ins, periodic reviews, and other repeating activities.
## How recurring tasks work
When you create a recurring task, an initial task is created immediately. After each task is completed, the next one is automatically scheduled based on the interval you set. Each repeat is a separate, standalone task linked to the recurrence series. The recurrence continues until you stop it, or until an optional **Until** end date is reached.
## Create a recurring task
Click **+ New task** on the **Tasks** page, or press `c` then `t`.
Enter the title, description, and other properties.
Click the icon in the footer of the form.
Configure the recurrence:
* **First due** — the date the first task is due
* **Repeats every** — a number from 1 to 12 and a unit: days, weeks, or months
* **Monthly pattern** — for monthly schedules, choose **Calendar day** or **Day of week**. **Day of week** supports **First**, **Second**, **Third**, **Fourth**, or **Last** plus a weekday.
* **Until** — an optional end date. Click the date to open the popover and pick a day; dates before the start are disabled. Click **Clear end date** to remove it.
The first task is created and future tasks are scheduled.
When recurrence is enabled, the due date is set in the recurrence configuration instead of the standard due date selector.
## Make an existing task recurring
You can convert any existing task into a recurring task from the detail panel.
Click the task to open the detail panel.
In the **Repeats** row, click **+ Make recurring**.
Choose the due date, repeat interval (1–12), unit, monthly pattern when applicable, and an optional **Until** end date. Click **Make recurring** to confirm.
The task becomes the first in the series. Future tasks are scheduled automatically.
## Apply changes to the series
When you edit a recurring task's title, description, assignee, priority, label, or relationship, those changes only apply to that specific task. To update all future tasks in the series, you must apply the changes to the recurring template:
Make your changes in the detail panel.
An **Apply** button appears in the **Repeats** row when the task differs from the recurring template. Click it to update the template and all future tasks.
## Edit the repeat schedule
Change how often a task repeats at any time. Only future occurrences follow the new schedule — tasks already in your task list keep their due dates.
Click the task to open the detail panel.
In the **Repeats** row, click the badge (for example, **Every 2 weeks**) to open **Edit repeating cadence**.
Change any of:
* **Starts** — the date the schedule begins
* **Repeats every** — a number from 1 to 12 and a unit: days, weeks, or months
* **Monthly pattern** — **Calendar day** or **Day of week**, such as the first Monday or last Friday
* **Until** — an optional end date. Click the date to pick a day; dates before the start are disabled. Click **Clear end date** to repeat with no end date.
A **Repeating cadence updated** confirmation appears, and future tasks follow the new schedule.
Editing the schedule doesn't move tasks already in your task list — they keep their original due dates. Future occurrences, including the next one waiting to be created, use the new schedule.
## Stop a recurring task
The recurrence badge has two parts: click the badge itself to open **Edit repeating cadence**, or click the icon to stop the recurrence.
To stop future tasks from being created, click the icon on the recurrence badge in the detail panel, then confirm by clicking **Stop repeating**.
Existing tasks in the series are not affected — only future tasks stop being created. The recurrence badge updates to show the stopped date.
## Filter recurring tasks
On the **Tasks** page, click **Filter** and add **Recurring** to show recurring or non-recurring tasks.
Stopping a recurrence can't be undone — to repeat the task again, you'll need to set up a new recurrence.
## FAQ
No. Once a recurrence is stopped, it cannot be restarted. Create a new recurring task instead.
Yes. Click the recurrence badge on the task and adjust the schedule in **Edit repeating cadence**. Tasks already in your task list keep their dates — future occurrences follow the new schedule.
Only that specific task is deleted. The recurrence series continues and future tasks are still created.
Title, description, assignee, priority, label, and relationship. Click **Apply** in the **Repeats** row to update the recurring template and all future tasks. Due date changes cannot be applied to the series since each task has its own scheduled date.
## Next steps
Create and assign tasks
Create reusable task templates
# Task templates
Source: https://docs.slant.app/activity/tasks/task-templates
Create reusable templates for common tasks to ensure consistency across your practice.
Task templates let you define standardized tasks once and reuse them when creating new tasks. Templates pre-fill the title, description, priority, label, assignee, deadline, and attachments.
## Where templates are used
| Location | How it works |
| ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Task creation form** | Click the icon in the footer to apply a template |
| **Project milestones** | Tasks are created automatically from milestone templates when a project enters a milestone |
| **Automations** | The [create task action](/platform/automations/actions) uses templates to define task properties |
## Create a template from settings
Any user can create company-wide or book-specific templates.
Go to **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Task templates**.
Select the **Company** tab for templates available to all books, or select a specific book tab for templates available only in that book.
Fill in the template fields:
* **Title** — the default task name
* **Description** — instructions or context (supports rich text, including tables)
* **Due in** — how long after creation the task is due. The due date is optional: choose **No due date** and tasks created from the template will have no due date. Otherwise pick a preset (**Same day**, **1 day**, **1 week**, and so on) or set a custom value in days, weeks, months, or years
* **Assigned** — a specific user, a team, or a user reference field on the household
* **Priority** — urgent, high, medium, or low
* **Label** — a color-coded [task label](/account-settings/customization/labels-and-tags)
* **Attachments** — files included with every task created from the template
The template is available immediately when creating tasks.
Click **Insert table** in the description editor footer to add a table. Hover over any row or column to reveal a menu for inserting rows and columns or deleting them.
**No due date** applies everywhere a template is used — manual task creation, project milestones, sequence steps, and recurring tasks. Tasks created from a no-due-date template have no due date.
## Convert an existing task to a template
Only admins can convert tasks to templates.
On the **Tasks** page, click the **...** menu on the task row.
The template creation form opens, pre-filled with the task's title, description, priority, assignee, and attachments.
Adjust any fields and click **Create**.
## Apply a template when creating a task
Click **+ New task** or press `c` then `t`.
In the footer of the form, click the icon to open the template picker.
Search for and select the template you want to apply. The form is pre-filled with the template values.
Modify any values as needed, then click **Create**.
## Template fields
Templates can pre-fill the title, description, priority, label, deadline, and assignee.
### Assignee options
Templates support three types of assignment:
* **Specific user** — always assigned to a particular team member
* **Team** — assigned to a team, notifying all members
* **User reference field** — dynamically assigned based on a user-reference [custom field](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields) on the household (e.g., the household's primary advisor)
Only one assignment type can be set per template.
## Company vs book templates
* **Company templates** are available across all books. Any user can create, edit, or delete them.
* **Book templates** are available only in a specific book. Any user can create them.
## Templates in projects
[Project types](/activity/projects/project-types) contain milestones, and each milestone can have task templates. When a project enters a milestone, tasks are created from each template automatically. Due dates are calculated from the milestone start date plus the template's deadline. If a template has **No due date**, tasks created from it in a project have no due date.
Editing a template does not change tasks that were already created from it.
## FAQ
Yes. Book-specific templates can be cloned to other books or to the company level from the template settings page.
Templates support the same file types as tasks: PDF, DOCX, TXT, CSV, XLSX, XLS, PNG, JPEG, and GIF. Up to 20 files, 10 MB each.
Yes. Any user can create, edit, delete, and apply company-wide templates.
## Next steps
Create and assign tasks
Configure project types with milestones and tasks
Manage task labels
# Get an automation
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/automations/get-an-automation
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/automations/{id}
Retrieve an automation by ID
# List automations
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/automations/list-automations
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/automations
List all automations. Optionally filter by book_id to scope to a specific book.
# Get a book
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/books/get-a-book
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/books/{id}
Retrieve a book by ID
# List books
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/books/list-books
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/books
List all books the authenticated user has access to
# Add tags to business
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/businesses/add-tags-to-business
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/businesses/{business_id}/tags
Add tags to an existing business. Tags are merged with existing tags (additive operation).
# Create a business
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/businesses/create-a-business
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/businesses
Create a new business
# Get a business
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/businesses/get-a-business
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/businesses/{id}
Retrieve a business by ID
# List businesses
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/businesses/list-businesses
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/businesses
List all businesses. Supports filtering by book_id, name, and updated_since.
# Remove a tag from business
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/businesses/remove-a-tag-from-business
/api-reference/openapi.yaml delete /v1/businesses/{business_id}/tags/{id}
Remove a specific tag from a business by tag ID.
# Update a business
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/businesses/update-a-business
/api-reference/openapi.yaml patch /v1/businesses/{id}
Update an existing business
# Create a client
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/clients/create-a-client
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/clients
Creates a new client household with head of household information
# Add tags to contact
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/contacts/add-tags-to-contact
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/contacts/{contact_id}/tags
Add tags to an existing contact. Tags are merged with existing tags (additive operation).
# Create a contact
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/contacts/create-a-contact
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/contacts
Create a new contact
# Get a contact
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/contacts/get-a-contact
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/contacts/{id}
Retrieve a contact by ID
# List contacts
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/contacts/list-contacts
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/contacts
List all contacts. Supports filtering by book_id, email, phone, and name.
# Remove a tag from contact
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/contacts/remove-a-tag-from-contact
/api-reference/openapi.yaml delete /v1/contacts/{contact_id}/tags/{id}
Remove a specific tag from a contact by tag ID.
# Update a contact
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/contacts/update-a-contact
/api-reference/openapi.yaml patch /v1/contacts/{id}
Update a contact. Currently supports updating custom field values.
# Create a custom_field
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/custom-fields/create-a-custom_field
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/custom_fields
Create a new custom field. book_id is accepted for backwards compatibility but ignored.
# Get a custom_field
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/custom-fields/get-a-custom_field
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/custom_fields/{id}
Retrieve a custom field by ID
# List custom_fields
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/custom-fields/list-custom_fields
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/custom_fields
List all custom fields. book_id is accepted for backwards compatibility but ignored.
# Add tags to household
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/households/add-tags-to-household
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/households/{household_id}/tags
Add tags to an existing household. Tags are merged with existing tags (additive operation).
# Create a household
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/households/create-a-household
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/households
Create a new household (Client or Prospect). Requires a `type` parameter to specify the household type. Client households require at least one contact method (email or phone). Client-only fields (tier, became_client_at) are silently ignored when creating a Prospect. Creating a household does not deduplicate or merge by email; search by exact email first if you need sync-style upsert behavior.
# Get a household
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/households/get-a-household
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/households/{id}
Retrieve a household (Client or Prospect) by ID
# List all households
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/households/list-all-households
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/households
List all households (Clients and Prospects). Supports filtering by book id, household type, updated_since timestamp, email, and phone.
# Remove a tag from household
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/households/remove-a-tag-from-household
/api-reference/openapi.yaml delete /v1/households/{household_id}/tags/{id}
Remove a specific tag from a household by tag ID.
# Update a household
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/households/update-a-household
/api-reference/openapi.yaml patch /v1/households/{id}
Update a household's name, tier, or became_client_at. Client-only fields (tier, became_client_at) are silently ignored when updating a Prospect.
# Get household profile image
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/images/get-household-profile-image
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /images/households/{id}
Redirects to a signed URL for the household profile image. This is a public endpoint that does not require authentication.
# List intake_forms
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/intake-forms/list-intake_forms
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/intake_forms
List published client intake forms available to send. Optionally filter by book_id.
# Send an intake form
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/intake-forms/send-an-intake-form
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/intake_form_invitations
Send a published client intake form to a client or prospect household.
# Create a meeting
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/meetings/create-a-meeting
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/meetings
Create a new meeting. Only past meetings can be logged via the API.
# Get a meeting
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/meetings/get-a-meeting
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/meetings/{id}
Retrieve a meeting by ID
# Get a meeting transcript
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/meetings/get-a-meeting-transcript
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/meetings/{meeting_id}/transcript
Retrieve the transcript for a meeting. The transcript field is null when the meeting has no transcript. When present, transcript is a structured array of text segments with timestamps and participant names.
# List meetings
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/meetings/list-meetings
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/meetings
List all meetings. Optionally filter by book_id to scope to a specific book.
# Update a meeting
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/meetings/update-a-meeting
/api-reference/openapi.yaml patch /v1/meetings/{id}
Update an existing meeting. Only the provided fields are changed.
# Create a note
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/notes/create-a-note
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/households/{household_id}/notes
Create a new note for a household. Notes use a wrapped body; the required field is note.content: { "note": { "content": "..." } }.
# Get a note
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/notes/get-a-note
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/households/{household_id}/notes/{id}
Retrieve a note by ID
# List notes
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/notes/list-notes
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/households/{household_id}/notes
List all notes for a household
# Update a note
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/notes/update-a-note
/api-reference/openapi.yaml patch /v1/households/{household_id}/notes/{id}
Update a note. Only provided fields change; tag_ids and references replace their complete sets.
# Create an opportunity
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/opportunities/create-an-opportunity
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/households/{household_id}/opportunities
Create a new opportunity for a household
# Create an opportunity
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/opportunities/create-an-opportunity-1
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/opportunities
Create a new opportunity
# Get an opportunity
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/opportunities/get-an-opportunity
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/households/{household_id}/opportunities/{id}
Retrieve an opportunity by ID
# Get an opportunity
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/opportunities/get-an-opportunity-1
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/opportunities/{id}
Retrieve an opportunity by ID
# List opportunities
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/opportunities/list-opportunities
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/households/{household_id}/opportunities
List all opportunities for a household
# List opportunities
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/opportunities/list-opportunities-1
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/opportunities
List all opportunities. Optionally filter by book_id, pipeline_type, pipeline_id, pipeline_stage_id, or household_id
# Update an opportunity
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/opportunities/update-an-opportunity
/api-reference/openapi.yaml patch /v1/households/{household_id}/opportunities/{id}
Update an existing opportunity for a household. To move stages, set pipeline_stage_id. The stage must belong to the opportunity pipeline; PATCH does not accept pipeline_id. There is no cross-pipeline move endpoint; create a new opportunity in the target pipeline.
# Update an opportunity
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/opportunities/update-an-opportunity-1
/api-reference/openapi.yaml patch /v1/opportunities/{id}
Update an existing opportunity. To move stages, set pipeline_stage_id. The stage must belong to the opportunity pipeline; PATCH does not accept pipeline_id. There is no cross-pipeline move endpoint; create a new opportunity in the target pipeline.
# Overview
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/overview
Authenticating and using the Slant public API
The Slant public API lets you read and manage CRM records (households, people, tasks, meetings, and more) from outside the app.
## Base URL
```
https://api.slant.app/v1
```
## Authentication
Every request must include an `Authorization` header using the `Bearer` scheme:
```
Authorization: Bearer slnt_pat_
```
Tokens are issued from the [API connections settings page](/account-settings/api-tokens) on the **API** tab. Personal access tokens are **read-only by default**. To enable write access for a token, click **Enable write access** from the API token row and explain how you plan to use it. Write access is enabled immediately. Use `/v1/me` to check whether the current token can write.
## Quickstart
Verify your token with a request to `/v1/me`, which returns the currently authenticated user:
```bash theme={null}
curl https://api.slant.app/v1/me \
-H "Authorization: Bearer slnt_pat_..."
```
```json theme={null}
{
"id": "abc123xyz",
"email": "you@example.com",
"first_name": "Jane",
"last_name": "Doe",
"api_access": {
"auth_type": "personal_access_token",
"scope": "read_write",
"can_write": true
}
}
```
## Rate limits
Every request is checked against three buckets. Each bucket uses a fixed one-hour window that begins with its first request. The strictest bucket wins, and exceeded requests return `429 Too Many Requests`.
| Bucket | Personal access token | OAuth app (default) |
| --------------------- | --------------------- | ------------------- |
| Per token / per user | 1,000 req / hr | 500 req / hr |
| Per company / per app | 10,000 req / hr | 1,000 req / hr |
| Per IP | 10,000 req / hr | 10,000 req / hr |
When you exceed a limit, use the `Retry-After` response header to determine how many seconds to wait before retrying. The response body identifies the limit that was exceeded:
```json theme={null}
{
"error": "Too Many Requests",
"status": 429,
"detail": "This API client is limited to 500 requests per hour."
}
```
## Idempotency
Safely retry `POST` and `PATCH` requests by including an `Idempotency-Key` header with a unique value (a UUID works well):
```bash theme={null}
curl -X POST https://api.slant.app/v1/prospects \
-H "Authorization: Bearer slnt_pat_..." \
-H "Idempotency-Key: 550e8400-e29b-41d4-a716-446655440000" \
-H "Content-Type: application/json" \
-d '{ "book_id": "...", "first_name": "Jane", "last_name": "Doe" }'
```
A repeated request with the same key and body returns the cached response instead of creating a duplicate. Keys live for **1 hour by default** and are scoped per endpoint — the same key on a different path creates a fresh record. `5xx` responses are never cached, so retries after a server error always re-execute.
## Request format
Requests with a body (`POST`, `PUT`, `PATCH`) must include `Content-Type: application/json`. Without it, the body is ignored and your fields come through empty. A malformed JSON body returns `400 invalid_json`.
## Conventions
* **Pagination** — list endpoints accept `page` (default 1) and `per_page` (default 25, max 100). Responses include `{ data: [...], pagination: { current_page, total_pages, total_count, per_page } }`.
* **IDs** — all IDs are opaque strings. Use them as-is.
* **Book scoping** — most endpoints accept an optional `book_id` query parameter. A "book" is an advisor's workspace. Use `GET /v1/books` to list the books your token can see.
* **Request bodies** — write endpoints use unwrapped JSON objects unless a specific endpoint says otherwise. Notes are a wrapped-body exception.
* **PATCH fields** — PATCH endpoints document their own request fields. Do not assume every POST field is accepted on PATCH.
* **Enum casing** — enum casing varies by endpoint. Use the exact case shown in each endpoint's request schema or example.
* **Timestamp filters** — filters such as `updated_since` use ISO 8601 timestamps, for example `2026-05-06T12:00:00Z`, not Unix seconds.
* **Filter matching** — email filters are exact matches after email normalization. Phone filters are exact E.164 matches. Name filters are prefix/full-text name matches, not arbitrary substring searches.
* **Assignment** — `assigned_to_id` should be a user ID from the relevant book's `GET /v1/books` `users[].id` list. Tasks and projects also accept `assigned_team_id` from that book's `teams[].id` list. User and team assignments are mutually exclusive; setting either one clears the other.
* **Deletes** — the v1 API does not expose DELETE for top-level CRM records. Use resource-specific lifecycle fields where available.
* **Errors** — `{ "error": "", "detail": "" }` with the appropriate HTTP status.
# Create a person
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/people/create-a-person
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/households/{household_id}/people
Create a new person in a household
# Create a phone number for a person
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/people/create-a-phone-number-for-a-person
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/people/{person_id}/phone_numbers
Add a new phone number to an existing person
# Create an address for a person
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/people/create-an-address-for-a-person
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/people/{person_id}/addresses
Add a new address to an existing person
# Create an email address for a person
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/people/create-an-email-address-for-a-person
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/people/{person_id}/email_addresses
Add a new email address to an existing person
# Create an employment for a person
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/people/create-an-employment-for-a-person
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/people/{person_id}/employments
Add a new employment record to an existing person
# Delete a phone number
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/people/delete-a-phone-number
/api-reference/openapi.yaml delete /v1/people/{person_id}/phone_numbers/{id}
Delete a phone number from a person
# Delete an address
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/people/delete-an-address
/api-reference/openapi.yaml delete /v1/people/{person_id}/addresses/{id}
Delete an address from a person
# Delete an email address
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/people/delete-an-email-address
/api-reference/openapi.yaml delete /v1/people/{person_id}/email_addresses/{id}
Delete an email address from a person
# Delete an employment
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/people/delete-an-employment
/api-reference/openapi.yaml delete /v1/people/{person_id}/employments/{id}
Delete an employment record from a person
# Get a person
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/people/get-a-person
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/people/{id}
Retrieve a person by ID
# List people
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/people/list-people
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/households/{household_id}/people
List all people in a household
# List people
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/people/list-people-1
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/people
List all people across clients, prospects, and contacts. Supports filtering by role_type, email, phone, and name.
# Update a person
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/people/update-a-person
/api-reference/openapi.yaml patch /v1/people/{id}
Update a person
# Update a phone number
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/people/update-a-phone-number
/api-reference/openapi.yaml patch /v1/people/{person_id}/phone_numbers/{id}
Update an existing phone number for a person
# Update an address
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/people/update-an-address
/api-reference/openapi.yaml patch /v1/people/{person_id}/addresses/{id}
Update an existing address for a person
# Update an email address
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/people/update-an-email-address
/api-reference/openapi.yaml patch /v1/people/{person_id}/email_addresses/{id}
Update an existing email address for a person
# Update an employment
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/people/update-an-employment
/api-reference/openapi.yaml patch /v1/people/{person_id}/employments/{id}
Update an existing employment record for a person
# Get a pipeline
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/pipelines/get-a-pipeline
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/pipelines/{id}
Retrieve a pipeline by ID. Pipeline stages are returned in order and include stage_order, visible, and default_probability.
# List pipelines
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/pipelines/list-pipelines
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/pipelines
List all pipelines. Optionally filter by book_id to scope to a specific book. Pipeline stages are returned in order and include stage_order, visible, and default_probability.
# Get a project template
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/project-templates/get-a-project-template
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/project_templates/{id}
Retrieve a project template by ID, including milestones, outcomes, and form fields.
# List project templates
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/project-templates/list-project-templates
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/project_templates
List project templates. Optionally filter by book_id to return templates usable for a specific book, including company-wide templates.
# Create a project
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/projects/create-a-project
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/projects
Create a new project from a known project template.
# Get a project
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/projects/get-a-project
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/projects/{id}
Retrieve a project by ID.
# List projects
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/projects/list-projects
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/projects
List active projects. Pass include_inactive=true or a status filter to include completed or cancelled projects.
# Update a project
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/projects/update-a-project
/api-reference/openapi.yaml patch /v1/projects/{id}
Update project metadata or move the project to another milestone in the current project template.
# Create a prospect
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/prospects/create-a-prospect
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/prospects
Creates a new prospect household with head of household information
# List tags
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/tags/list-tags
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/tags
List all tags available to the authenticated user. Optionally filter by record type. Contacts use household tags, so record_type=household returns tags usable for both households and contacts.
# Add labels to task
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/tasks/add-labels-to-task
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/tasks/{task_id}/tags
Add labels (tags) to an existing task. Labels are merged with existing labels (additive operation).
# Create a task
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/tasks/create-a-task
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/tasks
Create a new task
# Get a task
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/tasks/get-a-task
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/tasks/{id}
Retrieve a task by ID
# List tasks
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/tasks/list-tasks
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/tasks
List all tasks. Optionally filter by book_id to scope to a specific book.
# Remove a label from task
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/tasks/remove-a-label-from-task
/api-reference/openapi.yaml delete /v1/tasks/{task_id}/tags/{id}
Remove a specific label (tag) from a task by label ID.
# Update a task
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/tasks/update-a-task
/api-reference/openapi.yaml patch /v1/tasks/{id}
Update an existing task
# Create a trust
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/trusts/create-a-trust
/api-reference/openapi.yaml post /v1/households/{household_id}/trusts
Create a new trust for a household
# Get a trust
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/trusts/get-a-trust
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/households/{household_id}/trusts/{id}
Retrieve a trust by ID
# List trusts
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/trusts/list-trusts
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/households/{household_id}/trusts
List all trusts owned by a household. Supports filtering by name and updated_since.
# Update a trust
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/trusts/update-a-trust
/api-reference/openapi.yaml patch /v1/households/{household_id}/trusts/{id}
Update an existing trust
# Show current user
Source: https://docs.slant.app/api-reference/users/show-current-user
/api-reference/openapi.yaml get /v1/me
Retrieve the currently authenticated user information
# Book chat
Source: https://docs.slant.app/dashboard/book-chat
Use AI chat from your Home page to ask questions, build reports, and take action across your entire book.
Book chat is the [AI chat](/records/households/chat) experience on your [Home](/dashboard/home) page. It has the broadest view of any chat context — it can query across all your clients, prospects, tasks, meetings, notes, and more in a single conversation.
Open the **Book chat** tab on your Home page to start a conversation.
For a full overview of what chat can do — including sending messages, prompt snippets, uploading files, voice input, choosing a model, managing threads, and quick actions — see [household chat](/records/households/chat).
## What makes book chat different
While [client](/records/clients/overview) and [prospect](/records/prospects) chat focus on a single household, book chat works across your entire book. In addition to everything in [household chat](/records/households/chat), book chat can:
### Ask book-wide questions
Query across all your households at once:
* "How many clients do I have in tier A?"
* "What's the total AUM across all my clients?"
* "Which prospects haven't had a meeting in the last 90 days?"
* "What are the Smith household's current holdings?"
* "Show me recent transactions across all accounts"
### Build cohorts
When you ask for a list or report, book chat automatically creates a **cohort** — a saved group of records you can reference later:
* "List all clients with over \$1M in AUM"
* "Show me prospects we haven't contacted in 60 days"
* "Rank my top 10 clients by assets"
### Create new clients and prospects
Book chat can create new household records directly:
* "Create a prospect for John Smith with email [john@example.com](mailto:john@example.com)"
* "Add a new client for Sarah Davis"
### Create and assign tasks across your team
Book chat can create tasks for any household and assign them to any teammate on the book. Name the teammate in your request and the assignee is pre-filled in the task preview — otherwise the task is assigned to you.
* "Create a task for Sarah to call the Smiths about their RMD"
* "Add a task for Alex to send beneficiary forms to the Johnsons by Friday"
### Send intake forms
Book chat can send a published [intake form](/platform/intake-forms/overview) to a client or prospect:
* "Send the client intake form to the Smiths"
### Run financial calculations
Book chat can perform financial calculations including:
* Required minimum distributions (RMDs)
* Compound interest and growth projections
* Loan amortization schedules
* Tax projections
* Portfolio depletion analysis
### Hand off to an automation
When you ask book chat to build a recurring or event-driven workflow, it hands the request off instead of doing the work itself. Click **Continue in Automation Chat** on the card it returns to open a new automation with your request pre-loaded. See [building automations](/platform/automations/building-automations) for what happens next.
### Browse household files
Search and analyze documents stored in your connected [file storage](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage):
* "Find the Smith household's financial plan in Google Drive"
* "Look at this client's financial plan and pull out their target retirement age"
## What data book chat can access
Book chat has read access to all data in the book you're currently viewing:
* **[Clients](/records/clients/overview) and [prospects](/records/prospects)** — household details, service tiers, AUM, and custom fields
* **[People](/records/people)** — individual contact information, roles, email addresses, and phone numbers
* **[Other contacts](/records/other-contacts)** — professional relationships like CPAs and attorneys
* **[Tasks](/activity/tasks/overview)** — task titles, statuses, due dates, and assignees
* **[Meetings](/activity/meetings/overview)** — meeting details, attendees, and notes
* **Notes** — note content linked to households
* **[Projects](/activity/projects/overview)** — project details and milestones
* **[Opportunities](/activity/opportunities/overview)** — pipeline stages, probabilities, and values
* **[Accounts](/records/accounts/overview)** — custodian account details, current holdings and positions, account balances, and recent transactions
* **[Manual accounts](/records/accounts/manual-accounts)** — manually tracked accounts and their values
* **[Tags and custom fields](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields)** — any custom data you've added to records
* **Documents** — files stored in your connected [file storage](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage)
* **Email addresses, phone numbers, and addresses** — contact details across all records
While you're viewing a single book, book chat cannot see data from other books. To ask across books, switch to **All books**.
## All books
If you belong to more than one book, select **All books** in the book switcher in the sidebar, then open the **Book chat** tab on Home. Chat now answers across every book you belong to.
**All books** appears in the book switcher only if you have access to two or more books.
A few things work differently when you're in **All books**:
* **Book names on every record** — each client, task, or meeting in an answer shows which book it came from, so similar names stay unambiguous
* **Each book's own settings** — tier labels come from each record's own book
* **Company-level items listed once** — custom fields, tags, pipelines, and email templates shared across your company appear a single time, not repeated per book
* **Creating records** — when you ask chat to create something and the target book isn't clear, it asks which book to create it in
* **Reports and cohorts** — reports you create here belong to your company rather than one book, so each person who runs one sees results from the books they can access, and cohorts can hold records from across books
Chat threads stay private to the person who created them, whether you're in **All books** or in a single book.
## Keyboard shortcuts
| Shortcut | Action |
| ------------ | --------------- |
| `g` then `b` | Go to book chat |
## FAQ
Everything listed in [household chat](/records/households/chat), plus book-wide capabilities like building cohorts, creating new clients and prospects, running financial calculations, and browsing household files.
Book chat queries all data in your current book — clients, prospects, people, tasks, meetings, notes, projects, opportunities, accounts, tags, custom fields, and documents in connected file storage. In **All books** it covers every book you belong to. It can also search the web for current market data and financial news.
Yes. Select **All books** in the book switcher, then open the **Book chat** tab on Home. Answers label each record with its book. This option appears only if you have access to two or more books.
## Next steps
Full overview of all AI chat capabilities.
Check today's meetings, tasks, and nudges.
# Calendar
Source: https://docs.slant.app/dashboard/calendar
View and manage your schedule with synced calendar events from Google and Microsoft.
The calendar displays events from your connected Google or Microsoft accounts in a visual schedule. You can view upcoming events, create new ones, RSVP, and manage your week — all without leaving Slant.
To use the calendar, you need at least one connected email and calendar account. See [Email and calendar integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar) for setup instructions.
## View modes
The calendar supports four view modes: **Day**, **3 day**, **Work week** (Monday--Friday), and **Full week** (Sunday--Saturday). Switch between them using the dropdown in the top-right corner. Slant remembers the view you pick and restores it the next time you open the calendar.
Use the arrow buttons next to the date range to navigate forward or backward. Click **Today** to jump back to the current date.
All-day events appear in a sticky **All day** band above the hourly grid, so they stay visible as you scroll through the day.
Events with a **Meeting type** assigned show a small color-coded badge with the type's name — for example, **Client review** or **Prospect**. The badge color matches the color set for that meeting type. Very short events (15 minutes or less) hide the badge to save space.
## Calendar selector
If you or your teammates have multiple calendars connected, click **All calendars** to choose which calendars to display. You can toggle individual calendars on or off, or select all at once.
Each calendar is color-coded so you can tell at a glance which account an event belongs to.
## Create an event
Click or drag on the calendar grid to select a time range. A new event form appears.
Add a title, adjust the date and time, and optionally add:
* **All day** — toggle on to make the event span entire days. The time pickers are replaced with a second date picker so you can set a multi-day range (for example, a 3-day conference)
* **Guests** — search for people in Slant or type an email address
* **Location** — enter a physical address or room name
* **Add Google Meet** or **Add Microsoft Teams** — add a video conferencing link (depends on your calendar provider)
* **Meeting type** — classify the event using one of your active meeting types
* **Description** — add notes or an agenda using the text editor
* **Event color** — choose a color for the event (Google calendars only)
The event is created on your calendar and synced to your calendar provider.
You can only create events on calendars you own or calendars where someone has granted you edit access. See [calendar edit access](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar#calendar-edit-access).
## View event details
Click any event on the calendar to see its details, including:
* Title, date, and time
* Location and description
* Participant list with RSVP status (accepted, declined, maybe, or no reply)
* A link to any associated [meeting](/activity/meetings/overview)
If the event has a **Meeting type** assigned, its color-coded badge appears next to the title here too.
All-day events show the date followed by **All day** instead of a time range — for example, `Wednesday, April 22 · All day` for a single-day event, or `Apr 22 – Apr 24 · All day` for a multi-day span.
Private events are marked with a icon. If the event organizer has enabled **Hide private events** in their [email and calendar settings](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar#hide-private-events), private events won't create meetings or trigger the notetaker.
From the detail view, you can edit or delete the event.
## RSVP to an event
When viewing an event you're invited to, click **Yes**, **No**, or **Maybe** to respond. Your RSVP syncs back to your calendar provider.
Events you've declined appear on the calendar with the title and time shown in strike-through so you can spot them at a glance.
## Edit an event
Click an event to open its details, then click the icon. You can change the title, time, location, description, and participants. Changes sync to your calendar provider.
You can edit events on calendars you own and on calendars where someone has granted you [edit access](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar#calendar-edit-access). The original calendar owner stays the owner of every event, even when an editor makes the change.
## Delete an event
Click an event to open its details, then click the icon. You'll be asked whether to also remove the event from your calendar provider.
* **Also remove from calendar provider** (checked by default) — deletes the event from both Slant and your Google or Microsoft calendar
* **Uncheck** to remove it from Slant only, keeping the original event on your calendar provider
Deleting an event cannot be undone.
Cancelling a calendar event also removes its meeting from the [Meetings page](/activity/meetings/overview).
## Sync your calendar
Slant syncs calendar events automatically. To trigger a manual sync, click the icon in the top-right corner of the calendar.
Manual sync has a 5-minute cooldown between requests.
## Calendar events and meetings
Slant automatically creates a [meeting](/activity/meetings/overview) from a calendar event when all of these conditions are met:
* The event has a **specific start and end time** (all-day events are excluded)
* The event has **two or more participants**
* The event is **not private**, or you haven't enabled [Hide private events](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar#hide-private-events)
* Your calendar is **shared with at least one book** (your own book counts — see [calendar sharing](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar#calendar-sharing))
When a meeting is created from a calendar event, the notetaker automatically joins the call if:
* The event has a **video conferencing link** (Zoom, Google Meet, Microsoft Teams, Webex, or Slack)
* The **notetaker is enabled** for that book
* The event is **not a recurring event** with the **Skip recurring meetings** setting turned on
Events that don't meet these criteria still appear on your calendar — they just won't have a meeting or notetaker created automatically. You can always start a meeting manually from the [meetings page](/activity/meetings/overview).
## FAQ
Slant syncs your primary calendar from each connected account. Events sync from 18 months ago through 1 year into the future. See [Email and calendar integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar) for details on connecting accounts.
Yes, if they've shared their calendar with your book. Teammates can configure this in **Settings** → **Email and calendar** under calendar sharing. See [calendar sharing](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar#calendar-sharing) for details.
Make sure you have a connected email and calendar account in **Settings** → **Email and calendar**. If you've just connected, the initial sync may take a few minutes. You can also click the icon to trigger a manual sync.
Only if the calendar owner has granted you edit access. By default, shared calendars from teammates are read-only. Owners can grant edit access from **Settings** → **Email and calendar** — see [calendar edit access](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar#calendar-edit-access).
The original calendar owner. When you create, update, or reschedule an event on a calendar you can edit, the calendar's owner stays the owner of the event — your action is still recorded, but ownership and provider sync continue to flow through them.
## Next steps
Learn how meetings work and how calendar events connect to AI-powered meeting notes.
Connect your Google or Microsoft account to sync email and calendar.
# Daily overview
Source: https://docs.slant.app/dashboard/daily-overview
See today's meetings, tasks due, important emails, and nudges — all in one view.
The daily overview is the default tab on your [Home](/dashboard/home) page. It shows everything you need to stay on top of your day: upcoming meetings, tasks that need attention, inbound emails from clients and prospects, and nudges that suggest timely outreach.
## Today's meetings
The **Today's meetings** card lists every [meeting](/activity/meetings/overview) scheduled for today, showing the time, title, and attendees for each one.
Use the **My meetings** / **All meetings** toggle in the top-right corner to switch between meetings you're hosting and all meetings. **My meetings** is selected by default.
* Meetings happening right now are highlighted in blue.
* Past meetings appear dimmed.
* Click any meeting to open its detail page.
* Click the **View all meetings** icon in the top-right corner to open the full [meetings](/activity/meetings/overview) page.
## Your tasks
The **Your tasks** card shows [tasks](/activity/tasks/overview) assigned to you that are due today or overdue. Each task displays its title, due date, priority, and the linked household.
You can complete a task directly from this card by checking the checkbox next to it.
### Sort options
Use the dropdown in the top-right corner of the card to change the sort order:
* **Due today** — tasks due today first, then overdue (default)
* **Most overdue** — tasks furthest past their due date first
* **Highest priority** — highest-priority tasks first
* **Lowest priority** — lowest-priority tasks first
Your sort preference is saved and persists between visits.
## Important emails
The **Important emails** card surfaces recent inbound emails from your clients and prospects so you can respond quickly.
Filter emails by sender type using the buttons at the top of the card:
* **All** — every inbound email (default)
* **Client** — emails from [clients](/records/clients/overview) only
* **Prospect** — emails from [prospects](/records/prospects) only
* **Other** — emails from senders who aren't clients or prospects
Only emails from the last seven days appear here. Dismissed emails are hidden.
Important emails is only available when viewing a single book. In all-books mode, this card is hidden.
## Nudges
Nudges are timely suggestions to reach out to a client or prospect based on events Slant detects automatically. The **Nudges** card shows nudges for today's date.
### Types of nudges
* **Client birthday** — a client's birthday is coming up in the next few days. The nudge header shows the birthday's date (month and day, like "Jan 15") along with a timing label — **Today**, **Tomorrow**, **Yesterday**, or how many days ago it was — so you can spot missed birthdays at a glance. Birthdays more than a day in the future show just the date.
* **Job change detected** — a client started a new job, or **Promotion detected** if they were promoted
* **Family member new job** — a client's family member started a new job or received a promotion
* **Address change detected** — a client moved to a new address
* **Home purchase alert** — a client purchased a new home
* **Client obituary alert** — a client has been reported deceased, with relevant context like an obituary link
* **Family obituary alert** — a client's family member has been reported deceased
### Actions you can take
Each nudge includes contextual action buttons based on the type of event — such as composing an email, logging a call, creating a follow-up [task](/activity/tasks/creating-tasks), sending a message, or opening a LinkedIn profile. Some nudges instead ask whether you've already taken action or were already aware of the change.
You can dismiss any nudge if no action is needed.
### Filter to your assigned clients
When your company links nudges to an assigned advisor custom field, the card header shows a **My nudges** / **All nudges** toggle:
* **My nudges** — only nudges for clients where the assigned advisor field equals you. Nudges without a client and clients with a blank value still appear.
* **All nudges** — every nudge in the book, regardless of assignment.
Your choice is remembered between visits.
The toggle only appears when your company has configured an assigned advisor field under **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Nudges**. See [Data customizations](/account-settings/customization/data-customizations#nudges) for setup steps.
## FAQ
Important emails only appears when you're viewing a single book. Switch from **All books** to a specific book using the book switcher in the sidebar.
The **Your tasks** card only shows tasks assigned to you. To see all tasks across your team, go to the [tasks](/activity/tasks/overview) page.
Slant monitors your client data for notable events — birthdays, job changes, address changes, and more. When it detects something worth reaching out about, it creates a nudge automatically. No setup required.
Dismissed nudges are hidden from the card and won't reappear. If you change your mind, the nudge may have already expired.
## Next steps
Track your team's outreach metrics and recent activity.
Ask questions about your book's data using AI.
# Home
Source: https://docs.slant.app/dashboard/home
Your personal command center — see today's meetings, tasks, emails, and team activity at a glance.
Home is your starting point in Slant. It gives you a snapshot of your day, surfaces action items, and keeps you connected to your team's activity — all in one place.
Every time you open Slant, you land on Home. From here you can see what's on your calendar, which tasks need attention, review important emails, and track how your team is engaging with clients.
## Quick actions
Three buttons at the top of the page let you capture information without leaving Home:
* **Quick note** — opens a new note immediately
* **Quick task** — opens the [task creation form](/activity/tasks/creating-tasks)
* **Start meeting** — creates a new [meeting](/activity/meetings/overview) on the spot
## Recently viewed households
The top-right corner shows avatars for the households you've viewed most recently. Hover over an avatar to see when you last visited, and click to jump straight to that [client](/records/clients/overview) or [prospect](/records/prospects) record.
## Tabs
Home is organized into three tabs:
* **[Daily overview](/dashboard/daily-overview)** — today's meetings, your tasks, important emails, and nudges
* **[Team activity](/dashboard/team-activity)** — a scorecard of your team's outreach and a scrolling activity feed
* **[Book chat](/dashboard/book-chat)** — an AI assistant that can answer questions about your book's data
### Reordering tabs
Any user can set the tab order that everyone on the team sees. Click the **swap arrows** icon to the right of the tabs to open the drag-and-drop editor, rearrange the tabs, then click **Save**. Click **Reset to default** to restore the original order.
Tab order is shared across your company — every advisor sees the same order, and any user can change it.
## Keyboard shortcuts
| Shortcut | Action |
| ------------ | ------------------- |
| `g` then `h` | Go to the home page |
## FAQ
No. Home always opens to the **Daily overview** tab. Switching to another tab updates the URL, so you can bookmark a specific tab if you prefer to start there.
Yes. If you select **All books** from the book switcher, Home adapts to show meetings and tasks from every book you have access to. [Book chat](/dashboard/book-chat) works here too, answering across all your books. Important emails is the exception — that card asks you to switch to a specific book.
Today's meetings refresh automatically every 60 seconds. Other sections update when you interact with them or navigate back to Home.
## Next steps
See today's meetings, tasks, emails, and nudges.
Track your team's outreach and review recent activity.
Ask questions about your book's data using AI.
Stay on top of updates and alerts.
# Notifications
Source: https://docs.slant.app/dashboard/notifications
Stay on top of tasks, comments, and mentions with in-app notifications.
Notifications keep you informed when something relevant happens in your book — a task is assigned to you, someone comments on your work, or a document is signed.
Notifications appear in real time. You don't need to refresh the page to see new ones.
## What triggers a notification
You receive a notification when:
* **A task is assigned to you** — someone assigns a task directly to you or to a team you belong to
* **A task is created for a record you own** — a new task is added to one of your [clients](/records/clients/overview), [prospects](/records/prospects), or [other contacts](/records/other-contacts)
* **A task you're associated with is completed** — a task you're assigned to or collaborating on is marked complete
* **A task you're associated with is reassigned** — the assignee changes on a task you collaborate on
* **You're added as a collaborator on a task** — someone adds you to a [task](/activity/tasks/overview) as a collaborator
* **Someone comments on a task you're associated with** — a new comment appears on a task you're assigned to or collaborating on
* **Someone mentions you in a comment or note** — you're @mentioned in a comment on any record, or in a note
* **Someone replies to your comment** — a direct reply is added to one of your comments
* **A DocuSign envelope is completed, declined, or voided** — a document you sent for signature has a status change
* **A linked custodian account transfers out or drops to \$0** — a [custodian account](/records/accounts/custodian-accounts) linked to one of your clients leaves your data feed or falls to a zero balance. Everyone in the book is notified. Currently supported for Schwab feeds.
## View your notifications
Click **Notifications** in the sidebar to open the notifications panel. Each notification shows:
* **A read indicator** — a colored dot on the left (blue means unread, gray means read)
* **The notification message** — a summary of what happened and who did it
* **The book** — a badge showing which book the notification belongs to
* **The time** — how long ago the notification was created
* **A preview** — for comments and tasks, a short preview of the content appears below the message
When you have unread notifications, a count badge appears next to **Notifications** in the sidebar.
## Manage notifications
### Mark a notification as read or unread
Hover over any notification to reveal a toggle button on the right side. Click it to switch the notification between read and unread. The read indicator dot updates immediately.
### Mark all as read
Click **Mark all as read** at the top of the notifications panel to mark every notification as read at once. This button is disabled when you have no unread notifications.
### Open the related record
Every notification is clickable and takes you straight to the record it's about:
* Task notifications open the task details
* Comment notifications open the record the comment belongs to — a task, project, or any other commented-on record
* Note mention notifications open the note on its record
* Meeting comment notifications navigate to the meeting page
* DocuSign notifications open the signed document
* Account departure notifications open the client, prospect, or business the account was linked to
## Notification settings
You can control which notifications send you email and how frequently those emails arrive. Go to **Settings** → **Notifications** to configure daily digest emails, meeting prep emails, batch timing, and per-type email toggles.
See [notification settings](/account-settings/notifications) for full details.
## FAQ
No. In-app notifications are always on so you don't miss important updates. You can control which notifications send emails in **Settings** → **Notifications**, but the in-app notifications panel always shows all notification types.
Yes. The notifications panel shows notifications from every book you have access to. Each notification displays a badge indicating which book it belongs to.
The count badge only appears when you have unread notifications. If you're viewing **All books** instead of a specific book, notifications are not available — switch to a specific book to see them.
Notifications are stored indefinitely. You can scroll through the panel to view older notifications, and they load automatically as you scroll down.
## Next steps
Most notifications are task-related — learn how tasks work.
Control which events send you email and how often.
# Team activity
Source: https://docs.slant.app/dashboard/team-activity
Track your team's outreach with a scorecard of key metrics and a scrolling activity feed.
The team activity tab on your [Home](/dashboard/home) page gives you a bird's-eye view of what your team has been doing. It combines a scorecard of key outreach metrics with a live activity feed so you can spot trends, recognize effort, and stay aligned.
## Team scorecard
The scorecard tracks four outreach metrics across your team:
* **Emails sent** — outbound emails delivered
* **Tasks** — tasks completed
* **Meetings** — meetings held
* **Notes** — notes created
Each metric shows a count for the selected timeframe. Below the metrics, a **recent household interactions** section lists the households your team has engaged with most recently, with a breakdown of activity by type.
Click on a household name to view its record.
### Filtering the scorecard
Use the timeframe dropdown to change the reporting period — options range from today to last quarter. Use the **All users** dropdown to filter to specific team members, or keep the default to see everyone's activity.
## Activity feed
The activity feed on the right side of the page shows a scrolling timeline of everything happening in your book — tasks created, meetings completed, notes added, and more.
Activities are grouped by month and show:
* Who performed the action
* What they did (created, completed, updated, etc.)
* The related record (household, contact, task, etc.)
* When it happened
Scroll down to load more history automatically.
Email entries in the activity feed only appear for inboxes you have access to. You'll see emails from your own connected accounts, plus any teammate inboxes that have been shared with you under **Email permissions** on their [email and calendar settings](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar#share-your-email-access).
## FAQ
The team scorecard tracks four types of activity: emails sent, tasks completed, meetings held, and notes created. You can filter by timeframe (from today to last quarter) and by team member to see exactly who's doing what.
Yes. By default the scorecard shows all users, including you. Use the user filter to isolate your own activity or focus on specific team members.
No. The scorecard is a live view and doesn't currently support exporting.
The scorecard counts specific metric types (emails, tasks, meetings, notes) for a selected timeframe. The activity feed shows all activity types in chronological order regardless of the scorecard's filters.
## Next steps
Check today's meetings, tasks, and nudges.
Ask questions about your book's data using AI.
# Overview
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog
Recent updates and improvements to Slant.
What's new and improved in Slant. Each week's release notes are on their own page, with the number of code changes shipped that week.
* [August 31, 2026](/help/changelog/2026-08-31) — 1,694 commits across 241 PRs
* [August 17, 2026](/help/changelog/2026-08-17) — 545 commits across 113 PRs
* [August 10, 2026](/help/changelog/2026-08-10) — 911 commits across 152 PRs
* [August 3, 2026](/help/changelog/2026-08-03) — 1,681 commits across 312 PRs
* [July 17, 2026](/help/changelog/2026-07-17) — 563 commits across 90 PRs
* [July 10, 2026](/help/changelog/2026-07-10) — 233 commits across 62 PRs
* [July 6, 2026](/help/changelog/2026-07-06) — 518 commits across 102 PRs
* [June 26, 2026](/help/changelog/2026-06-26) — 297 commits across 72 PRs
* [June 19, 2026](/help/changelog/2026-06-19) — 384 commits across 72 PRs
* [June 15, 2026](/help/changelog/2026-06-15) — 216 commits across 35 PRs
* [June 11, 2026](/help/changelog/2026-06-11) — 601 commits across 136 PRs
* [June 1, 2026](/help/changelog/2026-06-01) — 329 commits across 74 PRs
* [May 26, 2026](/help/changelog/2026-05-26) — 490 commits across 119 PRs
* [May 8, 2026](/help/changelog/2026-05-08) — 219 commits across 66 PRs
* [May 1, 2026](/help/changelog/2026-05-01) — 339 commits across 86 PRs
* [April 24, 2026](/help/changelog/2026-04-24) — 415 commits across 79 PRs
* [April 17, 2026](/help/changelog/2026-04-17) — 341 commits across 74 PRs
* [April 10, 2026](/help/changelog/2026-04-10) — 458 commits across 77 PRs
# April 10, 2026
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog/2026-04-10
Updates released the week of April 10, 2026.
## International addresses
Addresses now support countries beyond the United States. When editing an address, select a country using the flag icon next to the state field. For non-US countries, the state field accepts free text and the postal code field accepts any format.
* [People](/records/people) — updated address field description
* [CSV import](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/csv-import) — second address fields added
## International phone numbers
Phone number fields now accept international formats. Select a country using the flag icon next to the input. Non-US numbers display with the country calling code.
* [People](/records/people) — updated phone field description
## Past client household creation
When [creating a new household from a person](/records/people#creating-a-new-household-from-a-person), you can now choose **Past client** as the household type in addition to Client and Prospect.
* [People](/records/people)
* [Past clients](/records/clients/past-clients)
## Tables in notes
The notes editor now supports tables. Use the table button in the toolbar or type `/` and select **Table** from the menu to insert a 2x2 table. Add rows and columns, rearrange content, and navigate cells with Tab and Enter.
## Projects: compact view and "Created by" filter
The [pipeline view](/activity/projects/pipeline-view) now includes a compact card layout toggle and a **Created by** filter available under **Filter**.
* [Pipeline view](/activity/projects/pipeline-view)
## Custom field AI fill improvements
The [Fill with AI](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields#fill-with-ai) feature now sends a notification and a summary in [book chat](/dashboard/book-chat) with links to updated records when the fill completes.
* [Custom fields](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields)
## Task template deadline presets
The **Due in** field on [task templates](/activity/tasks/task-templates) now offers presets (same day, 1 day, 1 week, etc.) and a custom option with days, weeks, months, or years.
* [Task templates](/activity/tasks/task-templates)
## Book chat: custodian and account data
[Book chat](/dashboard/book-chat) now has access to custodian account holdings, balances, recent transactions, and [manual accounts](/records/accounts/manual-accounts).
* [Book chat](/dashboard/book-chat)
## DocuSign field delegation
When [sending a document for signature](/records/households/document-filler/sending-for-signature), you can now delegate unfilled fields to signers to complete during signing. Admins can configure default signer mappings per template in [document filler settings](/records/households/document-filler/settings).
* [Sending for signature](/records/households/document-filler/sending-for-signature)
* [Document filler settings](/records/households/document-filler/settings)
## Checkbox groups in document templates
The [document filler](/records/households/document-filler/filling-documents) now supports checkbox groups as a field type alongside text fields, checkboxes, dropdowns, and radio groups.
* [Filling documents](/records/households/document-filler/filling-documents)
## CSV import: second address
You can now map a second address during [CSV import](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/csv-import) for clients and prospects, with fields for line 1, line 2, city, state, ZIP, and type.
* [CSV import](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/csv-import)
# April 17, 2026
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog/2026-04-17
Updates released the week of April 17, 2026.
## Customizable overview layout
The **Overview** tab on clients, prospects, other contacts, and businesses is now a drag-and-drop dashboard. Admins can click **...** → **Edit overview layout** to add, move, resize, and remove widgets. Available widgets include Tasks, Activity, Quick actions, Custom fields, Meetings, Recent emails, Projects, Opportunities, Related records, Trusts, Files, and Sequences. The layout is shared across your company and can be set independently for each record type.
* [Household overview layout](/records/households/overview#customizing-the-overview-layout)
* [Other contacts overview](/records/other-contacts#customizing-the-overview-layout)
* [Businesses overview](/records/businesses#customizing-the-overview-layout)
## Customizable tab order
Admins can now set the order of tabs on home, client, prospect, other contact, and business pages for the whole company. On a record, click the **...** menu and choose **Edit tab order** to drag the tabs into your preferred order. On home, use the **swap arrows** icon next to the tabs. The saved order applies to everyone on the team; non-admins see the order but can't edit it.
* [Home tab order](/dashboard/home#reordering-tabs)
* [Household tab order](/records/households/overview#reordering-the-tabs)
## Email voice settings
Each book now has its own **Email voice** prompt at **Settings** → **Prompts** → **Email voice**, with one tab per book the user belongs to. Any book member can edit the voice; **Regenerate email voice** samples from the book principal's primary email integration.
* [Prompts settings](/account-settings/customization/prompts#email-voice)
## Reorder custom fields
Custom fields can now be reordered with drag-and-drop from [custom field settings](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields#reorder-custom-fields). The order is shared across your company and controls how fields appear on record detail pages.
* [Custom fields](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields)
## Project type editor overhaul
The project type editor is now a two-panel inline editor with milestones in a sidebar and **Tasks**, **Outcomes**, **Form inputs**, and **Settings** tabs on the right. Form inputs and outcomes are drag-to-reorder, task templates open in a dialog with email prompt support, and changes auto-save with a **Saving...** / **Saved** indicator. The project types settings list is now a table with a three-dot menu for **Edit**, **Duplicate to book**, and **Delete**.
* [Project types (settings)](/account-settings/customization/project-types)
* [Project types reference](/activity/projects/project-types)
## Generate follow-up tasks from email threads
A new **Generate tasks** action on email threads uses AI to propose follow-up tasks based on the conversation. Suggested tasks are shown in a pending state — click **Accept** to add them to your task list or **Reject** to dismiss. Existing tasks are preserved when you regenerate.
* [Emails](/records/households/email)
* [Creating tasks](/activity/tasks/creating-tasks)
## Declined calendar events struck through
Events you decline in your connected calendar now render with the title and time in strike-through on the Slant calendar, matching Gmail and Outlook.
* [Calendar](/dashboard/calendar)
## Principal calendar sharing moved to email settings
The toggle that controls whether the book principal's primary calendar is shared with the book has moved from the book settings page to **Settings** → **Email** → the integration's **Calendar sharing** tab. The setting applies across all the principal's primary calendars.
* [Email and calendar](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar)
## Activity feed scoped to accessible email integrations
Email entries in the activity feed now only appear for users who own or have read access to the underlying email integration. Grant teammates access under **Settings** → **Email** → the integration's **Email permissions** tab.
* [Team activity](/dashboard/team-activity)
## Route automation tasks via custom fields
The **Create task** automation action's **Assigned to** picker now includes household user-reference custom fields under a **User reference fields** section. At run time, Slant uses the explicit user if set, otherwise reads the field off the household and assigns accordingly, otherwise creates the task unassigned.
* [Automation actions](/platform/automations/actions)
## Formatting toolbar on email templates
Email template bodies now show the same floating format bar as the email composer — bold, italic, underline, text color, bulleted and numbered lists, and indent controls.
* [Email templates](/account-settings/customization/email-templates)
## Tables in task descriptions
Task descriptions now support tables. Use the table button in the toolbar or type `/` and select **Table** from the menu, same as the notes editor.
* [Creating tasks](/activity/tasks/creating-tasks)
## Quick copy from the command palette
Hover over an email or phone in the command palette preview pane to reveal a **copy** icon. Click it to copy the value without leaving search.
* [Command palette](/help/glossary#interface-terms)
## Assign chat-created tasks to teammates
Ask AI chat to create a task for a specific teammate (e.g. "Create a task for Sarah to call the Smiths") and the assignee is pre-filled in the task preview. Works in book, household, and meeting chat. If you don't name a teammate, the task is assigned to you.
* [Book chat](/dashboard/book-chat#create-and-assign-tasks-across-your-team)
* [Household chat](/records/households/chat#create-tasks-and-notes)
## Retirement date on people
People now have a **Retirement date** field in the Professional and legal information section. Retirement dates are also mapped in during Redtail imports.
* [People](/records/people)
* [Importing from Redtail](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/from-redtail)
## User list scoped for non-admins
On **Settings** → **Users and teams**, non-admins now only see teammates they share at least one book with, and the books column only lists shared books. Admins still see the full company list.
* [Users and teams](/account-settings/users-and-teams)
# April 24, 2026
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog/2026-04-24
Updates released the weeks of April 18 – April 27, 2026.
## Personal access tokens for the Slant API
You can now create read-only personal access tokens for the Slant API from **Settings** → **API tokens**. Each token is tied to your user account and inherits your book access. Tokens are shown only once at creation, and you can revoke any token at any time. Write access can be requested per token by messaging support.
* [API tokens](/account-settings/api-tokens)
* [API reference](/api-reference/overview)
## Multi-book automations
Automations now belong to your company instead of a single book. From an automation's **Settings** → **Sharing** section, admins can either toggle **Apply to all books in company** to run the automation in every book (including new books added later) or check the **Share with specific books** list to pick exact books. Automations that reference book-specific resources (tags, sequences, pipelines, email integrations) can't be company-wide until those references are removed.
* [Building automations](/platform/automations/building-automations#share-an-automation-across-books)
## Meetings on contacts and businesses
You can now file meetings under [other contacts](/records/other-contacts) and [businesses](/records/businesses) in addition to households. Both record types have a new **Meetings** tab and a **Start meeting** button in the header. Starting a meeting from a contact or business detail page automatically files it under that record and locks the link in the create form.
* [Creating and recording meetings](/activity/meetings/creating-and-recording-meetings)
* [Meetings overview](/activity/meetings/overview)
* [Other contacts](/records/other-contacts#header-buttons)
* [Businesses](/records/businesses)
## Identification fields on other contacts
Other contacts now have an **Identification** section under **Details** for storing sensitive information — **SSN**, **Passport number**, and driver license fields (number, issuing state, issue date, expiration date). Previously these fields were only available on household members.
* [Other contacts — Identification](/records/other-contacts#identification)
## 2FA improvements on web and mobile
Admins now see two extra columns on **Settings** → **Users and teams**: **Auth method** (Google, Microsoft, or Password) and **2FA?** (Yes/No), making it easy to audit how each teammate signs in and whether two-factor authentication is enabled. The Slant mobile app also now supports 2FA (TOTP) during sign-in for both email/password and SSO flows — after entering credentials, you'll be prompted for the 6-digit code from your authenticator app.
* [Users and teams — Auth method and 2FA](/account-settings/users-and-teams#auth-method-and-2fa)
## EUR, AUD, and CAD currency custom fields
Currency [custom fields](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields) now support **US Dollar (USD)**, **Euro (EUR)**, **Australian Dollar (AUD)**, and **Canadian Dollar (CAD)**. Pick the currency when you choose the **Currency** format on a Number field.
* [Custom fields](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields#field-types)
## Prefix and suffix on names
When editing a person's name, you can now add an optional **Prefix** (e.g., Dr.) and **Suffix** (e.g., Jr., Sr., III) alongside first, middle, and last name.
* [People — Personal information](/records/people#personal-information)
## Manual account number reveal
The masked account number on manual accounts now exposes its eye and copy icons on hover instead of always showing them. Click the eye icon to reveal or hide the full number, and the copy icon to copy it to the clipboard. The same controls work on household account cards.
* [Manual accounts](/records/accounts/manual-accounts)
## Note labels in card view
Notes in card view now show their labels as colored badge chips in the card footer, on a dedicated row beneath the user name and timestamp. Long lists of labels scroll horizontally instead of collapsing into dots. The label picker is also searchable and scrolls — handy for books with many labels.
* [Labels and tags](/account-settings/customization/labels-and-tags)
## Hidden-stage drop confirmation
Dragging an opportunity onto a hidden stage (for example, **Archived**) now opens a confirmation prompt before the move applies. When you're dragging from a hidden stage, hidden-stage drop zones are also no longer shown so you can't accidentally re-archive.
* [Pipelines and stages](/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages#hidden-stages)
## Notetaker — 14-day window and dedupe
The **Notetaker** toggle is now only enabled for meetings starting in the next 14 days. Meetings further out show a disabled toggle until they enter the window.
When multiple users from the same firm are invited to the same calendar event, only one notetaker joins — not one per user or book — so you no longer see duplicate bots or duplicate recordings on shared events.
* [Notetaker](/activity/meetings/notetaker#two-week-scheduling-window)
## Deceased household members excluded from mail merge
Mail merge placeholders for the household head, spouse, and leader now skip household members who are marked deceased or have a date of death set, so [sequence emails](/platform/sequences/creating-sequences) no longer address messages to people who have passed away.
* [Creating sequences](/platform/sequences/creating-sequences)
## Email touchpoints use delivery date
Email [touchpoints](/account-settings/customization/engagement) are now dated by the email's actual delivery time instead of when the email record was created in Slant, so **Last touchpoint** reflects the real conversation date.
* [Engagement settings](/account-settings/customization/engagement)
## Better contact results in the command palette
The [command palette](/help/glossary#interface-terms) now reliably surfaces contacts when searching by person fields (name, email, phone), and the preview pane shows structured household member details — name, role, email, and phone — each with a copy icon.
* [Glossary — Command palette](/help/glossary)
## Folder picker requires a folder
The **Select** button on storage folder pickers (Box, Dropbox, OneDrive, Egnyte, ShareFile) is now only enabled after you choose a folder, so you can't accidentally clear a previously linked folder by clicking through with nothing selected.
* [Files](/records/households/files)
# May 1, 2026
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog/2026-05-01
Updates released the week of April 28 – May 1, 2026.
## All-day calendar events
You can now create, edit, and view all-day calendar events alongside hourly events. Toggle **All day** in the create or edit dialog to swap the time pickers for a date range, then enter a single day or a multi-day span (for example, a 3-day conference). All-day events appear in a sticky **All day** band above the hourly grid, and event details show as `Wednesday, April 22 · All day` or `Apr 22 – Apr 24 · All day` instead of a time range.
* [Calendar](/dashboard/calendar)
## Pipeline favorites and View all dropdown
The opportunities page now scales gracefully when you have many pipelines. With four or more pipelines, your favorites are pinned as the first tabs (with a filled amber star) and the rest collapse into a searchable **View all** dropdown tab. The page lands on your first favorite by default. Toggle a pipeline as a favorite using the new star button in the header, between the pipeline filter and **Sum by**.
* [Opportunities overview](/activity/opportunities/overview)
* [Pipelines and stages](/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages)
## Type-to-confirm bulk delete
Bulk deletes now require typing an uppercase confirmation phrase before the **Delete** button enables. After clicking **Delete** in the selection bar on any list, type the exact phrase shown in the dialog (for example, `DELETE 5 CLIENTS` or `DELETE 12 TASKS`). This guard applies to clients, prospects, past clients, other contacts, businesses, and tasks.
* [Clients overview](/records/clients/overview)
* [Past clients](/records/clients/past-clients)
* [Prospects](/records/prospects)
* [Other contacts](/records/other-contacts)
* [Businesses](/records/businesses)
* [Tasks overview](/activity/tasks/overview)
* [Managing tasks](/activity/tasks/managing-tasks)
## Wait actions extended to 30 days
Automation **Wait** actions now support waits up to **30 days**, with new **Hours** and **Days** options on the unit dropdown. Previously waits were capped at 30 minutes.
* [Automation actions — Wait](/platform/automations/actions#wait)
## Email draft on the Create task action
The **Create task** automation action gained an optional **Email draft** field that pre-stages an email on the resulting task. Choose **AI prompt** to write a free-text prompt that guides an AI-generated email, or **Email template** to pick from your existing templates. Only one source can be set per task.
* [Automation actions — Create task](/platform/automations/actions#create-task)
## "1 month before" date reminder option
**Birthday reminder**, **Client anniversary reminder**, and **Client custom date reminder** triggers now include **1 month before** as a timing option, alongside the existing same-day, days-before, and weeks-before choices.
* [Automation triggers](/platform/automations/triggers)
## Filters: Milestone, Completed date, and more relative operators
Several new filtering options are now available across list pages:
* **Milestone filter** appears on the tasks list once a **Project** is selected, scoped to the chosen project types.
* **Completed date filter** on the projects list lets you find projects completed in a specific window — applying it automatically includes completed and cancelled projects, so you don't need to toggle **Show completed projects**.
* **Relative date operators** now include **Last week**, **Last month**, and **Last year** in addition to the existing options.
* [Tasks overview](/activity/tasks/overview)
* [Managing projects](/activity/projects/managing-projects)
* [Pipeline view](/activity/projects/pipeline-view)
* [Data views](/records/data-views)
## Recurring task end date
When making a task recurring, you can now optionally set an **Until** end date in the date popover. Dates before the start are disabled, and a **Clear end date** button removes it.
* [Recurring tasks](/activity/tasks/recurring-tasks)
* [Creating tasks](/activity/tasks/creating-tasks)
* [Managing tasks](/activity/tasks/managing-tasks)
## Paste images into task descriptions
You can now paste screenshots and images directly into the task description editor on both the create form and inline edits, matching the note editor behavior.
* [Creating tasks](/activity/tasks/creating-tasks)
* [Managing tasks](/activity/tasks/managing-tasks)
## Project page header and milestone improvements
The project detail page header now shows project type, status badge (**Overdue**, **Completed**, or **Cancelled** when applicable), linked household, inline assignee avatar, and a **Created \[date]** stamp with creator-name tooltip. The current milestone in the **Tasks by milestone** accordion now shows a clock icon with elapsed time (e.g., "3d") and a tooltip with the exact in-milestone start.
* [Managing projects](/activity/projects/managing-projects)
* [Project types](/activity/projects/project-types)
## File attachment form fields on projects
Project types can now include **File attachment** form fields that let you upload files (up to 10 MB; PDF, DOCX, TXT, CSV, XLSX, XLS, PNG, JPEG, GIF) when filling out a project's milestone form. Files upload into the household's connected storage folder (Google Drive, OneDrive, etc.) and also appear in the household's **Files** section. The project type editor sidebar also gained a **Settings** pane with the existing **Kanban** toggle plus a new **Attachments** section and **Danger zone**.
* [Project types](/activity/projects/project-types)
* [Projects overview](/activity/projects/overview)
* [Creating projects](/activity/projects/creating-projects)
## Meeting type and AI prep on contacts and businesses
Meetings filed under [other contacts](/records/other-contacts) or [businesses](/records/businesses) now show the **Meeting type** dropdown when you start a meeting, and AI meeting prep generates for those meetings too — not just households.
* [Creating and recording meetings](/activity/meetings/creating-and-recording-meetings)
* [Other contacts](/records/other-contacts)
* [Businesses](/records/businesses)
## Updated chat models
The Slant AI chat selector now offers **GPT-5.5** (default), **Claude Opus 4.7**, **Claude Sonnet 4.6**, **Gemini 3 Flash**, and **Gemini 3 Pro**. Older versions (GPT-5.2, GPT-5.4, Claude Opus 4.6) have been retired. Existing chat threads automatically use the latest version of the model family they were on.
* [Chat](/records/households/chat)
## Request write access on personal access tokens
You can now request write access for any [personal access token](/account-settings/api-tokens) directly from **Settings** → **API tokens**. Click **Request write access** on the token's row, describe how you'll use it, and click **Send request**. The team reviews each request and follows up. A **Write access requested** badge appears on the row while the request is pending.
* [API tokens — Request write access](/account-settings/api-tokens#request-write-access)
## Wealthbox phone calls imported as Notes
Wealthbox phone calls now sync into Slant as Notes on the linked household, business, or trust. Each Note's body starts with a header line (`Phone call by [creator] on [date and time]`) followed by the call's full comment thread. Re-imports preserve the appended comments without creating duplicates.
* [Import from Wealthbox](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/from-wealthbox)
## Mobile app update prompt
The Slant mobile app now checks for a newer version on launch. When an update is available, a sheet appears with **Update now** (opens the App Store or Play Store) and **Later** (dismiss for the session).
# May 8, 2026
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog/2026-05-08
Updates released the week of May 4 – May 8, 2026.
## Private tasks
Tasks can now be marked **Private** so only the creator, assignee (or members of the assigned team), and collaborators can see them — including admins. Toggle privacy with the lock icon in the task create form footer or from the **Visibility** row in the task side panel.
* [Creating tasks](/activity/tasks/creating-tasks)
* [Managing tasks](/activity/tasks/managing-tasks)
## Lock a note for view-only access
You can now lock a note to prevent further edits, mentions, tag changes, or deletion. From a note's **⋮** menu, choose **Lock**; the note becomes view-only for everyone (including the author) until someone unlocks it.
* [Households overview](/records/households/overview)
* [Businesses](/records/businesses)
* [Other contacts](/records/other-contacts)
## Edit scheduled emails
Scheduled emails can now be edited before they send — content, recipients, attachments, and send time. Click the pencil next to the **Scheduled for** badge in the email view to reopen the composer; a **Save** button replaces **Send** while editing.
* [Household email](/records/households/email)
## Improved recipient search in the email composer
The To, Cc, and Bcc fields now search across email addresses, person names, and business names, with results grouped by **Businesses**, **Contacts**, **Clients**, **Prospects**, and **Users**.
* [Household email](/records/households/email)
## New CSV import fields
Household and contact CSV imports gained several new fields. Households now accept **Client since**, **LinkedIn URL**, **Company** (creates an employment record), and **Note** (creates a note on the household). Contacts now accept **LinkedIn URL**, **Company**, and full address fields.
* [CSV import](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/csv-import)
## Spouse extraction in Parse and create contact
The **Parse and create contact** automation action now extracts a spouse or partner alongside the head of household when creating a **Client** or **Prospect**. The relationship is inferred from the source content — "wife/husband" maps to spouse, "partner/domestic partner/fiancé" maps to partner.
* [Automation actions — Parse and create contact](/platform/automations/actions#parse-and-create-contact)
## Company-wide automations support company-wide pipelines and project types
A company-wide automation can now reference a company-wide pipeline or project type in its **Create opportunity**, **Find opportunity**, **Move to stage**, and **Start project** actions. Book-scoped pipelines and project types still require a per-book automation.
* [Building automations](/platform/automations/building-automations)
## Nudges filtered to your assigned clients
Admins can now scope nudges to each user's assigned clients via a household custom field. Set it under **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Nudges**. Once configured, the nudges card on the daily overview adds a **My nudges** / **All nudges** toggle so users can switch contexts.
* [Data customizations — Nudges](/account-settings/customization/data-customizations#nudges)
* [Daily overview — Nudges](/dashboard/daily-overview#nudges)
## Calendar edit permissions
Calendar owners can now grant edit access to specific teammates on a shared calendar. Permissioned teammates can create, update, reschedule, and delete events on that calendar. Manage access from the **Calendar edit access** section under **Calendar sharing** in your email and calendar account settings.
* [Email and calendar settings](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar)
* [Calendar](/dashboard/calendar)
## Custodian advisor codes auto-link existing accounts
When you assign an advisor code to a book, Slant now scans existing custodian accounts under that code and links any whose tax ID matches a household in that book. Previously only newly-arriving accounts were auto-linked.
* [Custodian linking](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/linking)
* [Custodian setup](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/setup)
## Business activity feed and updated overview
Each business now has an activity feed showing the business creation event plus tasks, notes, and meetings filed on it. The business **Overview** tab also got a new layout: **Meetings**, **Tasks**, and **Related records** widgets across the top, with the activity feed full-width below.
* [Businesses](/records/businesses)
## Auto-advance respects open tasks on the final milestone
Projects with an **All tasks completed** auto-advance trigger no longer mark the project complete from the final milestone unless that milestone has tasks and none are still open. The manual **Complete** path on a milestone or the project menu remains the way to finish a project that has open tasks.
* [Project types](/activity/projects/project-types)
## API and Zapier: update opportunities and contact details
The v1 API now supports `PATCH /v1/opportunities/:id` for partial opportunity updates (name, value, probability, target close date, household, pipeline stage, owner, custom fields), and exposes pipeline and pipeline stage endpoints for dynamic pickers. The Zapier integration uses these to add an **Update Opportunity** action plus four new actions for editing existing person sub-records — **Update Address**, **Update Phone**, **Update Email**, and **Update Employment**.
* [API reference](/api-reference/overview)
* [Zapier](/setting-up-slant/integrations/zapier)
## Household meetings sort newest-first within each year
The **Meetings** tab on a household now sorts meetings newest-first within each year, alongside the existing newest-year-first grouping (a regression fix).
* [Households overview](/records/households/overview)
# May 26, 2026
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog/2026-05-26
Updates released since May 8, 2026.
## Projects for contacts and businesses
Projects are no longer limited to households. Each project type now has an **Owner kind** — **Household**, **Contact**, or **Business** — that controls what its projects attach to. Start a project from a contact or business page (contacts via the **⋮** menu, businesses via the **Start project** button), and both record types show their work in a **Projects** widget on the overview.
* [Creating projects](/activity/projects/creating-projects)
* [Projects overview](/activity/projects/overview)
* [Project types](/activity/projects/project-types)
* [Businesses](/records/businesses)
* [Other contacts](/records/other-contacts)
## Important information on households
The household **Records** tab now includes an **Important information** section — a free-text note for high-priority context like service preferences or sensitive details to keep top of mind. Type directly in the field; changes save automatically. Available on clients, prospects, and past clients.
* [Household records](/records/households/records-overview)
## Attachments on automation emails
When a workflow's **Send email** action uses an email template, the template's attachments are now carried into the sent email automatically and shown beneath the template in the action editor.
* [Automation actions](/platform/automations/actions)
* [Email templates](/account-settings/customization/email-templates)
## Spanish meeting transcripts
The notetaker now detects the spoken language automatically and transcribes accordingly, including Spanish and meetings that mix Spanish and English. There's nothing to configure.
* [Notetaker](/activity/meetings/notetaker)
## Every notification is clickable
Clicking any notification now opens the record it's about, including comment notifications on projects and other records that previously didn't navigate anywhere.
* [Notifications](/dashboard/notifications)
# June 1, 2026
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog/2026-06-01
Updates released since May 26, 2026.
## Upload and configure your own document templates
You no longer need a Slant representative to set up document templates. Admins can upload a fillable PDF from **Settings** → **Document filler**, and Slant detects its form fields and names them automatically. A full template editor lets you set field labels and requirements, group related checkboxes, show fields conditionally, map fields to household and person data, and define signer roles — all in-house, with AI suggestions along the way.
* [Document filler settings](/records/households/document-filler/settings)
* [Document filler overview](/records/households/document-filler/overview)
* [Filling documents](/records/households/document-filler/filling-documents)
* [Sending for signature](/records/households/document-filler/sending-for-signature)
## Move an opportunity from its card menu
Opportunity cards now have a **Move to stage** option in the **⋮** menu. Open the menu in full view and pick any stage to move the opportunity there immediately — a quick alternative to drag-and-drop.
* [Managing opportunities](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities)
## Project automation triggers
Automations can now start from project events. Three new triggers are available: **Project created**, **Milestone changed**, and **Project completed** — each scoped to the project types you choose.
* [Automation triggers](/platform/automations/triggers)
## Update tasks and add comments from automations
Two new automation actions are now available when an automation runs on a task: **Update task** changes a task's title, description, due date, priority, status, or assignee, and **Add comment** posts a comment to the task. Fields left blank or set to **No change** are untouched.
* [Automation actions](/platform/automations/actions)
## Reconnect expired storage connections
When a connected file-storage provider's sign-in expires, Slant now flags it clearly. The provider card shows a warning and a **Reauthenticate** button, and folder pickers prompt you to reconnect before browsing or linking folders. Reconnecting takes one click and a quick sign-in.
* [File storage](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage)
## Import counts on CSV upload
The CSV import confirmation now shows how many records you're about to import — including the household count for clients and prospects — so you can catch a mis-mapped column before importing.
* [CSV import](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/csv-import)
# June 11, 2026
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog/2026-06-11
Updates released since June 1, 2026.
## Customize meeting types
Meeting types are no longer a fixed list. Slant includes locked default types, and admins can now add custom company-wide meeting types — each with a name, color, and AI description that helps Slant classify meetings and tailor notes and tasks. Manage them from **Settings** → **Data customizations**.
* [Data customizations](/account-settings/customization/data-customizations)
* [Meetings overview](/activity/meetings/overview)
* [Customizing meeting AI](/activity/meetings/customizing-meeting-ai)
## Dialpad phone integration
Dialpad joins RingCentral, CurrentClient, and MyRepChat as a supported phone provider. Connect your Dialpad account to sync SMS conversations and call history — including recordings and transcripts — into Slant.
* [Phone integrations](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone)
## Redesigned custodian settings with in-app release guides
The **Settings** → **Custodian** page has a new look — pick your custodian from the list, enter your advisor code, and follow the new step-by-step guide for releasing your data to Slant. Guides are available for Schwab, Fidelity, Pershing, Interactive Brokers, and DST.
* [Custodian setup](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/setup)
* [Release data: Schwab](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-schwab)
* [Release data: Fidelity](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-fidelity)
* [Release data: Pershing](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-pershing)
* [Release data: Interactive Brokers](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-interactive-brokers)
* [Release data: DST](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-dst)
## Lock notes by default, and pin locked notes
Two improvements to note locking: admins can now have every new note lock automatically from company settings, and locked notes can be pinned without unlocking them first.
* [Households overview](/records/households/overview)
## Phone number extensions
Phone numbers now support extensions. Add an extension when entering a phone number, and it displays alongside the number everywhere it appears — list columns, person pages, and the public API.
* [People](/records/people)
## Notes on financial accounts
The account edit form now includes a **Notes** field, so you can keep free-form context about an account right where you manage its details.
* [Accounts on the Records tab](/records/households/accounts)
## Projects in the public API
The public API now includes endpoints for projects. Other API additions this week: meetings expose their advisors and can be filtered by advisor and meeting type, households can be filtered by type (including past clients), and people support phone extensions.
* [API reference](/api-reference/overview)
## API connections: MCP and Zapier for everyone
The **API tokens** settings page is now **API connections**, with dedicated tabs for personal access tokens, MCP, and Zapier. The MCP connection — previously limited to internal use — is now available to all users, so you can connect Slant to MCP-compatible AI clients.
* [API connections](/account-settings/api-tokens)
# June 15, 2026
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog/2026-06-15
Updates released since June 11, 2026.
## Mail merge
Generate printed letters, envelopes, and labels by filling a Word template with each household's data. Upload a `.docx` template once, then run the merge from a single household or in bulk from the clients or prospects list. Templates can be book-scoped or company-wide, and the settings page shows every supported merge field with live example values.
* [Mail merge](/records/mail-merge)
* [Data customizations](/account-settings/customization/data-customizations)
## Start projects from chat
When the conversation calls for it — for example, after agreeing to begin a money movement or kick off onboarding — chat can propose a project on the linked household. Click **Start project** on the confirmation card to create it, with the project type and starting milestones already set.
* [Household chat](/records/households/chat#start-a-project-from-chat)
* [Meeting chat](/activity/meetings/chat#start-a-project-from-chat)
## Attachments on meetings and projects, plus storage links everywhere
Past meetings and projects now have **Attachments** sections, matching tasks. Anywhere you add an attachment — tasks, projects, meetings, or task templates — you can either upload a file or **Attach from \[provider]** to link a file directly from your connected cloud storage. Slant stores the link, so the file stays in your provider.
* [Meeting review](/activity/meetings/meeting-review#attachments)
* [Managing projects](/activity/projects/managing-projects#attachments)
* [Creating tasks](/activity/tasks/creating-tasks#attachments)
## Records tab on contacts and businesses
Contact and business detail pages now have the same right-sidebar split as households: a primary tab for inline fields, a **Records** tab for custom fields and related records, and a **Comments** tab for the team thread. The Records tab also holds a new **Files** section for linking a cloud storage folder to the contact or business — same flow as households.
* [Other contacts](/records/other-contacts#right-sidebar)
* [Businesses](/records/businesses#right-sidebar)
## Merge contacts
You can now merge two other contacts into one — useful when the same person was entered twice or when consolidating professional relationships. Start from the **...** menu on either contact, or select two contacts in the list and click **Merge** in the selection bar. Slant always asks you to confirm which contact remains before running the merge.
* [Merging contacts](/records/other-contacts#merging-contacts)
## Merge households from the list
Household merge now has a bulk entry point: select two households in **Clients** or **Prospects** and click **Merge** in the selection bar. The dialog opens with an explicit step that asks which household should remain, then continues with the same role-assignment flow as before.
* [Merging households](/records/households/merging-households)
## Add tasks to email threads manually
Email threads already let you generate follow-up tasks with AI. You can now also add a task to a thread yourself — click **Add task** in the thread's **Tasks** section to open the task creation form with the email thread pre-attached.
* [Email threads](/records/households/email#add-a-task-manually-from-a-thread)
* [Creating tasks](/activity/tasks/creating-tasks#create-a-task-from-an-email-thread)
## AI-generated task badge
Tasks created from a meeting or email thread now show a small wand badge once they're accepted into your task list, with a **Generated by AI** tooltip. The badge makes it easy to spot which tasks came from Slant versus the ones you created yourself.
* [Managing tasks](/activity/tasks/managing-tasks#ai-generated-tasks)
# June 19, 2026
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog/2026-06-19
Updates released since June 15, 2026.
## Automatic sign-out
Admins can require users to be signed out after a chosen period of inactivity. Set the policy under **Settings** → **Company profile** → **Automatic sign-out**, with options from 15 minutes to 12 hours or **Never**. When the limit is close, Slant shows a **Still there?** warning before signing the user out.
* [Automatic sign-out](/account-settings/automatic-sign-out)
## Note and comment mention notifications
Mentions in notes now generate a notification just like mentions in comments. Clicking a note mention opens the note on its source record so you can jump straight to the thread.
* [Notifications](/dashboard/notifications)
* [Notification settings](/account-settings/notifications)
## RBC and SEI custodian integrations
RBC and SEI custodial accounts can now sync into Slant. Contact support to set up either custodian for your firm.
* [Custodian integrations](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/overview)
* [Setting up a custodian](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/setup)
## Cross-book related records
Related records can now link to any record in your company, including records that live in another book you can see. The search in the relationship picker spans every book, making it easier to connect households, contacts, and businesses across teams.
* [Related records](/records/households/related-records)
## Cross-book custodian account visibility
The **Linked household** column on the custodian accounts list now shows when an account is linked in another book. If you can see that book, the cell shows the book's name; if not, it reads **Assigned in another book**. You can still link the account in the current book regardless.
* [Custodian accounts](/records/accounts/custodian-accounts)
* [Linking custodian accounts](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/linking)
## Restrict user-reference custom fields to specific teammates
User-reference custom fields now support an allow-list of teammates. Open the field, switch **Selectable users** to **Selected users**, and pick who should appear in the dropdown. The restriction applies everywhere the field is set, including bulk and inline edits.
* [Custom fields](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields#restrict-a-user-reference-field-to-specific-teammates)
## `{{current_date}}` placeholder in mail merge
Mail merge templates can now include `{{current_date}}` to insert today's date in the book's timezone — useful for letterheads and dated correspondence.
* [Mail merge](/records/mail-merge#write-merge-fields)
## Email and calendar sync progress badge
While a freshly connected mailbox is backfilling, the integration card shows a progress badge with separate rings for calendar and email plus a `+N` chip for any additional accounts. Initial syncs can take up to 24 hours depending on the size of your mailbox.
* [Email and calendar integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar)
## Contact roles in Wealthbox import
Wealthbox **Contact roles** now import into household user-reference custom fields, so role assignments like "Financial Planner" or "Attorney" carry over to Slant automatically.
* [Importing from Wealthbox](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/from-wealthbox)
# June 26, 2026
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog/2026-06-26
Updates released since June 19, 2026.
## Opportunities for contacts and businesses
Opportunities are no longer limited to households. You can now add an opportunity to a **contact** or a **business** — each detail page has an **Opportunities** section in its records and an **Opportunities** widget on its overview, matching how households work. When you create an opportunity, you pick its **Related record**, which can be a household, contact, or business. Pipelines now have an **Applies to** setting (**Clients**, **Prospects**, **Contacts**, **Businesses**) so each pipeline can serve the right audience. The pipeline board also gained a search box to filter cards by name, household, or owner, and links from search and record pages now open the board focused on a specific opportunity.
* [Managing opportunities](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities)
* [Pipelines and stages](/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages)
* [Businesses](/records/businesses)
* [Other contacts](/records/other-contacts)
## Recording announcements for the notetaker
You can now have the notetaker play an audible announcement that the meeting is being recorded when it joins. Turn it on under **Settings** → **Notetaker** on the **Company** tab with **Play the recording announcement when notetaker bots join and record meetings**. This helps firms meet recording-consent requirements; the announcement applies to Slant's online-meeting notetaker.
* [Customizing meeting AI](/activity/meetings/customizing-meeting-ai)
## Images in text messages
Incoming picture messages (MMS) now appear inline in the conversation on the **Phone** tab, so you can see images clients send right alongside their texts. Sending from Slant remains text-only. This works across all connected texting providers.
* [Phone and SMS](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone)
## Custom tax type for manual accounts
When adding a manual account, the **Tax type** list now includes an **Other** option. Choose it to enter your own **Tax type label** — such as "Defined benefit plan" — for tax statuses that aren't in the standard list. The custom label shows on the accounts list and is available as a filter.
* [Manual accounts](/records/accounts/manual-accounts)
## Create a project from a meeting
The meeting review **...** menu now includes **Create project**, so you can turn a meeting's follow-ups into a project without leaving the recap. When the meeting is linked to a single household, that household is filled in for you, and a **View project** link takes you straight to the new project.
* [Meeting review](/activity/meetings/meeting-review)
* [Creating projects](/activity/projects/creating-projects)
## Transcript availability follows your retention policy
When a recording-retention policy removes a meeting's generated transcript, the **Download transcript** option is hidden and the transcript area explains it is unavailable due to your retention settings. Firms can set this policy at the broker-dealer level, in which case the book's **Recording retention** controls are locked.
* [Meeting review](/activity/meetings/meeting-review)
## Project actions in the all-books view
When you select **All books** from the book switcher, the **Projects** page aggregates projects across every book you can access — and you can now act on them directly from the project's detail view. Complete milestones, move between milestones, and complete or delete projects without first switching into the project's own book.
* [Managing projects](/activity/projects/managing-projects)
## Clearer sender filter on the email automation trigger
The **Email received** automation trigger now only requires a sender condition when its **Trigger for** setting is **Emails from unknown senders**. If you set it to **Emails from existing contacts**, you can save the automation without adding a **from** address, since it's already scoped to people you know.
* [Automation triggers](/platform/automations/triggers)
# July 6, 2026
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog/2026-07-06
Updates released since June 26, 2026.
## Projects library
**New project type** now opens the **Projects library** — a gallery of ready-made project types you can install instead of building from scratch. Each card shows a title, description, and sometimes a cover image, and already-installed types are marked with an **Installed** badge. Pick a card to preview its milestones, answer any setup questions (like who should handle the work — a person, an existing team, or a new team), and click **Install** to land in the new type's editor. Installing from the **Company** tab makes the type available company-wide (admins only), while installing from a book tab adds it to that book. You can still choose **Start from scratch** to build your own.
* [Project types](/activity/projects/project-types)
* [Project types settings](/account-settings/customization/project-types)
## Task templates without due dates
The due date on a task template is now optional. Choose **No due date** in the **Due in** selector and tasks created from the template are created without a due date — whether the template is used for manual task creation, project milestones, sequence steps, or recurring tasks.
* [Task templates](/activity/tasks/task-templates)
## Filter meetings by source
The **All meetings** tab has a new **Meeting source** filter, so you can narrow the list by how each meeting was created: **Calendar**, **Logged**, **Imported**, **Instant**, **Mobile app**, or **Phone call**. The **Source** column reflects the same six sources.
* [Meetings overview](/activity/meetings/overview)
## Cancelled meetings are hidden
Meetings cancelled on your calendar no longer appear in meeting lists — the **Meetings** page and the **Meetings** tab on household, other contact, and business records. For a recurring series, cancelling a single occurrence hides just that occurrence.
* [Meetings overview](/activity/meetings/overview)
* [Calendar](/dashboard/calendar)
## Access levels for shared inboxes
Sharing your connected inbox is no longer all-or-nothing. Each teammate you share with now has an **Access level**: **Read only** (view email from the inbox) or **Read and send** (also send and reply from it). New shares default to **Read only**, and only inboxes you own or have **Read and send** access to appear when choosing which inbox to send from.
* [Email and calendar](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar)
* [Household email](/records/households/email)
* [Bulk email](/records/bulk-email)
## AI summaries survive retention cleanup
When your recording-retention policy removes a meeting's video and transcript, the AI summary and meeting notes are now kept — and the meeting stays on the **Processed** tab instead of dropping out of your lists.
* [Meeting review](/activity/meetings/meeting-review)
* [Customizing meeting AI](/activity/meetings/customizing-meeting-ai)
## Bulk import businesses from a CSV
The CSV importer now supports a **Business** record type alongside prospects, contacts, clients, and notes. Each row creates one business, with fields for the business name, industry, website, tax ID, contact details, an address, tags, custom fields, and an attached note. The **Update existing records** option matches businesses by email address, just like other record types.
* [CSV import](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/csv-import)
* [Businesses](/records/businesses)
## Choose household roles when filling documents
When filling a document for a household, you can now choose which household member fills each role. The **Head of household** and **Spouse/partner** selections are pre-filled from the household and control whose information lands in the corresponding fields on the PDF — swap them, or set spouse/partner to **None**.
* [Filling documents](/records/households/document-filler/filling-documents)
## Birthday nudges show the date
Client birthday nudges now show the birthday's date in the nudge header, plus a timing label — **Today**, **Tomorrow**, **Yesterday**, or how many days ago it was — so you can spot missed birthdays at a glance.
* [Daily overview](/dashboard/daily-overview)
## Current date template variable
Email templates have a new **Current date** variable that fills in the date the email is sent, formatted like "June 18, 2026" in your book's timezone. Company variables — like your company name — now also fill in on email drafts that tasks generate automatically.
* [Email templates](/account-settings/customization/email-templates)
# July 10, 2026
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog/2026-07-10
Updates released since July 6, 2026.
## Build reports with filters
**New report** now asks how you'd like to create the report: **Build with a prompt** (describe the records you want in plain language) or the new **Build with filters** (choose a record type, fields, and filters). Filter reports work for **Client**, **Prospect**, **Other contact**, and **Business** records. Unlike prompt-built reports, filter reports are live — they always show current data, and you can reopen one from the reports list to change its filters and columns. Report results are also now clickable: select a record's name in the results to open its details.
* [Reports](/platform/reports)
## Edit a repeating task's schedule
You can now change how often a task repeats without stopping and recreating the recurrence. Click the recurrence badge in the task detail panel to open **Edit repeating cadence**, adjust when it starts, how often it repeats, and when it ends, then click **Update cadence**. Tasks already in your task list keep their dates — future occurrences follow the new schedule.
* [Recurring tasks](/activity/tasks/recurring-tasks)
## Meeting type badges on the calendar
Calendar events with a **Meeting type** now show a color-coded badge with the type's name — both on the event block and in the event details. The badge color matches the color set for that meeting type, so you can scan your week by meeting type at a glance.
* [Calendar](/dashboard/calendar)
## Accept or reject suggested tasks from the detail panel
AI-suggested tasks awaiting review now show **Accept** and **Reject** buttons at the top of the task detail panel, so you can act on a suggestion while looking at its full details — not just from the source record.
* [Managing tasks](/activity/tasks/managing-tasks)
* [Tasks overview](/activity/tasks/overview)
## Past clients in search
Past clients now appear in global search. Search an archived client's name, email, or phone in the command palette (⌘K) — results are labeled **Past client** and open the past client's record.
* [Past clients](/records/clients/past-clients)
## Clear custom field values in bulk
The bulk **Update custom field** action now supports every field type — including link fields — and has a new **Clear value** option that removes the field's value from every selected record instead of setting a new one.
* [Custom fields](/records/households/custom-fields)
## Tables in task template descriptions
Task template descriptions now support tables. Click **Insert table** in the description editor to add one, and hover any row or column for controls to insert or delete rows and columns.
* [Task templates](/activity/tasks/task-templates)
## Full account numbers in project forms
Project form fields that ask for a custodian account now show the full account number next to the account name, instead of just the last four digits, making it easier to pick the right account.
# July 17, 2026
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog/2026-07-17
Updates released since July 10, 2026.
## Build client reports around people
Filter-based client reports can now show one row per household or one row per individual person. After choosing **Client**, answer **Who should each row represent?** with **Households** or **People**. People-based reports include person fields, filters, columns, and CSV downloads.
* [Reports](/platform/reports)
## Control access to sensitive meetings
Admins and book principals can make eligible past notetaker meetings private. Open the meeting's **...** menu, choose **Make private**, then select who should retain access in **Meeting privacy**. The book principal always keeps access, while excluded users no longer see the meeting in lists, activity, chat results, or reports.
Some processed recordings also offer **Reprocess with AI**, a one-time action that replaces the transcript and regenerates meeting notes.
* [Meeting review](/activity/meetings/meeting-review)
* [Meetings overview](/activity/meetings/overview)
## Import Wealthbox pipelines and opportunities
The Wealthbox import wizard now has an **Import workflows / opportunities** step. Along with importing workflows as projects, you can turn on **Import opportunities** to create pipelines, stages, linked opportunities, standalone opportunities, and their comments from current Wealthbox data.
* [Importing from Wealthbox](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/from-wealthbox)
## Configure projects more completely from automations
The automation **Start project** action now supports **Project name**, **Assigned to**, and form fields from the project's first milestone. Values can include data supplied by the trigger. Chat-triggered runs that still need a required value provide a **Complete project setup** link before starting the project.
Project management also has two workflow improvements: **Duplicate** now copies a project type within its current company or book scope, and completing a milestone with open tasks shows the remaining count plus a **Mark open tasks as complete** option.
* [Automation actions](/platform/automations/actions#start-project)
* [Project types](/activity/projects/project-types#duplicate-a-project-type)
* [Managing projects](/activity/projects/managing-projects#complete-a-milestone)
## Track multiple values in one custom field
The new **Multi select** custom field type lets you choose several values from a defined option list. Values display as pills and work with inline editing, bulk updates, filters, reports, and the public API.
* [Custom fields](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields)
## Standardize household names and shared addresses
Admins can set **Default household name** under **Settings** → **Company settings**, with formats ranging from **John Smith Household** to **The Smith Family**. You can customize an individual household's name or return it to the company convention with **Use default name**.
Household members can also select **Same as head of household** for their address. Slant displays the head's current address without maintaining a duplicate copy.
* [Households overview](/records/households/overview#default-household-names)
* [People](/records/people#personal-information)
## Trigger automations for age milestones
Use the new person trigger **Age milestone** for living heads of household, spouses, and partners in client households who are approaching a selected age. Choose a standard or custom milestone and a look-ahead window from **Week** through **4 weeks**; Slant evaluates the automation on Monday at 8 AM in the book's timezone.
* [Automation triggers](/platform/automations/triggers#age-milestone)
## Email improvements for records
Business records now have an **Emails** tab for viewing threads and composing messages. Email lists also hide calendar invitations by default; click **Show calendar invites** when you need to include them.
* [Businesses](/records/businesses#tabs)
* [Household email](/records/households/email#view-a-thread)
## Clearer multi-book CSV exports
Client and prospect household CSVs and business report CSVs downloaded from **All books** now include a **Book** column, making each exported record's source clear. People CSVs do not include this column, and full ZIP exports remain book-specific.
* [Exporting your data](/setting-up-slant/exporting-your-data#csv-download)
## Book chat prompt snippets
Prompt snippets can now use the **Book** chat type, so reusable prompts are available in book-level chat alongside the existing client, prospect, and meeting options.
* [Prompts](/account-settings/customization/prompts)
## More improvements
* Failed SMS messages now offer **Retry** from the conversation.
* Public API notes can be updated, and task create/update requests support labels.
# August 3, 2026
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog/2026-08-03
Updates released since July 17, 2026.
## Build automations with chat
The automation editor now includes **Automation chat**, an assistant that builds the automation with you. Describe what you want and it sets up the trigger, adds and updates actions, sets conditions and branches, and references your tags, sequences, and pipelines by name — you watch the changes appear on the canvas. Everything it does stays in the draft until you click **Publish**. Automations you start from scratch open with chat ready to go.
* [Building automations](/platform/automations/building-automations#build-with-automation-chat)
## Test an automation before turning it on
Use **Test automation** in the automation editor to run the latest published version against a single record you choose, so you can confirm the behavior before enabling it. Test runs perform real actions and appear in run history like any other run.
* [Building automations](/platform/automations/building-automations#test-an-automation)
* [Run history](/platform/automations/run-history)
## Ask book chat across all your books
If you belong to more than one book, select **All books** in the book switcher and open the **Book chat** tab on Home to ask questions that span every book you belong to. Each record in an answer shows its book, company-level items appear once, and chat asks which book to use when you create something. Reports created here belong to your company, and cohorts can hold records from across books.
* [Book chat](/dashboard/book-chat#all-books)
## Share, duplicate, and test intake forms
A form's **More form actions** menu now lets you duplicate a form, open its version history, and copy an install link that lets another advisor add a copy of the form to their own book with their branding. You can also send yourself a test invitation to experience a published form exactly as a client would, without saving a submission.
Forms can now be sent automatically too: the **Send intake form** automation action emails a published form to a household with optional automatic reminders, and the public API and Zapier support sending forms from your other tools.
* [Publishing and sharing](/platform/intake-forms/publishing-and-sharing#share-a-form-with-another-advisor)
* [Creating and editing forms](/platform/intake-forms/creating-and-editing-forms)
* [Sending invitations](/platform/intake-forms/sending-invitations)
## A more powerful reports page
The reports page is now a full table like clients and prospects — search, filter by record type, definition, last run, or run count, sort columns, and save custom views. Filter reports can also target **Past client** records.
* [Reports](/platform/reports#the-reports-table)
* [Data views](/records/data-views)
## Meetings across all books
Selecting **All books** in the book switcher now shows the full meetings page — tabs, filters, search, and the details panel — with each meeting labeled by its book. The previous limited events view is gone.
* [Meetings overview](/activity/meetings/overview#all-books)
## Know when an account transfers out
Slant now notifies everyone in a book when a linked custodian account leaves your data feed or drops to \$0, so transfers out never slip by unnoticed. Currently supported for Schwab feeds. Control the email with the **Account departures** setting.
* [Notifications](/dashboard/notifications)
* [Notification settings](/account-settings/notifications)
## Switch between firms
If your firm is part of a larger organization and you have access to more than one firm's Slant account, your firms now appear at the top of the account menu — select one to switch your entire workspace.
* [Users and teams](/account-settings/users-and-teams#switching-between-firms)
# August 10, 2026
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog/2026-08-10
Updates released since August 3, 2026.
## Filter tasks on a client or prospect
The **Tasks** tab on client and prospect pages now has its own filters. Filter by **Assigned to** and **Project**, or select **Filter** to add **Priority**, **Label**, **Due date**, and **Collaborator** filters.
* [Managing tasks](/activity/tasks/managing-tasks#filter-tasks-on-a-client-or-prospect)
* [Household overview](/records/households/overview)
## Save meeting views with feed layouts
Custom views on the meetings page now include a **Layout** picker — **Upcoming**, **Processed**, or **All** — so you can save card-feed views, not just tables. Creating a view from the Upcoming or Processed tab carries your current filters into it.
* [Meetings overview](/activity/meetings/overview#custom-views)
* [Data views](/records/data-views)
## Dismiss form submissions
Intake form submissions now show a status — **Applied**, **Dismissed**, or **Needs review** — and you can dismiss a submission to clear it from the review queue without applying it. Dismissed submissions stay in all submissions and can be moved back to needs review.
* [Reviewing submissions](/platform/intake-forms/reviewing-submissions#dismiss-a-submission)
## More intake form improvements
Duplicate a form straight from the forms table, let the AI name new forms with a specific title drawn from your description or attached document, and see sent invitations and received submissions in the activity feed. When a connected scheduler offers multiple meeting locations, clients now choose a **Meeting location** while booking.
* [Creating and editing forms](/platform/intake-forms/creating-and-editing-forms)
* [What clients see](/platform/intake-forms/what-clients-see)
## Create an opportunity with a new prospect
When creating a prospect, check **Also create an opportunity** to add the opportunity in the same step — pipeline, stage, value, target close date, and more.
* [Prospects](/records/prospects)
* [Managing opportunities](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities)
## Move opportunities between pipelines
Move an opportunity to another pipeline from its card menu. Only pipelines that support the linked record's type are offered.
* [Managing opportunities](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities#move-an-opportunity-to-another-pipeline)
## See a prospect's last touchpoint
The prospects list has an optional **Last touchpoint** column, and each prospect's page shows the date of the last meeting, email, text, or call — select it to open the source record.
* [Prospects](/records/prospects)
## Separate voices recorded on one device
If several people shared one microphone in a recorded meeting, use **Reprocess speakers** to enter who was in the room and get a transcript with real names instead of numbered speakers. Meetings recorded in person or from the mobile app can now also be made private.
* [Meeting review](/activity/meetings/meeting-review#reprocess-speakers)
## Mention teammates in notes
Typing `@` in a note now suggests teammates as well as records. Mentioned teammates get a notification.
* [Household overview](/records/households/overview)
* [Notification settings](/account-settings/notifications)
## Label your RingCentral numbers
Give each RingCentral number a label so senders are easy to tell apart, and set a **Default SMS sender** — or choose **Ask each time** — when you have more than one texting-capable number.
* [Phone integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone)
## Record ownership retired
The owner field on clients, prospects, and contacts has been removed, along with the **Change owner** bulk actions. Tasks, projects, and opportunities keep their own assignees.
## Other improvements
* A new **Important information** widget on the household overview holds free-form notes you always want in view.
* Household tags wrap to two rows, with the rest behind a **+N more** button.
* The calendar remembers your last view (day, 3 day, work week, or full week).
* Opportunity pipeline columns load as you scroll, and stage totals now cover the whole stage.
# August 17, 2026
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog/2026-08-17
Updates released since August 10, 2026.
## Write and reuse SMS templates
Create company-wide or book-specific SMS templates under **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Templates**. Add variables for contacts, households, senders, and custom fields, then apply a template from the Phone tab and personalize it before sending.
* [SMS templates](/account-settings/customization/sms-templates)
* [Phone and SMS](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone#send-an-sms)
## Connect Slant to MCP clients
Connect Claude, ChatGPT, or another MCP-compatible client to Slant's remote MCP server. Sign in with your Slant account instead of creating or copying an API token.
* [API connections](/account-settings/api-tokens#connect-an-mcp-client)
## Edit project types with chat
Open project type chat to describe changes to settings, milestones, tasks, outcomes, and form inputs. Chat follows the part of the editor you are viewing and can reuse milestones from other accessible project types. The project types page now combines company and book project types in one searchable table.
* [Project types](/activity/projects/project-types)
## Apply intake submissions with more control
Public-link submissions can now be linked to an existing client or prospect, or used to create either record type. Before applying, choose which household member receives each group of answers, match or add submitted people, and map other answers to the right record fields.
* [Reviewing submissions](/platform/intake-forms/reviewing-submissions#apply-a-submission)
## Manage notes in bulk
Select unlocked notes in table view to add a label or delete them together. You can also drag files into the note editor to attach them.
* [Notes](/records/notes)
## Use RingSense transcripts in Slant
RingCentral calls with RingSense transcripts now show a **Transcript** badge on the Phone tab, even when no recording is available. Open the call to search the transcript; RingSense call notes also appear on the call card when Slant can identify the record.
* [Phone and SMS](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone#call-recordings-and-transcripts)
## Connect Vonage Business Communications
Slant admins can connect an eligible Vonage Business Communications account and choose which extensions sync call history and recordings into each book. Vonage creates the required VBC API application only for clients with more than 50 users.
* [Phone and SMS](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone#vonage-business-communications)
## Link related custodian accounts together
When you manually link a custodian account to a household, Slant can suggest other unlinked accounts with the same primary related-party name. Review the preselected accounts and link the ones that belong to the same household.
* [Linking custodian accounts](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/linking#manual-linking)
## Choose sequence recipients
When enrolling a household, add team members and choose **To**, **CC**, **BCC**, or **None** for each recipient. Automation actions can use the same recipient mapping.
* [Managing sequence enrollments](/platform/sequences/managing-enrollments#enroll-a-household)
## Run scheduled automations for report audiences
Recurring automations can now run once for every record in a selected report. Slant refreshes the report when the schedule fires and starts a separate run for each matching record.
* [Automation triggers](/platform/automations/triggers#recurring)
## Connect Zoom Scheduler
Zoom Scheduler is now available under **Settings** → **Scheduling**. Connect a licensed Zoom user, choose compatible event types, and let intake-form respondents book an available time.
* [Scheduling integrations](/setting-up-slant/integrations/scheduling)
## Customize book icons
Give each book an icon made from initials, an emoji, or an uploaded image so books are easier to recognize throughout Slant.
* [Book profile](/account-settings/book-profile#book-icon)
## More routine settings for every user
Company members can now manage more everyday configuration without an admin, including templates, project types, pipelines, labels and tags, meeting types, nudges, document filler templates, and shared record layouts. Full company data exports are now limited to admins; list-page CSV downloads are unchanged.
* [Data customizations](/account-settings/customization/data-customizations)
* [Exporting your data](/setting-up-slant/exporting-your-data)
## More workflow improvements
Import current Redtail opportunities with their pipeline and stages, and preserve Wealthbox event comments on imported event notes. You can also require DocuSign phone verification, start a new form-builder chat, delete never-used sequences from the sequence list, and save the two engagement sections independently.
Outgoing replies now remain visible while they send, and Slant prevents deletion of email templates that are still in use.
* [Importing from Redtail](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/from-redtail#import-opportunities)
* [Importing from Wealthbox](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/from-wealthbox)
* [DocuSign](/setting-up-slant/integrations/docusign#require-phone-verification)
* [Creating intake forms](/platform/intake-forms/creating-and-editing-forms#edit-a-form)
* [Creating sequences](/platform/sequences/creating-sequences#delete-a-sequence)
* [Engagement settings](/account-settings/customization/engagement)
* [Household email](/records/households/email#view-a-thread)
* [Email templates](/account-settings/customization/email-templates#delete-an-email-template)
# August 31, 2026
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/changelog/2026-08-31
Updates released since August 17, 2026.
## Track insurance policies and trusts
Browse insurance policies and trusts from the expanded **Accounts** navigation. Insurance records capture life and property and casualty details, while trusts support company-defined custom fields and saved list views.
* [Insurance policies](/records/accounts/insurance-policies)
* [Trusts](/records/households/trusts)
## Add SMS steps to sequences
Add automated SMS steps alongside email and task steps in a sequence. Enrollment now collects the phone sender required for those messages.
* [Creating sequences](/platform/sequences/creating-sequences)
## Build and manage intake-form workflows
Review form mappings, choose who receives submission notifications, share a form across books, send forms to multiple clients, edit invited drafts, download responses, analyze aggregated answers, and save submissions as notes. File-only submissions can still be applied or saved as a note when there are no mapped field changes.
* [Creating and editing forms](/platform/intake-forms/creating-and-editing-forms)
* [Publishing and sharing forms](/platform/intake-forms/publishing-and-sharing#choose-form-notification-recipients)
* [Reviewing submissions](/platform/intake-forms/reviewing-submissions)
## Set project deadlines, milestone order, and conditional tasks
Projects now use saved views that can be renamed, reordered, and shared across the company. Create table views for custom project lists or Kanban views that organize a selected project type by milestone.
Projects can also carry their own due date. Project types can calculate task deadlines from milestone form dates, require teams to complete milestones in order, and create tasks only when household details or earlier form responses match the task's conditions.
* [Creating projects](/activity/projects/creating-projects)
* [Pipeline view](/activity/projects/pipeline-view)
* [Project types](/activity/projects/project-types)
## Expand automations and task workflows
Automations can find a household project, move it to a milestone, run when a client becomes a past client, and limit meeting triggers by meeting type. Add note actions can apply labels, AI research steps can be named, and company-wide recurring automations can use company reports across selected books.
Action subtrees can be moved on the canvas. Monthly tasks can repeat by weekday pattern, the task list can filter recurring work, and pending AI task recommendations can be accepted or rejected in bulk.
* [Automation actions](/platform/automations/actions)
* [Automation triggers](/platform/automations/triggers)
* [Recurring tasks](/activity/tasks/recurring-tasks)
* [Managing tasks](/activity/tasks/managing-tasks#ai-generated-tasks)
## Respect household timezones
Household timezones now guide recipient-facing schedules, including sequence steps, intake-form reminders, and scheduled emails. Each user can also choose the timezone for their daily digest.
* [Households overview](/records/households/overview)
* [Notification settings](/account-settings/notifications)
## Improve meeting privacy and phone workflows
Company admins can keep internal meetings private by default so only attendees and the book principal can access them. You can also add instructions when reprocessing a meeting with AI, attach files or paste images into comments throughout Slant, and optionally create meetings from matched transcribed phone calls.
* [Customizing meeting AI](/activity/meetings/customizing-meeting-ai)
* [Meeting review](/activity/meetings/meeting-review)
* [Phone and SMS](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone)
## Work through email threads faster
Long email threads collapse older middle messages behind **View additional messages** and separate the conversation from follow-up tasks. Set a default signature for each connected account and a separate signature for any sendable alias.
* [Household email](/records/households/email#view-a-thread)
* [Email and calendar](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar#email-signature)
## Add more context to client records
The **Household** tab brings client dates, the last touchpoint, and the last meeting together. Set a client-specific touchpoint cadence, reuse company relationship labels, and see a calculated age beside a person's date of birth.
* [Households overview](/records/households/overview#household-details)
* [Client reviews](/records/clients/reviews)
* [Related records](/records/households/related-records)
* [People](/records/people)
## Improve custodian connections and account status
Altruist now appears in the primary custodian list in **Settings** → **Custodian**. Save new Altruist advisor codes without a separate verification step while Slant completes feed registration.
Connect Pershing directly to Slant with your IBD and Investment Professional number for nightly data. Custodian accounts can also show a custodian-reported closure date and be filtered by **Open** or **Closed** status.
* [Set up custodian integrations](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/setup)
* [Connect Pershing](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-pershing)
* [Custodian accounts](/records/accounts/custodian-accounts)
## Configure company identity and communication defaults
Set a default country for new addresses and phone numbers, choose your preferred sending number for each phone connection, manage brand assets, and replace the last-page disclosure language used across generated deliverables.
* [Company settings](/account-settings/company-settings)
* [Brand kit](/account-settings/brand-kit)
* [Phone and SMS](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone)
## Move and filter records with more control
Organization admins can copy selected records into another eligible company with explicit field mappings. Filter reports can repeat eligible conditions and use expanded multi-value operators.
* [Data management](/records/data-management)
* [Reports](/platform/reports)
# Glossary
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/glossary
Definitions of key terms used throughout Slant.
Quick reference for terms you'll encounter across Slant.
## Core concepts
| Term | Definition |
| ----------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Book** | Your workspace in Slant. All clients, tasks, meetings, and data are organized within a book. Each book has a principal (the advisor who owns it) and can be shared with team members. |
| **Household** | A family unit in Slant — either a [client](/records/clients/overview) or a [prospect](/records/prospects). Contains a head of household and optional members like a spouse or dependents. |
| **Client** | An active, paying household. Clients have service tiers, AUM tracking, review schedules, and access to the full range of Slant features. |
| **Prospect** | A potential household being cultivated. Shares the same structure as a client but can be [promoted to a client](/records/prospects#promote-a-prospect-to-a-client) when they become a paying customer. |
| **Other contact** | A professional relationship that isn't a client or prospect — CPAs, attorneys, referral sources, or other centers of influence. |
| **Business** | An organization or company record. Businesses can be linked to households and other contacts. |
| **Person** | An individual within a household or other contact. Each person has their own contact details, role (head of household, spouse, dependent), and profile. |
## Relationship terms
| Term | Definition |
| --------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Head of household** | The primary person in a household. Every household must have exactly one head of household — typically the main client contact. |
| **Service tier** | A priority level assigned to clients. Default tiers are A (highest), B, C, and D (lowest). Tiers drive filtering, review cadences, and touchpoint goals. Books can customize tier labels and add up to 8 tiers. |
| **AUM** | Assets under management. The total value of financial assets managed on behalf of a client. Tracked automatically via [custodian integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/overview) or entered manually. |
| **Review cadence** | How often you meet with a client for formal reviews. Options include monthly, quarterly, trimesterly, semi-annual, and annual. Configured in [engagement settings](/account-settings/customization/engagement). |
| **Touchpoint** | Any interaction with a client between formal reviews — emails, calls, meetings, or messages. Slant tracks touchpoints automatically from your connected integrations. |
| **Principal** | The advisor who owns a book. Each book has one principal whose name and initials appear on the book. |
## Activity terms
| Term | Definition |
| --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Task** | A to-do item that can be assigned to a team member, given a due date, and linked to a household or other record. Tasks can be created manually, from templates, or automatically by meetings, sequences, and automations. |
| **Meeting** | A calendar event that Slant tracks. The [notetaker](/activity/meetings/notetaker) can join online meetings to record, transcribe, and generate summaries and action items. |
| **Project** | A structured workflow with milestones, tasks, and optional outcomes. Projects are based on [project types](/activity/projects/project-types) and help you manage multi-step processes like client onboarding or annual reviews. |
| **Opportunity** | A potential deal or revenue event tracked through a [pipeline](/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages). Opportunities have a value, probability, expected close date, and move through stages. |
| **Note** | A text record attached to a household or other contact. Notes support rich text formatting including tables, and can be created from [templates](/account-settings/customization/note-templates). |
## Automation terms
| Term | Definition |
| ---------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Automation** | A rule that triggers automatically based on events (like a task being completed or a meeting ending) and executes actions (like creating a task or sending an email). See [automations](/platform/automations/overview). |
| **Sequence** | A timed series of automated emails and tasks for prospect nurturing or client follow-up. When a recipient responds to an email or books time on your calendar, they are automatically removed from the sequence. See [sequences](/platform/sequences/overview). |
| **Scouting** | An AI-powered tool that searches over 300 million professional profiles to find people matching a description you provide in plain English. Matching profiles can be imported directly as prospects. See [scouting](/platform/scouting). |
| **Magic button** | A special automation trigger that appears as a clickable button on household and meeting records. Clicking it runs the automation immediately — no event needed. See [magic buttons](/platform/automations/magic-buttons). |
## Integration terms
| Term | Definition |
| ------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Custodian** | A financial institution that holds client assets (e.g., Schwab, Fidelity, Pershing). Slant integrates with custodians to automatically sync account data and balances. |
| **Notetaker** | An AI bot that joins your online meetings, records them, and generates transcripts, summaries, and recommended tasks. See [notetaker](/activity/meetings/notetaker). |
## Interface terms
| Term | Definition |
| ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Sidebar** | The navigation panel on the left side of Slant. Use it to switch between pages like clients, tasks, meetings, and settings. |
| **Command palette** | A quick-access search bar opened with `Cmd + K` (Mac) or `Ctrl + K` (Windows). Search for records, navigate to pages, or run actions. The preview pane shows household member details — name, role, email, and phone — each with a **copy** icon. |
| **Quick actions** | Keyboard shortcuts for creating records quickly. Press `C` followed by a letter to create a specific record type (e.g., `C` then `T` for a new task). |
## Data terms
| Term | Definition |
| ---------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Custom field** | A user-defined data field added to households, people, businesses, or opportunities. Custom fields let you track data specific to your practice. See [custom fields](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields). |
| **Tag** | A label applied to households or businesses for categorization and filtering. See [labels and tags](/account-settings/customization/labels-and-tags). |
| **Label** | A color-coded category applied to tasks, notes, or opportunities. See [labels and tags](/account-settings/customization/labels-and-tags). |
| **Data view** | A saved configuration of columns, filters, and sort order on a list page. Each view can be customized independently. See [data views](/records/data-views). |
| **Pipeline** | A series of stages that opportunities move through. Pipelines can be scoped to prospects, clients, or both. See [pipelines and stages](/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages). |
| **CSV import** | A way to bring data into Slant by uploading a CSV file. Supports importing clients, prospects, other contacts, and notes. See [CSV import](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/csv-import). |
# International support
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/international-support
How Slant handles international phone numbers, addresses, and currency.
Slant supports international clients and teams across phone numbers, mailing addresses, and currency custom fields. The interface itself is currently English-only.
## Phone numbers
Every phone input in Slant — on [people](/records/people), [other contacts](/records/other-contacts), and [businesses](/records/businesses) — supports international formats. A country flag icon next to the input lets you switch the country code; the field formats the number in the selected country's standard layout as you type.
## Addresses
Addresses are not limited to U.S. formats. The country selector next to the **State** field on any address input lets you choose a country, and the surrounding labels and validation adapt to that country's conventions.
## Currency
When you create a **Number** [custom field](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields) with the **Currency** format, you can pick from:
* **US Dollar (USD)**
* **Euro (EUR)**
* **Australian Dollar (AUD)**
* **Canadian Dollar (CAD)**
The chosen currency is fixed for that field — every record uses the same denomination. To track values in two different currencies, create separate custom fields, one per currency.
# Keyboard shortcuts
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/keyboard-shortcuts
A reference of keyboard shortcuts available in Slant.
Keyboard shortcuts let you navigate Slant and perform common actions without reaching for the mouse. Shortcuts work from any page unless noted otherwise.
Press `?` from anywhere in Slant to open the help chat.
## Navigation
Press `g` followed by a second key to jump to a page.
| Shortcut | Action |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------- |
| `g` then `h` | Go to [Home](/dashboard/home) |
| `g` then `t` | Go to [Tasks](/activity/tasks/overview) |
| `g` then `m` | Go to [Meetings](/activity/meetings/overview) |
| `g` then `j` | Go to [Projects](/activity/projects/overview) |
| `g` then `d` | Go to [Opportunities](/activity/opportunities/overview) |
| `g` then `c` | Go to [Clients](/records/clients/overview) |
| `g` then `p` | Go to [Prospects](/records/prospects) |
| `g` then `o` | Go to [Other contacts](/records/other-contacts) |
| `g` then `q` | Go to [Sequences](/platform/sequences/overview) |
| `g` then `b` | Go to [Book chat](/dashboard/book-chat) |
| `g` then `s` | Go to book settings |
## Create
Press `c` followed by a second key to create a new record.
| Shortcut | Action |
| ------------ | ----------------------------------------------------- |
| `c` then `t` | Create a new [task](/activity/tasks/creating-tasks) |
| `c` then `n` | Create a new note |
| `c` then `c` | Create a new [client](/records/clients/overview) |
| `c` then `p` | Create a new [prospect](/records/prospects) |
| `c` then `o` | Create a new [other contact](/records/other-contacts) |
| `c` then `e` | Compose an email |
## Global
| Shortcut | Action |
| ------------------ | --------------------------------- |
| `Cmd+K` / `Ctrl+K` | Open the command palette |
| `?` | Open help chat |
| `Cmd+O` / `Ctrl+O` | Start or stop voice transcription |
## Tasks page
These shortcuts are available on the [Tasks](/activity/tasks/overview) page and task detail view.
| Shortcut | Action |
| -------------------------- | ----------------------------------------- |
| `Shift` | Toggle multi-select mode |
| `Escape` | Exit multi-select mode or clear selection |
| `Cmd+Enter` / `Ctrl+Enter` | Toggle task completion (in task detail) |
| `J` | Next task (in task detail) |
| `K` | Previous task (in task detail) |
## Opportunities page
These shortcuts are available on the [Opportunities](/activity/opportunities/overview) pipeline board.
| Shortcut | Action |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------- |
| `Space` | Pick up or drop an opportunity card |
| `Arrow keys` | Move a picked-up opportunity between stages |
# Security
Source: https://docs.slant.app/help/security
How Slant protects your data with encryption, access controls, and compliance certifications.
Slant is built for financial advisors who handle sensitive client information every day. Security and data protection are foundational to how we build and operate the platform.
For full compliance documentation, visit the [Pageport Trust Center](https://compliance.pageport.com).
## SOC 2 compliance
Slant maintains SOC 2 compliance, verified through independent audits. SOC 2 reports are available under NDA — contact your Slant representative or reach out to [support@slant.app](mailto:support@slant.app) to request a copy.
## Encryption
All data is encrypted both in transit and at rest:
* **In transit** — all connections use TLS 1.2 or higher. Every request between your browser and Slant is encrypted.
* **At rest** — data stored in our databases and cloud infrastructure is encrypted using AES-256.
* **Key management** — encryption keys are managed through a dedicated key management service (KMS) with strict access controls and rotation policies.
## Infrastructure
Slant is hosted on U.S.-based cloud infrastructure with:
* **Access controls** — multi-factor authentication (MFA) is required for all internal access to production systems
* **Log management** — all access to production systems is logged and monitored
* **Encryption key access** — restricted to authorized personnel only
* **Asset management** — production inventory is maintained and portable media is encrypted
## Data handling
* **Data ownership** — you retain ownership of all your data stored in Slant
* **Data deletion** — customer data is deleted upon account termination
* **Data classification** — we maintain a data classification policy to ensure appropriate handling based on sensitivity
* **Data retention** — data is retained consistent with the purpose of collection and applicable legal requirements
* **No selling of data** — your data is never sold or rented to third parties
## AI and data privacy
Slant uses AI features throughout the platform, including meeting transcription, summaries, and chat. Important safeguards:
* **Google data isolation** — data from Google integrations (Gmail, Google Calendar) is strictly isolated and only used for providing the agreed-upon services. It is never used for AI model training.
* **Anonymization** — any data used for improving AI models is aggregated and anonymized so it cannot identify individual customers or their clients.
## Incident response
Slant maintains an internal incident response program with defined procedures and SLAs for identifying, responding to, and communicating about security incidents.
## Reporting a security issue
If you discover a security vulnerability or have concerns about data security, contact us at [max@slant.app](mailto:max@slant.app). We take all reports seriously and will respond promptly.
## Additional resources
* [Pageport Trust Center](https://compliance.pageport.com) — compliance documentation and certifications
* [Privacy policy](https://www.slant.app/privacy-policy) — how we collect, use, and protect your data
* [Terms of service](https://www.slant.app/terms-of-service) — service terms and data handling obligations
# Introduction
Source: https://docs.slant.app/index
Welcome to Slant, the relationship CRM for fiduciaries.
Slant is an AI-first CRM built for financial advisors. It helps you spend more time with clients and less time on administrative work. With Slant, you can:
* Chat with your CRM to draft emails, prep agendas, and automate outreach
* Get proactive nudges to strengthen client relationships
* Record meetings and get automatic summaries and action items
* Keep client processes on track with pipelines, projects, and automations
## Who Slant is for
Slant is designed for small-to-mid-size advisory firms:
* **Financial advisors** — Manage client relationships and grow your practice
* **Operations managers** — Configure integrations, manage data, and oversee automations
* **Client service associates (CSAs)** — Handle day-to-day client interactions and tasks
## Core concepts
Your workspace in Slant. Think of it like a Slack workspace — all your clients, tasks, and data live within your book.
A family unit you serve. Every household is either a **Client** (active customer) or **Prospect** (potential customer).
An individual within a household. Each household has a head of household, and may include a spouse or partner, dependents, and other family members.
A professional relationship that isn't a client — CPAs, attorneys, referral sources, and other centers of influence.
## Core features
Ask questions, draft emails, create tasks, and analyze files using a conversational AI assistant.
Query across your entire book to build reports, run calculations, and create new records.
Automated processes that trigger based on events, create tasks, send notifications, and update records.
Create reusable, AI-generated queries that return fresh results from your book's data anytime you need them.
Prepare for meetings, record notes, create summaries, and assign post-meeting tasks.
Track action items from meetings, notes, and automations across your book.
Track prospects through your pipeline and forecast new business.
Manage your clients, prospects, other contacts, and businesses in one place.
## Next steps
Bring your existing client data into Slant
Key terms and definitions
# Actions
Source: https://docs.slant.app/platform/automations/actions
Reference for all automation action types — the steps an automation performs.
Actions are the steps your automation performs after a trigger fires. You can chain multiple actions together, and each action runs in sequence. Some actions provide data to later actions — for example, **Create opportunity** makes the new opportunity available to subsequent steps.
When you add an action, choose from six categories: Household, Task, Opportunity, AI, Flow, and System.
## Household actions
These actions operate on the household associated with the triggering record.
### Add tag
Add a tag to the household.
| Field | Description |
| ------- | -------------------------------- |
| **Tag** | Required. Select the tag to add. |
### Remove tag
Remove a tag from the household.
| Field | Description |
| ------- | ----------------------------------- |
| **Tag** | Required. Select the tag to remove. |
### Add note
Add a note to the household record.
| Field | Description |
| ----------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Content** | Required. The note content. Supports markdown formatting and dynamic variables. |
| **Label** | Optional. Select a note label to apply to the created note. |
### Add comment
Add a comment to the household.
| Field | Description |
| ----------- | --------------------------- |
| **Content** | Required. The comment text. |
### Send email
Send an email to the household. Only one send email action is allowed per branch path.
| Field | Description |
| --------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Email integration** | Required. Select which connected email account to send from. |
| **Recipients** | Required. Choose who receives the email. For each person (head of household, spouse/partner), select **To**, **CC**, **BCC**, or **None**. Default: head of household as **To**. |
| **Email content** | Required. Optionally select an email template, then set the subject line and body. The body editor supports dynamic variables like `{{person.preferred_name}}`. If the selected template has attachments, they appear beneath the template and are automatically included with the sent email. |
### Send SMS to client
Send a text message to people in the household. Only one SMS action is allowed per branch path.
| Field | Description |
| ------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **SMS integration** | Required. Select which connected phone integration to send from. |
| **Recipients** | Required. Toggle which people receive the message: head of household and/or spouse/partner. Default: head of household only. |
| **Message** | Required. The message text. Supports dynamic variables like `{{person.preferred_name}}`. |
### Create opportunity
Create a new [opportunity](/activity/opportunities/overview) for the household. The created opportunity becomes available to later actions.
| Field | Description |
| --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Name** | Required. The opportunity name. |
| **Pipeline** | Optional. Select a pipeline. If left empty, the default pipeline for the household type is used. |
| **Value** | Optional. The opportunity value in dollars. |
| **Probability** | Optional. Win probability from 0–100. |
### Find opportunity
Find the most recently updated opportunity for the household. The found opportunity becomes available to later actions (such as **Move to stage**).
| Field | Description |
| ------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Pipeline** | Optional. Limit the search to a specific pipeline. If left empty, all pipelines are searched. |
### Add to sequence
Enroll the household in a [sequence](/platform/sequences/overview).
| Field | Description |
| ----------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Sequence** | Required. Select the sequence to enroll the household in. |
| **Recipients** | Choose **To**, **CC**, **BCC**, or **None** for household roles, and add team members when needed. At least one recipient must be **To**. |
| **Send SMS from** | Required when the sequence contains SMS steps. Choose the connected phone integration that sends the messages. |
### Remove from sequence
Remove the household from a sequence.
| Field | Description |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Sequence** | Required. Select a specific sequence, or remove from all sequences. |
### Start project
Start a [project](/activity/projects/overview) from a template. When the trigger provides a household, the project belongs to that household. A recurring automation configured to run **Once per book** creates a book-level project without a related household.
| Field | Description |
| ---------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Project type** | Required. Select the project type to create. |
| **Project name** | Optional. Enter a name or use dynamic variables. Leave blank to use the project type's default name. |
| **Assigned to** | Optional. Choose a user. Leave blank to assign the project to the book's principal. |
If the selected project type's first milestone has form fields, they appear below the action settings. Enter fixed values or insert data supplied by the trigger. When a chat-triggered run is still missing a required value, Slant provides a **Complete project setup** link instead of starting an incomplete project.
### Find project
Find the most recently updated project for the household. The found project becomes available to later actions such as **Move to milestone**.
| Field | Description |
| -------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Project template** | Required. Limit the search to projects created from this project type. |
### Promote to client
Promote a prospect household to a client. This action has no configuration fields — it promotes the household directly.
## Task actions
### Create task
Create a new [task](/activity/tasks/overview). The task is linked to the household or record associated with the trigger.
| Field | Description |
| --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Title** | Required. The task name. |
| **Description** | Optional. A longer description. Supports markdown formatting. |
| **Due in** | Required. When the task is due: same day, 1–3 days, 5 days, 1 week, 2 weeks, or 1 month. Default: 1 day. |
| **Priority** | Optional. Set the priority: low, medium, high, or urgent. |
| **Label** | Optional. Apply a task label to the created task. |
| **Assigned to** | Optional. Assign the task to a specific user, a team, or a user-reference [custom field](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields) on the household (for example, a **Servicing advisor** field). The picker groups options under **Users**, **Teams**, and **User reference fields**. |
| **Email draft** | Optional. Pre-stage an email draft on the task. Choose **AI prompt** to write a free-text prompt that guides an AI-generated email, or **Email template** to pick from existing templates. Only one source can be set per task. |
**How user-reference custom field assignment resolves at run time.** When the automation runs, Slant picks the assignee in this order:
1. If you chose a specific **user**, the task is assigned to that user.
2. If you chose a **user-reference custom field**, Slant reads that field off the household and assigns the task to whoever is set there.
3. If the custom field is blank on the household, the task is created with no assignee.
This lets one automation assign tasks to the right team member per household — for example, always routing to each household's servicing advisor.
### Update task
Update the task in the automation's context (for example, the task from a task trigger). Every field is optional — only the fields you set are changed, and any field left blank or set to **No change** leaves the task unchanged.
| Field | Description |
| --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Title** | Optional. The new task name. Leave blank to keep the current title. |
| **Description** | Optional. The new description. Supports markdown formatting and dynamic variables. |
| **Due in** | Optional. When the task is due: same day, 1–3 days, 5 days, 1 week, 2 weeks, or 1 month. Defaults to **No change**. |
| **Priority** | Optional. Set the priority: low, medium, high, or urgent. Defaults to **No change**. |
| **Status** | Optional. Set the status: to do, done, or rejected. Defaults to **No change**. |
| **Assigned to** | Optional. Reassign the task to a specific user, a team, or a user-reference [custom field](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields) on the household. The picker groups options under **Users**, **Teams**, and **User reference fields**. |
This action requires a task in the automation's context. It is available when the automation starts from a task trigger.
### Add comment
Add a comment to the task in the automation's context.
| Field | Description |
| ----------- | ------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Comment** | Required. The comment text. Supports dynamic variables. |
## Opportunity actions
These actions require an opportunity in context — either from an opportunity trigger or from a previous **Create opportunity** or **Find opportunity** action.
### Move to stage
Move the opportunity to a specific pipeline stage.
| Field | Description |
| ------------ | ---------------------------------- |
| **Pipeline** | Required. Select the pipeline. |
| **Stage** | Required. Select the target stage. |
### Add comment
Add a comment to the opportunity.
| Field | Description |
| ----------- | --------------------------- |
| **Content** | Required. The comment text. |
## Project actions
These actions require a project in context from a project trigger, **Start project**, or **Find project**.
### Move to milestone
Move the project to a milestone in its project type.
| Field | Description |
| ------------- | ------------------------------------------- |
| **Milestone** | Required. Select the destination milestone. |
Project types with **Require milestones in order** enabled cannot skip ahead past the next milestone.
## AI actions
AI actions use artificial intelligence to process data, make decisions, and generate content. Input quality directly affects output quality — be specific in your prompts and descriptions.
### Categorize
Use AI to sort a record into one of your defined categories. Returns the selected category, a confidence score (0–100), and the reasoning behind the choice.
| Field | Description |
| ----------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Record type** | Required. The type of record to categorize: household, contact, task, opportunity, meeting, or person. |
| **Categorization mode** | Required. Choose **Custom categories** (define your own list) or **Object field options** (use the existing options from a field on the record). |
| **Field** | Required if using object field options. Select which field's options to use as categories. |
| **Categories** | Required if using custom categories. Define category names and optional descriptions. |
### Filter
Use AI to evaluate whether a record meets criteria you describe in plain language. Records that match continue through the automation; records that don't are stopped.
| Field | Description |
| --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Record type** | Required. The type of record to evaluate: household, task, opportunity, meeting, or person. |
| **Criteria** | Required. Describe the criteria for records to continue through the automation. |
### Draft email
Use AI to generate an email draft from a Household or Meeting **Magic button** automation. The action returns a subject line and HTML body that you can use in subsequent actions.
**Draft email** is available only with a **Magic button** trigger under Household or Meeting. **Meeting scheduled** and other automatic triggers cannot create an AI email draft, even when they provide household or meeting data.
With a Meeting Magic button, the meeting must be linked to a client or prospect before the action can create a draft. A linked other contact or business does not satisfy this requirement.
| Field | Description |
| --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Record type** | Required. A Household Magic button can reference the household. A Meeting Magic button can reference the household or meeting. |
| **Prompt** | Required. Describe the email you want. Data from the associated record is automatically included as context. |
### Research
Use AI to look up information and return a summary. The AI has access to web search and other research tools.
| Field | Description |
| ------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Step name** | Optional. Name the research step so its results are easier to identify in later variable pickers. |
| **Subject** | Required. The type of record to research: household, task, opportunity, or meeting. |
| **Query** | Required. Describe what you want to learn. Information about the record is automatically included as context. |
### Parse and create contact
Extract contact information from an email or meeting and create a new record. Only one parse action is allowed per branch path. Requires an email or meeting in the automation context.
| Field | Description |
| ---------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Type of record to create** | Required. Choose **Client**, **Prospect**, or **Contact**. Default: prospect. |
| **Additional instructions** | Optional. Additional instructions for the AI when parsing the contact information. |
When the record type is **Client** or **Prospect**, the AI also extracts a spouse or partner if one is mentioned and adds them to the same household. Words like "wife" or "husband" mark the second person as a spouse, and "partner", "domestic partner", or "fiancé" mark them as a partner.
## Flow actions
Flow actions control the execution path of your automation.
### Branch
Split the automation into conditional paths. Each branch can have its own conditions, and records flow down the first branch whose conditions match. A default branch catches records that don't match any other path.
| Field | Description |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Branches** | Required. Define branches with names and condition groups. Each branch can have its own sequence of actions. |
After adding a branch action, each branch path appears as a separate column on the canvas. Add actions to each branch independently.
### Wait
Pause the automation for a specified duration before continuing to the next action.
| Field | Description |
| ----------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Wait duration** | Required. Enter a number. |
| **Unit** | Required. Choose **Seconds**, **Minutes**, **Hours**, or **Days**. |
The maximum wait time is 30 days.
## System actions
### Internal notification
Send a notification to team members via email or SMS. Use this to alert your team about important events.
| Field | Description |
| ----------------- | ------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Message type** | Required. Choose **Email** or **SMS**. Default: email. |
| **To / CC / BCC** | For email: enter email addresses for each field. |
| **Email content** | For email: set the subject and body. |
| **SMS to** | For SMS: enter phone numbers. |
| **SMS body** | For SMS: enter the message text. |
### Create task
Create a new task — see [Task actions](#task-actions) above. This action appears in both the Task and System categories.
### Confetti
Trigger a confetti celebration on screen for selected team members.
| Field | Description |
| ----------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Users** | Required. Select which team members see the celebration. |
| **Style** | Required. Choose **Fireworks**, **Raining**, or **Cannons**. Default: fireworks. |
| **Message** | Optional. A celebration message to display. |
## FAQ
Yes. Some actions provide data to later steps — for example, **Create opportunity** makes the opportunity available, and AI actions provide their results as variables. You can reference these outputs using dynamic variables in text fields.
Some actions need a specific record type in context to work. For example, **Move to stage** requires an opportunity. If your trigger doesn't provide one, add a **Create opportunity** or **Find opportunity** action earlier in the automation.
An action may be unavailable if the trigger or record context is incompatible, or if a "one per branch" action (like Send email) has already been added to the current branch path. For example, **Draft email** requires a Household or Meeting **Magic button** trigger. Hover over the action to see why it's disabled.
There is no hard limit on the number of actions. However, longer automations are harder to debug — keep workflows focused on a single purpose when possible.
# Building automations
Source: https://docs.slant.app/platform/automations/building-automations
Create, configure, publish, and manage automations in the visual builder.
Automations are built on a visual canvas where you connect a trigger to one or more actions. The canvas shows your automation as a flowchart — the trigger at the top, followed by each action in sequence.
## Create an automation
Go to **Automations** in the sidebar.
Click **New automation** in the top-right corner. The **New automation** dialog opens with a gallery of templates. Browse them all under **All templates**, or narrow by category: **Back office**, **Magic button**, **Prospecting**, and **Reviews & touch points**. Pick a template, or choose **Start from scratch** to begin with a blank canvas. If you have an unsaved draft from a previous session, you'll be asked whether to continue editing or start fresh.
Click the trigger node on the canvas. The edit panel opens on the right. Choose a trigger type and fill in its settings — see [Triggers](/platform/automations/triggers) for details on each type.
Click the action placeholder below the trigger to open the action picker. Actions are organized by category: Household, Task, Opportunity, AI, Flow, and System. Select an action and configure its fields in the edit panel.
After configuring an action, a new placeholder appears below it. Click it to add the next action. Repeat until your workflow is complete.
Click **Publish automation** in the bar at the bottom of the canvas. Enter a name for your automation and click **Publish**.
Your automation is now live and will run whenever its trigger fires.
## Build with automation chat
Automation chat is an assistant built into the editor. Describe the workflow you want in plain language and it builds it on the canvas for you.
Choosing **Start from scratch** opens the editor with chat already open. To open or close it later, click the speech-bubble button at the top-left of the canvas — the tooltip reads **Open chat**.
The panel is titled **Automation chat**. Your edits appear on the canvas as chat makes them, so you can watch the automation take shape and adjust anything by hand.
### What chat can do
* **Set up the trigger** — choose the trigger type and fill in its settings
* **Add, update, and remove actions** — including placing an action on a specific path of a branch
* **Set conditions and branches** — write the filter conditions that decide which records continue
* **Look up your data by name** — reference your tags, sequences, pipelines, and other book resources without hunting for IDs
* **Change automation settings** — update the name, whether the automation is active, and which books it runs in
Chat edits the draft only. It cannot publish, run, or delete an automation. Every change it makes — including turning the automation on — stays in the draft until you click **Publish** yourself.
### Start a new conversation
Click the plus button in the panel header — its tooltip reads **New chat** — to start a fresh thread. Past threads stay available in the panel's thread history, so you can return to an earlier conversation and pick up where you left off.
Describe the outcome rather than the mechanics — "when a prospect is tagged hot lead, create a follow-up task for me due in two days" gives chat more to work with than "add a task action."
## Test an automation
Testing runs your automation against one record you choose, so you can confirm it behaves the way you expect before it starts running on its own.
The **Test automation** button only appears on automations that have been published and whose trigger supports testing.
Click the automation on the list page to open the editor.
The button is in the top-right corner of the editor, next to the **Enable automation** toggle.
Pick the record to run against. The field is labeled for the record type your trigger uses — **Test client**, **Test task**, **Test meeting**, and so on. For email triggers, also choose the book under **Run in book**.
Click **Run automation**.
The run appears in the automation's [run history](/platform/automations/run-history) alongside its normal runs, where you can open it and review each action.
A test performs real actions. It sends real emails and text messages, and it changes real records — exactly as a live run would. Choose your test record accordingly.
Two other things to know: the test runs the last published version, so unpublished changes in the editor are not included, and trigger conditions are bypassed, so the automation runs even if the record wouldn't normally qualify.
## The automation canvas
The canvas is where you visually build your automation. It displays:
* **Trigger node** — the event that starts the automation (always at the top)
* **Action nodes** — the steps that run in sequence
* **Branch nodes** — conditional paths that split the flow (see [Branch](/platform/automations/actions#branch))
* **Note nodes** — free-form annotations you can add anywhere on the canvas for your own reference
Use the toolbar in the bottom-left corner to zoom in, zoom out, or fit the entire automation to the screen. You can also add note nodes from the toolbar.
## The edit panel
Clicking any node on the canvas opens the edit panel on the right side. The panel shows:
* The node's type, icon, and description
* Configuration fields for the trigger or action
* A switch button to change to a different trigger or action type
* A delete button to remove the node
Switching a trigger or action type replaces its configuration. Your previous settings for that node are not preserved.
## Edit an automation
Click any automation on the automations list page to open it in the editor.
Click any node to edit it, add new actions, or delete existing ones. The publish bar at the bottom indicates you have unpublished changes.
Click **Publish changes** in the bottom bar. Your updates take effect immediately.
To undo your changes, click **Discard** in the bottom bar. The automation reverts to the last published version.
### Move an action
Open an action node's menu and click **Move**. The builder highlights valid destinations and shows **Move here** where the action subtree can be placed. Click **Cancel move** to exit without changing the flow.
Some destinations are unavailable when moving the action would break the automation's record context or branch rules.
## Enable or disable an automation
Toggle the **Active** switch to enable or disable an automation without deleting it. You can toggle it from two places:
* **Automations list page** — the **Active** column has a toggle for each automation
* **Automation editor** — the toggle is in the top-right corner, labeled **Enable automation**
Disabled automations keep their configuration but do not run.
## Delete an automation
Click the automation on the list page to open the editor.
Click the **Settings** tab.
In the **Danger zone** section, click **Delete automation**. Type the automation name to confirm.
Deleting an automation permanently removes it and all its run history. This cannot be undone.
## Rename an automation
Open the automation and click the **Settings** tab.
Update the **Name** field and click **Save**.
## Duplicate an automation
Open the automation's **Settings** tab and click **Duplicate**. In **Duplicate automation**, choose the **Destination book** and confirm.
You can duplicate into the same book or another book you can access. The copy is independent and starts inactive. Same-book copies retain book-specific settings; cross-book copies clear settings that cannot be carried into the destination.
## Share an automation across books
If your company has multiple books, you can run the same automation in more than one book. Sharing is configured in the **Sharing** section of the automation's **Settings** tab.
The **Sharing** section only appears for company admins. Standard users can edit automations in their own books but cannot change which books an automation runs in.
### Apply to all books in the company
Toggle **Apply to all books in company** on to share the automation with every book in your company. New books added later are included automatically — no need to revisit the setting when you add a book.
### Share with specific books
When **Apply to all books in company** is off, the **Share with specific books** list appears below the toggle. Check the books you want this automation to run in. Uncheck a book to stop the automation from running there.
An automation cannot be set company-wide if it references book-specific resources — book-level tags, sequences, email integrations, book-level pipelines, book-level project types, and similar. Remove or replace those references first, then enable the toggle.
Company-wide pipelines and company-wide project types are allowed in **Create opportunity**, **Find opportunity**, **Move to stage**, and **Start project** actions on a company-wide automation. Only book-level pipelines and project types block the company-wide toggle.
## Drafts
When you start building a new automation, your work is saved as a draft automatically. If you leave the editor before publishing, the draft is preserved. The next time you click **New automation**, you'll be asked:
* **Continue editing** — reopen your draft where you left off
* **Start fresh** — discard the draft and start with a blank canvas
Drafts are per-user — other team members won't see your unpublished drafts.
## Validation
The publish bar shows validation errors if your automation has issues. Common validation messages include:
* Missing required fields on a trigger or action node
* Nodes that are not fully configured
Click the node with the error to see which fields need attention. You cannot publish until all validation errors are resolved.
## FAQ
Yes. Open the automation's **Settings** tab and choose **Duplicate**. You can create an independent copy in the same
book or another book you can access. Copies start inactive so you can review settings before enabling them.
Yes. The automation builder supports real-time collaboration — multiple team members can view and edit the same automation simultaneously.
No. Chat only edits the draft. The published version keeps running until you review the canvas and click **Publish**.
The automation has not been published yet, or its trigger doesn't support testing. Publish the automation first, then reopen the editor.
Runs that are already in progress continue using the version that was active when they started. Your changes only apply to new runs after you publish.
## Next steps
See every trigger type and how to configure it.
See every action type and how to configure it.
# Magic buttons
Source: https://docs.slant.app/platform/automations/magic-buttons
Add custom trigger buttons to household and meeting records.
Magic buttons are a special type of automation trigger that adds a custom button directly to a record. When someone on your team clicks the button, the automation runs immediately for that record — no event needed.
This is useful for on-demand workflows that your team runs manually, like kicking off a client onboarding process, requesting a review, or sending a standard follow-up.
## How magic buttons work
When you create an automation with a magic button trigger, the button appears on every record that matches the trigger's configuration. For example, a household magic button set to **Client** appears on all client records.
Each button has a title, description, and an icon with a color you choose. Your team sees these buttons as quick actions on the record.
## Create a magic button automation
Go to **Automations** and click **New automation**.
Click the trigger node and choose **Magic button** under the Household or Meeting category.
Fill in the button details:
* **Household type** (household only) — choose **Prospect** or **Client**
* **Title** — the label shown on the button (e.g., "Request review")
* **Description** — a short explanation of what the button does (e.g., "What does this button do?")
* **Icon and color** — pick a visual identifier for the button
Add the actions you want to run when the button is clicked, just like any other automation.
Click **Publish automation**, name it, and click **Publish**.
The button now appears on all matching records.
## Where magic buttons appear
* **Household magic buttons** appear on client or prospect records, depending on the household type you selected
* **Meeting magic buttons** appear on meeting records
A magic button only shows on a record when the underlying automation is enabled in that record's book. If the automation is shared with some of your books but not others, the button appears only on records that live in the shared books — not on every record you can view. See [Share an automation across books](/platform/automations/building-automations#share-an-automation-across-books) to control which books an automation runs in.
## Household vs. meeting magic buttons
| | Household | Meeting |
| ------------------ | ------------------------------------ | -------------- |
| **Household type** | Required — choose Prospect or Client | Not applicable |
| **Description** | Required | Optional |
| **Icon and color** | Required | Optional |
## FAQ
Yes. Each magic button automation creates its own button. You can have as many as you need on the same record type.
The button is removed from records and no longer appears as a quick action. Re-enable the automation to bring it back.
Any team member with access to the book can click magic buttons on records they can view.
Magic buttons only appear on records in books where the automation is enabled. If you have access to multiple books and the automation is shared with some of them but not others, the button shows only on records in the shared books. Open the automation's **Settings** tab and check the **Sharing** section to add or remove books.
## Next steps
Learn how to build and publish automations.
See all the actions you can add after a magic button trigger.
# Overview
Source: https://docs.slant.app/platform/automations/overview
Automate repetitive tasks with triggers, actions, and conditions.
Automations run tasks for you when something happens in Slant — a new client is created, a meeting is scheduled, a birthday is approaching, or any other event you define.
Each automation has two parts: a **trigger** (the event that starts it) and one or more **actions** (what happens next). You build automations visually on a canvas, connecting triggers to actions in the order you want them to run. If you'd rather describe what you want than build it by hand, [automation chat](/platform/automations/building-automations#build-with-automation-chat) assembles the automation for you.
## What you can automate
Automations work across the records you manage every day:
* **Households** — tag clients, add notes, send emails or texts, enroll in [sequences](/platform/sequences/overview), start [projects](/activity/projects/overview), create [opportunities](/activity/opportunities/overview), and more when a household is created, tagged, or promoted
* **Tasks** — react when tasks are created or completed
* **Meetings** — trigger workflows when meetings are scheduled or completed, or set up reminders before upcoming meetings
* **Opportunities** — respond when opportunities are created or move between pipeline stages
* **Reminders** — send birthday wishes, prepare for annual reviews, follow up on touchpoints, or act on any custom date field
## Triggers
A trigger defines when an automation runs. Slant offers 17 trigger types across five categories:
* **Record events** — household created, tag added, prospect promoted, task created/completed, meeting scheduled/completed, opportunity created/stage moved
* **Reminders** — birthday, client review, client anniversary, touchpoint, custom date, and meeting reminders with configurable lead times
* **Email** — run an automation when an email is received
* **Magic buttons** — add a custom button to household or meeting records that runs the automation on demand
See [Triggers](/platform/automations/triggers) for the full reference.
## Actions
Actions are the steps your automation performs. Slant offers actions in six categories:
* **Household** — add/remove tags, add notes or comments, send emails or SMS, create opportunities, start projects, enroll in or remove from sequences, promote prospects to clients
* **Task** — create tasks with configurable due dates, priority, and assignees
* **Opportunity** — move opportunities between pipeline stages, add comments
* **AI** — categorize records, filter based on criteria, draft emails from Household or Meeting Magic buttons, research topics, and parse emails or meetings to create new contacts
* **Flow** — add wait steps, create conditional branches that route records down different paths
* **System** — send internal notifications, trigger confetti celebrations for your team
See [Actions](/platform/automations/actions) for the full reference.
## Conditions and branches
You can add filter conditions to triggers so automations only run for records that match specific criteria — for example, only clients in a certain tier or only tasks with a specific label.
[Branch](/platform/automations/actions#branch) actions let you split an automation into conditional paths. Each branch has its own set of conditions, and a default branch handles records that don't match any other path.
## Magic buttons
[Magic buttons](/platform/automations/magic-buttons) are a special trigger type that adds a custom button directly to household or meeting records. When someone on your team clicks the button, the automation runs immediately for that record. This is useful for on-demand workflows like requesting a review or kicking off a client onboarding process.
## Testing before you go live
Once an automation is published, you can run it against a single record you choose to confirm it behaves the way you expect. See [Test an automation](/platform/automations/building-automations#test-an-automation).
A test performs real actions, including sending real emails and text messages and changing real records.
## Run history
Every automation tracks its run history, including success rates, durations, and individual action results. Use the [run history](/platform/automations/run-history) tab to monitor performance, diagnose failures, and stop running automations.
## Dynamic content
Actions that send emails, SMS, or add notes support dynamic variables using the `{{placeholder}}` format. Variables pull data from the triggering record — for example, `{{person.preferred_name}}` inserts the contact's preferred name. Available variables depend on the trigger type and any previous actions in the automation.
## FAQ
There is no limit on the number of automations you can create per book.
Yes. Automation chat sets up the trigger, adds and configures actions, and writes branch conditions from a plain-language description. It edits the draft only — you review the canvas and publish. See [Build with automation chat](/platform/automations/building-automations#build-with-automation-chat).
Yes, once it's published. Click **Test automation** in the editor and pick one record to run against. The test performs real actions, so choose the record carefully. See [Test an automation](/platform/automations/building-automations#test-an-automation).
Yes. Toggle the **Active** switch off on the automations list page or in the automation editor. The automation keeps its configuration but stops running until you re-enable it.
The run is marked as failed and no further actions execute. You can view the failure details in the [run history](/platform/automations/run-history) tab to diagnose the issue.
Yes. If multiple automations have triggers that match the same event, they all run independently.
Yes. Company admins can share an automation with specific books or apply it company-wide. See [Share an automation across books](/platform/automations/building-automations#share-an-automation-across-books).
## Next steps
Step-by-step guide to creating an automation from scratch.
See every trigger type and its configuration options.
See every action type and its configuration options.
# Run history
Source: https://docs.slant.app/platform/automations/run-history
Monitor automation performance, view run details, and diagnose failures.
Every automation tracks a complete history of its runs — when they started, whether they succeeded or failed, how long they took, and what each action did. Use the run history tab to monitor performance and troubleshoot issues.
## View run history
Click any automation on the automations list page.
Click the **Run history** tab at the top of the editor.
The run history tab has two sections: a performance graph at the top and a table of individual runs below.
## Performance graph
The graph shows successful and failed runs over time. Toggle between three time periods:
* **24h** — the last 24 hours
* **7 days** — the last week
* **30 days** — the last month
Below the graph, summary stats show:
* **Total** — total number of runs in the period
* **Success** — number of successful runs
* **Error rate** — percentage of runs that failed
* **Avg duration** — average time to complete a run
## Run table
The table lists each individual run with the following columns:
* **Status** — whether the run is active, finished (successful), failed, or waiting
* **Triggered at** — when the run started
* **Triggered for** — the record that triggered the automation
* **Duration** — how long the run took to complete
* **Actions performed** — how many actions ran
Click **View actions** on any row to see what happened in each step.
Runs you start with **Test automation** appear in this table like any other run, with the same status, duration, and action details. See [Test an automation](/platform/automations/building-automations#test-an-automation).
### Sort runs
Click the column headers to sort by **Status** or **Triggered at**. Runs are sorted by most recent by default.
## View run details
Go to the automation's **Run history** tab.
Click **View actions** on the run you want to inspect. A panel opens showing each action that ran.
Each action shows its status (finished, failed, active, or waiting), linked records, notes about what happened, and any errors.
## Stop a running automation
If an automation is currently running and you need to stop it:
Open the automation's **Run history** tab and locate the run with an **Active** or **Waiting** status.
Click the stop button on the run row. Confirm that you want to stop it.
The run is marked as failed and any remaining actions are skipped.
## Activity chart on the list page
The automations list page shows an aggregate activity chart across all your automations. This chart displays the last 30 days of runs, with green bars for successful runs and red bars for failures.
Each automation row also shows:
* **Status** — the result of the most recent run and when it happened
* **Total runs** — total runs in the last 7 days
* **Success rate** — percentage of successful runs in the last 7 days
## FAQ
Yes. Failed runs can be retried within 24 hours. The retry picks up from the last failed action.
Run history is kept indefinitely. You can delete all run history from the automation's **Settings** tab under **Danger zone**.
A run shows as waiting when it has reached a [Wait](/platform/automations/actions#wait) action and is paused for the configured duration. It will resume automatically.
# Triggers
Source: https://docs.slant.app/platform/automations/triggers
Reference for all automation trigger types — the events that start an automation.
A trigger defines when an automation runs. Every automation has exactly one trigger. When the trigger's conditions are met, the automation starts and runs through its actions in order.
Most triggers support an optional **filter group** — a set of conditions that narrow which records activate the automation. For example, a "Household created" trigger can be filtered to only fire for clients in a specific tier.
## Household triggers
### Household created
Runs when a new household is created.
| Field | Description |
| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Household type** | Required. Choose **Prospect** or **Client**. |
| **Filter** | Optional. Add conditions to narrow which households trigger the automation. |
### Tag added
Runs when a tag is added to a household.
| Field | Description |
| ---------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Tags** | Required. Select one or more tags. The automation fires when any of the selected tags is added. |
| **Filter** | Optional. Add conditions to narrow which households trigger the automation. |
### Prospect promoted to client
Runs when a prospect is promoted to a client.
| Field | Description |
| ---------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Filter** | Optional. Add conditions to narrow which households trigger the automation. |
### Client archived to past client
Runs when a client is archived as a past client.
| Field | Description |
| ---------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Filter** | Optional. Add conditions to narrow which households trigger the automation. |
### Magic button (household)
Adds a custom button to household records. The automation runs when someone clicks the button. See [Magic buttons](/platform/automations/magic-buttons) for details.
| Field | Description |
| ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Household type** | Required. Choose **Prospect** or **Client**. |
| **Title** | Required. The label shown on the button. |
| **Description** | Required. A short explanation of what the button does. |
| **Icon and color** | Required. Choose an icon and color for the button. |
## Task triggers
### Task created
Runs when a new [task](/activity/tasks/overview) is created.
| Field | Description |
| ---------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Filter** | Optional. Add conditions to narrow which tasks trigger the automation. |
### Task completed
Runs when a task is marked as completed.
| Field | Description |
| ---------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Filter** | Optional. Add conditions to narrow which tasks trigger the automation. |
## Meeting triggers
### Meeting scheduled
Runs when a new [meeting](/activity/meetings/overview) is scheduled.
| Field | Description |
| ---------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Meeting type** | Optional. Limit the automation to one or more [meeting types](/activity/meetings/overview#meeting-types). Leave empty to run for every type. |
| **Filter** | Optional. Add conditions to narrow which meetings trigger the automation. |
### Meeting completed
Runs when a meeting is marked as completed.
| Field | Description |
| ---------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Meeting type** | Optional. Limit the automation to one or more [meeting types](/activity/meetings/overview#meeting-types). Leave empty to run for every type. |
| **Filter** | Optional. Add conditions to narrow which meetings trigger the automation. |
### Magic button (meeting)
Adds a custom button to meeting records. See [Magic buttons](/platform/automations/magic-buttons) for details.
| Field | Description |
| ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Title** | Required. The label shown on the button. |
| **Description** | Optional. A short explanation of what the button does. |
| **Icon and color** | Optional. Choose an icon and color for the button. |
## Opportunity triggers
### Opportunity created
Runs when a new [opportunity](/activity/opportunities/overview) is created.
| Field | Description |
| ---------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Filter** | Required. Must include a pipeline condition so the automation only fires for opportunities in a specific pipeline. |
### Stage moved
Runs when an opportunity moves to a different stage.
| Field | Description |
| ---------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Filter** | Required. Must include a pipeline condition so the automation only fires for opportunities in a specific pipeline. |
## Project triggers
### Project created
Runs when a new [project](/activity/projects/overview) is started.
| Field | Description |
| ---------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Project type** | Required. Select one or more project types. The automation fires when a new project of any selected type is created. |
### Milestone changed
Runs when a project moves into a milestone.
| Field | Description |
| --------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Project type** | Required. Select one or more project types. |
| **Milestone entered** | Required. Select one or more milestones. Options are limited to the milestones in the selected project types. |
### Project completed
Runs when a project is marked complete.
| Field | Description |
| ---------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Project type** | Required. Select one or more project types. The automation fires when a project of any selected type is completed. |
## Reminder triggers
Reminder triggers fire at a configurable number of days (or other interval) before a date-based event. They are useful for proactive outreach — birthday cards, review preparation, follow-ups.
### Birthday reminder
Runs a set number of days before a person's birthday.
| Field | Description |
| ---------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Timing** | Required. Choose when to trigger: same day, 1–3 days before, 5 days before, 1 week before, 2 weeks before, or 1 month before. Default: 1 week before. |
| **Filter** | Optional. Add conditions to narrow which people trigger the automation. |
### Age milestone
Runs on Monday at 8 AM in the book's timezone for living household leaders in client households who will reach a selected age within the look-ahead window. Household leaders include the head of household, spouse, and partner.
| Field | Description |
| ---------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Age milestone** | Required. Choose a common milestone age or enter a custom age up to 125. Half-year ages are supported. |
| **For all clients in the next...** | Required. Choose **Week**, **2 weeks**, **3 weeks**, or **4 weeks**. Default: **Week**. |
| **Continue if...** | Optional. Add conditions to narrow which eligible household leaders trigger the automation. |
### Client review reminder
Runs before a client's annual review date.
| Field | Description |
| ---------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Timing** | Required. Choose when to trigger: 1 week, 2 weeks, 3 weeks, 1 month, 2 months, or 3 months before. Default: 2 weeks before. |
| **Filter** | Optional. Add conditions to narrow which households trigger the automation. |
### Client anniversary reminder
Runs before a client's anniversary date.
| Field | Description |
| ---------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Timing** | Required. Choose when to trigger: same day, 1–3 days before, 5 days before, 1 week before, 2 weeks before, or 1 month before. Default: 1 week before. |
| **Filter** | Optional. Add conditions to narrow which households trigger the automation. |
### Client touchpoint reminder
Runs relative to a client's next touchpoint due date.
| Field | Description |
| ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Timing** | Required. Choose when to trigger: same day, 1–3 days before, 5 days before, 1 week before, or 2 weeks before. Default: same day. |
| **Filter** | Optional. Add conditions to narrow which households trigger the automation. |
### Client custom date reminder
Runs relative to a date stored in a custom date field on the household. This lets you create reminders for any date you track — tax deadlines, policy renewals, or other important dates.
| Field | Description |
| ---------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Custom field** | Required. Select which date custom field to use. |
| **Recurrence** | Required. Choose **Annual** (triggers every year on the same month and day) or **Exact date** (triggers once on the specific date). Default: annual. |
| **Timing** | Required. Choose when to trigger: same day, 1–3 days before, 5 days before, 1 week before, 2 weeks before, or 1 month before. Default: 1 week before. |
| **Filter** | Optional. Add conditions to narrow which households trigger the automation. |
### Meeting reminder
Runs before a scheduled meeting.
| Field | Description |
| ---------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Timing** | Required. Choose when to trigger: 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, 24 hours, morning of, 1–3 days before, 5 days before, 1 week before, 2 weeks before, or 3 weeks before. Default: 1 hour before. |
| **Meeting type** | Optional. Limit the automation to one or more [meeting types](/activity/meetings/overview#meeting-types). Leave empty to run for every type. |
| **Filter** | Optional. Add conditions to narrow which meetings trigger the automation. |
## System triggers
### Recurring
Runs an automation on a schedule using each selected book's timezone. The automation can run once for the book or once for every matching record in a report.
| Field | Description |
| --------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Frequency** | Required. Choose **Every week**, **Every month**, or **Every year**. Default: every month. |
| **Month** | For yearly schedules, choose the month. |
| **Day** | For weekly schedules, choose a day of the week. For monthly and yearly schedules, choose a day of the month. |
| **Time of day** | Required. Choose the local time when the automation should run. Default: 8:00 AM. |
| **Run for** | Required. Run once per book or once for every record in a selected report. |
| **Report** | Required for report audiences. Supports client, prospect, past-client, person, contact, meeting, and task audiences. |
Filter reports are evaluated with current data when the schedule fires. AI-generated reports are regenerated first, then the automation runs for the fresh results. Company reports use the same definition for every selected book, but each book gets its own report run and automation occurrence in its local timezone. Report audiences are limited to 500 records per book occurrence.
### Email received
Runs when an email is received on a connected email integration.
| Field | Description |
| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Email integration** | Required. Select which connected email account to monitor. |
| **Trigger for** | Required. Choose **Emails from unknown senders** (the default) or **Emails from existing contacts**. |
| **Only continue if...** | Add conditions with **Add condition** to narrow which emails trigger the automation, such as filtering by the sender's email address. Required when **Trigger for** is set to **Emails from unknown senders**; optional for **Emails from existing contacts**. |
When **Trigger for** is **Emails from unknown senders**, you must add at least one sender condition under **Only continue if...** before you can save. This keeps the automation from running on every inbound email. When **Trigger for** is **Emails from existing contacts**, the condition is optional.
## FAQ
No. Each automation has exactly one trigger. If you need the same actions to run for different events, create a separate automation for each trigger.
Filters let you narrow which records activate the automation. You can combine multiple conditions with AND/OR logic. Only records that match all filter criteria will trigger the automation.
Trigger filters decide whether the automation runs at all. [Branch](/platform/automations/actions#branch) conditions run inside the automation and route records down different paths based on criteria you define.
# Creating and editing forms
Source: https://docs.slant.app/platform/intake-forms/creating-and-editing-forms
Build an intake form with AI or a template, then refine it by chatting with the form builder.
Create a form by describing what you need or picking a template, then refine it conversationally — there's no field-by-field builder to learn.
## Create a form
Click **Intake forms** in the sidebar under **Platform**.
Type what you want in the **Describe any form or include an example...** box and submit, or choose a template under **Or start with a template**.
### Start from a description
Describe the form in your own words — "a discovery questionnaire for new prospects covering goals, income, and risk tolerance" — and attach an existing form if you have one. The AI rebuilds attached PDFs, Word documents, and images (up to 5 files, 25 MB each) as a Slant intake form.
The AI also names the form for you. It reads your description and any attached document or image and writes a specific 3–8 word title that states the form's subject and purpose — "Annual review household update," not a generic name. Rename it later if you'd rather use your own wording.
While the AI drafts your form, the form shows a **Building** status. Once the questions are ready, choose a layout and the form opens in the editor as a draft.
### Start from a template
Templates are ready-made forms you can use as-is or adapt:
* **Client Intake Form** — a full onboarding questionnaire covering household, finances, and goals
* **Prospect Discovery** — a pre-engagement questionnaire for prospective clients
* **Secure Document Collection** — a guided checklist that asks which documents a client has, then collects uploads for each
* **Annual Review Client Update** — a pre-meeting check-in that gathers family, financial, and goal updates before an annual review
* **Event RSVP** — a branded invitation page that collects RSVPs for client dinners, seminars, and appreciation events
* **Risk Tolerance Questionnaire** — the 13-item risk tolerance scale developed by Dr. John Grable and Dr. Ruth Lytton
Selecting a template opens the layout picker with a live preview of the finished form.
### Choose a layout
Every form uses one of four layouts. Pick one in the **Choose your layout** screen and preview it on desktop and mobile before clicking **Continue**:
* **Signature** — bold sidebar with multi-page form
* **Contemporary** — calm, minimalistic multi-page form
* **Traditional** — one scrolling multi-section form
* **Conversational** — one question at a time flow
Every layout presents the same questions — only the presentation changes, so you can switch layouts later without redoing the form.
## Edit a form
Open a form and click **Edit form**. The editor shows a chat panel on the left and a live preview on the right, with **Desktop** and **Mobile** preview toggles.
Make changes by telling the form builder what you want — structurally or visually:
* "Add a section for insurance policies with carrier, type, and coverage amount"
* "Make the phone number required"
* "Split the household section into two pages"
* "Match our brand colors"
You can also attach a file to the chat, for example to add questions from an existing document. Each change appears in the preview immediately.
Select **New chat** in the **Form chat** header when you want to begin another conversation about the same form. The form keeps the changes already applied.
Images you attach to the chat stay with the form. Ask the form builder to place one later — "put the photo I sent at the top of the first page" — without re-uploading it.
The form builder can move or resize your logo, but it can't change the logo image itself. Logos come from your brand kit — go to **Settings** → **Brand kit** — and apply to every form in your company.
To rename a form, click its name at the top of the editor and type the new name.
Edits apply to your working draft only. Recipients keep seeing the last published version until you [publish the changes](/platform/intake-forms/publishing-and-sharing).
## Review form mappings
Mappings control which Slant record fields receive answers when you apply a submission.
In the editor toolbar or **More form actions**, click **Form mappings**.
Choose a compatible household or person field for each answer. Select **Keep in submission only** when an answer should remain on the form without updating a record.
For dependent and other household-member groups, choose the person role and map a name field so Slant can identify each repeated person.
Click **Save mappings**.
Employment detail mappings require an **Employer** mapping. You can refine compatible mappings again while [reviewing a submission](/platform/intake-forms/reviewing-submissions).
## Duplicate a form
Copy a form when you want a variant — a shorter version, a version for a different audience — without rebuilding it.
On the **Forms** tab, click the **⋮** menu on the form's row. You can also use the **⋮** (more form actions) menu on the form's detail page, next to **Send invitation**.
**Duplicate form?** explains that this creates a copy without its invitations or submissions.
You'll see a **Form duplicated** message, and the copy opens in the editor as a draft named "*form name* - Copy". Its questions, layout, branding, and field mappings all carry over — invitations and submissions don't.
**Duplicate form** is unavailable while a form is still building — the menu item explains "Wait for the form to finish building before duplicating it" — and for archived forms. Published forms can be duplicated.
## Archive a form
Archive a form you no longer use from the **Forms** tab: click the **⋮** menu on its row and select **Archive form**, then confirm with **Archive form**.
Archiving stops new invitations and the public link stops accepting responses. Existing invitations and submissions are kept.
## FAQ
No. All editing happens through the form builder chat. Describe the field you want — including whether it's required and any answer options — and the builder adds it.
Yes. Ask the form builder in the editor chat to switch the layout. Your questions carry over unchanged.
Slant proposes mappings as it builds the form. Open **Form mappings** to review them, keep an answer in the submission only, or map it to a compatible household or person field. You review the mapped changes again before applying a submission.
The form is archived, or it's still being built. Wait for building to finish, or duplicate a form that isn't archived. See [Duplicate a form](#duplicate-a-form).
## Next steps
Publish your form so it can be sent.
Invite a client or prospect to fill it out.
# Intake forms overview
Source: https://docs.slant.app/platform/intake-forms/overview
Collect client and prospect information with AI-built forms that map answers directly into Slant.
Intake forms are online questionnaires you build in Slant and send to clients and prospects to collect their information — personal details, financial data, documents, and signatures — without back-and-forth emails or paper forms.
Answers map directly to Slant fields, so when a form comes back you review the responses and apply them to the household record in a few clicks.
## How intake forms work
1. **Build a form** — describe the form you want and Slant's AI builds it, or start from a template. Every form uses one of four polished layouts with your firm's branding. See [Creating and editing forms](/platform/intake-forms/creating-and-editing-forms).
2. **Publish it** — publishing creates a numbered version that recipients see. You keep editing the draft without affecting anyone mid-form. See [Publishing and sharing](/platform/intake-forms/publishing-and-sharing).
3. **Share it** — send a personal invitation to a client or prospect, or turn on a public link anyone can open. See [Sending invitations](/platform/intake-forms/sending-invitations).
4. **Review submissions** — completed forms land in your submissions inbox, where you compare answers against what's on file and apply the changes. See [Reviewing submissions](/platform/intake-forms/reviewing-submissions).
## The Intake forms page
Open **Intake forms** in the sidebar under **Platform**. The page has three tabs:
* **Forms** — every form in your book, grouped by status: **Building** (the AI is still drafting it), **Draft** (not yet published), and **Live** (published). Each row shows the form's sections, invitations, and submissions. Filter by number of invitations or submissions, and use the row's **⋮** menu to **Duplicate form** or **Archive form**.
* **Invitations** — every invitation you've sent, with its status (**Open**, **Submitted**, **Revoked**, or **Expired**), the invitation link, and when it was created and submitted.
* **Submissions** — completed responses from invitations and public links, flagged **Needs review** until you apply or dismiss them.
Clicking a form opens its detail page: response stats, invitations, submissions, the public link, and a live preview. From here you can **Edit form** or **Send invitation**. **More form actions** includes version history, duplication, form mappings, cross-book sharing, notification settings, and the install link when those actions apply.
## Where intake forms appear
* **Intake forms page** — build, publish, and track everything from **Intake forms** in the sidebar under **Platform**.
* **Household pages** — send a form to a client or prospect from the **⋮** menu on their page, and see their invitations and submissions in the **Intake forms** section of their **Records** tab. Invitations sent and forms submitted also show up in the household's activity feed, so the form sits in the same timeline as calls, emails, and meetings.
* **Chat** — ask [Book chat](/dashboard/book-chat) or a [household's chat](/records/households/chat) to send a form for you.
* **Automations** — the **Send intake form** action invites a household whenever a household automation runs. See [automation actions](/platform/automations/actions).
* **Zapier and the API** — send invitations from another app with the **Send Intake Form** action in [Zapier](/setting-up-slant/integrations/zapier), or through the [public API](/api-reference/overview).
See [other ways to send a form](/platform/intake-forms/sending-invitations#other-ways-to-send-a-form) for details.
## What forms can collect
Forms support the field types advisors need for onboarding and data gathering:
* **Contact and personal details** — names, dates, emails, phone numbers, and addresses that map to Slant fields
* **Financial details** — currency, percentage, and number fields, plus multiple choice and rating questions
* **Document uploads** — collect tax returns, statements, and IDs; files are delivered to the household's folder in your connected [file storage](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage)
* **Acknowledgments** — have the recipient type their name to acknowledge disclosures
* **Meeting scheduling** — embed your scheduling link so recipients book a meeting inside the form
* **Repeating groups** — let recipients add multiple entries, like dependents or accounts
Fields can be required, show conditionally based on earlier answers, and come prefilled with what Slant already knows when you send a personal invitation.
## Automatic reminders
Invitations sent from the Slant email address can send automatic follow-up reminders on business days until the recipient submits the form. You control the spacing and the maximum number of reminders per invitation, and reminders stop on their own once the form is submitted or the invitation is revoked. See [Sending invitations](/platform/intake-forms/sending-invitations#automatic-reminders).
## Security
* Personal invitation links are unique per recipient. Before opening the form, the recipient verifies their identity with a code sent to their email. See [What clients see](/platform/intake-forms/what-clients-see).
* Public links are open to anyone who has the link. You can turn a public link off at any time, and archiving a form closes its link.
* Invitation progress saves to the invitation, so recipients can leave and continue later, including from another device after verifying their identity.
## Permissions
Any user with access to the book can create, edit, publish, and archive forms, send and revoke invitations, and review and apply submissions.
## FAQ
No. Describe the form you want — or attach an existing form as a PDF, Word document, or image — and the AI builds it for you. You refine it by chatting, not by dragging fields.
Yes. Every layout works on desktop and mobile, and the editor includes a mobile preview so you can check before sending.
Nothing changes for them until you publish. Personal invitations stay on the version that was current when they were sent, and public link respondents mid-form have a grace period to finish on the version they started.
Forms are archived rather than deleted. Archiving stops new invitations and closes the public link, but keeps existing invitations and submissions.
## Next steps
Build a form with AI or a template, then refine it in the editor.
Publish versions and share a public link.
Invite a client or prospect with automatic reminders.
Apply submitted answers to your records.
# Publishing and sharing
Source: https://docs.slant.app/platform/intake-forms/publishing-and-sharing
Publish intake form versions, share forms across books, manage notifications, and distribute public or install links.
Publishing takes a snapshot of your form — a numbered version — that recipients see. You keep editing the draft freely; nothing reaches recipients until you publish again.
A form must be published before you can send invitations or turn on its public link.
## Publish a form
In the editor, click **Publish** in the top bar. The first publish creates v1; each later publish creates the next version. The **Publish** button is only active when the draft has changes that haven't been published yet.
The form's status badge shows the published version — for example **Published v2**. If the public link is on, a **Live** badge appears next to it.
New invitations and the public link use the latest published version. Invitations that were already sent stay on the version they were sent with, so nobody's form changes underneath them.
## Version history
Open **Version history** two ways: click the version number (for example **v1**) in the editor top bar, or select the **⋮** (more form actions) menu on the form's detail page → **Version history**. Each version shows when it was published and by whom. The current version is tagged **Current**; click **Preview** to view any version.
To roll back, click **Revert** on an earlier version and confirm with **Revert and publish**. This restores that version's content and immediately publishes it as a new version — the public link and new invitations use the reverted content right away.
## Share a public link
A public link lets anyone with the link fill out the form — useful for your website, email signature, or a newsletter. Unlike [invitations](/platform/intake-forms/sending-invitations), public links aren't tied to a specific person and don't require a verification code.
To turn it on from the editor, click the share icon in the top bar and select **Share a public link**. The link is created and the form goes **Live** — click **Copy** to grab the URL or **Open form** to view it. The share menu also offers **Send to a client or prospect**, which starts an invitation instead.
You can also manage the link from the form's detail page: the **Public link** toggle in the right panel turns it on and off and shows the URL while it's on.
When someone submits through the public link, the submission arrives in your [submissions inbox](/platform/intake-forms/reviewing-submissions) for you to match to an existing record or turn into a new client or prospect.
Anyone with the link can submit the form. Turn the link off when you're not actively collecting responses — submissions through the link stop immediately.
If you publish a new version while someone is mid-form on the public link, they have 14 days to finish on the version they started; after that they're asked to continue on the updated form.
## Share a form with another book
The form owner can make one form available in other books without creating copies.
On the form, select **More form actions** → **Share with books**.
Select the other books that should be able to use the form, then save.
Each shared book can send its own invitations and sees only its own invitation and submission activity. Editing, publishing, version history, and the public link remain in the owner book. A shared row shows **Shared from *book name***; users who can access the owner book can click **Open in *book name***.
**Share with books** keeps one form shared across your books. **Copy install link** gives another advisor an independent copy they can edit separately.
## Choose form notification recipients
Select **More form actions** → **Notification settings** to open **Form notifications**. Under **Always notify**, choose book users who should receive submission emails, then click **Save**.
The person who sent the invitation or published the form is also notified when applicable.
## Share an independent copy with another advisor
Send another advisor a copy of a form you built — the questions, sections, and layout, without any of your data.
On the form's detail page, select the **⋮** (more form actions) menu → **Copy install link**. **Share form configuration** opens; click **Copy install link** to put the URL on your clipboard.
Anyone with the link can sign in to Slant and install a copy of the form.
When the recipient opens the link, they see **Add this form to a book** with a preview, who shared it, and how many sections and fields it includes. They pick a **Destination book** — and, if the form schedules meetings, a **Scheduling event** from that book — then click **Add form to book**.
The recipient gets their own editable draft copy, branded with their destination book's brand kit. Invitations, submissions, and version history don't carry over, and your original form doesn't change.
Sharing actions are unavailable while a form is still building, and for archived forms.
## FAQ
Not directly — published versions are permanent snapshots. To stop collecting responses, turn off the public link and revoke open invitations, or archive the form.
No. Each submission is tied to the version the respondent filled out, so past answers stay exactly as they were submitted.
No, each form has one public link. To share variations of a form, create a separate form for each.
## Next steps
Send the published form to a specific client or prospect.
How recipients open and complete your form.
# Reviewing submissions
Source: https://docs.slant.app/platform/intake-forms/reviewing-submissions
Review completed intake forms and apply the answers to your Slant records.
Completed forms land on the **Submissions** tab, where you review the answers, compare them against what's on file, and apply the changes to the household record.
Nothing updates your records automatically — you choose exactly which answers to apply.
## The Submissions tab
Each submission shows the respondent, the form, the source (**Invitation** or **Public link**), when it was submitted, its status, and how many documents were uploaded. New submissions are marked unread and flagged **Needs review**; once handled they show **Applied** or **Dismissed**.
A form's own page has the same lists: **Needs review** shows the review queue, and **Submissions** shows everything received.
Click a submission to open it.
## Review a submission
The header shows the respondent, the form, and a status badge — **Applied** in green, **Dismissed**, or **Needs review** in yellow — alongside the submission date and answer count.
Below that, the review page lists every answer grouped by form section, with a count of how many questions were answered. You can:
* Search answers with the **Search fields and answers** box
* Toggle **Show unanswered fields** to see what was skipped
* Open **Details** for the source, time to complete, device, and how many questions were answered
* Click **View files** in the header to see uploaded documents
* Download the submission as **PDF** or **CSV** from the download menu
## Apply a submission
Click **Accept submission** to open the apply view. What happens next depends on where the submission came from:
* **From an invitation** — answers apply to the invited client or prospect.
* **From the public link** — Slant looks for existing records matching the respondent's details. Link the submission to an existing client or prospect, or create a new client or prospect. When creating a household, you can adjust the first name, last name, primary email, and primary phone before saving.
The apply view shows a change table with each mapped field's **Current value** and **New value** side by side. For an existing household, you can choose which household member receives answers grouped under **Head of household** and **Spouse or partner**.
If the submission includes other people, resolve each one before applying:
* Select **Add new household member** to create a person on the household.
* Select **Match** and choose an existing household member.
* Select **Keep in submission only** to preserve the answer without changing the household.
You can also map other submitted answers to a record field for this submission, or select **Keep in submission only**. Only answers that differ from what's on file are applied. Before applying you can:
* Edit any new value inline
* Clear a value you don't want applied, or restore the form's answer with **Use form value**
* Map compatible unmapped answers and choose which household person receives a repeated person group
* Turn on **Create as note** to save the submitted answers as a household note
Click the apply button — it shows how many fields will be updated — to save the changes, or create the selected household type for a new record. The submission's status changes to **Applied**, and you can reopen it anytime and click **View changes** to see exactly what was updated.
File-only submissions can still be marked applied or saved as a note even when there are no mapped field changes.
### Uploaded documents
Documents from the form are copied to the household's folder in your connected [file storage](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage) when you apply the submission. If the household doesn't have a linked folder yet, the apply view asks you to choose a destination folder first. Each document shows its delivery status, and you can view or download the files from the submission at any time.
Recipients can upload up to 20 files per submission, 25 MB each (100 MB total) — PDF, JPG, PNG, HEIC, TXT, CSV, DOCX, and XLSX.
## Dismiss a submission
If a submission doesn't need action — a duplicate, a test, or spam from the public link — dismiss it to take it out of the review queue.
The **Dismiss** button sits next to **Accept submission**.
On **Dismiss submission?**, click **Dismiss**. Click **Keep reviewing** if you'd rather go back.
Slant takes you to the form's **Needs review** tab, where the submission is no longer listed. Nothing is deleted — it still appears under **Submissions**, now badged **Dismissed**.
To undo, reopen the submission and click **Move to needs review**.
Applied submissions can't be dismissed. Once you've applied a submission, its review status is settled.
## Edit an invited recipient's responses
Open an invitation and choose **Form responses** to review the current draft. Click **Prefill responses** or **Edit responses** to enter answers on the recipient's behalf.
If the recipient currently has the form open, Slant shows **The recipient is editing this form** and prevents simultaneous editing.
## View aggregated responses
From a form's activity area, click **View aggregated responses** to compare answers across submissions. Use the charts, tables, and filters to review totals, then open an individual response when you need its details. Aggregated responses can be downloaded as CSV.
## Delete a submission
From the submission's **More** menu, choose **Delete submission**, then confirm **Delete submission?**.
Deleting a submission removes the submitted response. Changes already applied to a household or prospect remain on that record.
## FAQ
Yes. Clear any value in the change table before applying, and edit values that need correcting. Only what remains in the table is applied.
Slant checks the current values when you apply. If a field changed since you loaded the review, the apply is rejected so you can re-review rather than overwrite someone else's update.
Submitted answers remain as the recipient sent them. Before submission, an advisor can open **Form responses** and edit an invited recipient's draft when the recipient is not actively editing it. During review, you can adjust mapped values before applying them to records.
No. Once applied, a submission shows what changed via **View changes** but can't be applied again.
Yes. Open it from the **Submissions** tab and click **Move to needs review**. Nothing is lost when you dismiss.
## Next steps
Where applied answers live.
Send the next form.
# Sending invitations
Source: https://docs.slant.app/platform/intake-forms/sending-invitations
Invite a client or prospect to complete an intake form, with automatic reminders until they submit.
An invitation sends a client or prospect a personal, secure link to complete a form. The form comes prefilled with what Slant already has on file, and automatic reminders can follow up until they submit.
Invitations require a published form, and at least one person in the household needs an email address on their record.
## Send an invitation
On the **Invitations** tab, click **New invitation** — or click **Send invitation** on a form's detail page.
Select a published form and the client or prospect. The preview on the right shows the form filled in with that household's information.
Under **Send from**, keep the Slant email address (recommended — it supports automatic reminders) or select your connected email account to send from your own address.
Adjust the form name, choose which household members receive the email (To, CC, BCC, or None — at least one To recipient is required), choose whether to copy yourself, and set the reminder settings. Sending from your own address lets you edit the subject and message.
The invitation appears on the **Invitations** tab with an **Open** status, and its detail page opens to show delivery activity.
Sending from your own email requires a send-capable connected account — see [Email and calendar integrations](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar).
## Send yourself a test
Walk through the form the way a client will before you send it to anyone real. On the form's detail page, click **Send me a test as John Doe** in the right panel.
Slant emails a prefilled invitation link to your own address. The email and the form are marked **Test mode**, and you complete the form as a sample recipient named John Doe rather than as yourself.
Open the test on your phone as well as your computer. It's the fastest way to catch a confusing question or a layout problem before a client sees it.
Nothing you enter is saved as a submission, and picking a meeting time doesn't book an appointment. The test link expires after 7 days. The button stays unavailable until the form is published, and for archived forms.
## Other ways to send a form
You don't have to start from the Intake forms page:
* **From a household** — on a client or prospect page, open the **⋮** menu and select **Send form**. The invitation flow opens with that household already selected. Not available for past clients.
* **From household quick actions** — on a client or prospect **Overview**, click **Send form** in **Quick actions**. Not available for past clients.
* **From the Clients list** — select multiple clients and choose **Send form** to send a separate invitation to each head of household.
* **From chat** — ask [Book chat](/dashboard/book-chat) or a [household's chat](/records/households/chat) to send a form, for example "Send the client intake form to the Smiths."
* **From an automation** — add the **Send intake form** action to a household automation so the form goes out whenever the automation runs. See [automations](#send-a-form-from-an-automation) below.
* **From Zapier or the API** — use the **Send Intake Form** action in [Zapier](/setting-up-slant/integrations/zapier), which lists your published forms so you can pick one in the Zap, or send invitations through the [public API](/api-reference/overview).
Each household's **Records** tab also shows an **Intake forms** section listing the invitations and submissions for that household, linked to their detail pages.
Archived forms can't send invitations, from any of these paths.
### Send a form to multiple clients
On the **Clients** list, select the clients who should receive the form. This action is unavailable in **All books**.
Choose **Send form** from the selection bar.
Select a published client form. Under **Automatic reminders**, choose **Every (days)** and **Maximum reminders**.
Click **Send *N* invitations**.
Slant sends a separate tracked invitation to each selected client's head of household, prefills saved details, and sends you a blind copy.
## Send a form from an automation
Add the **Send intake form** action to a household automation to invite people without doing it by hand — for example, when a prospect moves into a discovery stage or a new client is created.
Configure the action with:
* **Intake form** — only published forms built for clients appear in the list; forms built for prospects, contacts, or businesses can't be sent from an automation
* **Send from** — **Slant notifications** (supports automatic reminders) or **Connected email**, which then asks for the account to send from
* **Recipients** — set the head of household and spouse or partner to To, CC, BCC, or none
* **Include the book principal as** — BCC, CC, or none, when sending from Slant notifications
* **Automatic reminders** — none, or 1 to 10 reminders, with **Business days between reminders** from 1 to 30 (default 3)
The action runs on one book at a time. See [building automations](/platform/automations/building-automations) for how to add actions to an automation.
## Automatic reminders
Reminders nudge the recipient by email until they submit. They're available when sending from the Slant email address — choosing your connected email turns automatic reminders off for that invitation. On the review step, the **Automatic reminders** toggle is on by default with two settings:
* **Business days between reminders** — 1 to 30 days (default 3)
* **Maximum reminders** — 1 to 10 reminders (default 3)
Reminders send on business days in the household's timezone when available and stop automatically when the form is submitted or the invitation is revoked. To cancel a single upcoming reminder, open the invitation's detail page, click the **⋮** menu next to the scheduled reminder, and select **Cancel reminder**.
## Track an invitation
Click an invitation on the **Invitations** tab to open its detail page. The **Activity and reminders** timeline shows everything that has happened and what's scheduled next:
* When the invitation was created and sent, and from which address
* When the recipient viewed the form and when they submitted it
* Each reminder — sent, scheduled, or canceled
* Delivery problems, if an email couldn't be sent
The page also has a **Copy link** button for the recipient's invitation link, so you can resend it yourself if the email was missed.
Each invitation has one of four statuses:
| Status | Meaning |
| ------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Open** | Waiting on the recipient |
| **Submitted** | The form was completed — review it on the [Submissions tab](/platform/intake-forms/reviewing-submissions) |
| **Revoked** | You canceled the invitation; its link no longer works |
| **Expired** | The invitation reached its expiration date before submission |
## Revoke an invitation
On the invitation's detail page, click **Revoke** and confirm.
The recipient's link stops working immediately and all automatic reminders stop. Send a new invitation if they still need to complete the form.
## FAQ
Yes. On the review step, set each household member to To, CC, BCC, or None — anyone included on the email can open the link and verify with their own email address. The form covers household questions in one place.
Only published forms built for clients and prospects can be sent as invitations. Publish the form first, and check that it isn't archived.
No one in the household has an email address on file. Add an email to a household member's record, then send the invitation.
There's no resend button, but you can copy the invitation link from the detail page and send it yourself, or revoke the invitation and send a new one.
## Next steps
The recipient's experience, from email to submission.
Review and apply completed forms.
# What clients see
Source: https://docs.slant.app/platform/intake-forms/what-clients-see
The recipient's experience with an intake form, from the invitation email to submission.
Recipients complete intake forms in their browser — no account, app, or password required. This page walks through their experience so you can set expectations when you send a form.
## Opening an invitation
The invitation email — sent from Slant or [from your own address](/platform/intake-forms/sending-invitations) — introduces the form and includes a button plus a secure backup link.
Because invitation links are personal, the recipient verifies their identity before the form opens: they choose one of their email addresses on file (shown partially hidden), click **Send verification code**, enter the 6-digit code from their email, and continue. This keeps their prefilled personal information private even if the email is forwarded.
Invitation links stop working if you revoke the invitation or it expires, and recipients see a clear message explaining why.
## Opening a public link
Public links open the form directly — no verification code, and nothing prefilled. Anyone with the link can respond.
## Filling out the form
* **Progress saves automatically** to the invitation. If recipients close the tab or switch devices, they can verify their identity again and continue with their saved answers.
* **Prefilled answers** (invitations only) mean the recipient confirms what you have on file instead of retyping it.
* **Uploads** — if the form asks for documents, they attach files as they go.
* **Scheduling** — if the form includes your scheduling link, they book a meeting without leaving the form.
* **Acknowledgments** — disclosure questions ask them to type their name to acknowledge.
### Choosing a meeting location
When the connected Calendly, Cal.com, or OnceHub event type offers more than one location — your office, a video call, a phone call — the scheduling question adds a **Meeting location** dropdown above the day and time lists, with the placeholder **Choose a location…**.
The recipient picks a location first. The day and time lists stay hidden until they do, then show only the openings available at that location. If some openings have no location attached, the dropdown includes a **No location** option for them.
With a single location, or none, there's no dropdown — the recipient goes straight to picking a day and time.
## After submitting
The recipient sees a confirmation, and invitation recipients also get a confirmation email. You're notified by email, and the response appears in your [submissions inbox](/platform/intake-forms/reviewing-submissions) marked **Needs review**. Any [automatic reminders](/platform/intake-forms/sending-invitations#automatic-reminders) still scheduled are canceled.
If you publish a new version of a form while someone is partway through the public link, they can finish on the version they started for 14 days; after that, they're asked to continue on the updated form and answers that still apply carry over.
## FAQ
No. Invitation progress saves automatically, and the link keeps working until they submit, the invitation expires, or you revoke it.
They can request a new code from the same screen. Codes go to the email address the invitation was sent to, so have them check spam or confirm the address on their record is right.
No. Once submitted, answers are final. Send a new invitation if something needs correcting, or edit the values yourself when applying the submission.
Yes, for personal invitations. The recipient verifies their identity on the other device and continues with the saved draft. Public links are not tied to a named invitation.
## Next steps
Send a form with automatic reminders.
What to do when the form comes back.
# Reports
Source: https://docs.slant.app/platform/reports
Build reusable lists of records from your book — with a plain-language prompt or with filters — and revisit them anytime for fresh results.
Reports are saved lists of records from your book — clients, prospects, people, other contacts, businesses, meetings, or tasks. Describe what you want in plain language and let Slant's AI build the report, or choose a record type and apply filters yourself. Either way, you can return to a report anytime to see results from the latest data.
Reports are useful for recurring analyses like "clients who haven't had a meeting in 90 days" or "prospects tagged as referrals this quarter." Instead of asking the same question in [chat](/dashboard/book-chat) each time, save it as a report and revisit it whenever you need fresh numbers.
## The reports table
Saved reports live in a table on the Reports page — the same table used for clients, prospects, and other record lists. Click a row to open that report.
The table shows these columns:
* **Report** — the report name
* **Description** — what the report finds. A prompt-built report shows **Generating report...** while a run is in progress.
* **Record type** — Clients, Prospects, Past clients, People, Contacts, Meetings, Tasks, or Businesses
* **Definition** — **Prompt** for reports built by AI, **Filters** for reports built by hand
* **Records** — how many records the latest run returned
* **Runs** — how many times the report has been run
* **Last run** — how long ago the report last ran, or **Never**
* **Created** — the date the report was created
**Records**, **Runs**, and **Last run** apply to prompt-built reports. Filter reports always reflect current data, so **Records** and **Runs** show a dash and **Last run** shows **Never**.
When you work across all books, a **Book** column shows which book each report belongs to, or **Company-wide** for reports shared across the company.
Narrow the list with the **Record type** and **Definition** chips, or click **Filter** to filter by **Last run**, **Created**, or **Runs**. Click the search icon to find a report by name, drag a column edge to resize it, and open a column's **...** menu to sort by that column. Save any combination of filters, columns, and sort order as a view — see [data views](/records/data-views) for how views work.
To start a new report, click **New report** in the table toolbar.
## Create a report
There are three ways to create a report:
* **Build with a prompt** — describe the records you want in plain language and let Slant's AI create the report.
* **Build with filters** — choose a record type, then narrow the results with fields and filters yourself.
* **Save a cohort from chat** — save a list of records returned by an [AI chat](/dashboard/book-chat) conversation.
When you click **New report**, Slant asks **How would you like to create this report?** and offers two cards: **Build with a prompt** and **Build with filters**.
### Build with a prompt
Click **Reports** in the sidebar under **Platform**.
Click **New report**, then choose **Build with a prompt**.
Enter a plain language description of the records you want. For example, "All clients who discussed retirement planning in the last 90 days" or "Prospects with no meetings scheduled."
Click **Generate report**. Slant's AI interprets your description, builds the report, and returns the matching records. This may take a moment.
Once generation completes, you're taken to the report detail page where you can see the results.
Be specific in your descriptions. Include details like time ranges, record types, tiers, tags, or activity types to get more precise results.
### Build with filters
Build a report by hand when you know the record type you want and can express your criteria as filters. Filter reports stay live: they always reflect the current data in your book, so there's nothing to rerun.
Click **Reports** in the sidebar under **Platform**.
Click **New report**, then choose **Build with filters**.
Under **What type of record is this report for?**, choose **Client**, **Prospect**, **Past client**, **Other contact**, or **Business**.
For a **Client** report, choose **Households** for one row per household or **People** for one row per individual person. People-based reports use person fields, filters, and columns. Other record types continue directly to the builder.
In the builder, enter a **Report name**, then add filters and choose which columns to show. The results table updates as you go, and a **Your report is unsaved** badge appears until you save.
Click **Save report**.
Your report appears in the reports table with its record type and a **Filters** definition.
To change a filter report later, click its row in the reports table to reopen the builder. Adjust the name, filters, or columns, then click **Save changes**.
Filter reports can repeat eligible fields in separate **AND** conditions. For example, add **Tag has all of** or repeat a tag condition to require several tags. Use **does not have any of** to exclude records carrying selected values.
Filter reports support **Client**, **Prospect**, **Past client**, **Other contact**, and **Business** records. Client reports can represent either households or people; the other record types use one row per record.
### Save a cohort from chat
When [AI chat](/dashboard/book-chat) returns a list of records (a cohort), you can save it as a reusable report.
In a chat conversation, click the cohort result to open it in a full-screen dialog.
Click **Save as report** at the top of the cohort dialog.
Enter a name for the report and click **Save report**.
The saved report appears in the reports table and can be rerun at any time.
## View report results
Click any row in the reports table to open that report. How results appear depends on how the report was built:
* **Prompt-built reports** open a detail page showing the report's name, description, and run history.
* **Filter-built reports** open the builder, with a live results table that always reflects your book's current data.
In the results table, click a record's name to open its details. This works for clients, prospects, people, other contacts, and meetings. Task rows aren't linked.
### Run history
For prompt-built reports, the **Run history** section lists every time the report has been run, with the most recent run at the top. Each entry shows:
* **Record count** — how many records matched (for example, "12 clients")
* **Date and time** — when the run completed
* **Run notes** — any additional instructions provided for that run
The oldest entry in the list is labeled **(original)** to indicate the first time the report was generated.
Click any run to open a full-screen dialog showing the matching records in a table. From this dialog you can:
* **Download CSV** — download the results as a spreadsheet
* **Take bulk actions** — for client and prospect reports, apply bulk operations like updating tiers, adding tags, enrolling in sequences, adding to projects, sending bulk emails, and more
Filter-built reports don't have a run history — they update automatically and have no **Run** button. Only prompt-built reports are run and tracked over time.
## Run a report
Rerun a prompt-built report to get updated results based on the latest data in your book. The AI re-evaluates the original query, recalculates any relative date ranges (like "last 90 days"), and searches for new records that match.
Only prompt-built reports can be run. Filter reports update on their own, so they have no **Run** button.
Click the report's row in the reports table to open its page.
Click **Run report** in the top-right corner. A dialog appears where you can optionally provide additional instructions for this run.
If you want to adjust the query for this run, enter additional instructions. For example, "Exclude clients under 50" or "Include prospects this time." Leave blank to run the report as-is.
Click **Run as-is** or **Run with changes** depending on whether you added instructions.
The report status changes to **Running** while the AI generates fresh results. A new entry appears in the run history when the run completes.
Additional instructions only apply to the current run. They do not permanently change the report's underlying query.
## Rename a report
How you rename a report depends on how it was built:
* **Prompt-built reports** — on the report page, hover over the report name and click the pencil icon that appears. Type the new name and press **Enter** to save, or press **Escape** to cancel.
* **Filter-built reports** — open the report to reopen the builder, change the **Report name** field, and click **Save changes**.
## Delete a report
Click the report's row in the reports table.
Click the **...** menu in the top-right corner.
Select **Delete report**, then click **Delete** to confirm.
The report disappears from the reports table.
Deleting a report removes it and its run history. This cannot be undone.
## Supported record types
Which record types a report can cover depends on how it's built.
Prompt-built reports determine the record type automatically from your description and support:
* **Clients** — active, paying households
* **Prospects** — potential households being cultivated
* **People** — individuals within households
* **Other contacts** — professional relationships (CPAs, attorneys, referral sources)
* **Meetings** — scheduled and completed meetings
* **Tasks** — open and completed tasks
Filter-built reports support **Client**, **Prospect**, **Past client**, **Other contact**, and **Business** — you choose the type when you start the report. Businesses are only available in filter-built reports.
## FAQ
Reports are saved queries you can rerun. When you ask a question in chat, the results are part of that conversation. A report lets you re-execute the same query later with fresh data, without retyping the question.
It depends on how the report was built. Filter-built reports are fully editable — click the report to reopen the builder, change its filters or columns, and click **Save changes**. Prompt-built reports (created by AI) can't be edited directly; create a new report with an updated description, or provide additional instructions when you rerun.
Relative date references like "last 90 days" or "this quarter" are recalculated from the current date on each run. The AI tells you the exact date range it used so you can verify.
Yes. Reports return up to 500 matching records per run. If your query matches more than 500 records, try narrowing the criteria to get a more focused result set.
If the AI is unable to generate the report, the detail page shows a failure message with the option to delete the report and try again with a different description.
## Next steps
Ask questions and generate cohorts that can be saved as reports.
Enroll report results into automated outreach sequences.
# Scouting
Source: https://docs.slant.app/platform/scouting
Find and import new prospects using natural language search across millions of professional profiles.
Scouting searches over 300 million professional profiles to find people who match a description you provide in plain English. You describe who you're looking for, and Slant returns a list of matching profiles with contact information that you can import directly as [prospects](/records/prospects).
Each result includes a match score showing how well the person fits your criteria, along with their current role, education, and location. When you import a result, Slant creates a new prospect record with their name, job title, LinkedIn profile, email, and phone number.
## Run a scouting search
Click **Scouting** in the sidebar under **Platform**.
Type a natural language description in the search field. Be specific about the type of person you want to find — include details like profession, location, age range, industry, or interests.
Click the search button or press **Enter** to begin. You can also click the microphone button to dictate your search using voice input. The search typically takes a few minutes to analyze profiles and return up to 30 matches.
Your search runs in the background. You can leave the page and come back — click any report in the **Recent scouting reports** list to check on progress or view results.
If you're not sure what to search for, try one of the **Suggested searches** shown below the search field. These example queries demonstrate the kind of natural language descriptions that work well.
### Writing effective searches
Scouting works best with specific, descriptive queries. Include details that narrow down your ideal prospect:
* **Demographics** — age range, marital status, family situation
* **Location** — city, state, metro area, or region
* **Profession** — job title, industry, employer type
* **Education** — school, degree, field of study
* **Interests** — hobbies, affiliations, community involvement
For example, "University of Texas faculty in their 40s and 50s" or "Blue-collar business owners in northern Georgia" are more effective than broad queries like "wealthy people."
## Understand your results
When a search completes, the results page shows each matching profile in a table with four columns:
* **Prospect** — name, location, and professional headline. Click the name to open their LinkedIn profile.
* **Current role** — job title, company, and dates.
* **Education** — school, degree, and years attended.
* **Criteria match** — a visual score showing how well the person matches your search.
### Search progress
While a search is running, a progress banner shows the current stage:
* **Searching** — converting your query into search filters
* **Filtering** — refining results to find the best matches
Results appear as they are found, so you can start reviewing profiles before the search finishes. The progress banner disappears once the search is complete.
### Match scores
Each result includes a match score displayed as a circular chart. The score shows how many of the search criteria the person matched, displayed as a fraction (for example, 4/5 means four out of five criteria matched).
Hover over the match score to see the full breakdown. Each criterion shows:
* A green checkmark for criteria the person meets
* A yellow question mark for uncertain matches
* A red X for criteria the person does not meet
Each criterion includes a brief explanation of why the person did or did not match.
## Import a prospect
When you find someone you'd like to add to your book, click **Add as prospect** on their row. Slant enriches the profile with email and phone data, then creates a new [prospect](/records/prospects) record with:
* First and last name
* Job title
* LinkedIn profile link
* Email address (when available)
* Phone number (when available)
The new prospect is automatically tagged "From Scouting Report" so you can find all prospects that came from scouting.
If someone with the same LinkedIn profile or email address already exists in your book, the import is flagged as a duplicate and the profile is not imported again.
### Import status
After clicking **Add as prospect**, the profile goes through a brief enrichment process. The status updates in real time on the profile row:
* **Enriching email and phone** — Slant is looking up contact information for the profile
* **Already added to Slant** — the prospect was successfully imported. Click the name to open their record.
* If a matching person already exists in your book, the import is skipped and a message explains why
* If the import fails for another reason, an error message appears on the row
## Import credits
Each book has a monthly limit on how many scouting profiles can be imported. One credit is used each time you import a prospect. Credits reset at the beginning of each calendar month.
The number of remaining credits is displayed at the top of the results page. When you run out of credits, the **Add as prospect** button is disabled and shows "Out of credits."
Credits are only used when you import a profile. Running searches does not use any credits.
## FAQ
Scouting searches across over 300 million professional profiles, primarily sourced from LinkedIn and other public professional data. The search is powered by AI to match your natural language description against these profiles.
Each search returns up to 30 matching profiles. If you need more results, try running a new search with a slightly different description.
Each search query must be unique. If you enter a query you've already used, Slant won't create a new search — open the existing report from the **Recent scouting reports** list instead.
You can still run searches and view results, but you won't be able to import new prospects until your credits reset at the start of the next month. Contact your admin if you need your credit limit increased.
## Next steps
Learn how to manage the prospects you've imported from scouting.
Set up automated outreach to engage your new prospects.
# Creating sequences
Source: https://docs.slant.app/platform/sequences/creating-sequences
Build automated email, SMS, and task sequences, configure steps, and manage sequence settings.
Create a sequence to automate emails, SMS messages, and tasks that run on a schedule when you enroll a household.
## Create a sequence
Click **Sequences** in the sidebar under **Platform**.
Choose how to start:
* **Start from scratch** — create an empty sequence and add steps yourself
* **Generate with AI** — describe what you want and Slant writes the steps
Type a name for the sequence in the **Sequence name** field.
If you chose **Generate with AI**, fill in **Description of what the sequence should be** with who the sequence is for, the ideal outcome, and what steps to include. Slant uses that description to generate a starting set of steps.
The sequence is created and you're taken to the sequence detail page. If you provided a description, AI-generated steps appear after a few seconds.
New sequences start as **inactive**. Edit the steps and [enable the sequence](#enable-or-disable-a-sequence) when you're ready to start enrolling households.
## Edit steps
The **Steps** tab shows all steps in the sequence, organized by business day. Each step is an **Email**, **SMS**, or **Task**.
### Email steps
Each email step includes:
* **Subject** — The email subject line.
* **Body** — The email content, with rich text formatting.
* **Reply to previous email** — Check this to send the email as a reply in the same thread as the previous email step. When enabled, the subject line is inherited from the previous email.
* **Attachments** — Click the attachment icon at the bottom of the step to add files.
* **Signature** — Your email signature is appended automatically when the email is sent.
* **Variables** — Click **Insert variable** in the subject or body to add household, household-member, sender, company, or household custom-field values that fill when the email sends.
Deceased household members are automatically excluded from head, spouse, and household leader placeholders in the subject and body.
### SMS steps
Each SMS step includes:
* **Message** — Plain-text content up to 1,000 characters.
* **Variables** — Insert household and recipient details where available.
The sender is selected when the household is enrolled. A sequence-level default SMS sending account does not replace that enrollment choice.
### Task steps
Each task step includes:
* **Title** — The task name.
* **Description** — Additional details for the task.
* **Priority** — The task priority level.
* **Label** — A label for categorizing the task.
* **Assigned** — The team member responsible for the task.
* **Due in** — How many days after the step runs the task is due.
* **Email options** — Whether to associate the task with an email.
### Add a step
Click **+ Add step** in the top-right corner of the Steps tab.
Select **Email**, **SMS**, or **Task**. You can have up to 6 email steps per sequence.
Enter the business day (1–20) when this step should run.
Only one email step is allowed per business day. SMS and task steps have no per-day limit.
### Move or delete a step
Click the menu on any step to access:
* **Move step** — Change the business day the step is assigned to.
* **Delete step** — Remove the step from the sequence.
### Publish changes
Changes to steps are saved locally until you publish them. When you have unpublished changes, a bar appears at the bottom of the Steps tab:
* Click **Publish changes** to save all edits.
* Click **Discard** to revert to the last published version.
If the sequence has active enrollments, publishing changes only affects future enrollments. Households already enrolled continue with the steps as they were when enrolled.
## Duplicate a sequence
To create a copy of an existing sequence:
Click **Sequences** in the sidebar.
Click the menu on the sequence you want to copy.
Enter a name for the copy and confirm. The duplicate includes all steps and settings from the original.
The new sequence is created as inactive.
## Sequence settings
Click the **Settings** tab on any sequence to configure:
### General settings
* **Sequence name** — Edit the sequence name inline.
### Sender settings
* **Default sending account** — Choose which connected email account sends emails for this sequence. If not set, emails send from the email account of the user who enrolls the household.
* **Default SMS sending account** — Choose the phone integration shown by default while configuring the sequence. You still select **Send SMS from** for each enrollment or automation.
If no email integrations are connected, go to **Settings** → **Email** to set one up.
## Enable or disable a sequence
Toggle **Enable sequence** in the top-right corner of the sequence detail page. You can also click the menu on the sequences list and select **Activate** or **Deactivate**.
* **Enabling** allows you to enroll households and starts processing steps for active enrollments.
* **Disabling** pauses all active enrollments immediately. When you re-enable, you're asked whether to automatically resume the paused enrollments or leave them paused.
## Delete a sequence
If a sequence has never had an enrollment, open its menu on the sequences list and select **Delete sequence**.
For a sequence with past enrollments, delete it from its settings:
Click the **Settings** tab on the sequence.
In the **Danger zone** section, click **Delete sequence** and confirm.
Deleting a sequence is permanent. Emails and SMS messages already sent and tasks already created remain on the associated households but are no longer linked to a sequence.
You must remove all active enrollments before you can delete a sequence. The list-page shortcut appears only for sequences with no enrollment history.
## FAQ
If you choose **Generate with AI** without a description, a new sequence starts with five steps: a welcome email and a task on day one, a follow-up email on day three, a check-in email on day ten, and a final email on day twenty. **Start from scratch** creates an empty sequence with no steps.
Yes. You can edit and publish changes at any time. However, changes only apply to future enrollments — existing enrollments continue with the original steps.
All active enrollments are paused immediately. When you re-enable the sequence, you can choose to resume them automatically or leave them paused for manual review.
## Next steps
Enroll households and track progress through a sequence.
Learn how sequences work and key concepts.
# Managing enrollments
Source: https://docs.slant.app/platform/sequences/managing-enrollments
Enroll households in sequences, track progress, and manage active enrollments.
When you enroll a household in a sequence, Slant schedules each step and tracks progress automatically. You can monitor, pause, resume, or exit enrollments at any time.
## Enroll a household
Go to the sequence from the **Sequences** page and make sure it's [enabled](/platform/sequences/creating-sequences#enable-or-disable-a-sequence).
Click **+ Enroll household** in the top-right corner.
Choose which connected email account sends email steps. If the sequence contains SMS steps, also choose **Send SMS from**.
Type to search and select the household you want to enroll.
The head of household and spouse or partner default to the **To** field. For each person, choose **To**, **CC**, **BCC**, or **None**. Select **Add team member** to include a teammate, then choose their recipient type. At least one household member or team member must be a **To** recipient.
The enrollment appears on the **Enrollments** tab.
Every selected email recipient needs an email address. A household member does not need to be a **To** recipient when a team member is selected as **To**. A phone integration and eligible phone recipient are required when the sequence has SMS steps.
### Enroll from a household record
You can also enroll a household directly from its record:
* On the household's **Records** tab, scroll to the **Sequences** section and click **Enroll household**.
* From the menu on the household header, select **Enroll in sequence**.
### Bulk enroll households
To enroll multiple households at once from the [clients](/records/clients/overview) or [prospects](/records/prospects) list:
Check the boxes next to the households you want to enroll.
Select **Add to sequence** from the bulk actions bar.
Choose the email sender and, for sequences with SMS steps, **Send SMS from**.
Review the enrollment count and confirm.
Review the recipient mapping before a bulk enrollment. Only households with the required email addresses and phone numbers can be enrolled.
## Track enrollment progress
The **Enrollments** tab on a sequence page shows a two-panel view:
* **Left panel** — A list of all enrollments with the household name, enrollment date, status, and when the next step is scheduled.
* **Right panel** — Detailed view of the selected enrollment, including a visual timeline of every step.
### Enrollment statuses
| Status | Meaning |
| ------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Active** | The sequence is running and steps are being executed on schedule. |
| **Paused** | The enrollment has been paused. No steps run until resumed. |
| **Finished** | The enrollment completed — either all steps ran, or it was finished early by a trigger or manual action. |
### Finished reasons
When an enrollment finishes early, the status shows the reason:
* **Email reply received** — The household replied to an email in the sequence.
* **Meeting scheduled** — A meeting was scheduled with someone in the household.
* **Manual exit** — A user manually removed the household from the sequence.
* **Unsubscribed** — The household unsubscribed from emails.
### Enrollment timeline
Click an enrollment to see a visual timeline in the right panel. Each step shows:
* The step type (email, automated SMS, or task) with an icon
* Whether it has been completed, is pending, or was skipped
* The scheduled or completed date
For pending email steps, you can view and edit the content before it sends. Completed steps link to the sent email, automated SMS, or created task.
## Pause and resume an enrollment
To pause an active enrollment, select it on the **Enrollments** tab and click **Pause**. All remaining steps are held until you resume.
To resume a paused enrollment, select it and click **Resume**. The sequence continues from where it left off — remaining steps are rescheduled based on the current date while preserving the original spacing between steps.
## Exit an enrollment
To remove a household from a sequence before it finishes, select the enrollment and click **Exit**. This marks the enrollment as finished with the reason "Manual exit." Emails already sent and tasks already created are not affected.
## Delete an enrollment
After an enrollment has finished, you can delete it to remove it from the list. Select the finished enrollment and click **Delete**.
Only finished enrollments can be deleted. Active or paused enrollments must be exited first.
## Enrollment limits
Each connected email account can have up to **500 active enrollments** across all sequences and books that send from that account. Capacity is additive: a book with five available email accounts can have up to 2,500 active enrollments if the enrollments are distributed across those accounts.
The current combined count and capacity for your available email accounts is displayed at the top of each sequence page. Paused and finished enrollments do not count toward the limit. If an email account reaches its limit, choose another account with capacity, wait for existing enrollments to finish, or exit some manually before enrolling more households.
## FAQ
Not at the same time. A household can only have one active or paused enrollment per sequence. After an enrollment finishes, you can enroll the household again.
The sequence picks up where it left off. Remaining steps are rescheduled from the current date, maintaining the original day spacing between steps.
Yes. On the enrollment timeline, click a pending email step to view and edit its content before the scheduled send time.
Yes. The limit applies to all active enrollments that send from the selected email account, including enrollments in other sequences or books. The bulk enrollment form shows an error if the selected households would exceed that account's remaining slots.
## Next steps
Build a new sequence with email and task steps.
View sequence enrollments from a household's record.
# Sequences overview
Source: https://docs.slant.app/platform/sequences/overview
Automate multi-step email, SMS, and task workflows for your households.
Sequences are automated workflows that send emails and SMS messages and create tasks for a household over a set number of business days.
Use sequences to standardize outreach — onboarding new clients, nurturing prospects, or re-engaging inactive households — without manually tracking follow-ups. Once you enroll a household, Slant handles the timing and delivery automatically.
## How sequences work
A sequence is a series of **steps** spread across business days (weekdays, excluding holidays). Each step is an automated email, automated SMS, or task. When you enroll a household, Slant schedules each step based on its assigned business day and runs it automatically.
* **Email steps** send an email from your connected email account to the household's head of household (and optionally other members)
* **SMS steps** send a text message from the phone integration you choose when enrolling the household
* **Task steps** create a task assigned to the user who enrolled the household (or another team member you specify)
Steps run on business days only — weekends and holidays are skipped.
## Key concepts
* **Steps** — The individual emails, SMS messages, and tasks that make up a sequence. A sequence can have up to 6 email steps, with SMS and task steps spread across up to 20 business days. See [Creating sequences](/platform/sequences/creating-sequences) for details.
* **Enrollments** — When you add a household to a sequence, that creates an enrollment. Each enrollment tracks its own progress through the steps independently. See [Managing enrollments](/platform/sequences/managing-enrollments) for details.
* **Publishing** — Changes to steps are not applied until you click **Publish changes**. This lets you edit multiple steps before committing. Published changes only affect future enrollments — households already in the sequence continue with the original steps.
* **Enabling and disabling** — New sequences start as inactive. You must enable a sequence before you can enroll households. Disabling an active sequence pauses all current enrollments.
## Auto-finish triggers
Sequences automatically finish an enrollment early when the household responds:
* **Email reply** — If the household replies to any email in the sequence, the enrollment finishes immediately.
* **Meeting scheduled** — If a meeting is scheduled with anyone in the household, all active enrollments for that household finish.
This prevents continued outreach after you've already connected with the household.
## AI-generated sequences
When you [create a new sequence](/platform/sequences/creating-sequences#create-a-sequence), you can provide a description of what the sequence should accomplish. Slant uses AI to generate a starting set of steps based on your description — including email subjects, body content, and task titles. You can then edit the generated steps before enabling the sequence.
## Enrollment limits
Each connected email account can have up to **500 active enrollments** across all sequences and books that send from that account. Capacity is additive, so a book with five available email accounts can have up to 2,500 active enrollments distributed across them. The combined count is displayed at the top of each sequence page. Finished and paused enrollments do not count toward the limit.
## Where sequences appear
* **Sequences page** — Access all your sequences from **Sequences** in the sidebar under **Platform**. This is where you create, edit, and manage sequences and their enrollments.
* **Household records** — Each household's **Records** tab shows a [Sequences section](/records/households/sequences) with active and past enrollments, plus the ability to enroll directly.
* **Bulk actions** — You can enroll multiple households at once from the [clients](/records/clients/overview) or [prospects](/records/prospects) list page.
* **Automations** — [Automations](/platform/automations/overview) can add or remove households from sequences automatically based on triggers you define.
## FAQ
Yes. Each enrollment tracks progress independently. A household can be in as many sequences as needed, as long as the selected sending account hasn't reached its 500-active-enrollment limit.
Emails and SMS messages that have already been sent and tasks that have already been created remain on the household. They are no longer linked to a sequence, but the data is preserved.
No. Sequences use business days only. Emails, SMS messages, and tasks are scheduled during business hours on weekdays, skipping weekends and holidays.
Any user with access to the book can create, edit, and manage sequences and enrollments.
## Next steps
Build a sequence with email, SMS, and task steps.
Enroll households and track their progress.
# Custodian accounts
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/accounts/custodian-accounts
Browse, search, and link custodian accounts synced to your book.
Custodian accounts are synced automatically from your [custodian integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/overview) each night. Use the custodian accounts list to see which accounts are linked to clients, link unlinked accounts, and look up account details.
You cannot create, edit, or delete custodian accounts manually. They appear once your [advisor codes are set up](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/setup) and the first sync completes.
## Open the custodian accounts list
Click **Accounts** → **Custodian** in the sidebar.
## Columns
The list includes these columns by default:
* **Account** — The account name from your custodian. When the custodian supplies a closure date, the account shows a **Closed \[date]** badge.
* **Custodian** — The financial institution holding the account (e.g., Schwab, Fidelity).
* **Account type** — The account type (e.g., Individual, IRA, Joint).
* **Market value** — The total market value as of the last sync.
* **Account number** — Masked by default (e.g., •••• 6780). Click the icon to reveal the full number, or click the number to copy it.
* **Primary related party** — The primary account holder. Hover over the name to see their relationship, email, and phone number.
* **Linked household** — The client household this account is linked to. Click to link or change the linked household. If the account is already linked in another book you can see, the cell shows that book's name; if it's linked in a book you don't have access to, the cell reads **Assigned in another book**. You can still link it in the current book regardless.
To show the **Linked trust** column, click the column toggle button in the top-right corner of the list.
## Search and filter
Type in the **Search** field to find accounts by name or account number.
### Link status
The **Link status** filter chip appears at the top of the list. Click it to show only linked or unlinked accounts.
### Account status
Use **Account status** to show **Open** or **Closed** accounts. An account is closed only when its custodian supplies a closure date.
### Additional filters
Click **Filter** to add filters for:
* **Custodian** — Filter by custodian name.
* **Account type** — Filter by account type.
* **Market value** — Filter by value (greater than, less than, equal to, etc.).
## Link an account to a household
Search by name or number, or use the **Link status** filter to show unlinked accounts.
Click the **Linked household** cell and choose a client from the dropdown.
If Slant finds other unlinked accounts with the same primary related-party name, review the preselected accounts in **Link matching accounts?**. Clear any you do not want to include, then select **Link *N* accounts**. Closing the dialog cancels the link.
When there are no matching-account suggestions, the link takes effect immediately. The account's market value is added to the client's AUM, and portfolio data becomes available on the client's [Custodian tab](/records/clients/portfolio).
To link an account to a trust instead, add the **Linked trust** column using the column toggle, then select a trust from the dropdown.
For more on how linking works — including auto-linking by tax ID — see [linking custodian accounts](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/linking).
## Unlink an account
Click the **Linked household** (or **Linked trust**) cell for the account and clear the selection. The account stays in Slant but is no longer associated with that client. Its market value is removed from the client's AUM.
## FAQ
Accounts appear after your advisor codes are set up and the first nightly sync completes. If you just added your advisor codes, accounts will appear the next morning. See [setting up custodian integrations](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/setup).
Yes. A custodian account can be linked to one household and one trust at the same time. The account's market value counts toward the linked client's AUM.
Custodian accounts sync nightly. The **Market value** column reflects the most recent sync. Newly added advisor codes will pull accounts on the next nightly sync.
Yes — use [manual accounts](/records/accounts/manual-accounts) to track checking accounts, savings accounts, insurance policies, outside retirement accounts, and other accounts not held at a connected custodian.
## Next steps
Auto-linking, manual linking, and unlinking
View balances, holdings, and performance for linked clients
# Insurance policies
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/accounts/insurance-policies
Track life and property and casualty insurance policies for client households.
Insurance policies keep coverage, premium, ownership, and servicing details with the client household they protect.
## Browse insurance policies
Click **Accounts** → **Insurance** in the sidebar. The **Insurance policies** list includes policy, household, insurance type, carrier, policy number, premium, coverage, and renewal details.
Use **Insurance type**, **Filter**, or a saved view to narrow the list. Click a policy to open its household and edit the policy.
## Add an insurance policy
Select a client or prospect and open the **Records** tab.
Expand **Accounts**, then click **Add insurance policy**.
Select **Life** or **Property & casualty** under **Insurance type**.
Add the **Policy name**, carrier, policy number, dates, owners, insured people, premium, and coverage details that apply.
Click **Add policy**. The policy appears on the household and in **Accounts** → **Insurance**.
## Policy details
Available fields depend on the insurance type.
* **Life policies** — Track the life policy type, permanent policy type, term duration, convertibility, face amount, death benefit, cash value, owners, and insured people.
* **Property and casualty policies** — Track the policy type, effective and renewal dates, named and additional insureds, deductibles, and agent or broker.
* **Premium and servicing** — Record premium amounts, payment frequency, carrier details, and servicing information.
## Edit or delete a policy
Open the policy from the household or the **Insurance policies** list. Update the fields and click **Save policy**.
Deleting a policy permanently removes its stored details.
Deleting an insurance policy cannot be undone.
## Related
* [Account overview](/records/accounts/overview)
* [Household records](/records/households/records-overview)
* [Custom fields](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields)
# Manual accounts
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/accounts/manual-accounts
Create and manage financial accounts that aren't synced from a custodian.
Manual accounts let you track financial accounts that aren't held at a connected custodian — checking and savings accounts, outside retirement accounts, education savings plans, and more.
Use [insurance policies](/records/accounts/insurance-policies) to track life and property and casualty coverage.
Unlike [custodian accounts](/records/accounts/custodian-accounts), manual accounts are created and maintained by you. Balances and details don't sync automatically.
## Open the manual accounts list
Click **Accounts** → **Manual** in the sidebar. The list shows all manual accounts across your book.
### Columns
* **Account** — The account name. Click to open the linked household.
* **Household** — The client household this account belongs to.
* **Account type** — Checking, Savings, or Investment.
* **Tax-advantaged type** — The tax status (e.g., Traditional 401(k), Roth IRA, 529). Shows a dash if not applicable. Accounts set to **Other** show the custom label you entered.
* **Institution** — The institution name (e.g., Chase, Vanguard).
* **Balance** — The current balance.
* **Account number** — Masked by default. Hover the cell to reveal a copy icon (copies the full number to your clipboard) and an eye icon (toggles between the masked and full number). The same controls appear on the **Accounts** cards on a household's [Records tab](/records/households/accounts).
## Create a manual account
You can create manual accounts from the list page or from a client's household.
### From the manual accounts list
Choose a client from the **Household** dropdown.
Enter an **Account name** and select an **Account type**. Choose a **Tax type** if applicable. Optionally add the **Institution**, **Account owners**, **Balance**, and **Account number**.
The account appears in the manual accounts list and on the client's [Records tab](/records/households/accounts).
### From a client's household
Click on a client from the **Clients** list.
Click **Records** in the right-side panel, then expand the **Accounts** section.
Fill in the account details and save.
### Account form fields
| Field | Description | Required |
| ------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------- |
| **Household** | The client household this account belongs to | Yes |
| **Account name** | A descriptive name (e.g., "Chase Checking") | Yes |
| **Account type** | The financial account category | Yes |
| **Tax type** | Tax-advantaged status. Options include retirement accounts (401(k), IRA, 403(b), 457, pension), health savings (HSA), education savings (529, Coverdell ESA), custodial accounts (UGMA, UTMA), and more. Pick **Other** for anything not listed. Defaults to "Not applicable" | Yes |
| **Tax type label** | A custom label for the tax status (e.g., "Defined benefit plan"). Only appears when you select **Other** as the tax type | Only with **Other** |
| **Institution** | The institution holding the account | No |
| **Account owners** | One or more people from the household | No |
| **Balance** | The current account balance | No |
| **Account number** | The account number (stored securely) | No |
## Search and filter
Type in the **Search** field to find accounts by name or institution.
### Account type
The **Account type** filter chip appears at the top of the list. Click it to filter by account category.
### Additional filters
Click **Filter** to add filters for:
* **Tax-advantaged type** — Filter by tax status. Includes an **Other** option for accounts with a custom tax type label.
* **Institution** — Filter by institution name.
* **Balance** — Filter by balance (greater than, less than, equal to, etc.).
## Edit and delete accounts
To edit or delete a manual account, open the client's household and go to the [Accounts section on the Records tab](/records/households/accounts). From there you can update any field or delete the account.
## FAQ
No. Only linked [custodian accounts](/records/accounts/custodian-accounts) contribute to AUM. Manual account balances are tracked for your reference only.
Yes. When creating or editing a manual account, you can select any people from the household as owners.
Options include Traditional and Roth variants of 401(k), 403(b), 457, and IRA accounts, as well as SEP IRA, SIMPLE IRA, HSA, 529, Coverdell ESA, UGMA, UTMA, pension, and profit-sharing plans. Choose "Not applicable" for non-tax-advantaged accounts like checking or standard brokerage accounts.
For anything not on the list, pick **Other** and type your own **Tax type label** (e.g., "Defined benefit plan"). That custom label is what shows in the **Tax-advantaged type** column and the tax-type filter.
## Next steps
View and edit accounts on a client's Records tab
Browse accounts synced from your custodian
Track life and property and casualty coverage
# Overview
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/accounts/overview
Track custodian accounts, manual accounts, insurance policies, and trusts across your book.
The **Accounts** section brings together custodian accounts, manual accounts, insurance policies, and trusts across your book.
* **[Custodian accounts](/records/accounts/custodian-accounts)** — Synced automatically from your custodian each night. These are read-only and reflect the latest data from institutions like Schwab and Fidelity. Custodian accounts power [portfolio analytics](/records/clients/portfolio) and contribute to a client's AUM.
* **[Manual accounts](/records/accounts/manual-accounts)** — Created by you to track financial accounts that aren't held at a connected custodian, such as checking, savings, outside retirement, and education accounts.
* **[Insurance policies](/records/accounts/insurance-policies)** — Created by you to track life and property and casualty coverage, premiums, policy dates, insured people, and servicing details.
* **[Trusts](/records/households/trusts)** — Created by you to track trust records, tax IDs, linked households, and company-defined custom fields.
Both types appear on a client's [Records tab](/records/households/accounts) under **Accounts**.
## Where to find accounts
Click **Accounts** in the sidebar to expand the sub-menu:
* **Custodian** — Browse all custodian accounts synced to your book. [Learn more](/records/accounts/custodian-accounts).
* **Manual** — Browse all manual accounts created across your book. [Learn more](/records/accounts/manual-accounts).
* **Insurance** — Browse insurance policies across your book. [Learn more](/records/accounts/insurance-policies).
* **Trusts** — Browse trust records across your book. [Learn more](/records/households/trusts).
You can also view and manage accounts for a specific client from their [household detail page](/records/households/accounts).
## How accounts connect to clients
Custodian accounts are [linked to client households or trusts](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/linking) — either automatically through tax ID matching or manually from the custodian accounts list. Once linked, the account's market value counts toward the client's AUM and portfolio data appears on the client's **Custodian** tab.
Manual accounts are tied to a client household when you create them. They don't sync with external data, so you update balances and details yourself.
## FAQ
Custodian accounts sync automatically from your custodian integration and are read-only. Manual accounts are created and maintained by you for accounts not held at a connected custodian.
No. Only linked custodian accounts contribute to a client's AUM. Manual account balances are tracked separately for your reference.
No. Custodian accounts are created automatically when data syncs from your custodian. If a manual account corresponds to a custodian account that later syncs, you can delete the manual account and link the custodian account to the client instead.
## Next steps
Browse and link synced accounts
Create and manage accounts manually
Track policy and coverage details
Browse and manage trust records
View balances, holdings, and performance
Connect your custodian integration
# Bulk email
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/bulk-email
Send personalized emails to multiple clients, prospects, or contacts at once.
Bulk email lets you send individual, personalized emails to a group of recipients from your connected email account. Each recipient receives their own email — it's not a mass CC or BCC. You can personalize each email with placeholders that automatically fill in recipient-specific details like names and custom fields.
## Send a bulk email
On any list page — [clients](/records/clients/overview), [prospects](/records/prospects), [other contacts](/records/other-contacts), or [past clients](/records/clients/past-clients) — use the checkboxes to select the recipients you want to email.
In the selection bar at the bottom of the page, click **Bulk email**. The compose window opens with your selected recipients listed on the right.
The **From** field defaults to your primary connected email. Click it to switch to a different connected email address. You can only send from inboxes you own or have [**Read and send** access to](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar#share-your-email-access).
Enter a **subject** and compose your message in the body editor. You can also select an [email template](/account-settings/customization/email-templates) to start from a pre-written message.
Review how the email will look for each recipient. Click any recipient in the list on the right to preview their personalized version.
Click **Send emails** to send immediately, or click the dropdown arrow next to the send button to schedule the emails for a later date and time.
## Personalizing with placeholders
Use placeholders to insert recipient-specific information into your subject line and body. Click the button in the toolbar to browse available placeholders, including:
* **Person fields** — first name, last name, full name, email, phone
* **Household fields** — household name, tier
* **User fields** — your name, email, phone (the sender)
* **Custom fields** — any [custom fields](/records/households/custom-fields) configured for your book
Placeholders appear as tags in the editor and are replaced with real values when the email is sent. If a placeholder value is missing for a recipient, it's left blank.
## Recipient roles for households
When sending to [households](/records/households/overview) that have multiple people (such as a head of household and spouse), you can control who receives the email and how.
Click **Change roles** next to the **To** field to configure:
* **Head of household** — set to To, CC, BCC, or exclude
* **Spouse / partner** — set to To, CC, BCC, or exclude
By default, both the head of household and spouse or partner are included in the **To** field. Duplicate email addresses are automatically removed.
## Attachments
Click the button in the toolbar to attach files. Limits:
* Up to **3 attachments** per bulk email
* Maximum **10 MB** per file
* Maximum **25 MB** total across all attachments
## AI rewriting
Click the button in the toolbar to revise your email with AI. Describe the changes you want — for example, "make this warmer" or "shorten the second paragraph" — and the email body and subject are updated automatically.
## Scheduling
Instead of sending immediately, you can schedule the bulk email for a later date and time. On the review step, click the dropdown arrow next to **Send emails** and pick a date and time. Scheduled emails can be cancelled before they're sent.
## Tracking delivery
After sending, you can track the status of your bulk email. The detail view shows:
* **Delivered** — emails that have been sent successfully
* **Scheduled** — emails waiting to be sent
* **Opened** — emails the recipient has opened
* **Cancelled** — emails that were cancelled or failed
You can cancel individual recipients that are still scheduled, or cancel the entire bulk email.
## Limits
* **500 recipients** per bulk email (enforced when selecting from the list)
* **500 emails per day** per connected email account
* Emails are sent **one per minute** to avoid spam filters, so a 500-recipient bulk email takes about 500 minutes to complete
* Only one bulk email can be actively sending per connected email account at a time
The daily limit of 500 emails is shared across all bulk emails sent from the same connected email account. If you've already sent 400 emails today, you can only send 100 more.
## FAQ
No. Each recipient receives their own individual email. It's not a mass CC or BCC — each email is sent separately.
Yes. Bulk email works with [clients](/records/clients/overview), [prospects](/records/prospects), [other contacts](/records/other-contacts), and [past clients](/records/clients/past-clients). Select recipients from any of these list pages.
Recipients without a valid email address are automatically excluded. The recipient count shown in the compose window reflects only recipients with email addresses.
You can cancel individual recipients that haven't been sent yet. Emails that have already been delivered cannot be recalled.
## Next steps
Create reusable email templates with placeholders
Automate multi-step email campaigns over time
# Businesses
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/businesses
Track companies and organizations your practice works with.
Businesses are company records that represent organizations relevant to your practice — employers, custodians, vendors, referral firms, or any other entity you want to track. You can link [other contacts](/records/other-contacts) and [people](/records/people) to a business through employment records, and attach [tasks](/activity/tasks/overview), [meetings](/activity/meetings/overview), notes, and comments directly to a business.
## Creating a business
Click **+ New business** on the **Businesses** page.
Fill in the **Business name** (required). Optionally add an **Email**, **Phone** number, **Website**, and **Industry**.
The business is created and appears in the list.
## The business list
The **Businesses** page displays all businesses in a table with these default columns:
* **Business** — the business name (links to the detail page)
* **Email address** — primary email
* **Phone number** — primary phone
* **Website** — website URL (opens in a new tab)
* **Industry** — industry category
* **Tags** — assigned tags (editable inline)
Click any column header to sort by that field. You can sort by name, email, website, industry, created date, and updated date.
### Search
Click the icon in the toolbar or start typing to search businesses by name. Results update as you type.
### Filtering
Use the **Tags** chip at the top of the list to quickly filter by tag. Click **Filter** for additional conditions:
* **Name**, **Email**, **Phone number**, **Industry**, **Website** — match by text
* **City**, **State**, **ZIP** — match by address fields
* **Tags** — filter by one or more tags
* **Book** — filter by book (visible when viewing across all books)
Custom fields also appear as filter options.
### Views
The default view is **All businesses**. Click the **+** button next to the view tab to create a custom view with saved filters and sort order. Rename a view by clicking its name.
## Managing a business
Click a business name in the list to open its detail page.
### Header
The header displays the business name, primary email (as a clickable badge), and a profile picture. Click **+ Add tags** to assign tags for categorization and filtering.
Use the buttons in the top-right corner:
* **Add task** — create a [task](/activity/tasks/overview) linked to this business
* **Start meeting** — start an in-person, online, or past [meeting](/activity/meetings/overview) filed under this business. Choose a **Meeting type** in the create form, and Slant generates an AI [meeting prep](/activity/meetings/creating-and-recording-meetings#meeting-preparation) brief for upcoming business-only meetings.
* **Start project** — start a [project](/activity/projects/overview) filed under this business. The project type list is limited to types whose **Owner kind** is business.
* **...** (more menu) — add a note, edit the overview layout or tab order, or destroy the business
### Tabs
The left side of the detail page has tabs for:
* **Overview** — a customizable dashboard with **Meetings**, **Tasks**, **Projects**, **Opportunities**, and **Related records** widgets and an **Activity** feed. See [the overview tab](#the-overview-tab).
* **Emails** — email history with the business. Compose messages, open threads, and use **Show calendar invites** when you need to include invitation emails.
* **Phone** — call logs and recordings (requires a [phone integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone))
* **Meetings** — [meetings](/activity/meetings/overview) filed under this business
* **Tasks** — [tasks](/activity/tasks/overview) linked to this business
* **[Notes](/records/notes)** — notes created on this business
To preserve a note from further changes, open its **⋮** menu and choose **Lock**. Locked notes are read-only and can't be deleted. Only admins can lock or unlock notes.
Any user can reorder these tabs for the whole company. From the **...** menu on a business, select **Edit tab order**, drag the tabs into the order you want, then click **Save**. See [reordering the tabs](/records/households/overview#reordering-the-tabs) for the full workflow.
Tab order is shared across your company. Any user can change it, and everyone sees the saved order.
### The overview tab
The **Overview** tab opens to a top row of three widgets — **Meetings**, **Tasks**, and **Projects** — followed by **Opportunities** and **Related records** widgets and a full-width **Activity** feed.
The **Opportunities** widget lists [opportunities](/activity/opportunities/overview) linked to this business, with an **Add opportunity** button. When none exist, it shows a **No opportunities** empty state.
The **Activity** feed shows when the business was created and lists tasks, notes, and meetings as they're added. Each entry shows who created it and when.
### Customizing the overview layout
Businesses share the same drag-and-drop overview editor as households. Click **...** → **Edit overview layout** to open the editor.
The available widgets for businesses are **Meetings**, **Tasks**, **Projects**, **Opportunities**, and **Related records**. The layout is shared across your company, and any user can edit it. See [customizing the household overview layout](/records/households/overview#customizing-the-overview-layout) for the full workflow.
### Right sidebar
The right sidebar has three tabs:
* **Business** — the standard business fields
* **Records** — custom fields, related records, and a linked storage folder
* **Comments** — threaded comments
#### Business tab
Click any field to edit it inline:
* **Name** — the business name
* **Website** — a URL that opens in a new tab
* **Industry** — the business's industry
* **Tax ID** — a tax identification number
* **Email** — one or more email addresses, each with a type (personal, business, school, or other) and a primary indicator
* **Phone** — one or more phone numbers, each with a type (mobile, work, home, fax, or other) and a primary indicator
* **Address** — street address, city, state, and zip
* **Additional info** — free-text notes about the business
#### Records tab
The **Records** tab is an accordion that mirrors the [household Records tab](/records/households/records-overview) and holds:
* **Custom fields** — values for any [custom fields](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields) defined on the **Business** record type
* **Related records** — connections to other businesses, households, or trusts
* **Opportunities** — [opportunities](/activity/opportunities/overview) linked to this business. Click **Add opportunity** to create one with the business pre-filled as the related record. When none exist, the section shows **No opportunities found**.
* **Files** — a linked folder from your [file storage](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage) provider. Click **Link \[provider] folder** to browse and pick a folder, then expand **Files** to see its contents inline. Click the **⋯** menu next to the **Files** heading to **Unlink folder**.
#### Comments tab
View and add threaded comments about this business. Attach files with the upload button or paste images into a comment. Comments are visible to your team.
## Profile pictures
You can add a profile picture to any business to make it easier to identify in lists and detail pages.
Click the business name in the list.
Click the icon to the left of the business name in the header.
To replace or remove a profile picture, click the avatar and choose **Replace** or **Remove**.
Accepted formats: JPEG, PNG, GIF, and WebP. Maximum file size is 10 MB.
## Tags
Tags help you categorize businesses for filtering and organization. You can assign tags from the business detail page header or directly in the list by clicking the **Tags** cell.
### Managing business tags
You can create, rename, and delete business tags from settings.
Go to **Settings** → **Tags & labels** → **Businesses**.
Deleting a tag removes it from all businesses. This cannot be undone.
## Bulk actions
Select businesses in the list by clicking the checkbox next to each name. Hold `Shift` and click to select a range. Use the **Select all** checkbox in the header to select every business matching your current filters.
The selection bar appears at the bottom of the screen with **Add tag**, **Remove tag**, and **Delete** actions for the selected businesses.
After clicking **Delete** in the selection bar, you'll be asked to type `DELETE N BUSINESSES` (uppercase, with the actual count — `DELETE 1 BUSINESS` when only one is selected) before the delete button enables.
## Deleting a business
To delete a single business, click the **...** button on the business detail page and select **Destroy**.
To delete multiple businesses at once, select them in the list and click **Delete** in the selection bar. You'll be asked to type `DELETE N BUSINESSES` (uppercase, with the actual count — `DELETE 1 BUSINESS` when only one is selected) before the delete button enables.
Deleting a business removes all associated notes and tasks. Contacts and employment records linked to the business are preserved, but the link to the business is removed. This cannot be undone.
## FAQ
[Other contacts](/records/other-contacts) can be linked to a business through the **Business** field on the contact's detail page. This is useful for tracking which firm a CPA, attorney, or referral source works for. A business can have many linked contacts.
[People](/records/people) can be linked to a business through employment records. Each employment record tracks a role, start and end dates, and active status. A person can have multiple employments across different businesses.
Yes. Businesses are included when you import data from Redtail, Wealthbox, or Salesforce. You can also bulk-import businesses from a spreadsheet: go to **Settings** → **Data import** and choose the **Business** record type. Each row creates one standalone business — the import doesn't link them to households or people. See [CSV import](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/csv-import) or [importing your data](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/overview) for details.
Yes. Go to **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Custom fields** and add fields for the **Business** record type. Custom fields appear on the business detail page and can be used as filters.
## Next steps
Track professional relationships and link them to businesses
Manage individual person records with employment history
Create and manage tasks linked to businesses
Add custom fields to business records
# Clients
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/clients/overview
Manage your active client households — the paying families you serve.
Clients are active, paying [households](/records/households/overview) in your book. Each client has a [review schedule](/records/clients/reviews), [portfolio analytics](/records/clients/portfolio) from linked [custodian accounts](/records/accounts/custodian-accounts), and assets under management (AUM) tracking.
From the sidebar, you can also jump to the [people list](/records/people), [review manager](/records/clients/reviews), and [past clients](/records/clients/past-clients).
## The clients list
The clients list shows all active client households in your book. Click **Clients** in the sidebar to open it.
The default columns are **Client**, **Email address**, **Phone number**, **Tier**, **Tags**, **Client since**, **Latest email interaction**, and **Last meeting**. You can add columns for **LinkedIn**, **Date of birth**, **AUM**, **Next meeting**, review dates, location, and more.
Quick filter chips at the top let you filter by **Tags** and **Tier**. Click **Filter** for advanced filtering across additional fields including email, name, location, age, meetings, review dates, touchpoints, and any [custom fields](/records/households/custom-fields) configured for your book.
For full details on customizing columns, filters, sorting, saved views, search, and exporting, see [Data views](/records/data-views).
## Create a client
In the top-right corner of the clients list.
Fill in the **First name**, **Last name**, **Email**, **Phone**, and phone **Type**. Either a first name or email address is required.
The new client appears in the list. Slant automatically creates a household with the person you entered as the head of household.
Toggle **Create more** at the bottom of the form to keep it open after creating a client, so you can add multiple clients in a row.
You can also create a client by [promoting a prospect](/records/households/overview#converting-between-types).
## Bulk actions
Select one or more clients using the checkboxes on the left side of the list. A selection bar appears at the bottom with these actions:
* **Tier** — Change the tier for all selected clients
* **Add to project** — Start a [project](/activity/projects/overview) for each selected client
* **Bulk email** — Send a [bulk email](/records/bulk-email) to all selected clients (limit of 500 recipients)
* **Add tag** — Apply a tag to all selected clients
Click the **...** menu in the selection bar for additional actions:
* **Convert to prospect** — Move selected clients to the [prospects](/records/prospects) list
* **Archive to past client** — Move selected clients to [past clients](/records/clients/past-clients)
* **Add to sequence** — Enroll selected clients in an email [sequence](/platform/sequences/overview)
* **Mail merge** — Fill a Word template with the selected clients' data and download it as one document ([mail merge](/records/mail-merge))
* **Update custom field** — Set a [custom field](/records/households/custom-fields) value across all selected clients
* **Rename households** — Rename selected households using a naming template
* **Move to another book** — Transfer selected clients to another book you can access (requires access to multiple books)
* **Delete** — Permanently delete all selected clients and their data
Deleting clients removes all associated data including people, notes, tasks, meetings, and activity history. This cannot be undone. To confirm, type the uppercase phrase shown in the dialog (for example, `DELETE 5 CLIENTS`) to enable the **Delete** button.
## AUM tracking
Assets under management (AUM) is calculated automatically for clients with [linked custodian accounts](/records/clients/portfolio). The total is the sum of market values across all linked accounts and updates with each nightly custodian sync.
AUM appears as an optional column on the clients list and on the client detail page when custodian accounts are linked.
## FAQ
They are the same page. **Households** in the sidebar under **Clients** takes you to the clients list. The sub-items — **People**, **Reviews**, and **Past clients** — provide quick access to related views.
Yes. The only requirement is either a first name or an email address. You can add contact details later from the [household detail page](/records/households/overview#the-household-detail-page).
AUM is the total market value of all custodian accounts linked to the client. It updates automatically with each nightly custodian sync. If no custodian accounts are linked, AUM is blank.
Yes. Switch to the **All books** view using the book selector in the top-left corner. The clients list will show clients from all books you have access to, and a **Book** column appears in the table.
## Next steps
Track and manage client review schedules
View and restore archived clients
View custodian account balances and holdings
Customize columns, filters, and saved views
# Past clients
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/clients/past-clients
View, manage, and restore archived client households.
Past clients are former clients that have been archived. Archiving preserves all household data — people, notes, tasks, meetings, emails, and activity history — while moving the household out of your active clients list. Past clients can be restored to active client status at any time.
Open the past clients list by clicking **Clients** → **Past clients** in the sidebar.
## Archive a client
You can archive a single client or archive multiple clients at once.
### Single client
From the client's [detail page](/records/households/overview#the-household-detail-page), click the **...** menu and select **Archive to past client**.
### Bulk archive
Use the checkboxes to select the clients you want to archive.
In the selection bar at the bottom, click **...** and select **Archive to past client**.
## The past clients list
The past clients list shows all archived client households in your book. The default columns include the household name, email, phone, tags, dates, and meeting activity. Past client-specific fields like **Past client since** and **Was client since** show when the relationship changed and how long the household was active.
Use the **Tags** quick filter or click **Filter** for advanced filtering by **Past client since**, name, contact info, location, meetings, touchpoints, and [custom fields](/records/households/custom-fields). For details on customizing columns, filters, and views, see [Data views](/records/data-views).
Open a past client's household details to edit **Past client since**. The date also appears in CSV exports when its column is selected.
## Restore a past client
Restoring a past client moves them back to the active [clients list](/records/clients/overview) and reactivates client features like [review scheduling](/records/clients/reviews) and [custodian account linking](/records/clients/portfolio).
### Single restore
From the past client's detail page, click **Restore to client**.
### Bulk restore
Use the checkboxes on the past clients list.
In the selection bar at the bottom.
## Bulk actions
Select one or more past clients to reveal the selection bar at the bottom with these actions:
* **Restore to client** — Move selected past clients back to the active clients list
* **Add to project** — Start a [project](/activity/projects/overview) for each selected past client
* **Bulk email** — Send a [bulk email](/records/bulk-email) to all selected past clients (limit of 500 recipients)
* **Add tag** — Apply a tag to all selected past clients
Click the **...** menu for additional actions:
* **Delete** — Permanently delete selected past clients and all their data
* **Move to another book** — Transfer to another book you can access (requires access to multiple books)
Deleting past clients permanently removes all associated data including people, notes, tasks, meetings, and activity history. This cannot be undone. To confirm, type the uppercase phrase shown (for example, `DELETE 5 PAST CLIENTS`) to enable the **Delete** button.
## FAQ
No. Archiving preserves all household data. The client moves from the active clients list to the past clients list. You can restore them at any time.
Not directly. Restore the past client to active client status first, then [convert them to a prospect](/records/households/overview#converting-between-types) from the client detail page.
No. Past clients do not have linked custodian accounts, so they are not included in AUM calculations.
Yes. Search a past client's name, email, or phone number in global search (press **⌘K**). Matching results are labeled **Past client** and open the past client's record.
## Next steps
Manage the active clients list
Features shared across all household types
# Portfolio analytics
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/clients/portfolio
View portfolio balances, asset composition, holdings, transactions, and performance for linked clients.
Once a custodian account is [linked to a client](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/linking), portfolio analytics become available on the client's detail page. You can view balances, asset allocation, individual holdings, recent transactions, and balance history — all updated with each nightly sync.
Portfolio analytics are available for both client households and trusts with linked custodian accounts.
## Custodian tab
Open a client household and click the **Custodian** tab to see their full portfolio view.
If no custodian accounts are linked, the tab displays a prompt to connect accounts. Once accounts are linked, the tab shows:
* **Portfolio balance** — The total market value across all linked accounts, with the as-of date and daily and 30-day change percentages.
* **Asset composition** — A breakdown of holdings by asset class. Click a section to filter positions by that asset class.
* **Positions** — A list of individual holdings. Click **View all positions** or click an asset class section to see the full list.
* **Recent transactions** — The latest trades, deposits, and withdrawals. Click **View all transactions** to see the complete history.
* **90-day balance** — A chart showing portfolio value over the last 90 days.
### Filter by account
If a client has multiple linked custodian accounts, use the account selector in the top-right corner of the tab to filter the view to specific accounts.
The selector shows each account by name with the custodian and masked account number. The button label shows how many accounts are currently selected (e.g., "Showing all accounts (3)").
## Portfolio balance in the header
For clients with linked custodian accounts, the client detail page header displays a portfolio balance summary in the top-right area. This includes:
* Total portfolio balance
* A 30-day sparkline chart
* Daily and 30-day percentage changes (color-coded green for gains, red for losses)
This summary is visible from any tab on the client's detail page.
## Trust portfolios
Trusts with linked custodian accounts show the same portfolio analytics on their **Custodian** tab. The experience is identical to client households — portfolio balance, asset composition, positions, transactions, and 90-day balance history.
To link custodian accounts to a trust, use the **Linked trust** column on the [custodian accounts list](/records/accounts/custodian-accounts).
## FAQ
Portfolio data syncs nightly from your custodian. Balances, positions, and transactions reflect the most recent sync. The as-of date shown next to the portfolio balance tells you exactly when the data was last updated.
Position data for newly linked accounts may take up to 24 hours to appear after the initial account sync. If positions still don't appear after 24 hours, check that the custodian account has active holdings.
No. Portfolio analytics are only available for client households and trusts with linked custodian accounts. Prospects do not have a Custodian tab.
## Next steps
Connect accounts to clients and trusts
Browse and manage all synced accounts
# Reviews
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/clients/reviews
Track client review schedules, mark meetings as reviews, and manage review cadences.
The review manager helps you stay on top of client review meetings. It shows when each client was last reviewed, when their next review is due, and whether a review meeting is scheduled — all in one view.
Open the review manager by clicking **Clients** → **Reviews** in the sidebar.
## Views
The review manager includes two built-in views:
* **Upcoming reviews** — Focused on review scheduling. Shows when each client's next review is due, their last and next review meetings, and their review cadence.
* **Touchpoint Tracking** — Focused on engagement frequency. Shows the last touchpoint, when the next touchpoint is due, and the touchpoint cadence for each client.
Click the **+** button next to the view tabs to create additional custom views with your own filters, columns, and sort order.
## Upcoming reviews columns
The default **Upcoming reviews** view displays:
* **Client** — Household name (click to open the detail page)
* **Tier** — [Service tier](/records/households/overview#service-tiers) (editable inline)
* **Last review meeting** — Date of the most recent meeting marked as a review. Click to select a past meeting to mark as a review or to manually log a review date.
* **Next review due** — The calculated date when the client's next review should happen. Shows in red when overdue. Click to set a manual override.
* **Next review meeting** — The scheduled date of the next upcoming meeting marked as a review. Click to mark an upcoming meeting as a review.
* **Review cadence** — How frequently the client should be reviewed (editable inline)
Click **+ Add column** to show additional columns: **Tags**, **Last touchpoint**, **Next touchpoint due**, **Touchpoint cadence**, **Next meeting**, **AUM**, **Email address**, and **Phone number**.
## Touchpoint Tracking columns
The **Touchpoint Tracking** view displays:
* **Client** — Household name
* **Email address** — Head of household's primary email
* **Tier** — Service tier
* **Last touchpoint** — Date of the most recent interaction (meeting, email, call, or SMS)
* **Next touchpoint due** — When the next touchpoint should happen based on the cadence
* **Touchpoint cadence** — How frequently the client should be contacted
Touchpoints are recorded automatically when you send emails, hold meetings, make calls, or complete other interactions with a client.
To override the book or tier cadence for one client, open the client's **Household** tab and select **Last touchpoint**. Choose a cadence for that client or select **Use book default**.
## Review cadence
The review cadence determines how frequently a client should be reviewed. Options are:
* Monthly
* Quarterly
* Trimesterly (every 4 months)
* Semi-annual
* Annual
The cadence can be set at three levels, with the most specific taking priority:
1. **Client override** — Set directly on the client from the review manager or the client detail page
2. **Tier default** — Configured per [tier](/records/households/overview#service-tiers) in book engagement settings
3. **Book default** — The global cadence for all clients in the book
If no cadence is set at any level, Slant defaults to annual.
## How the next review date is calculated
Slant calculates the **Next review due** date by adding the review cadence to the date of the last review meeting. If no review meeting has been recorded, it uses the most recent meeting date. If the client has no meetings at all, it falls back to the **Client since** date.
When you hold a new review meeting, the next review date recalculates automatically.
## Mark a meeting as a review
Not every client meeting is a review. Slant distinguishes review meetings from regular check-ins so that only reviews affect the review schedule.
### From the review manager
Click the cell for the client whose review you want to record.
Choose from the list of past meetings with this client. The selected meeting is marked as a review and the review schedule updates.
To mark an upcoming meeting as a review:
Click the cell for the client.
Choose from the list of scheduled meetings with this client.
### From the client detail page
The review schedule section in the client header shows the last review meeting, next review meeting, and next review due date. Click any of these to update them.
## Override the next review date
If you need to adjust when a client's next review is due — for example, to accommodate a scheduling conflict — you can set a manual override.
In the review manager or the client detail page header.
Choose a new date for the next review.
The override stays in place until the client's next review meeting is recorded, at which point Slant recalculates the date automatically and clears the override.
## Filtering
Quick filter chips at the top of the review manager let you filter by **Review due**, **Review cadence**, **Next review meeting**, **Last touchpoint**, and **Tier**.
Click **Filter** for advanced filtering by additional fields including **Last review meeting**, **Full name**, and any [custom fields](/records/households/custom-fields) configured for your book.
## FAQ
If no cadence is set on the client, their tier, or the book, Slant defaults to an annual review cycle. Set a cadence at any level to override the default.
Yes. Click the **Last review meeting** cell and clear the selection. The meeting reverts to a regular check-in and the review schedule recalculates.
No. Review scheduling is only available for clients. When you [promote a prospect to a client](/records/households/overview#converting-between-types), you can then configure their review cadence.
Yes. Click the **Last review meeting** cell and use the manual date option to record a review date without linking it to a meeting in Slant.
## Next steps
Manage the clients list and create clients
Schedule and track meetings with clients
# Data management
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/data-management
Merge records, manage views, use bulk actions, and convert between record types.
Slant provides several tools for organizing and managing your records as your book grows.
## Merging households
When you have duplicate households, you can [merge them](/records/households/merging-households) to combine all data — notes, tasks, meetings, emails, and financial accounts — into a single household. The source household is removed after the merge.
## Converting between types
As relationships evolve, you can convert records between types:
* [Promote a prospect to a client](/records/prospects#promote-to-client) when they become a paying customer
* [Archive a client to a past client](/records/clients/past-clients#archive-a-client) to preserve their data while removing them from your active list
* [Restore a past client](/records/clients/past-clients#restore-a-past-client) to move them back to active client status
* [Convert a household to an other contact](/records/households/overview#converting-between-types) or vice versa
See [converting between types](/records/households/overview#converting-between-types) for the full list of conversions.
## Bulk actions
Every list page supports selecting multiple records and performing actions in bulk. Common bulk actions include changing tiers, adding tags, sending [bulk email](/records/bulk-email), adding to [projects](/activity/projects/overview) or [sequences](/platform/sequences/overview), and deleting records.
See the bulk actions section on each list page for the full set of available actions:
* [Clients](/records/clients/overview#bulk-actions)
* [Prospects](/records/prospects#bulk-actions)
* [Other contacts](/records/other-contacts#bulk-actions)
* [Past clients](/records/clients/past-clients#bulk-actions)
## Data views
[Data views](/records/data-views) let you save custom configurations of columns, filters, sort order, and search across any list page. Create views for different workflows — for example, a view filtered to clients in a specific tier or sorted by review due date.
## Copy records to another company
Company admins can copy clients, prospects, past clients, other contacts, and businesses to another eligible company in the same organization.
Open a record's actions menu, or select multiple records from a list.
Select **Copy to another company**.
In **Copy records to another company**, select the **Destination company** and **Destination book**.
Choose whether Slant should use, create, or skip destination tags, task and note labels, and populated record or person custom fields.
Confirm the copy and track it from the notification when complete.
The original records and their data remain in the source company. Projects stay in the source and are not copied.
The destination list includes only companies in the same organization where you are an active admin with access to an eligible book. If none qualify, Slant shows **No eligible destination company**.
## Next steps
Combine two households into one
Customize columns, filters, and saved views
Send personalized emails to multiple recipients
Import records from CSV or another CRM
# Data views
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/data-views
Customize how you browse records with saved views, column configuration, filtering, sorting, and search.
Data views control how you browse records across Slant. Every list page — [clients](/records/clients/overview), [prospects](/records/prospects), [past clients](/records/clients/past-clients), [people](/records/people), [other contacts](/records/other-contacts), [businesses](/records/businesses), [accounts](/records/accounts/overview), [reports](/platform/reports), and the [review manager](/records/clients/reviews) — uses the same data view system for organizing, filtering, and sorting records.
Each view saves its own columns, filters, and sort order, so you can create purpose-built views for different workflows.
## Saved views
Every list page starts with a default view (e.g., **All clients**). You can create additional views, and each one saves its own column layout, filters, and sort order as separate tabs at the top of the list.
### Create a view
Next to the existing view tabs at the top of the list.
Type a name for the view.
The new view starts with the default columns and no filters. Customize it by adding filters, changing columns, or adjusting the sort order.
The [meetings](/activity/meetings/overview) page also uses data views, and adds a **Layout** picker when you create one. Choose **All** for a data table like the rest of Slant, or **Upcoming** or **Processed** for a card feed. A feed layout saves filters rather than columns, since cards have no columns to configure.
### Edit a view
Hover over a view tab to reveal the icon. Click it to open the view settings, where you can:
* **Rename** the view by editing the name field
* **Reorder** tabs with the **Move left** and **Move right** buttons
* **Delete** the view (the default view cannot be deleted)
### Save changes
When you modify a view's filters, columns, or sort order, an **Unsaved changes** button appears. Click it to choose:
* **Save for everyone** — Saves your changes to the current view. All team members who use this view will see the update.
* **Save as new view** — Creates a copy of the view with your changes, leaving the original unchanged.
* **Discard changes** — Reverts the view to its last saved state.
### View scope
Views can be scoped to a single book or shared across all books in your company:
* **Book only** — Only visible when working in the specific book where it was created.
* **Company-wide** — Visible across all books. Company-wide views show a badge on the tab.
The default view on each list page cannot be deleted or reordered.
## Columns
Each view controls which columns are visible, their order, and their width.
### Show and hide columns
To add a column, click the **+ Add column** button at the right end of the column headers (or the column icon in the toolbar). A dropdown shows all available columns that aren't currently visible — select one to add it.
To hide a column, click the **...** menu on a column header and select **Hide column**.
The first column (usually the record name) is always visible and cannot be hidden or moved.
### Reorder columns
Click the **...** menu on a column header and use **Move left** or **Move right** to change the column's position.
### Resize columns
Drag the right edge of a column header to adjust its width. The new width is saved automatically.
### Custom field columns
On list pages that support [custom fields](/records/households/custom-fields) (such as clients and prospects), you can add custom fields as columns. When adding a column, select an existing custom field from the dropdown, or click **Create custom field** to define a new one.
## Filtering
Filters let you narrow the list to records matching specific criteria. Slant offers two types of filters: quick filter chips and the advanced filter panel.
### Quick filter chips
At the top of every list page, you'll see quick filter chips for the most common fields — such as **Tags** and **Tier** on the clients list, or **Review due** and **Review cadence** on the review manager.
Click a chip to activate it. Depending on the field type, you'll either select values from a dropdown or enter a value. Click the chip again to clear it.
### Advanced filters
Click **Filter** to open the advanced filter panel. Search for any available field and add it as a filter condition. Each filter has three parts:
1. **Field** — What you're filtering on (e.g., Email, City, Last meeting)
2. **Operator** — How to compare (e.g., is, contains, is blank)
3. **Value** — What to match against
Common operators:
| Operator | Meaning |
| -------------------- | -------------------------- |
| **is** | Exact match |
| **is not** | Does not match |
| **contains** | Includes the text anywhere |
| **does not contain** | Excludes the text |
| **is blank** | Field has no value |
| **is not blank** | Field has a value |
Date and time fields use relative operators like **Today**, **This week**/**Last week**/**Next week**, **This month**/**Last month**/**Next month**, **This quarter**/**Last quarter**/**Next quarter**, **This year**/**Last year**, **Past**, **Overdue**, or **Never**.
You can add multiple filters — records must match all active filters to appear in the list.
### Remove a filter
Click the **x** on a filter chip to remove it, or clear the operator and value to deactivate a quick filter.
## Sorting
Click a column header to open the sort menu. Most columns offer two options (e.g., **Sort A to Z** and **Sort Z to A**). Some columns provide additional sort options — for example, the **Date of birth** column on the people list can sort by upcoming birthdays, oldest to youngest, or youngest to oldest.
The active sort is indicated by an arrow icon on the column header. Only one sort can be active at a time.
## Search
Click the search icon in the top-right corner of the list to open the search bar. Search matches across key fields for the record type — typically names, email addresses, and phone numbers. Results update as you type.
## Exporting
Click the download icon in the top-right corner to export the current list as CSV files. The export respects your active filters and sort order, so you can filter down to exactly the records you need before exporting.
For [client](/records/clients/overview), [prospect](/records/prospects), and [past client](/records/clients/past-clients) lists, the export generates two files: one with household-level data and one with person-level data.
## FAQ
Not currently. All views are shared — either with everyone in the book (book only) or everyone in the company (company-wide). Any changes you save are visible to all team members with access.
The changes apply for everyone who uses that view. If you'd prefer not to modify the shared view, use **Save as new view** to create your own copy.
Yes. Add as many filters as you need — records must match all active filters to appear in the list.
The export includes all records that match your current filters, not just the ones visible on screen. Scroll position doesn't affect the export.
# Accounts
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/households/accounts
View and manage financial accounts for a client household from the Records tab.
The **Accounts** section on a client's **Records** tab shows all financial accounts linked to that household — both [manual accounts](/records/accounts/manual-accounts) you've created and accounts synced from a [custodian integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/overview).
Accounts are available for clients only. Prospects do not have an Accounts section.
## View accounts
Open a client's detail page and click **Records** in the right-side panel. Expand the **Accounts** section to see all accounts for this household.
Each account card shows:
* **Account name** and **institution**
* **Account type** and **tax-advantaged type** (if applicable)
* **Account number** — if available
* **Owner(s)** — the household members who own the account
* **Balance** — the most recent balance with an "as of" date
* **YTD return** — year-to-date return percentage (color-coded green for gains, red for losses)
Click **Show more** on an account card to see additional details including performance metrics (MTD, QTD, 1-year, 3-year, and 5-year returns) and the full account number.
## Add an account
Click **Records** in the right-side panel, then expand **Accounts**.
Enter the account name, select an account type and tax type, and optionally add the institution, account owners, balance, and account number. See [manual accounts](/records/accounts/manual-accounts) for a full description of each field.
The new account appears in the Accounts section.
You can also create manual accounts from the **Accounts** → **Manual** page in the sidebar. See [creating manual accounts](/records/accounts/manual-accounts#create-a-manual-account).
## Edit an account
Click an account card to open the edit form. You can update:
* Account name, institution, and account number
* Account type and tax-advantaged type
* Account owners (select one or more household members)
* Balance
* Notes — free-form notes about the account
Click **Save changes** to apply your edits.
## Unlink a synced account
If an account was originally synced from your custodian, a link icon appears on the card. To stop syncing updates while keeping the account data:
Confirm the action. The account remains on the household but no longer receives updates from the custodian.
## Delete an account
Confirm the deletion.
Deleting an account removes it permanently. This cannot be undone.
## FAQ
Yes. When adding or editing an account, you can select multiple people from the household as owners.
The Accounts section only appears for client households. If you're viewing a prospect, it won't be available.
If you have a [custodian integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/overview) connected and accounts are linked, balances update automatically with each nightly sync. For manual accounts, you update balances yourself from the edit form.
# Chat
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/households/chat
Use AI chat on client and prospect records to ask questions, draft emails, create tasks, and more — all in context.
AI chat is available on every client, prospect, and past client record under the **Chat** tab. It's a conversational assistant that knows about the household you're viewing — its people, activity, emails, meetings, tasks, notes, and more.
Chat appears in several places across Slant, each tailored to its context. This page covers household chat and the shared mechanics that apply everywhere chat appears. For other chat contexts, see [book chat](/dashboard/book-chat) and [meeting chat](/activity/meetings/chat).
## What chat can do
### Ask questions about your data
Type a question in plain language and chat queries the household's data to find the answer.
* "When was the last time we met with this client?"
* "What tasks are open for this household?"
* "Summarize the last 3 months of activity"
* "What's this prospect's email address?"
For book-wide questions like "How many clients do I have in tier A?" or "What's the total AUM across all my clients?", use [book chat](/dashboard/book-chat).
### Search notes, emails, and meetings
Chat can search through the content of your notes, emails, meetings, and tasks to find specific information. This is especially useful for recalling what was discussed or agreed upon.
* "What did we discuss about estate planning with the Johnsons?"
* "Find any notes mentioning retirement for this client"
* "Have we received any emails about the trust amendment?"
### Create tasks and notes
Ask chat to create records and it handles the details:
* "Add a task to follow up with the Davis household by next Friday"
* "Log a note about today's phone call regarding their 401k rollover"
**Assign tasks to teammates** by naming them in your request — e.g. "Create a task for Sarah to call the Smiths". If you don't specify a teammate, the task is assigned to you. Chat pre-fills the assignee in the task preview so you can review before saving.
### Update records
Chat can update existing records like households, people, and meetings:
* "Update the Thompson household's service tier to A"
* "Change the meeting type to annual review"
Chat describes what it's changing before making updates so you can verify.
Chat never takes action without your consent. When it drafts an email, creates a record, or updates data, you'll always have a chance to review and confirm before anything is sent or saved.
### Draft emails
Chat can compose emails for you:
* "Draft a birthday email to Sarah Johnson"
* "Write a follow-up email about the portfolio review we just had"
### Analyze files
Chat can read and analyze files you upload directly or files stored in your connected [file storage](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage):
* "Analyze the PDF I just uploaded and summarize the key points"
* "Look at this client's financial plan and pull out their target retirement age"
### Look up stocks and funds
Chat can look up current information about stocks, mutual funds, and ETFs to support your conversations.
### Check calendar availability
Chat can check your calendar availability to help with scheduling meetings.
### Search the web
Chat can search the web for current market data, interest rates, financial news, and other external information.
### Start a project from chat
When the conversation calls for it — for example, after agreeing to begin a money movement or kick off onboarding — chat can propose a [project](/activity/projects/overview) on this household. Chat shows a project type and starting milestones in a confirmation card. Click **Start project** to create it, or **Cancel** to dismiss. Once started, a link to the new project appears in the conversation.
### Send an intake form
Ask chat to send this household a published [intake form](/platform/intake-forms/overview) — "Send them the client intake form." Chat sets up the [invitation](/platform/intake-forms/sending-invitations) for you.
### Generate a PDF document
Ask chat to write a polished, client-ready PDF and it delivers a download link right in the conversation. Use it for any document you'd hand to a client — a meeting recap, a summary of a topic you discussed, an analysis of documents, or a household or estate overview.
* "Create a PDF recap of my last meeting with the Smiths"
* "Write a one-page estate summary for this household"
* "Generate a PDF summarizing the retirement plan we discussed"
Chat gathers what it needs from the conversation and the household's data, then writes the document — branded automatically with your firm's logo and colors, so you don't format anything yourself. When it's ready, a download card appears in the chat with two buttons: **Preview** opens the PDF in a new tab, and **Download** saves the file.
Download links expire one day after the document is generated. After that the card shows **Link expired** — ask chat to generate the document again to get a fresh link.
## Quick actions
The chat input shows **quick action buttons** — pre-built prompts that handle common workflows in one click.
Quick actions are contextual. For example, on a client record you might see:
* **Critique financial plan**
* **Meeting prep**
* **Suggest check-in**
Click a quick action to run it immediately. Quick actions are powered by [automations](/platform/automations/overview), so your team can customize which actions appear and what they do.
## Using chat
### Send a message
Type your question or instruction in the text box and press **Enter** or click the send button. Chat responds with an answer, often showing the data it queried to reach its conclusion.
### Use a prompt snippet
Type `/` in the chat box to open every [prompt snippet](/account-settings/customization/prompts#prompt-snippets) for that chat. The list includes Slant's defaults and any snippets you've created. Keep typing to filter, then click a snippet or press **Enter** to run it. At the start of a new thread, snippets also appear as buttons above the chat box.
### Upload a file
Click the icon next to the text box to upload a file for analysis. Chat can read PDFs, spreadsheets, and images.
### Use voice input
Click the icon to dictate your message instead of typing. Your speech is transcribed into the text box.
### Choose a model
Use the model selector to switch between AI models. Different models offer different tradeoffs between speed and depth of reasoning:
* **GPT-5.6 Sol**
* **GPT-5.6 Terra**
* **Claude Opus 5**
* **Claude Sonnet 5**
Your model choice is saved and persists between sessions.
### Manage threads
Each conversation is saved as a thread. You can:
* **Start a new thread** — click the **+** button in the top-right corner of the chat area
* **View past threads** — click the history button next to the **+** button to browse and reopen previous conversations
Threads are saved automatically and persist between sessions.
## FAQ
Chat can access the household's people, tasks, meetings, notes, emails, projects, opportunities, accounts, tags, custom fields, and documents. Chat can never access data from books you don't have access to.
Yes. Chat can create tasks and notes, update records, and draft emails. It always describes what it's doing before making changes so you can review and confirm.
Chat sends your questions and relevant data to AI model providers to generate responses. Your data is not used to train these models. See [security](/help/security) for more details.
Yes. Quick actions are powered by [automations](/platform/automations/overview). Your team can create and configure automations to add custom quick actions to client and prospect records.
Not within Slant. Chat writes the document fresh each time, so to change it, tell chat what to adjust and have it generate a new version. The downloaded PDF is a finished file you can open and print like any other.
Generated PDFs use your firm's logo and colors automatically — there's no per-document styling to set. To create printed letters from a reusable template instead, use [mail merge](/records/mail-merge).
## Next steps
Query across your entire book from the Home page.
Chat in the context of a specific meeting.
Create custom quick actions for chat.
# Custom fields
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/households/custom-fields
Store and edit additional household information using custom fields on the Records tab.
Custom fields let you store additional information on a household beyond the standard fields. If your book has custom fields configured for households, they appear in the **Custom fields** section of the **Records** tab.
## View and edit custom fields
Each field displays its name and current value. Click any field to edit it inline — changes save automatically.
By default, the first four custom fields are visible. Click **Show more** to see the rest, or **Show less** to collapse them.
Custom fields for households are configured in your book's settings under **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Custom fields**, and apply to both clients and prospects. If no custom fields are set up, this section won't appear.
## FAQ
No. Clients and prospects share the same household custom fields — a field created for households appears on both.
Yes. Custom fields appear as filter options on the clients and prospects list pages.
Yes. On the clients or prospects list page, select multiple households, open the bulk actions menu, and choose **Update custom field**. Every field type is supported, including link and URL fields. To empty a field instead of setting a new value, turn on **Clear value** — the value for that field is removed from every selected record.
# Filling documents
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/households/document-filler/filling-documents
Fill PDF forms with household and people data, then download or save the completed document.
Fill a PDF template with data from a household's records. The document filler pre-fills mapped fields automatically — you review the values, fill in any remaining fields, and generate the completed document.
## Fill a document
From a client or prospect record, click the **...** (actions menu) and select **Fill PDF**.
Select a template from the **Template** dropdown. The PDF preview on the left updates to show the selected template.
Some templates are designed to fill data for a specific person rather than the whole household. If the template requires a person, choose one from the **Person** dropdown. Each person is shown with their household role (e.g., head of household, spouse).
Some templates fill fields for two people in the household. For these, choose who fills each role using two dropdowns:
* **Head of household** — Required. Defaults to the household's current head of household. Whoever you pick fills the head-of-household fields on the document.
* **Spouse/partner** — Optional. Defaults to the household's current spouse or partner, and can be set to **None**. Whoever you pick fills the spouse fields.
Each person is shown with their household role (e.g., **Sparkle Bergnaum (Head of household)**). The head of household and the spouse/partner must be different people — if you choose the same person for both, you'll see an error and can't continue until you change one.
Some templates include advisor fields like name, email, or phone. If the template requires an advisor, choose one from the **Advisor** dropdown. This defaults to you if you're a member of the book.
Toggle any of the available options:
* **Send to DocuSign for signatures** — Route the filled document to DocuSign for e-signature after you generate it. Appears for templates with signature fields.
* **Let signers fill empty fields in DocuSign** — Allow signers to complete fields you left blank during signing.
* **Keep document editable after fill** — Keep the filled PDF as an interactive form instead of flattening it into a static document. Some templates always produce a static document — in that case, this option won't appear.
Slant resolves all field values from the household's records and loads the form.
The form shows all fields for the template. Pre-filled fields already have values pulled from the household's records. Empty fields need to be filled in manually. Required fields are marked with an asterisk. See [working with fields](#working-with-fields) for details.
Slant generates the completed document. If any required fields are missing, you'll be scrolled to the first one that needs attention.
Once the document is generated, you'll see your options for [saving or sharing](#after-filling) the completed document.
## Working with fields
### Pre-filled vs manual fields
Each field in the form has a source:
* **Pre-filled fields** have values pulled automatically from the household's records (names, addresses, dates of birth, etc.). You can edit these values before generating the document.
* **Manual fields** have no mapping and are left empty for you to fill in. Template editors choose which fields are mapped and which are collected at fill time when [configuring the template](/records/households/document-filler/settings#configure-a-template).
### Field types
Templates can include text fields, checkboxes, checkbox groups, dropdowns, and radio groups. Date, phone, and SSN fields use formatted input to help you enter values in the correct format.
### Conditional fields
Some fields only appear when a related field has a specific value. For example, a trust information section might only appear when you select "Trust" as the account type. When the condition isn't met, those fields are hidden automatically.
### Required fields
Required fields are marked with an asterisk. If you try to generate the document without completing all required fields, you'll be taken to the first missing field. Template editors set which fields are required when [configuring the template](/records/households/document-filler/settings#configure-a-template).
### PDF preview
As you work through the form, the PDF preview on the left highlights the field you're currently editing. Use the zoom controls to get a closer look at the document.
## After filling
Once the document is generated, you have three options:
* **Download** — Save the completed PDF to your computer.
* **Save to cloud storage** — If the household has a connected [file storage folder](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage), save the document directly to their cloud storage. Any user can configure a specific subfolder for filled documents in the [document filler settings](/records/households/document-filler/settings).
* **Send to DocuSign** — If the template includes signature fields, send the document for e-signature. See [sending documents for signature](/records/households/document-filler/sending-for-signature).
## FAQ
Yes. The document filler is available for both clients and prospects — any household type.
The field appears empty in the form. You can enter a value manually or leave it blank if it's not required.
No. To change the template, the selected person, or the head of household and spouse/partner roles, close the document filler and start again. You'll be asked to confirm if you have unsaved changes.
# Document filler
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/households/document-filler/overview
Auto-fill PDF forms with data from your client records and send them for e-signature.
The document filler populates PDF forms with data from your household and people records — names, addresses, account details, and more. Instead of manually entering the same information across dozens of forms, you select a template, review the pre-filled values, and generate a completed PDF in seconds.
## What you can do
* **Auto-fill PDF forms** — Templates pull data directly from your records using field mappings. Fields that aren't mapped are left for you to fill in manually. [Learn how to fill a document](/records/households/document-filler/filling-documents).
* **Fill for a specific person or entire household** — A template's form type is either **Joint** (fills data for the whole household) or **Individual** (fills data for a single person, like an individual account application).
* **Review fields with a live PDF preview** — As you work through the form, the PDF preview highlights the field you're editing so you can see exactly where each value will appear.
* **Download or save to cloud storage** — Once your document is filled, download it to your computer or save it directly to the household's connected [cloud storage folder](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage).
* **Send for e-signature via DocuSign** — For templates with signature fields, send the filled document to DocuSign and assign signers to each role. [Learn how to send documents for signature](/records/households/document-filler/sending-for-signature).
* **Upload and configure your own templates** — Your team can upload fillable PDFs and configure field labels, mappings, groups, conditions, and signers directly in Slant — no Slant representative required. [View settings](/records/households/document-filler/settings).
## How it works
The document filler is available from any client or prospect record. Open the household's actions menu and select **Fill PDF** to get started. You'll choose a template, review and edit the pre-filled field values, then generate the completed document.
After the document is generated, you can download it, save it to the household's cloud storage, or send it to DocuSign for e-signatures — all from the same screen.
## FAQ
Any user can upload a fillable PDF from **Settings** → **Document filler** and configure it in-house. See [managing document templates](/records/households/document-filler/settings). If you have a form that isn't a fillable PDF, contact your Slant representative.
Yes. Any user can set and change field mappings, labels, groups, conditions, and signer roles in the template editor. See [managing document templates](/records/households/document-filler/settings).
Filled documents can be saved to Google Drive, OneDrive, Box, Dropbox, ShareFile, or Egnyte. You need a [file storage integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage) connected to your book.
No. If your firm hasn't connected a DocuSign account, envelopes are sent from Slant's shared account. You can also connect your own account from the [DocuSign settings](/records/households/document-filler/settings#connect-docusign).
## Next steps
Step-by-step guide to filling a PDF form
Send filled documents to DocuSign for e-signature
Manage templates and storage folders
Connect cloud storage for document management
# Sending documents for signature
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/households/document-filler/sending-for-signature
Send filled documents to DocuSign for e-signature and track signing status.
After [filling a document](/records/households/document-filler/filling-documents), you can send it to DocuSign for e-signature. The document filler lets you assign a signer to each signer role configured on the template, then sends the envelope directly from DocuSign.
You can send documents for e-signature even if your firm hasn't connected a DocuSign account — envelopes are sent from Slant's shared account by default. To send from your own account, see [connecting DocuSign](/records/households/document-filler/settings#connect-docusign).
## Send a document for signature
[Fill a document](/records/households/document-filler/filling-documents) as usual. After the document is generated, you'll see your options.
This option appears when the template includes signature fields.
Each signer role defined for the template (for example, client, joint client, or advisor) needs a signer. Select a person from the **Household members** or **Book users** groups. To skip an optional role, select **N/A**.
If a selected signer doesn't have an email address on file, an email field appears below their name. Enter the email address where they should receive the signing request.
If the document has fields that were left blank during filling, you can delegate them to signers to complete during signing. Toggle on the fields you want to delegate, then assign each one to a signer. Required fields are always included. Click **Continue** when you're done.
The envelope is created and signers are notified.
If you're one of the signers, you'll be redirected to DocuSign to sign immediately. Other signers receive an email with a link to sign.
## After sending
### Signing notifications
You'll receive a notification when the document's status changes:
* **Signed** — All signers have completed their signatures. The signed document is available for download.
* **Declined** — A signer declined to sign.
* **Voided** — The envelope was voided.
Click the notification to view the status and download the signed document.
### Signed document storage
If the household has a connected [cloud storage folder](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage), the signed document is automatically saved there once all signers have completed signing. You can configure a specific subfolder for signed documents in the [DocuSign settings](/records/households/document-filler/settings#signed-document-storage).
## FAQ
No. Schwab forms are not currently supported for DocuSign e-signatures. You can still fill and download them.
Slant automatically suggests signers based on the role. The head of household role maps to the household's head member, spouse maps to the spouse or partner, and advisor maps to you (the current user). You can change any of these before sending.
Envelope management (voiding, resending) is handled directly in DocuSign. Slant tracks the envelope status and notifies you of any changes.
# Document filler settings
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/households/document-filler/settings
Upload and configure document templates, set field mappings and signers, and connect DocuSign.
Upload your own fillable PDFs, configure how each one fills and gets signed, choose where completed documents are stored, and connect your firm's DocuSign account.
## Document templates
Any user can upload and configure document templates.
Go to **Settings** → **Document filler**. The **Company** tab lists all document templates available to your firm. Each row shows the template **Name**, **Form type** (**Joint** or **Individual**), and an **Active** toggle.
### Upload a template
You configure your own fillable PDFs in-house — no Slant representative required.
Click **Upload PDF**. The **Upload document template** window opens.
Enter a **Name** (for example, "Schwab account application").
Set **Form type** to **Joint** to fill data for the whole household, or **Individual** to fill data for a single person.
Next to **Fillable PDF**, click **Choose File** and select your PDF.
Click **Upload**. Slant detects the PDF's form fields automatically and names them for you.
After upload, Slant suggests field names and a banner shows while it works. The new template appears in the list, ready to configure.
Your PDF must be a fillable PDF — one with form fields you can type into. If it has no form fields, the upload is rejected with: "This PDF has no fillable form fields. Please upload a fillable PDF." If your form isn't a fillable PDF, contact your Slant representative.
### Enable or disable a template
Toggle the **Active** switch on a template row to enable or disable it. Disabled templates are hidden from users when filling documents but are not deleted. You can re-enable them at any time.
### Rename or delete a template
Click the **⋮** (three-dot menu) on a row, then select **Edit** to open the template editor or **Delete** to remove it.
Deleting a template removes it and its configuration. This cannot be undone.
### Configure a template
Click the **⋮** (three-dot menu) on a row and select **Edit**. The editor opens with the PDF preview on the left and a sidebar with five sections: **Field definitions**, **Field groups**, **Conditional fields**, **Mappings**, and **Signatures**. Hover a row in any section to highlight that field in the PDF preview. Click **Save changes** to apply your work or **Cancel** to discard it.
Look for the suggestion banners marked with a sparkle icon. Slant can suggest field names, groups, mappings, and conditions so you don't have to configure everything by hand.
#### Field definitions
Drag rows to reorder them, rename fields, hide them from the fill form, or mark them as required. Each row has these controls:
* **Label** — The name users see for the field on the fill form.
* **Sign / date** — Mark a field as a signature or date field so it can be assigned to a signer in the **Signatures** section.
* **Show on form** — Show or hide the field on the fill form.
* **Required** — Require a value before the document can be filled.
#### Field groups
Radio button groups already defined in the PDF appear automatically and are labeled **From PDF** (these are locked). To clean up the fill form, combine related checkboxes into a custom group:
* Click **New group**, then choose **Pick one** (only one option can be selected) or **Pick many** (multiple options can be selected).
* Or click **Suggest groups** to let Slant propose groups for you.
#### Conditional fields
Show one or more fields on the fill form only when another field has a specific value. Click **Add condition**, then choose the trigger field and the condition — for example, show fields when a trigger field is filled, has certain values, or a checkbox is checked. Slant can also suggest conditions.
#### Mappings
Pre-fill each form field from household or person data. Use the combobox next to each field to choose the data source. Leave a field blank to collect its value at fill time.
* Click **Suggest mappings** to let Slant propose mappings for every field.
* Click **Clear all** to remove all mappings at once.
#### Signatures
Define one signer role per person who needs to sign. The fields you marked **Sign / date** in **Field definitions** become available here.
Click **Add role** and enter a **Role label** (for example, "Client", "Joint client", or "Advisor").
Use the **Signature fields** picker to assign the signature fields this role signs.
Use the **Date fields** picker to assign the date fields this role completes.
These roles are the signers users assign when [sending the document for signature](/records/households/document-filler/sending-for-signature).
## Filled document storage
Go to **Settings** → **Document filler** and select a book tab. The **Where should completed documents be stored?** field lets you set an optional subfolder name within each household's cloud storage folder.
Leave this empty to save completed documents to the root of the household's storage folder. The folder name saves automatically when you click away from the field.
This setting requires a [file storage integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage) to be connected.
## Connect DocuSign
Go to **Settings** → **DocuSign**. The **Company** tab lets you connect your firm's DocuSign account for sending e-signature envelopes.
You'll be redirected to DocuSign to authorize Slant.
After authorizing, you'll be redirected back to Slant. The connection status updates to **Connected** with the DocuSign email and username.
If your firm doesn't connect a DocuSign account, envelopes are sent from Slant's shared DocuSign account instead.
### Disconnect DocuSign
Click **Disconnect** on a connected account. Existing envelopes are not affected — only future envelopes will be sent from Slant's shared account.
Disconnecting switches all future envelopes to Slant's shared DocuSign account. This affects all users in your firm.
### Signed document storage
Go to **Settings** → **DocuSign** and select a book tab. The **Where should completed documents be stored?** field lets you set an optional subfolder name for signed documents within each household's cloud storage folder, separate from the subfolder for filled documents.
## FAQ
Any user can upload, configure, and enable document templates.
A fillable PDF — one with form fields you can type into. Slant rejects PDFs that have no form fields. If your form isn't a fillable PDF, contact your Slant representative.
No. Slant names fields automatically on upload and can suggest field names, groups, mappings, and conditions from the editor. You review and adjust the suggestions.
No. Disabling a template hides it from the document filler but keeps all its configuration. You can re-enable it at any time.
The filled document folder (in **Document filler** settings) stores PDFs generated by the document filler. The signed document folder (in **DocuSign** settings) stores PDFs returned from DocuSign after all signers have signed. You can set different subfolder names for each.
# Email
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/households/email
View email history with a household, send new messages, and generate AI follow-up tasks from an email thread.
The **Email** tab on a client, prospect, or other contact record shows every email thread with the people on that record. Connect an inbox through [email and calendar integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar) to sync your conversations.
## View a thread
Click any row in the thread list to open a thread. The **Conversation** tab shows each message's sender, recipients, date, and full body. In a long thread, older middle messages collapse behind **View N additional messages** so the newest context stays close to the reply box.
Open the **Tasks** tab to review, create, or generate follow-up tasks for the thread. Use **Resync from Gmail** (or your provider) to pull in the latest messages.
After you send a reply, it remains visible in the thread while delivery completes. Its badge updates from **Sending** to the delivered message, or to **Failed**, **Undeliverable**, or **Unsubscribed** when it cannot be delivered.
Calendar invitation emails are hidden from the thread list by default. Click **Show calendar invites** in the toolbar to include them.
## Send an email
Click **Send email** in the top right of the Email tab to compose a new message. The head of household's email is pre-filled as the recipient, along with the spouse or partner if they're on the household. You can only send from inboxes you own or have [**Read and send** access to](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar#share-your-email-access).
### Add recipients
Click the **To**, **Cc**, or **Bcc** field and start typing. Slant searches your book by email address, person name, and business name, and groups suggestions:
* **Businesses**
* **Contacts**
* **Clients**
* **Prospects**
* **Users**
Click a suggestion to add it as a recipient.
## Schedule an email
Instead of sending immediately, you can schedule an email for a later date and time.
Click **Send email** and fill in the recipients, subject, and body.
Click the calendar icon next to the **Send** button.
Choose a date and select a time. For a household with a timezone, Slant limits choices to the recipient's local daytime window and shows your time alongside the client time. The preview includes **Client local time**.
Slant queues the email and closes the composer.
The scheduled email appears in the Email tab with a **Scheduled** badge and the send time.
Set the household's **Timezone** in its details when the client lives in a different timezone. If no household timezone is available, the picker uses the advisor-local schedule.
### Edit a scheduled email
You can change a scheduled email's content, recipients, attachments, and send time before it sends.
In the Email tab, click the email with the **Scheduled** badge.
Click the pencil icon next to **Scheduled for \[date and time]** at the top of the message. The composer reopens with the existing content.
Update the recipients, subject, body, or attachments. To change the send time, click the calendar icon and pick a new date and time.
Slant updates the scheduled email and closes the composer.
### Cancel a scheduled email
Open the scheduled email and click the **X** icon next to the **Scheduled for \[date and time]** badge, then click **Cancel email** to confirm.
Cancelling a scheduled email permanently deletes it. This cannot be undone.
## Generate follow-up tasks from a thread
Slant can read an email thread and suggest follow-up tasks for you — great for turning a long client reply into a clear to-do list.
Click a thread in the Email tab to view its messages.
Open the **Tasks** tab and click **Generate tasks**. Slant reads the thread and proposes follow-up tasks.
Each suggested task appears with **Accept** and **Reject** buttons.
* Click **Accept** to add the task to your task list.
* Click **Reject** to dismiss the suggestion.
Accepted tasks behave like any other task — you can edit, assign, and schedule them. Tasks created this way link back to the email thread so you can return to the source conversation at any time.
### Add a task manually from a thread
You can also add a task to a thread yourself, without using AI. Open the **Tasks** tab and click **Add task** to open the [task creation form](/activity/tasks/creating-tasks) with the email thread already attached. The new task lands in the thread's task list alongside any AI suggestions.
### Regenerate tasks
Once a thread has tasks, the button changes to **Regenerate**. Use it after new replies arrive to refresh the suggestions.
Regenerating replaces pending and open suggestions for the thread. Tasks you've already completed are preserved, and Slant won't suggest duplicates of tasks that already exist on the thread.
Suggested tasks stay as suggestions until you accept them. They don't appear in your main task list or send notifications until you click **Accept**.
# Extracting data from documents
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/households/extracting-data
Upload a document and automatically extract contact details, financial information, and other fields into a household.
Extract data lets you pull structured information out of a document — like a PDF form, scanned application, or account opening paperwork — and apply it directly to a household's records. Instead of manually retyping names, addresses, phone numbers, and other details, Slant reads the document and maps the data to the right fields.
You can extract data from any client, prospect, or past client household.
## Extract data from a document
Go to the client or prospect you want to update.
Click the **...** menu in the top-right corner and select **Extract data**.
Click **Choose file** and select a document from your computer. Supported file types: PDF, PNG, JPG, JPEG, GIF, WebP, TIFF, and BMP.
Slant uploads the document and begins extracting data. This may take a few moments depending on the document size.
Once extraction completes, you'll see a table of extracted fields. See [reviewing extracted data](#review-extracted-data) for details on how to review and apply.
### Extract from linked storage
If the household has a [linked storage](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage) folder, you can pull documents directly from your connected cloud storage instead of uploading from your computer.
Click the **...** menu on the household and select **Extract data**.
Two tabs appear: **Linked storage** and **Upload from computer**. Select **Linked storage**.
Navigate through folders to find the document you want to extract from. Click a file to select it.
The **Linked storage** tab only appears when the household has a linked storage folder and your book has an active file storage integration.
## Review extracted data
After extraction completes, Slant displays a review table with four columns:
* **Checkbox** — Select or deselect individual fields
* **Field** — The name of the extracted field
* **Current** — The value currently stored in Slant (or "—" if empty)
* **New** — The extracted value, which you can edit before applying
Fields are grouped by category: **Head of household**, **Spouse / partner**, **Household**, **Custom fields**, and **Other**. All fields are selected by default.
### Edit values before applying
Each extracted value is editable. Click into the **New** column for any field to correct or adjust the value before applying it to the household.
### Select which fields to apply
Use the checkboxes to control which fields are written to the household. You can:
* Select or deselect individual fields
* Use the checkbox in the header row to select all or deselect all
Only checked fields are applied when you click **Apply selected**.
### Swap head of household and spouse
When the document contains data for both the head of household and spouse, a **Swap roles** button appears. This is useful when the document lists the spouse's information in the primary position — for example, when an account application has the spouse as the primary account holder.
Clicking **Swap roles** reassigns the extracted data so that head of household fields are applied to the spouse and vice versa. The group labels update to show **(swapped)** so you can confirm the mapping before applying.
Click **Swap roles** again to switch back.
### Apply the data
Click **Apply selected** to write the checked fields to the household. Slant updates the head of household, spouse, and household records with the extracted values. If the document contains spouse data but the household doesn't have a spouse yet, Slant creates one automatically.
If the extraction updates the head of household or spouse's name, the household name is automatically updated to reflect the change.
A confirmation message appears when the data has been applied.
### No data extracted
If the document doesn't contain recognizable data, Slant displays a message and you can close and try again with a different file.
## Supported fields
Slant can extract the following fields from documents. The exact fields returned depend on what information the document contains.
### Personal information
First name, middle name, last name, suffix, preferred name, maiden name, date of birth, gender, and marital status.
### Contact information
Primary email, primary phone, mobile phone, work phone, and home phone.
### Addresses
Home address (street, city, state, ZIP) and mailing address (street, city, state, ZIP).
### Employment
Employer, occupation, job title, designations, LinkedIn URL, and gross annual income.
### Identity documents
SSN, tax ID, passport number, driver's license number, driver's license state, driver's license issue date, and driver's license expiration date.
Sensitive identity fields like SSN, tax ID, and passport number are stored securely in the household's private vault, not as plain text.
### Household details
Home ownership status, estimated home value, and estimated wealth range.
### Custom fields
Any [custom fields](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields) configured for households in your book are also included in the extraction. These appear under the **Custom fields** group in the review table.
## FAQ
PDF, PNG, JPG, JPEG, GIF, WebP, TIFF, and BMP. Both digital documents and scanned images are supported.
Only for the fields you select. You can review every extracted value before applying and deselect any fields you want to keep unchanged. Existing values are shown in the **Current** column so you can compare.
You'll see an error message explaining what went wrong. Close the message and try again — common causes include corrupted files or unreadable scans.
No. Once you click **Apply selected**, the values are written to the household. Review the extracted data carefully before applying. If you need to revert a change, manually edit the field on the household.
No. Data extraction is only available for households — clients, prospects, and past clients.
## Next steps
Fill document templates with household data
Configure custom fields that appear in extractions
Connect cloud storage to browse files directly
Manage household members and their details
# Household files
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/households/files
Link cloud storage folders to households and manage documents directly from the client or prospect view.
Household files let you connect a cloud storage folder to any client or prospect, giving you quick access to their documents without switching to a separate app.
The **Files** section appears under the **Records** tab on every client and prospect. Once you [connect a file storage provider](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage), you can link a folder from your cloud storage and browse, upload, and organize files directly in Slant.
## Link a folder to a household
Go to a client or prospect and click the **Records** tab in the right sidebar.
Click **Link \[provider] folder** (for example, **Link Google Drive folder**). A folder picker opens where you can browse your cloud storage and select the folder you want to link. The **Select** button is enabled only after you pick a folder.
The selected folder and its contents appear in the Files section. Slant displays the folder tree from your cloud storage, showing subfolders and files with icons based on file type.
Only users with [shared storage access](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage#share-storage-access-with-teammates) can link folders. If someone else connected the storage provider and hasn't shared access with you, you'll see a message indicating who needs to link the folder.
## Browse files and folders
Once a folder is linked, the Files section shows a tree view of its contents. Folders are listed first, followed by files.
* **Expand a folder** — click the folder name or the arrow to reveal its contents
* **Collapse a folder** — click the folder name or arrow again
* **Open a file** — click a file name to open it in your storage provider (Google Drive, OneDrive, etc.)
* **Open a folder in your provider** — hover over a folder and click the icon to open it directly in your cloud storage
## Upload files
You can upload files to any folder in the linked storage.
* **Upload button** — hover over a folder to reveal the icon. Click it, then select one or more files from your computer.
* **Drag and drop** — drag files from your computer and drop them onto a folder. The folder highlights when it's ready to receive files.
Uploaded files appear in your cloud storage immediately and show up in the Slant file browser.
## Create and rename folders
### Create a folder
Hover over any folder to reveal the icon. Click it to create a subfolder. Type a name for the new folder and press **Enter** to save, or **Escape** to cancel.
### Rename a folder
Hover over a folder to reveal the icon. Click it to edit the folder name. Press **Enter** to save the new name, or **Escape** to cancel.
## Unlink a folder
Unlinking removes the connection between the household and the storage folder. Your files remain in cloud storage — nothing is deleted.
On the household's **Records** tab, expand the **Files** section.
Click the **⋯** (three-dot menu) next to the **Files** heading and select **Unlink folder**.
After unlinking, the Files section returns to its empty state and you can link a different folder.
## FAQ
Yes. Each household has its own linked folder. You can organize your cloud storage with a folder per household and link each one individually.
Slant displays all files from your cloud storage. Documents, spreadsheets, PDFs, images, and other file types each show a corresponding icon. Clicking any file opens it in your storage provider.
No. Slant supports browsing, uploading, and organizing files, but deleting files must be done directly in your cloud storage provider.
If your team's [file storage integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage) is disconnected, the Files section shows a prompt to reconnect. Previously linked folders are unlinked, but your files remain in cloud storage.
## Next steps
Connect a cloud storage provider and manage access
Learn about households in Slant
# Merging households
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/households/merging-households
Combine two households into one, transferring all data to the target household.
Merging combines two households into one. All notes, tasks, meetings, emails, activity history, and financial accounts transfer to the target household. The source household is removed after the merge.
You can merge any combination of household types — clients, prospects, and past clients.
## Merge from a single household
From either household, click the **...** menu and select **Merge with household**.
Search for and select the household you want to merge with. Click **Next**.
You'll see all people from both households. For each person, choose a role — such as **Head of household**, **Spouse**, **Partner**, **Other adult**, or **Dependent child** — or select **Delete** to remove them.
Every household must have exactly one head of household and at least one person remaining.
The merge runs and you're redirected to the surviving household.
## Merge from the list
You can also kick off a merge by selecting exactly two households in the **Clients** or **Prospects** list.
Check the boxes next to the two households you want to merge. The selection bar appears at the bottom.
The merge dialog opens in pair mode and asks which household should remain.
Pick the household to keep — the other one's data merges into it. The picked household is marked **will remain**. Click **Next**.
Assign roles for everyone in the combined household, then click **Merge households**.
When you start from a single household, the household you **select** in the **Select the other household** step is the one that remains — the household you started from is merged into it and then removed. When you start from the list with two selected, you choose which household remains in the first step. Either way, the confirmation screen spells out which household will remain and which will be deleted before you finish.
## What transfers during a merge
Everything associated with the source household moves to the target:
* **Notes** — All notes, including notes linked to people in the household
* **Tasks** — All tasks and task recurrences
* **Meetings** — Meeting associations are combined. If both households attended the same meeting, the duplicate is removed automatically.
* **Emails** — Full email history
* **Activity history** — All activity records. Duplicate activities (same action on the same record) are deduplicated automatically.
* **Financial accounts** — Custodian accounts and portfolios are consolidated. If both households have a portfolio, the source's accounts move into the target's portfolio.
* **Custom fields, vault files, and other records** — All remaining household-scoped data transfers to the target.
## Duplicate person detection
When assigning roles, Slant automatically detects potential duplicates between the two households by matching on email address or full name. Duplicates are flagged with a badge so you can choose to delete one of them.
Review flagged duplicates carefully before merging. Deleting a person removes their contact details, but notes, tasks, and meetings linked to them are preserved on the target household.
## FAQ
No. Merging is permanent. The source household is deleted after its data transfers to the target. Make sure you've selected the correct target before confirming.
The source household is automatically deleted once all its data has been transferred and no associated records remain.
No. The target household keeps its current type (client, prospect, or past client). If you need to change the type, [convert between types](/records/households/overview#converting-between-types) after the merge.
Any user with edit access to both households in the same book can perform a merge.
## Next steps
Detail page layout, tags, tiers, and shared features
Manage the individuals within your households
# Household opportunities
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/households/opportunities
View and create opportunities linked to a household from the Records tab.
The **Opportunities** section on the **Records** tab shows all [opportunities](/activity/opportunities/overview) linked to this household. Each opportunity card displays the name, pipeline stage, value, probability, and any labels.
## View opportunities
Each opportunity card shows:
* **Name** — the opportunity title
* **Stage** — the current pipeline stage
* **Value** — the deal value in dollars
* **Probability** — the estimated likelihood of closing
* **Label** — the first tag applied to the opportunity
Click an opportunity card or the icon to view it on the opportunities page.
## Add an opportunity
Click **Add opportunity** at the bottom of the section. The opportunity creation form opens with the household pre-filled as the **Related record**.
You need at least one [pipeline](/activity/opportunities/pipelines-and-stages) configured before you can add opportunities.
For a brand-new prospect, skip this step — check **Also create an opportunity** while [creating the prospect](/records/prospects#create-a-prospect-and-an-opportunity-together) to add both records at once.
The same **Opportunities** section appears on the **Records** tab of [other contacts](/records/other-contacts) and [businesses](/records/businesses), and as an **Opportunities** widget on their overview tabs. Each links the record as the opportunity's related record.
For full details on managing opportunities, see [Opportunities](/activity/opportunities/overview).
## FAQ
Yes. Each opportunity belongs to a specific pipeline, and a household can have opportunities across multiple pipelines. To move an existing opportunity, use [move to pipeline](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities#move-an-opportunity-to-another-pipeline) on the opportunities board.
Opportunities are managed from the full [opportunities page](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities). Navigate there to edit or delete an opportunity.
# Households overview
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/households/overview
Understand households — the core record type in Slant that represents a family unit you serve.
A household is a family unit in Slant. Every client, prospect, and past client is a household — it's the shared foundation that holds [people](/records/people), contact information, activity history, and everything else related to a family you work with.
Whether someone is an active client, a prospect you're cultivating, or a past client you've archived, they all share the same household structure. The type determines which tab they appear on and which features are available.
## Household types
Every household has one of three types:
* **Client** — An active, paying household. Clients appear under **Records** → **Clients** in the sidebar and have access to custodian account linking, review scheduling, and assets under management (AUM) tracking.
* **Prospect** — A potential household you're cultivating. Prospects appear under **Records** → **Prospects** and share most features with clients, but don't have review schedules or custodian data.
* **Past client** — A former client you've archived. Past clients appear under **Records** → **Clients** → **Past clients** and retain all their historical data. They can be restored to active client status at any time.
You can convert households between types as relationships evolve. See [converting between types](#converting-between-types) for details.
## People in a household
Each household contains one or more [people](/records/people) — the individual members of the family. Every household must have a **head of household**, and can optionally include a spouse or partner, dependent children, and other family members.
The head of household is the primary contact. Their name and contact details are displayed prominently on the household and used as defaults throughout Slant.
You can add people to a household from the **Household** tab on the right side of the household detail page. Click **Add person to household** at the bottom of the tab.
For full details on managing people, roles, and contact information, see [People](/records/people).
## The household detail page
When you open a client, prospect, or past client, you see the household detail page. The layout is the same across all household types, with a few features specific to clients.
### Header
The header shows the household name, primary email address, and primary phone number. Below the name you'll find:
* **Tier** — The household's [service tier](#service-tiers). Click the tier badge to change it. Prospects show a **Prospect** badge here instead.
* **Tags** — Click **Add tags** to assign or remove tags. Tags wrap to two rows at most. Any that don't fit collapse into a **+N more** button — hover over it or click it to see the full list.
* **AI summary** — Slant generates a summary of the household based on its data. This updates automatically as you add information.
Hover over the household name and click the pencil icon to open **Edit household name**. A customized name stays fixed when the household leaders' names change. To return to your company's naming convention, reopen the dialog and click **Use default name**.
### Default household names
Admins can choose how Slant names households that do not have a customized name. Go to **Settings** → **Company settings** and set **Default household name** to one of these formats:
* **John Smith Household**
* **John Smith**
* **Smith Household**
* **Smith**
* **Smith, John**
* **John and Jane Smith Household**
* **John and Jane Smith**
* **The Smith Family**
Changing the setting opens **Replace household names?**. The first change replaces all existing household names across the company. Later changes replace only names that have not been customized.
Clients also display a **Next review due on** date in the header when a [review schedule](#review-schedule) is configured.
### Household details
The **Household** tab keeps key relationship dates together:
* **Client since** — Edit the date the household became a client.
* **Last touchpoint** — View the latest interaction. Open the field to set a client-specific **Touchpoint cadence** or choose **Use book default**.
* **Last meeting** — Open the household's most recent meeting.
* **Past client since** — View when a past client was archived.
* **Created at** — View when the household was added to Slant.
### Household timezone
Open the household details and set **Timezone** to the household's local timezone. Clear the value to return it to auto-detection from the household's address or phone information.
Slant uses the effective household timezone for recipient-facing schedules, including sequence steps, intake-form reminders, recurring workflow dates, and scheduled household email. If Slant cannot determine a household timezone, scheduling falls back to the advisor's local behavior.
### Quick actions
The top-right corner of the header provides quick access to common actions:
* **Call** — Start a phone call (requires [phone integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone))
* **Send email** — Open the email composer
* **Add task** — Create a [task](/activity/tasks/overview) for this household
* **Start meeting** — Create a new [meeting](/activity/meetings/overview) linked to this household
### More actions
Click the **...** menu next to the quick actions for additional options:
* **Add note** — Create a note for this household
* **Start project** — Begin a new [project](/activity/projects/overview) with this household
* **Add to sequence** — Enroll the household in an email [sequence](/platform/sequences/overview)
* **Fill PDF** — Fill a document template with household data
* **Send form** — Send the household an [intake form](/platform/intake-forms/overview) to fill out (not available for past clients)
* **Extract data** — Upload a document and automatically [extract contact details, financial information, and other fields](/records/households/extracting-data) into the household
* **Enrich household** — Use AI to find and add publicly available information about the household
* **Convert to prospect** — Demote a client to a prospect (clients only)
* **Archive to past client** — Archive a client as a past client (clients only)
* **Convert to other contact** — Convert a single-person household to an [other contact](/records/other-contacts). Projects, opportunities, financial data, and vault files are permanently deleted.
* **Merge with household** — Combine this household with another
* **Destroy** — Permanently delete the household and all associated data
### Content tabs
The main area of the household detail page is organized into tabs:
* **[Chat](/records/households/chat)** — An AI-powered conversation about this household. Ask questions, get meeting prep, or request analysis.
* **Overview** — A customizable dashboard of widgets for this household. See [customizing the overview layout](#customizing-the-overview-layout).
* **Custodian** — View linked custodian accounts and financial data (clients only)
* **[Email](/records/households/email)** — Email history, compose new messages, and generate AI follow-up tasks from a thread
* **Phone** — Phone call history (requires [phone integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone))
* **Meetings** — Past and upcoming [meetings](/activity/meetings/overview) with this household, grouped by year with the newest meetings first
* **Tasks** — [Tasks](/activity/tasks/overview) associated with this household. Narrow the list with the **Assigned to** and **Project** filters, or click **Filter** to filter by **Priority**, **Label**, **Due date**, or **Collaborator**.
* **[Notes](/records/notes)** — Notes and documentation about this household
Type `@` in a note to mention a record or teammate. On a household note, suggestions include that household's custodian accounts, manual accounts, and insurance policies. Teammate suggestions cover people with access to this book, and everyone you mention gets a notification. See [notification settings](/account-settings/notifications) to control whether those notifications also arrive by email.
To preserve a record of advice, attestations, or any final note that shouldn't change, click the **⋮** menu on a note card and choose **Lock**. Locked notes are read-only — content, mentions, references, labels, and attachments are frozen, and the note can't be deleted. You can still pin or unpin a locked note from the same menu.
Only admins can lock and unlock notes. Edits and unlocking can be done together, so you don't have to lock a note again after a quick correction.
To lock every new note automatically, go to **Settings** → **Company settings** and turn on **Lock new notes by default**. New notes are created as locked and must be unlocked by an admin before they can be edited or deleted.
Any user can reorder these tabs for the whole company — see [reordering the tabs](#reordering-the-tabs).
### Reordering the tabs
Any user can set the tab order that everyone on the team sees on client and prospect detail pages.
Tab order is shared across your company — every advisor sees the same order, and any user can change it.
On a client or prospect's detail page, click the **...** button in the top-right corner.
Select **Edit tab order**. The tab bar switches into a drag-and-drop editor.
Use the grip handle on each tab to drag it left or right.
Click **Save** to publish the new order, **Reset to default** to restore Slant's built-in order, or the **X** to close without saving.
Client and prospect tab orders are configured separately — changing one does not affect the other.
## Customizing the overview layout
The **Overview** tab is a drag-and-drop dashboard built from widgets. Pick which widgets appear, rearrange them, and resize each one to fit how your team works.
The layout is shared across your company — every advisor sees the same overview, and you can set a different layout for clients, prospects, other contacts, and businesses.
The overview layout is shared across your company, and any user can edit it.
### Enter edit mode
On a client or prospect's detail page, click the **...** button in the top-right corner.
Select **Edit overview layout**. The Overview tab opens with an editor panel on the right.
### Add, move, resize, and remove widgets
While editing:
* **Add** — Drag a widget from the right-hand list onto the grid. Widgets already placed are dimmed and cannot be added twice (except custom fields, which can appear multiple times).
* **Move** — Drag any widget by its header to reposition it.
* **Resize** — Drag the bottom-right corner of a widget to make it larger or smaller.
* **Remove** — Click the trash icon on a widget's header to take it off the grid.
* **Undo** — Click **Undo** in the editor panel to reverse your last change.
Click **Save** to publish the layout to your team, or close the editor to discard changes.
### Available widgets
| Widget | What it shows |
| ------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Tasks** | Open [tasks](/activity/tasks/overview) for this household |
| **Activity** | Full activity timeline for this household |
| **Important information** | A free-text area for anything the team should see first. Click into it and type — the text saves on the household. You can add only one of these. |
| **Quick actions** | Shortcuts for common actions like sending email or starting a project |
| **Custom fields** | A group of [custom fields](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields). You can add more than one custom fields widget and pick which fields each one shows. |
| **Meetings** | Recent and upcoming [meetings](/activity/meetings/overview) |
| **Recent emails** | Latest email threads |
| **Projects** | Active [projects](/activity/projects/overview) |
| **Opportunities** | Open [opportunities](/activity/opportunities/overview) |
| **Related records** | Linked households, businesses, contacts, and trusts |
| **Trusts** | Trusts tied to this household |
| **Files** | Vault files for this household |
| **Sequences** | Active [sequence](/platform/sequences/overview) enrollments |
| **Pinned note** | One pinned household note. Add the widget more than once to surface different pinned notes. |
The Activity widget is anchored to the bottom of the layout — it takes the full width and can't be moved above the other widgets.
The activity timeline also records [intake form](/platform/intake-forms/overview) exchanges. Sending a form adds a "sent a form invitation" entry, and a completed form adds a "submitted a form" entry. Each entry shows the form name — click it to open the invitation or the submission.
### Right sidebar
The right side of the page has three tabs:
* **Household** — Shows each person in the household with their role, contact details, and key fields. Expand a person to edit their information inline, or click **Show more** to open their full [person detail page](/records/people).
* **Records** — Linked records including [custom fields, projects, files, financial accounts, and more](/records/households/records-overview).
* **Comments** — Internal comments visible to your team. Attach files with the upload button or paste images into a comment.
## Service tiers
Tiers let you prioritize households by service level. By default, Slant provides four tiers — A, B, C, and D — but your book can be configured with up to eight tiers with custom labels.
You can set a household's tier from:
* The **tier badge** on the household detail page header
* The **Tier** column on the clients or prospects list (click inline to change)
* **Bulk actions** on the list page (select multiple households and click **Tier**)
Tiers also drive review and touchpoint schedules — you can configure different cadences per tier in your book's engagement settings.
## Tags
Tags help you categorize and filter households. A household can have multiple tags, and you can filter by tag on the clients or prospects list page.
Add tags from the household header by clicking **Add tags**, or in bulk from the list page by selecting households and using the tag action in the selection bar.
The tag list opens with a **Selected tags** header and a count of the tags already on the household. Click any tag in that group to remove it. Below that, type in **Search or create tags...** to find an existing tag or to create a new one with the name you typed. When the household already carries every tag in your book, the list reads "All available tags are selected".
## Review schedule
Review schedules are available for clients only.
Slant tracks when each client is due for their next review meeting. The review schedule is based on a **cadence** — how frequently you review the client — and updates automatically as you hold review meetings.
Cadence options are: Monthly, Quarterly, Trimesterly, Semi-annual, or Annual. The cadence can be set at three levels, with the most specific taking priority:
1. **Household override** — Set directly on the client
2. **Tier cadence** — Configured per tier in book settings
3. **Book default** — The global cadence for all clients in the book
The **Next review due on** date appears in the client header and can be filtered on the clients list page.
## Touchpoint tracking
Touchpoints track how recently you've engaged with a household. Slant automatically records touchpoints when you send emails, hold meetings, make calls, and complete other interactions.
Like review schedules, touchpoints use a cadence to calculate when the next touchpoint is due. This helps you identify households that may need attention.
## Converting between types
As your relationship with a household evolves, you can convert between types:
* **Prospect to client** — Click **Promote to client** on a prospect's detail page. This moves the household to the clients tab and activates client features like review scheduling and custodian linking.
* **Client to prospect** — From the **...** menu, select **Convert to prospect**. This moves the household to the prospects tab and removes review schedule and financial data.
* **Client to past client** — From the **...** menu, select **Archive to past client**. The household moves to the past clients section under clients. All data is preserved and the household can be restored at any time.
* **Past client to client** — Click **Restore to client** on a past client's detail page to move them back to active client status.
* **Household to other contact** — From the **...** menu, select **Convert to other contact**. This is only available for households with a single person and converts the household into an [other contact](/records/other-contacts).
Converting a client to a prospect removes review schedule data and financial account links. This cannot be undone.
## FAQ
Both are households with the same core features — people, notes, tasks, meetings, and email. Clients have additional capabilities: custodian account linking, assets under management (AUM) tracking, and review scheduling. When a prospect becomes a paying customer, promote them to a client to unlock these features.
No. Every household has exactly one head of household. If you need to change who the head of household is, update the household role on the person you want to designate. The previous head of household is automatically reassigned.
Deleting a household permanently removes all associated data including people, notes, tasks, meetings, and activity history. This cannot be undone.
Yes. From the **...** menu on a household, select **Merge with household**. You'll choose a target household, then decide which people to keep and what roles to assign. See [merging households](/records/households/merging-households) for the full workflow.
From the clients or prospects list page, select one or more households, open the bulk actions menu, and choose **Move to another book**. You must have access to both the current book and the destination book.
## Next steps
Manage the individuals within your households
Custom fields, files, projects, and more
Create and manage tasks for your households
Schedule and track meetings with households
# Household projects
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/households/projects
View and create projects linked to a household from the Records tab.
The **Projects** section on the **Records** tab shows all [projects](/activity/projects/overview) linked to this household. Each project card displays the project name, type, assigned user, and milestone progress with completion percentages.
## View projects
Each project card shows:
* **Project name** — the title of the project
* **Project type** — the template the project was created from
* **Assigned to** — the team member responsible
* **Milestone progress** — color-coded progress bars showing completed and total tasks per milestone
Click a project card or the icon to open the full project page.
## Add a project
Click **Add project** at the bottom of the section. The project creation form opens with the household pre-filled.
For full details on creating and managing projects, see [Projects](/activity/projects/overview).
## FAQ
Yes. You can link as many projects as needed to a single household.
Yes. Projects are managed from the full [project page](/activity/projects/overview) — navigate there to edit or delete a project.
# Household records
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/households/records-overview
An overview of linked records and data available on the Records tab of every household.
The **Records** tab on the right side of every household detail page gives you quick access to linked records and data without leaving the household. Each section expands to show its contents and lets you add, edit, or view related records.
To open the Records tab, go to any client or prospect and click **Records** in the right sidebar.
## Sections
The Records tab contains the following sections:
* **[Custom fields](/records/households/custom-fields)** — Store additional information beyond the standard household fields. Edit values inline.
* **[Projects](/records/households/projects)** — View and create [projects](/activity/projects/overview) linked to this household, with milestone progress tracking.
* **[Opportunities](/records/households/opportunities)** — View and create [opportunities](/activity/opportunities/overview) linked to this household, with pipeline stage and value.
* **[Related records](/records/households/related-records)** — Track connections between this household and other records like [businesses](/records/businesses), other households, or [people](/records/people).
* **[Trusts](/records/households/trusts)** — View and create trust records associated with this household.
* **[Files](/records/households/files)** — Connect a cloud storage folder to browse, upload, and organize documents.
* **[Accounts](/records/households/accounts)** — View and manage linked financial accounts (clients only).
* **[Sequences](/records/households/sequences)** — View and manage email [sequence](/platform/sequences/overview) enrollments.
* **Intake forms** — View the household's [intake form](/platform/intake-forms/overview) invitations and submissions, linked to their detail pages.
* **Important information** — A free-text note for high-priority context about the household, such as service preferences or sensitive details to keep top of mind. Type directly in the field to add or edit it; changes save automatically.
Each section that holds linked records shows a count badge indicating how many items it contains. Click a section to expand it and see its contents.
# Related records
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/households/related-records
Track connections between a household and other records in Slant.
Related records let you track connections between a household and other records in Slant — such as [businesses](/records/businesses), other households, [people](/records/people), [other contacts](/records/other-contacts), or users.
The **Related records** section on the **Records** tab shows all linked records with their relationship labels.
## View related records
Each related record shows:
* **Record name** — the linked record's name, with an icon indicating its type
* **Relationship label** — how the records are related (for example, "is referred by" or "is CPA for")
Click a related record to navigate to its detail page.
## Add a related record
Type the name of the record you want to link. Search spans every book you have access to, so you can link to clients, prospects, people, businesses, other contacts, or users from any of your books — not just the current one.
Use **Search or create a relationship** to select a company relationship label. If the label does not exist, select **Create “\[label]”**. You can also add a reverse label to describe the relationship from the other direction.
Relationship labels are shared across your company and reused without regard to capitalization. This keeps labels consistent as teammates link more records.
## Edit a relationship
Hover over a related record card and click the icon to change the relationship label. Press the checkmark to save or the X to cancel.
## Remove a related record
Hover over a related record card and click the icon. Confirm the deletion in the dialog.
Removing a related record deletes the relationship between the two records. This cannot be undone.
## FAQ
You can link clients, prospects, people, businesses, other contacts, and users. Each relationship has a customizable label describing how the records are connected.
They can be. When adding a related record, you can optionally set a reverse label to describe the relationship from the other record's perspective. Both labels will appear on their respective detail pages.
Yes — related records can link to records in any book you have access to, not just the current one. If you later lose access to a linked record's book, opening its card shows an access error.
# Household sequences
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/households/sequences
View and manage sequence enrollments for a household from the Records tab.
The **Sequences** section on the **Records** tab shows [sequence](/platform/sequences/overview) enrollments for this household.
## View enrollments
Each enrollment card shows:
* **Sequence name** — the name of the sequence the household is enrolled in
* **Enrollment date** — when the household was enrolled
* **Progress** — a percentage showing how far through the sequence the household has progressed
* **Next step** — when the next step is scheduled (for example, "Next step in 2 days")
Click an enrollment card to view it on the sequences page where you can manage the enrollment in detail.
If a sequence has been deleted but the enrollment remains, the card appears dimmed and is no longer clickable.
## Enroll a household
Click **Enroll household** at the bottom of the section. Select a sequence from the dropdown, then configure the enrollment settings before confirming.
You can also enroll households from the menu on the household header, or in bulk from the [clients](/records/clients/overview) or [prospects](/records/prospects) list page. See [Managing enrollments](/platform/sequences/managing-enrollments) for full details.
## FAQ
Yes. A household can be enrolled in as many sequences as needed, as long as the selected sending account hasn't reached its 500-active-enrollment limit. Each enrollment tracks progress independently.
Yes. Click the enrollment card to navigate to the sequences page, where you can pause or exit the enrollment. See [Managing enrollments](/platform/sequences/managing-enrollments) for details.
Every selected email recipient needs an email address. During individual enrollment, at least one household member or team member must be selected as **To**. Also check that the sequence is active and that the book has not reached its enrollment limit.
# Trusts
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/households/trusts
Browse, create, and manage trust records across your books or from a household.
Trusts track legal trust records and connect each trust to one household. You can browse trusts across a book or open the **Trusts** section on a household's **Records** tab.
## Browse trusts
Click **Accounts** → **Trusts** in the sidebar. The list supports search, filters, saved views, and **All books** when you have access to more than one book.
Add columns for standard trust details or [trust custom fields](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields). Custom field values are edited from the trust detail page, not inline in the list.
## View trusts
Each trust card shows:
* **Trust name**
* **Additional information** — any notes or details about the trust
* **Tax ID** — if one has been entered
Click a trust card to open the full trust detail page where you can view and edit all trust information.
The **Custom fields** section shows the first four populated or available fields. Click **Show more** to view the rest.
## Add a trust
Click **Add trust** at the bottom of the section. The trust creation form opens with the household pre-filled.
You can also create a trust from **Accounts** → **Trusts**.
## FAQ
Yes. A household can have as many trust records as needed.
No. Trusts are linked to a single household. To track a trust's relationship to another household, use [related records](/records/households/related-records).
# Mail merge
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/mail-merge
Generate printed letters, envelopes, and labels by filling a Word template with household data.
Mail merge fills a Word template with each household's data and combines the results into a single Word document you can print and mail. Use it for client letters, envelopes, mailing labels, and any printed correspondence.
You upload a `.docx` template once, then run the merge from any client or prospect — or in bulk from the list — and download the filled document.
## Upload a template
Templates live under **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Mail merge**. Each book has its own templates, and any user can also upload company-wide templates that every book can use.
Go to **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Mail merge**. Switch to the **Company** tab to manage company-wide templates, or the book tab to manage templates only that book uses.
Pick a `.docx` file from your computer. Slant scans the document for merge fields and uploads it.
The template appears in the **Templates** list with the merge fields it found. A warning icon indicates any unrecognized fields — fix the typo in your Word document and re-upload.
Letters, envelopes, and labels all share the same flow — page size, margins, and layout come from your Word document itself.
Any user can upload, rename, or delete templates on the **Company** tab. Anyone with access to a book can manage that book's templates.
### Rename or delete a template
Open the **⋯** menu on any template row to **Rename** or **Delete** it. Deleting a template also removes any past merge runs that used it.
## Write merge fields
In your Word document, type merge fields as `{{field.name}}` — exactly as shown in the **Merge fields** reference on the mail merge settings page. Hover the info icon next to any field for an example value.
Common fields include:
* **`{{household.greeting}}`** — the household members' preferred names joined with `&` (for example, "John & Jane"). It doesn't include a lead-in like "Dear," so add that yourself in your template: `Dear {{household.greeting}},`
* **`{{household.address_block}}`** — a multi-line mailing address suitable for the top of a letter or an envelope
* **`{{household.name}}`** — the household's display name
* **`{{household.head_of_household.full_name}}`** — full name of the head of household
* **`{{household.head_of_household.salutation}}`**, **`{{household.partner.salutation}}`** — formal salutations
* **`{{household.last_meeting_date}}`**, **`{{household.next_meeting_at}}`** — meeting dates
* **`{{current_date}}`** — today's date in the book's timezone (for example, "June 19, 2026") — useful for letterheads and dated correspondence
The full reference on the settings page lists every supported field for the head of household, spouse, partner, and household.
Open the **Merge fields** section to see sample values for each field, rendered from a sample "John & Jane Doe" household — no real client data is used. Copy the field text directly from the reference to avoid typos.
## Run a merge for one household
Go to any client or prospect.
On the **Overview** tab, click **Mail merge** in the **Quick actions** widget. If you don't see it, click the gear in the widget header and turn on **Mail merge**.
Choose a template, then click **Run mail merge**.
When the merge finishes, click **Download document** to save the filled `.docx` file.
## Run a merge in bulk
You can fill one template against many households in a single run.
On the **Clients** or **Prospects** page, select the households you want to mail to.
In the selection bar at the bottom, open the more menu and choose **Mail merge**.
Choose a template and click **Run mail merge**. Slant generates one `.docx` file containing a filled copy of the template for each household — ready to print.
Mail merge isn't available when you're viewing **All books** — pick a specific book first.
## Recent runs
The book tab on **Settings** → **Data customizations** → **Mail merge** lists every merge run for that book under **Recent runs**, with the template name, the user who started it, the number of households, and a **Download** button to retrieve the document again. Runs that failed or surfaced merge field warnings are flagged here so you can fix the template and re-run.
## FAQ
Templates and outputs are both `.docx` (Microsoft Word). Open the result in Word, Google Docs, or any compatible editor before printing.
Empty values render as blank text in the document. Slant lists any households with missing or unresolved fields as warnings on the merge run so you can review before printing.
No. Mail merge is for printed mail. For email outreach to many households, use [bulk email](/records/bulk-email) or [sequences](/platform/sequences/overview).
Anyone with access to the households being mailed can run a merge. Any user can also upload company-wide templates.
## Next steps
Send the same email to many clients or prospects at once
Auto-fill PDF forms with household data
Manage templates, pipelines, and other firm settings
# Notes
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/notes
Create, organize, attach files to, lock, and manage notes on records in Slant.
Notes keep advice, decisions, and other context with the record they belong to. Clients, prospects, past clients, other contacts, and businesses each have a **Notes** tab.
## Create or edit a note
Open the record and select **Notes**.
Click **Add note** to create one, or select an existing note to edit it.
Write the note, then add labels, mentions, or attachments as needed.
Click **Create note** for a new note or **Update note** for an existing one. New attachments are uploaded when you save.
Type `@` in the editor to mention a record or teammate. Teammate suggestions include people with access to the current book. Mentioned teammates receive a notification.
## Attach files
Use the **Attachments** section in the note editor to add files in either of these ways:
* Click **Upload file** and choose one or more files.
* Drag files from your computer onto the open note. When **Drop files to attach** appears, release them.
* Click **Attach from drive** to link a file from your connected [file storage](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage).
You can add up to 20 attachments to a note. Each uploaded file can be up to 10 MB. Supported formats are PDF, DOCX, TXT, CSV, XLSX, XLS, PNG, JPEG, and GIF.
The files remain part of the draft until you save the note. To remove one before saving, click the next to its name.
Locked notes are view-only. Unlock a note before adding or removing attachments.
## Find and organize notes
Use the controls above the note list to change what you see:
* **Search** — find text within the record's notes
* **Table view** — show notes in rows with labels, creators, and dates
* **Card view** — show note previews as cards
* **View settings** — show hidden notes or filter notes by label
Apply a label while editing a note, or [manage available note labels](/account-settings/customization/labels-and-tags) from settings.
## Manage notes in bulk
Bulk actions are available in **Table view**.
Select the checkbox beside each unlocked note. Use the header checkbox to select all unlocked notes currently loaded in the table.
In the selection bar, click **Add label** or **Delete**.
Choose a label, or confirm the permanent deletion.
Adding a label preserves each note's existing labels. If more notes load as you scroll, use the header checkbox again to include them.
Bulk deletion permanently removes every selected note. This cannot be undone.
Locked notes cannot be selected for bulk actions. Changing the search, label filter, hidden-note setting, or view clears the current selection.
## Lock, hide, pin, or delete a note
Open the note's **⋮** menu in the notes list to manage it:
* **Pin** — keep the note at the top of the list
* **Hide** — remove the note from the default view and from AI context. Turn on **Show hidden notes** under **View settings** to find it again.
* **Lock** — make the note view-only. Its content, mentions, references, labels, and attachments cannot change while locked.
* **Delete** — permanently remove the note
Only admins can lock or unlock notes. Any user with access to the record can still view a locked note.
You can pin or unpin a locked note. Unlock it before hiding, editing, labeling, attaching files, or deleting it.
Deleting a note is permanent and cannot be undone.
# Other contacts
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/other-contacts
Track professional relationships like CPAs, attorneys, and referral sources.
Other contacts are professional relationships that are not [clients](/records/clients/overview) or [prospects](/records/prospects). Use them to track CPAs, attorneys, referral sources, centers of influence, and other people your practice works with.
Each other contact has a single [person](/records/people) record with their name, email, phone number, address, and other details. You can link [tasks](/activity/tasks/overview), [meetings](/activity/meetings/overview), notes, and email history to a contact, and enroll them in [sequences](/platform/sequences/overview).
## Creating an other contact
Click **+ New contact** on the **Other contacts** page. You can also press `C` then `O` from anywhere in Slant.
Enter a **First name** and optionally a **Last name**, **Email**, and **Phone** number. If you add a phone number, choose a **Type** (mobile, work, home, or other).
The contact is created and appears in the list.
Turn on **Create more** to keep the form open after saving, so you can add multiple contacts in a row.
## The contact list
The **Other contacts** page displays all contacts in a table with these columns:
* **Contact** — the contact's full name (links to their detail page)
* **Email address** — primary email
* **Phone number** — primary phone
* **Tags** — assigned tags
* **Created at** and **Updated at** — timestamps
* **City**, **State**, **Zip**, and **Full address** — location information
Click any column header to sort by that field. You can sort by name (full or last), email, city, state, zip, and date columns.
### Search
Click the icon or start typing to search contacts by name, email, phone, or other fields. Results update as you type.
### Filtering
Use the **Tags** chip at the top of the list to quickly filter by tag. Click **Filter** for additional conditions:
* **Email** — match by email address
* **Last name** — match by last name
* **Phone number** — match by phone number
### Views
The default view is **All contacts**. Click the **+** button next to the view tab to create a custom view with saved filters and sort order. Rename a view by clicking its name.
## Managing a contact
Click a contact's name in the list to open their detail page.
### Header
The header displays the contact's full name, primary email (as a clickable badge), and tags. If the contact has a LinkedIn profile, a LinkedIn icon next to their name links to it.
Click **+ Add tags** to assign tags for categorization and filtering.
### Quick actions
Use the buttons in the top-right corner of the detail page:
* **Add task** — create a [task](/activity/tasks/overview) linked to this contact
* **Send email** — compose an email to this contact
* **Start meeting** — start an in-person, online, or past [meeting](/activity/meetings/overview) filed under this contact. Choose a **Meeting type** in the create form, and Slant generates an AI [meeting prep](/activity/meetings/creating-and-recording-meetings#meeting-preparation) brief for upcoming contact-only meetings.
* **...** (more menu) — add a note, start a [project](/activity/projects/overview) (limited to project types whose **Owner kind** is contact), convert to a household, edit the overview layout or tab order, or delete the contact
### Tabs
Each contact page has tabs for:
* **Overview** — a customizable dashboard of widgets for this contact. See [customizing the overview layout](#customizing-the-overview-layout).
* **Emails** — email history and threads
* **Phone** — call logs and recordings (requires [phone integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone))
* **Meetings** — [meetings](/activity/meetings/overview) involving this contact
* **Tasks** — [tasks](/activity/tasks/overview) linked to this contact
* **[Notes](/records/notes)** — notes created on this contact
To preserve a note from further changes, open its **⋮** menu and choose **Lock**. Locked notes are read-only and can't be deleted. Only admins can lock or unlock notes.
Any user can reorder these tabs for the whole company. From the **...** menu on a contact, select **Edit tab order**, drag the tabs into the order you want, then click **Save**. See [reordering the tabs](/records/households/overview#reordering-the-tabs) for the full workflow.
Tab order is shared across your company. Any user can change it, and everyone sees the saved order.
### Customizing the overview layout
Other contacts share the same drag-and-drop overview editor as households. Click **...** → **Edit overview layout** to open the editor.
The available widgets for contacts are **Tasks**, **Activity**, **Meetings**, **Recent emails**, **Projects**, **Opportunities**, and **Related records**. The layout is shared across your company, and any user can edit it.
The **Opportunities** widget lists [opportunities](/activity/opportunities/overview) linked to this contact, with an **Add opportunity** button and a **No opportunities** empty state. See [customizing the household overview layout](/records/households/overview#customizing-the-overview-layout) for the full workflow.
### Right sidebar
The right sidebar has three tabs:
* **Contact** — the standard contact fields
* **Records** — custom fields, related records, and a linked storage folder
* **Comments** — threaded comments
#### Contact tab
Click any field to edit it inline:
* **Business** — link the contact to a [business](/records/businesses) record
* **Employment** — add employment records with a role, company, start and end dates, and active status
* **Name** — first, middle, and last name
* **Email** — one or more email addresses, each with a type (personal, work, etc.) and a primary indicator
* **Phone** — one or more phone numbers, each with a type and a primary indicator
* **Address** — street address, city, state, and zip
* **LinkedIn** — a LinkedIn profile URL
* **Date of birth** — the contact's birthday
* **Preferred name** — an alternate name for the contact
* **Job title** — their professional title
* **Designations** — professional designations (e.g., CPA, CFP, JD)
* **Gender** — male, female, non-binary, other, or prefer not to say
#### Identification
Below the standard fields is an **Identification** section for storing sensitive identification details. Click any field to edit it inline:
* **SSN** — Social Security Number
* **Passport number** — passport identifier
* **Number** — driver license or state ID number
* **Issuing state** — the state that issued the driver license or ID
* **Issue date** — when the driver license or ID was issued
* **Expiration date** — when the driver license or ID expires
Treat identification details with care — only fill these in if your team needs them on file and your firm's policies allow it.
#### Records tab
The **Records** tab is an accordion that mirrors the [household Records tab](/records/households/records-overview) and holds:
* **Custom fields** — values for any [custom fields](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields) defined on the **Contact** record type
* **Related records** — connections to businesses, households, or trusts
* **Opportunities** — [opportunities](/activity/opportunities/overview) linked to this contact. Click **Add opportunity** to create one with the contact pre-filled as the related record. When none exist, the section shows **No opportunities found**.
* **Files** — a linked folder from your [file storage](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage) provider. Click **Link \[provider] folder** to browse and pick a folder, then expand **Files** to see its contents inline. Click the **⋯** menu next to the **Files** heading to **Unlink folder**.
#### Comments tab
View and add threaded comments about this contact. Attach files with the upload button or paste images into a comment. Comments are visible to your team but not to the contact.
## Bulk actions
Select contacts in the list by clicking the checkbox next to each name. Hold `Shift` and click to select a range. Use the **Select all** checkbox in the header to select every contact matching your current filters.
The selection bar appears at the bottom of the screen with these actions:
* **Tags** — add a tag to the selected contacts
* **Bulk email** — compose a [bulk email](/records/bulk-email) to the selected contacts (up to 500 at a time)
* **Delete** — permanently delete the selected contacts
After clicking **Delete** in the selection bar, you'll be asked to type `DELETE N CONTACTS` (uppercase, with the actual count) before the delete button enables.
## Exporting contacts
Click the icon in the toolbar to export your contacts as a CSV file. The export includes all contacts matching your current filters.
## Merging contacts
If the same person was entered twice, you can merge two contacts into one. All notes, tasks, meetings, emails, and activity history transfer to the surviving contact; the other is deleted.
### Merge from a single contact
From either contact, click the **...** button in the top-right corner and select **Merge with contact**.
Search for and select the contact you want to merge with. Click **Next**.
Pick the contact to keep — the other one's data merges into it. The picked contact is marked **will remain**.
The merge runs and you're redirected to the surviving contact.
### Merge from the list
Select exactly two contacts in the **Other contacts** list and click **Merge** in the selection bar. The dialog opens directly on the **Choose which contact will remain** step, then runs the merge.
Merging is permanent. The non-surviving contact is deleted after its data transfers to the survivor.
## Converting to a household
You can promote an other contact to a [client](/records/clients/overview) or [prospect](/records/prospects) when the relationship evolves.
From the contact's detail page, click the **...** button in the top-right corner and select **Convert to household**.
Select **Prospect** to add them to your pipeline, or **Client** to convert them directly to a client.
Click **Convert to prospect** or **Convert to client**. All associated tasks, notes, meetings, activities, and tags transfer to the new household.
You can also convert a single-person household back to an other contact from the household's detail page.
## Deleting a contact
To delete a single contact, click the **...** button on the contact's detail page and select **Destroy**.
To delete multiple contacts at once, select them in the list and click **Delete** in the selection bar. You'll be asked to type `DELETE N CONTACTS` (uppercase, with the actual count) before the delete button enables.
Deleting a contact removes all associated notes, tasks, meetings, and activity history. This cannot be undone.
## Keyboard shortcuts
| Shortcut | Action |
| ------------ | ---------------------------------------- |
| `C` then `O` | Create a new other contact from anywhere |
| `G` then `O` | Go to the other contacts page |
## FAQ
Prospects are potential clients you're cultivating toward a paid relationship. Other contacts are professional relationships — attorneys, CPAs, referral sources — that you want to track but don't plan to convert into clients. You can always convert an other contact to a prospect or client later.
Yes. Go to **Settings** → **Data import** and select **Contact** as the record type when uploading your CSV file. See [CSV import](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/csv-import) for details.
Yes. Select up to 500 contacts in the list and click **Bulk email** in the selection bar. See [bulk email](/records/bulk-email) for details.
Yes. Other contacts can be enrolled in [sequences](/platform/sequences/overview) just like clients and prospects, as long as the contact has an email address.
## Next steps
Learn about person records within households and contacts
Track business records and link them to contacts
Create and manage tasks linked to contacts
Automate email outreach to contacts
# People
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/people
Manage the individual people within your client, prospect, and other contact records.
People are the individuals within your [client](/records/clients/overview), [prospect](/records/prospects), and [other contact](/records/other-contacts) records. Every household has at least one person — the head of household — and can include additional people like a spouse, partner, children, or other family members.
Each person stores their own contact details, employment history, education, and sensitive identity information. You can view all people in one place from the people list, or manage them directly from a household page.
## Household roles
Every person in a household has a role that describes their relationship to the head of household.
| Role | Description |
| ----------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Head of household** | The primary person in the household. Every household must have exactly one. |
| **Spouse** | Married to the head of household. Only one per household. |
| **Partner** | Unmarried partner of the head of household. Only one per household. |
| **Dependent child** | A child claimed as a dependent. |
| **Non-dependent child** | An adult child not claimed as a dependent. |
| **Grandchild** | A grandchild of the head of household. |
| **Other adult** | Another adult family member. |
| **Other dependent** | A non-child dependent. |
| **Deceased** | A person who has passed away. |
A household can only have one spouse and one partner at a time. If a household already has a spouse or partner, that role won't appear when adding a new person.
### Changing the head of household
The head of household role cannot be changed directly. To designate a different person as head of household, assign the head of household role to the new person — the previous head is automatically reassigned to "Other adult."
## People list
The people list shows all individuals across your client households in one table.
To open the people list, click **Clients** → **People** in the sidebar.
### Columns
The table displays the following columns by default:
* **Person** — full name (click to open the household page)
* **Household** — the household the person belongs to
* **Birthday** — date of birth
* **Email address** — primary email
* **Phone number** — primary phone
* **Household role** — role within the household
Additional columns you can add include **Age**, **Household tier**, **Household tags**, **LinkedIn**, **Job title**, **Gender**, **Marital status**, **Preferred name**, **Employment**, **Education**, **City**, **State**, and **ZIP**.
Several columns can be edited directly from the table — click a cell to update values for **Birthday**, **Household tier**, **Household tags**, **LinkedIn**, **Job title**, **Gender**, **Marital status**, **Preferred name**, **City**, **State**, and **ZIP**.
### Views
The people list includes a built-in **Upcoming birthdays** view. Create additional custom views with the **+** button. Each view saves its own filters, sort order, and visible columns.
### Filtering
Use the quick filter chips at the top of the list to filter by:
* **Birthday** — today, this month, next 30 days, or upcoming days
* **Age** — between, greater than, less than, or equals
* **Role** — one or more household roles
Click **Filter** for advanced filtering across additional fields including **Full name**, **Email**, **Phone number**, **Gender**, **Marital status**, **Job title**, **LinkedIn**, **Employment**, **City**, **State**, **ZIP**, **Date of death**, **Household tags**, **Household tier**, and **Education**.
### Sorting
Click the sort icon on a column header to change the sort order. The **Person** column supports sorting by last name or first name (A–Z or Z–A). The **Birthday** column offers four sort options:
* **Upcoming birthdays** — next birthday soonest first
* **Most recently missed** — most recently passed birthday first
* **Oldest to youngest** — by age, descending
* **Youngest to oldest** — by age, ascending
### Exporting
Export the current people list to a CSV file. The export respects your active filters and sort order.
## Person details
Each person has a detail page showing all their information, organized into two sections.
To open a person's detail page, go to their household and click **Show more** under their information in the **Household** panel on the right side.
The person header displays the person's name, primary email, and primary phone number. Below that, you'll see the household name (click it to return to the household), the household type (Client or Prospect), and the person's household role.
### Personal information
* **Name** — first, middle, and last name, plus optional prefix (e.g., Dr.) and suffix (e.g., Jr., Sr., III)
* **Email** — one or more email addresses, each with a type (personal, business, school, or other) and a primary designation
* **Phone** — one or more phone numbers, each with a type (mobile, work, home, fax, or other) and a primary designation. Phone numbers support international formats — select a country using the flag icon next to the input. To record an extension, use the **ext** field next to the number — extensions display alongside the phone number wherever it appears
* **Address** — one or more addresses, each with a type (home, work, mailing, or other), a country, and a primary designation. Addresses support international countries — select a country using the flag icon next to the state field. For a household member other than the head, select **Same as head of household** to inherit the head's addresses instead of maintaining a separate copy. Inherited addresses are read-only until you clear the option.
* **Date of birth** — shows the person's calculated age next to the date. Infants display months or **newborn**; deceased people do not show a current age.
* **Gender** — female, male, non-binary, other, or prefer not to say
* **Marital status** — single, married, partnered, separated, divorced, or widowed
* **Preferred name** — an informal name used in place of the first name
### Professional and legal information
* **Employment** — current and past employers, with company name, role, start and end dates
* **Education** — degrees and institutions, with field of study and dates
* **Job title**
* **Designations** — professional credentials or certifications (e.g., CFP, CPA)
* **LinkedIn** — link to the person's LinkedIn profile
* **SSN** — Social Security number, stored securely
* **Passport number** — stored securely
* **Retirement date** — the date the person retired (or plans to retire)
* **Date of death** — setting this for a person who is not the head of household changes their household role to **Deceased**. Slant does not automatically change the head of household's role.
* **Household role** — the person's role within their household
* **Driver license** — number, issuing state, issue date, and expiration date, all stored securely
Sensitive fields — SSN, passport number, and driver license details — are encrypted and hidden by default. Click the field to reveal or update the value.
### Custom fields
If your book has custom fields configured for people, they appear below the standard fields on the person detail page. Custom fields are also available as columns in the people list and as filter conditions.
### Editing fields
All fields on the person detail page can be edited in place. Click any field to update its value — changes save automatically.
### Tasks and notes
The person detail page includes **Tasks** and **Notes** sections. Click **New task** or **New note** to create one linked to the person's household. Tasks and notes created from a person's detail page automatically mention that person.
### Related records
The **Related records** section lets you link a person to other records in Slant, such as [businesses](/records/businesses), households, or trusts. Click **Add** to create a new connection.
## Adding a person to a household
Go to the [client](/records/clients/overview) or [prospect](/records/prospects) household where you want to add the person.
At the bottom of the **Household** panel on the right side, click **Add person to household**.
Enter the person's **First name** and **Last name** (required), then select a **Household role**. You can optionally add an **Email**, **Phone number**, and **LinkedIn URL**.
## Managing people
### Moving a person to a different household
You can move a person from one household to another. This is useful when a family member's situation changes — for example, an adult child starting their own household.
Go to the household that currently contains the person.
In the **Household** panel, click the three-dot menu next to the person's name.
Choose the target household and select a role for the person in their new household.
The head of household cannot be moved. To move someone who is currently the head, first assign another person as head of household.
### Creating a new household from a person
You can create a new [client](/records/clients/overview) or [prospect](/records/prospects) household from an existing person. The person becomes the head of the new household.
In the **Household** panel, click the three-dot menu next to the person's name.
Enter a name for the new household (pre-filled as "\[Person name] Household") and choose the household type — **Client**, **Prospect**, or **[Past client](/records/clients/past-clients)**.
Click **Create**. The person is removed from the original household and placed in the new one as head of household.
### Deleting a person
In the **Household** panel, click the three-dot menu next to the person's name.
Click **Delete** to confirm.
Deleting a person removes all their information, including contact details, employment history, and education. This cannot be undone.
The head of household cannot be deleted. To remove the current head, first assign another person as head of household, then delete the original person.
## FAQ
No. Every person belongs to a household ([client](/records/clients/overview) or [prospect](/records/prospects)) or an [other contact](/records/other-contacts) record. To add a standalone professional relationship, create an other contact instead.
Assign the "Head of household" role to a different person in the household. The previous head is automatically reassigned to the "Other adult" role. You can then change their role to something more appropriate if needed.
No. Each person belongs to exactly one household or other contact record. To track a relationship between a person and another household, use [related records](#related-records) instead.
All of the person's information — contact details, employment, education, and sensitive data — moves with them. Only their household role may change based on what you select during the move.
All users with access to the book can view and edit sensitive fields. These values are encrypted and hidden by default — you must click the field to reveal it.
## Next steps
Manage client households and their people
Track and nurture potential clients
Manage professional relationships
Track companies and organizations
# Prospects
Source: https://docs.slant.app/records/prospects
Track and manage potential clients as they move through your pipeline.
Prospects are [households](/records/households/overview) that represent potential clients you're cultivating. As households, they have access to [people](/records/people), notes, [tasks](/activity/tasks/overview), [meetings](/activity/meetings/overview), email, and all other household features.
## The prospects list
Go to **Records** → **Prospects** in the sidebar to see all prospects in your book. The list displays the following columns by default:
* **Prospect** — Name with a link to the detail page and comment count
* **Email address** — Head of household email
* **Phone number** — Head of household phone
* **Tags** — Assigned tags
* **Created at** — When the prospect was added
* **Latest email interaction** — Most recent email activity
* **Last meeting** — Date of the last meeting with links to the record
Additional columns are available, including **Last touchpoint**, **Est. home value**, **Est. household income**, **Est. wealth range**, **Home ownership**, **Next meeting**, **City**, **State**, **Zip**, and **Education**.
### Last touchpoint column
**Last touchpoint** shows the date of the most recent interaction with the prospect — a meeting, email, text message, or logged call. It's off by default. Click **Add column** at the right edge of the header row and select **Last touchpoint** to show it, then sort by it to surface the prospects you've gone longest without contacting.
### Data views
Like all list pages in Slant, the prospects list supports [data views](/records/data-views) — saved configurations of columns, filters, sort order, and search. Create custom views for different workflows, such as a view filtered to prospects in a specific city or sorted by upcoming birthday.
## Create a prospect
Click **+ New prospect** in the top-right corner of the prospects list, or press `C` then `P` from anywhere in Slant.
Enter a **First name** and **Last name**. Add an **Email** address and **Phone** number if available. Select the phone **Type** (Mobile, Home, Work, etc.).
Check **Also create an opportunity** to start tracking a deal alongside the new prospect. See [create a prospect and an opportunity together](#create-a-prospect-and-an-opportunity-together).
The new prospect appears in the list and you can click into it to add more details.
Toggle **Create more** to keep the form open after creating a prospect, so you can add multiple prospects quickly.
### Create a prospect and an opportunity together
Most prospects enter your book attached to a specific deal. Check **Also create an opportunity** in the **Create new prospect** window to create both records in one step.
Checking the box reveals the opportunity fields:
* **Pipeline** — which prospect pipeline the opportunity lands in. This appears only when your book has more than one prospect pipeline.
* **Stage** — the starting stage. Defaults to **Identified** when the pipeline has that stage, otherwise the first stage.
* **Value** — the estimated dollar amount.
* **Target close date** — when you expect to close.
* **Assigned to** — the team member responsible. Defaults to you.
* **Label** — an [opportunity label](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities#labels). This appears only when your book has labels configured.
Any [custom fields](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities#custom-fields) your firm has configured for opportunities appear below these.
The opportunity takes the prospect's name — you can rename it later on the [opportunities board](/activity/opportunities/managing-opportunities#edit-an-opportunity).
A **Prospect and opportunity created** confirmation appears once both records are saved.
## Promote to client
When a prospect becomes a paying customer, promote them to a client to unlock custodian account linking, review scheduling, and AUM tracking.
### Promote a single prospect
Click a prospect's name on the list to open their detail page.
Click **Promote to client** in the header area of the prospect detail page.
Confirm when prompted. The prospect moves to **Records** → **Clients** with all existing data preserved.
### Promote multiple prospects
On the prospects list, click the checkboxes next to the prospects you want to promote.
In the selection bar at the bottom, click **Promote to client**.
## Bulk actions
Select one or more prospects using the checkboxes to reveal the selection bar at the bottom of the page. Available actions:
* **Promote to client** — Convert selected prospects to clients
* **Add tag** — Apply a tag to all selected prospects
* **Bulk email** — Send a [bulk email](/records/bulk-email) to selected prospects (limit of 500 recipients)
* **Convert to contacts** — Convert single-person prospects to [other contacts](/records/other-contacts). Only available when all selected prospects have a single person.
Click the **...** button in the selection bar for additional actions:
* **Add to project** — Create a [project](/activity/projects/overview) from a template for each selected prospect
* **Add to sequence** — Enroll selected prospects in an email [sequence](/platform/sequences/overview)
* **Update custom field** — Set a [custom field](/records/households/custom-fields) value across selected prospects
* **Rename households** — Rename selected prospects using a naming template
* **Move to another book** — Move selected prospects to another book you can access (requires access to multiple books)
* **Delete** — Permanently delete selected prospects and all associated data
Deleting prospects removes all associated people, notes, tasks, meetings, and history. This cannot be undone. To confirm, type the uppercase phrase shown in the dialog (for example, `DELETE 5 PROSPECTS`) to enable the **Delete** button.
## Enrich a prospect
Use AI enrichment to find publicly available information about a prospect. From the prospect detail page, click the **...** menu and select **Enrich prospect**. Slant searches for information and populates fields like estimated net worth, household income, home value, and home ownership status.
You can review the enriched data and accept or reject individual suggestions.
## Prospect detail page
The prospect detail page follows the same layout as all [households](/records/households/overview), with a few differences:
* **Overview tab** — Prospects have an Overview tab showing outstanding tasks and custom fields. This tab is not available for clients.
* **No Custodian tab** — Custodian account linking is only available for clients.
* **No review schedule** — Review due dates and cadences are client-only features.
* **Prospect badge** — The header shows a **Prospect** badge instead of a [service tier](/records/households/overview#service-tiers).
* **Last touchpoint** — Below **Promote to client**, the header reads **Last touchpoint on** followed by the date of the most recent meeting, email, text message, or logged call. Click the date to open that record in a quick preview. The line is hidden when the prospect has no recorded interactions.
All other tabs — Chat, Email, Phone, Meetings, Tasks, and Notes — work the same as on client detail pages.
## Keyboard shortcuts
| Shortcut | Action |
| ------------ | ----------------------------------- |
| `C` then `P` | Create a new prospect from anywhere |
| `G` then `P` | Go to the prospects page |
## FAQ
Both are households with the same core features — people, notes, tasks, meetings, and email. Clients have additional capabilities: custodian account linking, AUM tracking, and review scheduling. Promote a prospect to a client to unlock these features.
Yes. On a client's detail page, click the **...** menu and select **Convert to prospect**. This moves them back to the prospects list. Review schedule data and custodian account links are removed.
Yes, but only if the prospect has a single person. From the prospect detail page, click the **...** menu and select **Convert to other contact**. Projects, opportunities, financial data, and vault files are permanently deleted during conversion. You can also convert multiple single-person prospects at once using the bulk action on the list page.
When you enrich a prospect, Slant uses AI to search for publicly available information and suggests values for fields like estimated net worth, income range, home value, and home ownership. You review each suggestion before it's applied.
## Next steps
Detail page layout, tags, tiers, and shared features
Manage the individuals within your prospects
Enroll prospects in automated email sequences
Track onboarding and other initiatives for prospects
# Account creation
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/account-creation
Sign up for Slant and complete the onboarding setup to start managing your book of business.
When you first sign up for Slant, you create an account and walk through a guided setup to configure your workspace. The experience differs depending on whether you're the first person at your firm or joining an existing team.
* **First user (admin)** — You create your firm's Slant account and complete a multi-step onboarding setup that includes entering your information, selecting a subscription plan, and connecting your tools.
* **Invited team member** — You receive an email invitation from your admin, create your account through the link provided, and land directly on your dashboard with access to the books you were assigned.
## Signing up as the first user
The first person to sign up for your firm becomes the admin. After creating your account, Slant automatically creates your company, your first book, and assigns you as the principal user in that book.
You'll briefly see a "Setting up your workspace..." screen while Slant prepares your account, then you'll be directed to the onboarding setup.
## Completing the onboarding setup
The onboarding setup walks you through three sections. A progress bar at the top tracks your progress across all sections.
Only admins complete the onboarding setup. Invited team members skip this flow and go straight to their dashboard.
### 1: Basic information
This section collects your personal and company details, then sets up your subscription.
#### User info
Provide the following:
* **Phone number** — Your business phone number.
* **Time zone** — Automatically detected from your browser. Options include Eastern, Central, Mountain, Pacific, Alaska, and Hawaii time zones.
* **Scheduling link** — Your Calendly or other scheduling page URL (optional).
Click **Next step** to continue.
#### Company info
* **Company name** — Your firm's name (required).
* **Company website** — Your firm's website URL (optional).
Click **Next step** to continue.
#### Payment
Select the **Annual** subscription for \$1,800 per user per year, billed once each year. Selecting the plan takes you to Stripe to complete payment. After payment, you're returned to the setup and can access the remaining sections.
### 2: Connect your tools
This section is locked until you complete payment.
#### CRM import
Import your existing client data into Slant. You can import directly from [Wealthbox](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/from-wealthbox) or [Redtail](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/from-redtail), request a migration from another CRM (Salesforce, Advyzon, Practifi, etc.), or skip this step if you don't have a CRM.
#### Email
Connect your email to sync messages, calendar events, and enable the meeting notetaker. You can skip this step and connect later, but email is critical for most of Slant's features. See [Email and calendar](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar) for details on what gets synced and how to connect.
#### Phone
Connect a phone integration to sync SMS and call logs. You can skip this step and connect later. See [Phone](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone) for supported providers and setup details.
You can click **Skip for now** to connect a phone integration later.
### 3: Validation
#### Validate CRM
If you imported CRM data, this step shows a summary of your import with counts for clients, prospects, and other contacts. Click **Review import** to verify and finalize your data before it's applied.
If no import was started, you can skip this step.
#### Schedule onboarding
Schedule a call with the Slant team to get help getting the most out of Slant. A Calendly calendar is embedded directly in the page — pick a time that works for you.
You can skip this and schedule later.
Click **Complete setup** to finish onboarding and go to your dashboard.
## Accepting a team invitation
When an admin invites you to join their firm's Slant account, you receive an email with a signup link. Invitations expire after 30 days.
Click the signup link in the email you received.
Complete the signup form to create your Slant account.
You're automatically granted access to the books your admin assigned. You'll land on your dashboard and can start working right away.
If your invitation has expired, ask your admin to resend it.
## After setup
Once onboarding is complete (or if you're an invited team member), you land on your dashboard. The dashboard shows:
* **Today's meetings** — Your scheduled meetings for the day.
* **Important emails** — Recent inbound emails from clients and prospects.
* **Nudges** — Suggestions to reach out for client birthdays, job changes, and more.
* **Your tasks** — Tasks assigned to you, sorted by due date.
From here, explore the sidebar to access your [clients](/records/clients/overview), [tasks](/activity/tasks/overview), [meetings](/activity/meetings/overview), and more.
If you have access to more than one firm's Slant account, see [switching between firms](/account-settings/users-and-teams#switching-between-firms).
## FAQ
No. The onboarding setup runs once when your firm first signs up. After completing it, you manage your integrations, company info, and subscription from the settings pages.
You can manage your subscription from your account settings after completing onboarding.
No. Only the admin who created the account can complete the onboarding setup. Other team members are directed to their dashboard after signing up.
You can connect them later from your [integrations settings](/setting-up-slant/integrations/overview). However, email is critical for most of Slant's features — connecting it as early as possible is recommended. See [Email and calendar](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar) for setup details.
# Exporting your data
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/exporting-your-data
Download your book's data as a ZIP archive or CSV files.
Slant lets you export your data in two ways: a full data export that packages everything into a downloadable ZIP file, or a quick CSV download from any list page.
## Full data export
A full export creates a ZIP archive containing all your book's data as structured files — [clients](/records/clients/overview), [prospects](/records/prospects), past clients, [other contacts](/records/other-contacts), and [businesses](/records/businesses), along with their associated [people](/records/people), notes, tasks, meetings, and more.
Only admins can create and download full ZIP exports. Users with access to a list page can still download its CSV files.
Go to **Settings** → **Data export**.
Click **New export**. Slant begins preparing your data in the background.
The page shows real-time progress as records are processed. You'll see statuses like "Preparing export...", "Exporting records...", and "Finalizing archive..." with a progress bar.
Once the export completes, click **Download** to save the ZIP file to your computer.
Only one export can run at a time per book. Wait for the current export to finish before starting a new one.
### What's included in a full export
The ZIP file is organized into folders by record type. Each record is saved as its own file and includes all related data:
* **Clients, prospects, and past clients** — household details, tier, AUM, people (head of household, spouse, dependents), contact information, addresses, notes, tasks, meetings, opportunities, tags, custom fields, and portfolio data (account balances and returns)
* **Other contacts** — person details, contact information, notes, tasks, meetings, and tags
* **Businesses** — business details, addresses, contact information, associated contacts, tags, and custom fields
### Download link expiration
The download link for a completed export is available for one hour. If the link expires, you can create a new export to get a fresh download link.
## CSV download
You can download a CSV file directly from the **Clients**, **Prospects**, **Past clients**, and **Other contacts** list pages. The CSV includes the records matching your current filters.
Open the list page you want to export from the sidebar.
Use filters to narrow down the records you want to export. The CSV will only include records that match your current view.
Click the button in the top-right corner of the list.
A confirmation message describes what will be downloaded. Click **Download** to proceed.
### What's downloaded
The files you receive depend on which page you download from:
| Page | Files downloaded |
| ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Clients** | Two CSVs — one with household data, one with people data |
| **Prospects** | Two CSVs — one with household data, one with people data |
| **Past clients** | Two CSVs — one with household data, one with people data |
| **Other contacts** | One CSV with contact data |
The household CSV includes columns matching your current view configuration. The people CSV includes names, contact information, and personal details for each person in the matching households.
When you download clients or prospects from **All books**, both files include records from every book you can access. The household CSV adds a **Book** column so you can identify each household's source. The people CSV does not include a **Book** column.
### Export businesses from a report
The **Businesses** list does not have a CSV download action. To export businesses, create or open a filter-based **Business** report and click the button in the report table. The CSV follows the report's filters and visible columns.
When you run the report from **All books**, the business CSV includes a **Book** column.
## FAQ
A full export downloads everything in your book as a ZIP archive — all record types with all related data. A CSV download gives you a spreadsheet of the records on a specific list page, filtered to your current view. Use a full export for backups or migrating to another system. Use a CSV download for quick spreadsheets.
Full ZIP exports are per book. For list-page CSVs, select **All books** before downloading clients or prospects; the household CSV includes a **Book** column, while the people CSV does not. To export businesses across books, use a filter-based **Business** report from **All books**. The business CSV includes a **Book** column.
Only one full export can run at a time per book. Wait for your current export to complete or fail before starting another.
The CSV includes all records matching your current filters, not just the ones visible on screen. If you haven't applied any filters, it includes all records.
## Next steps
Bring data into Slant from another CRM or a CSV file.
Customize fields, tags, and how your data is organized.
# CSV import
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/csv-import
How to import clients, prospects, other contacts, businesses, or notes into Slant from a spreadsheet.
Upload a spreadsheet to bulk-create records in Slant. This is the best option when you're switching from a CRM that Slant doesn't directly support, or when you have data in a file that you want to bring in.
Supported file formats: `.csv`, `.tsv`, `.txt`, `.xls`, `.xlsx`, and `.xml`.
## What you can import
The CSV upload supports five record types:
* **Prospect** — Create [prospect](/records/prospects) households with [people](/records/people), contact details, and addresses.
* **Client** — Create [client](/records/clients/overview) households with [people](/records/people), contact details, and addresses.
* **Contact** — Create [other contacts](/records/other-contacts) with a single person and contact details.
* **Business** — Create [businesses](/records/businesses) as standalone records with contact details and one address. Each row creates one business.
* **Note** — Create notes attached to existing records in Slant.
## Upload a file
Go to **Settings** → **Data import**.
Select the type of record you want to create from the dropdown: **Prospect**, **Contact**, **Client**, **Business**, or **Note**.
Click **Upload CSV**. An import wizard opens with five steps: **Upload**, **Set header**, **Match columns**, **Bulk fix**, and **Review and edit**.
Drag and drop your file into the upload area, or click **Choose a file** to browse. The wizard advances to the next step once the file is loaded.
The wizard highlights the row it thinks contains your column names. Click **Confirm selection and continue** if it's correct, or click a different row to change the selection. If your file has no column names, click **The file has no column names**.
The wizard suggests matches between your column names and Slant fields. Review the matches in the **Your column name** / **Matches to** table. Use the dropdown to change a match, or click **Ignore** to skip a column. Click **Confirm matching and continue** when you're done.
If any rows have validation errors (e.g., an invalid email format or a missing required field), the wizard shows a **Bulk fix** step where you can correct them across all affected rows at once. If there are no errors, this step is skipped automatically.
The final step shows your data in a spreadsheet view. You can edit individual cells, delete rows, or add new rows. Use **Find and replace** to make changes across multiple rows. A badge at the top shows whether any errors remain. Click **Finish** when everything looks correct.
A confirmation dialog then shows how many records will be imported — for example, **Import 12 clients into 5 households?** for clients and prospects, or a flat count for other contacts, businesses, and notes. Check these counts before confirming. An unexpected household count usually means a column was mapped incorrectly.
After the import completes, Slant creates the records in the background and takes you to a dedicated import list that tracks the progress. You can see each record as it's created.
## Update existing records
Check **Update existing records** before clicking **Upload CSV** to update records that already exist in Slant instead of creating duplicates.
Slant matches incoming rows to existing records **by email address**. For each row in your file:
* **Email matches an existing record** — Slant updates that record's fields with the values from your file (name, phone numbers, addresses, tags, custom fields, etc.). If the record was previously archived, it is reactivated.
* **No email match** — Slant creates a new record.
Email matching applies to business imports as well: a row whose email matches an existing business updates that business instead of creating a duplicate.
If your file contains duplicate rows (multiple rows with the same email address), only the first row is imported — subsequent duplicates are skipped automatically.
When **Update existing records** is unchecked, rows that match an existing email are skipped — no duplicate is created, but the existing record is not updated. If the matching record was archived, it is reactivated.
This setting does not apply to note imports. Notes are always created as new records.
## Available fields
The fields available during column mapping depend on the record type you selected. Your file doesn't need to include all fields — only the ones you have data for.
### Client and prospect fields
Clients and prospects share most fields. Each row in your file represents one [person](/records/people) within a household. **Tier** and **Client since** are client-only and don't appear when importing prospects.
**Household fields**
| Field | Description |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Household ID | Groups multiple rows into the same household. If not provided, each row becomes its own household. |
| Household Name | Name for the household. Defaults to "Last Name Household" if not provided. |
| Tier | Service tier (A, B, C, D by default, or your custom tier labels). Client imports only. |
| Client since | Date the household became a client. Accepts MM/DD/YYYY or YYYY-MM-DD format. Client imports only. |
| Household Role | Role within the household: Head of Household, Spouse, Partner, or Dependent Child. Defaults to Head of Household. |
| Tags | Comma-separated list of tags to assign to the household. |
| Note | Adds a note to the household. Combined into a single note when multiple rows in the same household contain notes. Re-running an import with the same note appends a new note rather than replacing the existing one. |
**Name fields**
| Field | Description |
| -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Full Name | The person's full name. Use this or First Name and Last Name — at least one is required. |
| First Name | Required if Full Name is not provided. |
| Last Name | Required if Full Name is not provided. |
| Middle Name | Middle name. |
| Preferred Name | Name the person prefers to be called. |
| Salutation | Preferred salutation (e.g., Mr., Mrs., Dr.). |
| Suffix | Name suffix (e.g., Jr., III). |
| Designations | Professional designations (e.g., CPA, CFP). |
**Contact details**
| Field | Description |
| ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------ |
| Email | Primary email address. |
| Email Type | Type of primary email: Personal, Business, School, or Other. |
| Email 2 / Email 2 Type | Second email address and its type. |
| Email 3 / Email 3 Type | Third email address and its type. |
| Mobile phone | Mobile phone number. |
| Home phone | Home phone number. |
| Work phone | Work phone number. |
| Fax | Fax number. |
| Other phone | Additional phone number. |
**Address**
| Field | Description |
| ------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Address Line 1 | Street address. |
| Address Line 2 | Apartment, suite, or unit number. |
| City | City. |
| State | State or province. For US addresses, use two-letter abbreviations (e.g., CA, NY). |
| ZIP Code | Postal code. US addresses accept five-digit ZIP or ZIP+4 format (e.g., 12345 or 12345-6789). International addresses accept any postal code format. |
| Address Type | Home, Work, Mailing, or Other. |
| Primary Address | Whether this is the primary address. |
| Address 2 Line 1 | Street address for a second address. |
| Address 2 Line 2 | Apartment, suite, or unit number for a second address. |
| Address 2 City | City for a second address. |
| Address 2 State | State or province for a second address. |
| Address 2 ZIP Code | Postal code for a second address. |
| Address 2 Type | Home, Work, Mailing, or Other. |
**Personal details**
| Field | Description |
| ------------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Date of Birth | Accepts MM/DD/YYYY or YYYY-MM-DD format. |
| Gender | Female, Male, Non-binary, Other, or Prefer not to say. |
| Marital Status | Single, Married, Partnered, Separated, Divorced, Widowed, or Unknown. |
| Job Title | Current job title or occupation. |
| Company | Name of the person's current employer. Creates an employment record linked to the person. |
| LinkedIn URL | Person's LinkedIn profile URL. |
| Social Security Number | Securely stored after import. |
| Driver license number | Securely stored after import. |
| Driver license state | Two-letter state abbreviation for the issuing state. |
| Driver license issue date | Accepts MM/DD/YYYY or YYYY-MM-DD format. |
| Driver license expiration date | Accepts MM/DD/YYYY or YYYY-MM-DD format. |
### Other contact fields
Other contacts use the same name, contact details, address, and personal details fields as clients and prospects — including **LinkedIn URL** and **Company**. They do not support household, tier, tag, or note fields, and only one address per contact (no Address 2 fields).
### Business fields
Each row creates one [business](/records/businesses) as a standalone record. Businesses aren't grouped into households, and the import doesn't link them to any household or person.
**Business details**
| Field | Description |
| --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------- |
| Business name | The name of the business. Required. |
| Industry | The business's industry. |
| Website | The business's website URL. |
| Tax ID | Tax identification number. |
| Additional info | Free-text notes about the business. |
| Tags | Comma-separated list of tags to assign to the business. |
| Note | Attaches a single note to the business on import. |
**Contact details**
| Field | Description |
| ------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Email | Email address. |
| Email Type | Type of email: Personal, Business, School, or Other. Defaults to Personal if blank. |
| Mobile phone | Mobile phone number. |
| Home phone | Home phone number. |
| Work phone | Work phone number. |
| Fax | Fax number. |
| Other phone | Additional phone number. |
**Address**
Businesses support one address.
| Field | Description |
| -------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Address Line 1 | Street address. |
| Address Line 2 | Apartment, suite, or unit number. |
| City | City. |
| State | State or province. For US addresses, use two-letter abbreviations (e.g., CA, NY). |
| ZIP Code | Postal code. |
| Country | Country. |
| Address Type | Home, Work, Mailing, or Other. |
Any [custom fields](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields) defined on the **Business** record type appear automatically during column mapping.
### Note fields
Note imports work differently from other record types. Instead of creating new records, each row attaches a note to an existing record in your book. You need to tell Slant which record each note belongs to.
| Field | Required | Description |
| --------------------- | -------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Record type | Yes | The type of record this note belongs to: **Client**, **Prospect**, **Contact**, or **Business**. |
| Note content | Yes | The text content of the note. |
| Record ID | No | The ID of the record to attach this note to. |
| Record name | No | The name of the record to attach this note to. |
| Original created date | No | When the note was originally created. Accepts various date formats (e.g., MM/DD/YYYY, YYYY-MM-DD). |
**How notes are matched to records**
Each note needs a **Record type** and either a **Record ID** or **Record name** so Slant can find the right record.
**Record ID** is the most reliable way to match. You can find it in the URL when viewing a record — for example, `hqhpCbSxjZ` from `slant.app/clients/hqhpCbSxjZ`. If you provide both an ID and a name, the ID takes priority.
**Record name** matching is case-insensitive:
* **Clients and prospects** — matches the household name (e.g., "Smith Household") or any person's full name (e.g., "John Smith")
* **Other contacts** — matches the person's full name
* **Businesses** — matches the business name
Notes that can't be matched to an existing record are skipped without any error. Double-check that your record type and name (or ID) values match records already in your book.
## Custom fields
Any [custom fields](/account-settings/customization/custom-fields) you've created in Slant automatically appear as available columns during the mapping step. This lets you import data directly into your custom fields without any extra configuration.
## FAQ
CSV, TSV, TXT, XLS, XLSX, and XML files are all supported.
Include a **Household ID** column with a shared value for [people](/records/people) in the same household. For example, give all members of the Smith family the same Household ID. Assign one person the **Head of Household** role and others as Spouse, Partner, or Dependent Child.
The mapping tool automatically suggests matches based on common naming patterns. For example, "fname" or "firstname" will match to "First Name". You can manually adjust any mapping before confirming.
Yes. Export your data from your current CRM as a CSV file, then use the CSV upload to bring it into Slant. You may need to reorganize columns to match Slant's expected fields.
After a successful import, Slant takes you to a dedicated import list that shows every record created during the import. Imported records also appear in their respective sections — clients in **Clients**, prospects in **Prospects**, and so on.
## Next steps
Import directly from a Redtail database backup
Import from a Wealthbox data export
# Importing from Redtail
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/from-redtail
How to import your contacts, notes, tasks, and other data from Redtail into Slant.
Slant can import your Redtail data directly from a database backup file. The import wizard extracts your households, [people](/records/people), notes, tasks, events, trusts, and businesses, then lets you review and categorize everything before creating records in Slant.
## Before you start
You'll need a database backup file from Redtail. To get one:
Log in to Redtail and go to the [database backups page](https://crm.redtailtechnology.com/admin/lists/backups).
Click **Request Database Backup**.
This takes 1–2 minutes. You may need to reload the page.
Click the file name to download the `.sql` file.
## Start the import
Go to **Settings** → **Data import**.
Click the upload area and select your `.sql` or `.zip` file. You'll see the file name and size once it's attached.
Click **Create import**. Slant processes your file and extracts the data — this may take a few minutes for large files.
Once extraction is complete, the import appears on the **Data import** page with a **Ready for review** status. Click it to continue.
## Import workflows as projects
If you used workflows in Redtail, you can bring them into Slant as [project templates](/activity/projects/project-types).
On the upload step, toggle **Import workflows as projects** and enter your Redtail username and password. These credentials are stored encrypted and only used during the import to fetch workflow templates from the Redtail API.
## Import opportunities
On the upload step, enter your optional **Redtail login** and turn on **Import opportunities**. Slant uses current Redtail data to create a pipeline, its stages, and linked opportunities. Your login is stored encrypted and used only during the import.
## Filter contacts
The first step after extraction is deciding which contacts to include.
* **Import all contacts** — Brings in every contact from your Redtail database.
* **Filter contacts prior to import** — Only imports contacts that match **any** of the filters you set:
* **Servicing advisor** — Filter by the assigned advisor in Redtail.
* **Keywords** — Filter by Redtail keywords.
* **Tag groups** — Filter by Redtail tag groups.
Choose your option and click **Continue to mappings**.
## Map contact types
This step controls how Redtail contacts are categorized in Slant. You'll see four sections, each with filters for **Keywords**, **Tag groups**, **Category**, and **Status**:
1. **Who becomes a client?** — Contacts matching **any** of these filters are imported as clients.
2. **Who becomes a past client?** — From the remaining contacts, those matching **any** of these filters are imported as past clients.
3. **Who becomes a prospect?** — From the remaining contacts, those matching **any** of these filters are imported as prospects.
4. **What should remaining contacts become?** — Contacts that don't match any of the above are imported as either **Other contacts** (default) or **Prospects**.
A sidebar shows a live count of how many contacts fall into each category as you configure your mappings.
Click **Continue to review** when you're done.
## Review and import
The review step shows every contact that will be imported in a table. For each row you can:
* **Uncheck the checkbox** to exclude a contact from the import.
* **Change the category** using the dropdown to reassign a contact as client, past client, prospect, or other contact.
* **Hover over a name** to see a preview card with the household's [people](/records/people), their roles, contact info, and related records (notes, tasks, events, etc.).
When you're satisfied with the selections, click **Import**. Slant creates the records in the background — you can close the window and continue using Slant while the import runs. A progress indicator shows how many records have been imported.
## What gets imported
Depending on the data in your Redtail database, Slant imports:
* **Households** — Family units with all their members and roles (head of household, spouse, dependents)
* **[People](/records/people)** — Individual contact details including email, phone, address, date of birth, gender, job title, and **retirement date**
* **Standalone individuals** — Contacts not assigned to a family are imported as individual households
* **Businesses** — Business contacts with their associated records
* **Notes** — Notes linked to contacts
* **Tasks** — Activities from Redtail (excluding meetings)
* **Events** — Meetings from Redtail
* **Trusts** — Trust entities and their associated notes and tasks
* **Custom fields** — User-defined fields from Redtail are automatically created as custom fields in Slant
* **Workflows** — Imported as project templates if the **Import workflows as projects** option is enabled
* **Opportunities** — Current opportunities, their pipeline, and stages when **Import opportunities** is enabled
Redtail keywords and tag groups are converted to tags in Slant during the import.
## Field mapping reference
These tables summarize the Redtail data Slant can bring in and where that data appears after import.
### From the SQL backup
| Redtail field/concept | Slant field/concept | Notes |
| -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Contact type: Family | Household | Creates a household in Slant. The final Slant type is controlled by import mapping rules: client, past client, prospect, or remaining-item behavior. |
| Contact type: Individual in a family | Person in household | Adds the individual to the related Slant household based on the Redtail family connection. |
| Contact type: Standalone individual | Person / Household or other contact | |
| Contact type: Business | Business | Creates a business record in Slant. |
| Contact type: Trust | Trust | Creates a trust record only when Slant can connect the Redtail trust to an imported household through trustee relationship data. |
| Family fields | Household fields | Includes family name, important information from household members, and client since date when available. |
| Family members | People in household | Includes people connected to the Redtail family. Slant imports those people into the same household and uses Redtail household role data when available. |
| Head of household flag | Person household role | The Redtail head of household becomes the Slant head of household. If no head is identified, Slant makes the first imported person the head of household. |
| Family relationship | Person household role | Mapped values include spouse, dependent child, other dependent, and other adult. Unrecognized values are imported as other adult. |
| Individual fields | Person fields | Includes first name, middle name, last name, preferred name/nickname, salutation, suffix, date of birth, date of death, job title, and retirement date. |
| Individual gender | Person gender | Mapped values include male, female, non-binary, other, and prefer not to say. If Redtail does not provide a matching value, the Slant gender field is left blank. |
| Individual marital status | Person marital status | Mapped values include single, partnered, married, separated, divorced, widowed, and relationship unknown. If Redtail does not provide a matching value, the Slant marital status field is left blank. |
| Individual client since date | Household client since date | For Redtail families, Slant uses the head of household's client since date when available. If that date is not available, the Slant client since date is left blank. |
| Individual important information | Import note | Imported as part of a note on the household that contains other information Slant does not have dedicated fields for. |
| Individual marital date / wedding anniversary | Not imported | Redtail marital date values are not mapped to a dedicated Slant field. |
| Individual tax ID | Secure person SSN import | Tax ID values for Redtail individuals are imported securely and automatically as part of the import process. |
| Individual driver's license fields | Secure driver's license import | Driver's license number, issuing state, issue date, and expiration date are imported securely and automatically as part of the import process. |
| Business fields | Business fields | Includes company name, nickname, website, tax ID, and important information. If the company name is blank, Slant uses the nickname; if both are blank, Slant assigns a placeholder business name such as Business #12345. |
| Business website | Business website | Slant imports the first active website listed for the business. |
| Business tax ID | Business tax ID | |
| Trust fields | Trust fields | Includes trust name, tax ID, and important information. If the trust name is blank, Slant uses the nickname; if both are blank, Slant assigns a placeholder trust name such as Trust #12345. |
| Trust tax ID | Trust tax ID | |
| Trustee relationships | Trust related household | Slant uses Redtail trustee relationship data to connect a trust to the appropriate imported household. |
| Trust beneficiary relationships | Not imported | |
| Email addresses | Email addresses | Email value, type, and primary status are imported for people and businesses. Duplicate email addresses are consolidated, with primary or preferred emails prioritized. |
| Email type | Email type | Mapped values: personal, business, and other. Unrecognized values default to personal. |
| Phone numbers | Phone numbers | Phone value, type, and primary status are imported for people and businesses. Values that Slant cannot recognize as valid phone numbers are not imported, such as "call me" or "000". |
| Phone type | Phone type | Mapped values include home, work, mobile, fax, and other. Unrecognized values default to other. |
| Addresses | Addresses | Address lines, city, state, zip, country, type, and primary status are imported for people and businesses. Addresses are deduplicated before import. |
| Address type | Address type | Mapped values include home, work, mailing, and other. Unrecognized values default to home. |
| Address ZIP code | Address ZIP code | Slant imports valid U.S. five-digit ZIP codes and ZIP+4 values for U.S. addresses. International addresses keep their source postal code format. |
| Address country | Address country | United States is imported as US. Other country values are carried over from Redtail. |
| Servicing advisor | Not imported | Used during import setup to choose which Redtail records should be imported into the selected Slant book. |
| Writing advisor | Not imported | |
| Contact category | Not imported | Used during import setup to choose how Redtail contacts should be imported into the selected Slant book. |
| Contact status | Not imported | Used during import setup to choose how Redtail contacts should be imported into the selected Slant book. |
| Contact source | Not imported | Not used during import setup and not mapped to a dedicated Slant field. When present, it is included in the note that contains other Redtail information Slant does not have dedicated fields for. |
| Referral source / referred by fields | Not imported | Not mapped to dedicated Slant fields. |
| Keywords | Household tags | Redtail keywords are imported as household tags in Slant. Keywords are also available during import setup to choose which records should be imported. |
| Tag groups | Household tags | Redtail tag groups are imported as household tags in Slant. Tag groups are also available during import setup to choose which records should be imported. |
| Custom field definitions | Custom field definitions | Redtail contact custom fields are created in Slant so imported custom field values have matching fields to populate. |
| Custom field name | Custom field display name / field key | The Redtail custom field name is used as the Slant display name and to generate the Slant field key. |
| Custom field type | Custom field type | Mapped values include boolean, single select, text, date, and number. Unrecognized types default to text. |
| Custom field select options | Custom field select options | Used for single-select custom fields. |
| Custom field values | Household custom field values | Redtail contact custom field values are imported as Slant household custom fields. For households with multiple people, Slant uses the head of household's custom field values when available; otherwise, Slant uses the first person's values. |
| Related contacts | Relationships | Imported as relationships when both contacts are included in the import. Business/employer links are imported as Employer/Employee relationships when both records are included in the import. |
| Membership relationships | Relationships | Imported as named relationships when both related contacts are included in the import. Trustee relationships are handled through trust import. |
| Business/employer relationship | Relationship | Imported as an Employer/Employee relationship when the linked business is included in the import. |
| Activities: non-meeting activities | Tasks | Redtail activities are imported as Slant tasks unless the activity is marked as a meeting. |
| Activity related contact | Task related record | Used to attach the task to the related household, person, business, or trust. |
| Activity fields | Task fields | Includes subject/title, description, start date, all-day setting, and completion status. |
| Activity completed status | Task status | Completed Redtail activities are imported as done. Incomplete activities are imported as todo. |
| Activity completed date | Task completed date | When a Redtail activity is marked completed, Slant uses the activity's last updated date as the completed date. |
| Activity assignee | Not imported | The Redtail export does not include user data |
| Activity task / code | Task tag | Imported as a task tag when the activity task or code has a usable name. Generic labels such as Task and Unassigned are not added as tags. |
| Activity priority / percent done / end date | Not imported | |
| Activities: meetings | Notes | Redtail meetings are imported as Slant notes rather than Slant meetings. |
| Activities: Meeting related contact | Event note related record | Used to attach the imported event note to the related household, person, business, or trust. |
| Activities: Meeting fields | Imported event note fields | Includes subject, description, and a formatted date/time line. |
| Activities: Meeting start time / end time / all-day setting | Imported event note When line | Used to add a formatted date/time line to the imported event note. Invalid dates are omitted from that formatted line. |
| Activities: Meeting attendees / recurrence / calendar colors / visibility fields | Not imported | |
| Activities: Templates | Not imported | |
| Redtail calendar | Not imported | Slant does not import the Redtail calendar into the Slant calendar view. Contact-linked Redtail meetings are imported as notes. |
| Notes | Notes | Notes are imported when they are linked to an imported contact, household, person, business, or trust. |
| Note related contact | Note related record | Used to attach the note to the related contact. Notes without a linked contact are not imported. |
| Activity-only notes | Not imported | Notes tied only to a Redtail activity are not imported. Notes tied to both an activity and an imported contact are imported as notes on the related Slant record |
| Note fields | Note fields | Includes note content. HTML content is preserved when present. |
| Note author | Not imported | |
| Comments | Not imported | |
| Opportunities | Optional additional import | Opportunities are not read from the SQL backup. Turn on **Import opportunities** and provide a Redtail login to retrieve current opportunities and link them to imported records. |
| Opportunity fields | Opportunity fields | The optional opportunity import brings in the available details from current Redtail data. |
| Opportunity stages / types | Pipeline and stages | The optional opportunity import creates a pipeline and stages from current Redtail data. |
| Workflows | Not imported | Workflow import is available through a separate workflow import process. |
| Accounts | Not imported | |
| Account assets | Not imported | |
| Account beneficiaries / owners / insureds | Not imported | |
| Account transactions | Not imported | |
| Documents | Not imported | Stored Redtail documents are not imported from the SQL backup. |
| Dropbox files | Not imported | Stored Dropbox files referenced by Redtail are not imported from the SQL backup. |
| Email history / broadcast emails | Not imported | |
| Email templates | Not imported | |
| Note templates | Not imported | |
| Activity templates | Not imported | |
| Automations | Not imported | |
| Reports / custom exports / quicklists | Not imported | |
| Seminars | Not imported | |
| Contact photos | Not imported | Redtail contact photos are not imported. |
| Social media profiles | Not imported | Redtail social media profile links are not imported. |
| Contact URLs for people | Not imported | Business website URLs are imported for businesses; personal contact URLs are not mapped to dedicated Slant fields. |
| Contact professional details | Not imported | |
| Contact interests / objectives | Not imported | |
| Contact assets / liabilities / banks / taxes | Not imported | |
| External integration mappings / webhooks | Not imported | |
| Original created date across imported records | Original created date | Slant preserves the original Redtail created date for imported households, people, tasks, notes, and event notes when available. |
| Updated date across records | Not imported | |
| Mail merge templates | Not imported | |
### From the Redtail workflow import
| Redtail field/concept | Slant field/concept | Notes |
| ------------------------ | ------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| Workflows | Projects | Redtail workflows are imported as Slant projects when the Import workflows as projects checkbox is enabled during import setup. |
| Workflow templates | Project templates | Slant creates project templates from Redtail workflow templates and uses them when creating imported workflow projects. |
| Workflow name | Project name input | The final Slant project name combines the household name and project template title. |
| Workflow fields | Project fields | Mapped fields include workflow name, current step, workflow steps, step tasks, and step completion state. |
| Workflow completed steps | Project status / completed date | Redtail workflows are marked complete in Slant when all imported workflow steps are completed. Incomplete workflows become in-progress projects. |
| Workflow current step | Current project milestone | Used to determine the current Slant project milestone. |
| Workflow template steps | Project milestones | Workflow template steps become Slant project template milestones. |
| Workflow step tasks | Project tasks / task templates | Workflow step tasks are used to create project template tasks and imported project tasks under the appropriate project milestones. |
| Workflow outcomes | Project milestone outcomes | Workflow outcomes are mapped to Slant project milestone outcomes when possible. |
| Workflow assigned user | Not imported | |
## FAQ
Extraction typically takes a few minutes depending on the size of your database. The final import step also runs in the background — you'll see a progress bar showing how many records have been created.
You can change the category for any contact on the review step before clicking **Import**. Once the import has started, you'll need to update records individually in Slant.
The import continues in the background. You can check its progress by returning to **Settings** → **Data import** and clicking on the import.
Yes. Each import is tracked separately on the **Data import** page. Be aware that running multiple imports from the same Redtail database may create duplicate records.
# Importing from Wealthbox
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/from-wealthbox
How to import your contacts, notes, tasks, and other data from Wealthbox into Slant.
Slant can import your Wealthbox data by signing in to your Wealthbox account directly from the import wizard. The wizard downloads your data, then walks you through filtering contacts, mapping them to Slant categories, and reviewing everything before any records are created.
## Start the import
Go to **Settings** → **Data import**.
Enter your Wealthbox email and password, then click **Sign in & import**. Slant connects to your account and downloads your data automatically.
If your account uses two-factor authentication, you'll be prompted to enter the verification code sent to your phone.
Your Wealthbox credentials are only used to download your data during the import. They are not stored after the import completes.
A progress screen shows live counts of the households, [people](/records/people), tasks, notes, and other records found in your data. This may take a few minutes for large accounts.
Once processing is complete, the wizard advances to the filter step.
## Upload a file instead
If you prefer not to sign in — or if the automatic download fails — you can upload a Wealthbox export file manually.
Log in to Wealthbox and go to **Settings** → **Data Backup**. Click the green **Request Export** button, wait 1–2 minutes for the export to generate (you may need to reload the page), then download the JSON file.
On the Wealthbox sign-in screen, click **I have my Wealthbox export file**.
Click the upload area and select your `.json` or `.zip` file. You'll see the file name and size once it's attached.
Click **Create import**. Slant processes your file and extracts the data.
## Import workflows and opportunities
The **Import workflows / opportunities** step lets you retrieve additional Wealthbox data that is not included in the standard export:
* Turn on **Import workflows as projects** to create Slant project templates and projects from Wealthbox workflows.
* Turn on **Import opportunities** to create Slant pipelines, stages, and opportunities from your current Wealthbox data.
Both options use the same secure Wealthbox sign-in and verification flow. Enter your Wealthbox username and password, choose either or both options, then continue. The credentials are stored encrypted and used only while Slant retrieves the selected data.
## Filter contacts
The first step after processing is deciding which contacts to include.
* **Import all contacts** — Brings in every contact from your Wealthbox data.
* **Filter contacts prior to import** — Only imports contacts that match **any** of the filters you set:
* **Assigned to** — Filter by the assigned user in Wealthbox.
* **Tags** — Filter by Wealthbox tags.
Choose your option and click **Continue to mappings**.
## Map contact types
This step controls how your Wealthbox contacts are categorized in Slant. You'll see three sections, each with filters for **Contact type** and **Tags**:
1. **Who becomes a client?** — Contacts matching **any** of these filters are imported as clients.
2. **Who becomes a past client?** — From the remaining contacts, those matching **any** of these filters are imported as past clients.
3. **Who becomes a prospect?** — From the remaining contacts, those matching **any** of these filters are imported as prospects.
4. **What should remaining contacts become?** — Contacts that don't match any of the above are imported as either **Other contacts** (default) or **Prospects**.
A sidebar shows a live count of how many contacts fall into each category as you configure your mappings.
Click **Continue to review** when you're done.
## Review and import
The review step shows every contact that will be imported in a table. For each row you can:
* **Uncheck the checkbox** to exclude a contact from the import.
* **Change the category** using the dropdown to reassign a contact as client, past client, prospect, or other contact.
* **Hover over a name** to see a preview card with the household's [people](/records/people), their roles, contact info, and associated records.
The last column shows associated record counts — how many tasks, notes, events, and opportunities are linked to each contact.
When you're satisfied with the selections, click **Import**. Slant creates the records in the background — you can close the window and continue using Slant while the import runs. A progress indicator shows the percentage complete and how many records have been imported.
## What gets imported
Depending on the data in your Wealthbox account, Slant imports:
* **Households** — Family units with all their members and roles (head of household, spouse, dependents)
* **[People](/records/people)** — Individual contact details including email, phone, address, date of birth, and gender
* **Standalone individuals** — Contacts not assigned to a household are imported as individual households
* **Businesses** — Business contacts with their associated records
* **Trusts** — Trust entities and their associated records
* **Tasks** — Tasks linked to contacts, including comments
* **Notes** — Notes linked to contacts
* **Phone calls** — Wealthbox phone calls are imported as Slant **Notes** on the linked household, business, or trust. Each note's body starts with a header line ("Phone call by \[creator] on \[date/time]") followed by the call's comment thread. Re-importing preserves the appended comments without creating duplicates.
* **Events** — Wealthbox events are imported as Slant notes. Event comments are appended to the same note, and re-importing avoids duplicate comments.
* **Opportunities** — Pipeline opportunities linked to contacts, including pipelines and stages when **Import opportunities** is enabled
* **Custom fields** — User-defined fields from Wealthbox are automatically created as custom fields in Slant
Wealthbox tags are converted to tags in Slant during the import. Any Wealthbox data that doesn't map to a specific Slant field is preserved as a note on the contact so nothing is lost.
## Field mapping reference
These tables summarize the Wealthbox data Slant can bring in and where that data appears after import.
### From the JSON export
| Wealthbox field/concept | Slant field/concept | Notes |
| ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Workspace ID / name | Not imported | |
| Contacts: type = Household | Household | Creates a household in Slant. The final Slant type is controlled by import mapping rules: client, past client, prospect, or remaining-item behavior. |
| Contacts: type = Person | Person / Household | Creates a person in Slant. If the person belongs to a Wealthbox household, Slant adds them to that household. If not, Slant creates an individual household for that person. |
| Contacts: type = Organization | Business | Creates a business record in Slant. |
| Contacts: type = Trust | Trust | Creates a trust record in Slant. If Wealthbox identifies a grantor or trustee who is also imported, Slant attaches the trust to that person's household. |
| Contacts: Household fields | Household fields | Includes household name, household status, and important/background information. |
| Contacts: Person with a household | Person in household | The person is added to the Wealthbox household referenced on the person record. |
| Contacts: Person without a household | Standalone household with person | Slant creates an individual household for the person so the contact can be imported into Slant's household-based data model. |
| Contacts: Person fields | Person fields | Includes first name, middle name, last name, preferred name/nickname, salutation/prefix, suffix, date of birth, and date of death. |
| Contacts: Person gender | Person gender | Mapped values include female, male, non-binary, and unknown. Unknown is imported as other. |
| Contacts: Person marital status | Person marital status | Wealthbox married, single, divorced, widowed, and separated map to the same Slant statuses. Wealthbox life partner maps to partnered, and Wealthbox unknown maps to relationship unknown. |
| Contacts: Person household role | Person household role | Mapped values include Head, Spouse, Partner, Child, Grandchild, and Other Dependent. Unknown or blank roles are imported as unknown. Standalone people default to head of household. |
| Contacts: Person client since date | Household client since date | For households with people, Slant uses the head of household's client since date when available. If unavailable, Slant uses the first available person client since date, then the household created date. |
| Contacts: Organization fields | Business fields | Includes organization name, industry/occupation, website, and background information. If the organization name is blank, Slant assigns a placeholder business name using the Wealthbox ID, such as Business #12345. |
| Contacts: Organization websites | Business website | Slant imports the primary website when Wealthbox marks one as primary. Otherwise, Slant imports the first website listed. |
| Contacts: Organization tax ID / SSN | Business tax ID | Slant uses tax ID first. If tax ID is blank, Slant uses SSN. |
| Contacts: Trust fields | Trust fields | Includes trust name and background information. If the trust name is blank, Slant assigns a placeholder trust name using the Wealthbox ID, such as Trust #12345. |
| Contacts: Trust SSN / tax ID | Trust tax ID | Slant uses SSN first. If SSN is blank, Slant uses tax ID. |
| Contacts: Trust grantor / trustee relationships | Trust related household | When Wealthbox includes grantor or trustee relationship data, Slant uses it to connect the trust to the appropriate imported household. |
| Contacts: Emails | Email addresses | Email value, type, and primary status are imported for people and businesses. Duplicate email addresses are consolidated, with primary emails preferred. |
| Contacts: Email type | Email type | Mapped values: Personal and Home to personal, Work to business, and Other to other. Unrecognized values default to personal. |
| Contacts: Phone numbers | Phone numbers | Phone value, type, and primary status are imported for people and businesses. Values that Slant cannot recognize as valid phone numbers are not imported, such as "call me" or "000". |
| Contacts: Phone type | Phone type | Mapped values include Work, Home, Mobile, Vacation, Fax, and Other. Unrecognized values default to mobile. |
| Contacts: Addresses | Addresses | Address lines, city, state, zip, country, type, and primary status are imported for people and businesses. Addresses on Wealthbox household or trust records are not currently mapped to dedicated Slant address fields. |
| Contacts: Address type | Address type | Mapped values include Work, Home, Vacation, and Other. Unrecognized values default to home. |
| Contacts: Address ZIP code | Address ZIP code | Slant imports valid U.S. five-digit ZIP codes and ZIP+4 values for U.S. addresses. International addresses keep their source postal code format. |
| Contacts: Address country | Address country | United States is imported as US. Other country values are carried over from Wealthbox. |
| Contacts: Assigned to | Not imported | Used during import setup to choose which Wealthbox records should be imported into the selected Slant book. |
| Contacts: Contact type | Not imported | Used during import setup to choose how Wealthbox contacts should be imported into the selected Slant book. If no explicit mapping is selected, Client generally maps to Client and other values generally map to Prospect. |
| Contacts: Tags | Household tags | Wealthbox household and person tags are combined and imported as household tags in Slant. Tags are also available during import setup to choose which records should be imported. |
| Contacts: Custom field values | Household custom field values | Wealthbox custom field values are imported as Slant household custom fields. For household records with multiple people, Slant uses the head of household's custom field values when available; otherwise, Slant uses the first person's values. |
| Contacts: Contact roles | Household user-reference custom fields | Each Wealthbox contact role (for example, "Financial Planner" or "Service Advisor") is created as a user-reference custom field on the household, with the role's allowed teammates set as the field's selectable users. Workflow steps assigned to a contact role import with that custom field as the assignee. |
| Contacts: Related contacts | Relationships | Imported as relationships when both contacts are included in the import. Related people are added to the same Slant household only when they are part of the same Wealthbox household; otherwise, they remain separate records linked by a relationship. |
| Contacts: Named relationship fields | Relationships | Imported as named relationships, such as Attorney, CPA, Doctor, Insurance Agent, Business Manager, Family Officer, Assistant, Other, and Trusted Contact. |
| Contacts: SSN | Secure person SSN import | SSN values are imported automatically as part of the Wealthbox import through Slant's secure SSN import process. |
| Contacts: Driver's license fields | Secure driver's license import | Driver's license values are imported automatically as part of the Wealthbox import through Slant's secure driver's-license import process. |
| Contacts: Other profile fields | Import note | Most nonblank contact fields that do not have a dedicated Slant field are preserved in an import note. SSN and driver's-license fields are handled through the secure import processes above instead. |
| Users | Not imported | Wealthbox users are not imported as Slant users. They are used during import setup to support filtering and assignment matching. |
| Users: First name / last name | Not imported | Used to label assignment options during import setup. |
| Users: Email | Not imported | Used to match Wealthbox users to existing Slant users for assignments and comment authorship. |
| Teams | Teams | Non-archived Wealthbox teams are created as Slant teams to preserve team assignment on tasks. |
| Teams: Name | Team name | |
| Custom fields | Custom field definitions | Wealthbox custom fields are created in Slant so the imported custom field values have matching fields to populate. |
| Custom fields: Label / name | Custom field display name / field key | The Wealthbox field label is used as the Slant display name and to generate the Slant field key. |
| Custom fields: Field type | Custom field type | Mapped values: string to text, number to number, date to date, checkbox to boolean, single select to single select, multi-string to text, and text area to rich text. Unrecognized types default to text. |
| Custom fields: Field options | Custom field select options | Used for single-select custom fields. Options are split on semicolons or commas. |
| Custom fields: Visibility / category scoping | Not imported | |
| Tasks | Tasks | Tasks are imported and linked to the related contact, household, person, business, or trust when possible. Tasks without a linked contact can still be imported as standalone tasks. |
| Tasks: Related contact ID | Task related record | When the task is linked to a Wealthbox contact, Slant uses the Wealthbox contact ID to attach the task to the corresponding Slant record. |
| Tasks: Related resources | Task related record | Used to identify the related contact when Wealthbox does not provide a direct related contact ID. |
| Tasks: Fields | Task fields | Includes task name/title, description, and due date. Task titles are imported as rich text; descriptions preserve HTML when present. |
| Tasks: Completed | Task status | Completed Wealthbox tasks are imported as done. Incomplete Wealthbox tasks are imported as todo. |
| Tasks: Completed date | Task completed date | Imported only for tasks marked completed in Wealthbox. |
| Tasks: Assigned to / assigned team | Task assignee / assigned team | Team assignments are matched to Slant teams when possible. User assignments are matched by email address. If no matching Slant user is found, the task is assigned to the primary Slant user for the book. |
| Tasks: Category | Task tag | Imported as a task tag/category. |
| Tasks: Priority / frame / repeat schedule / visibility fields | Not imported | |
| Tasks: Templates | Not imported | |
| Repeating tasks | Not imported | |
| Notes | Notes | Notes are imported when they are linked to an imported contact, household, person, business, or trust. |
| Notes: Related resources | Note related record | Used to attach the note to the related contact. Notes without a linked contact are not imported. |
| Notes: Fields | Note fields | Includes note content. HTML content is preserved; plain text is formatted as note content. |
| Notes: Tags | Note tags | Imported as note tags when present. |
| Notes: Pins / versions / visibility fields | Not imported | |
| Notes: Templates | Not imported | |
| Events | Notes | Wealthbox events are imported as Slant notes rather than Slant meetings. |
| Events: Related resources | Event related record | Used to attach the event note to the related contact. Events without a linked contact are not imported. |
| Events: Fields | Imported event note fields | Includes event title/name, location, and description. |
| Events: Start time / end time / all-day setting | Imported event note When line | Used to add a formatted date/time line to the imported event note. Invalid dates are omitted from that formatted line. |
| Events: Meeting ID / attendees / invited contacts / status / category / repeat schedule / visibility fields | Not imported | |
| Meetings | Not imported | |
| Phone calls | Notes | Wealthbox phone calls are imported as Slant notes. |
| Phone calls: Related contact | Phone call related record | Required to attach the phone call to a Slant record. Phone calls without a related contact are not imported. |
| Phone calls: Creator / call date | Phone-call note title/content | Used to create the imported phone-call note title and initial note content. |
| Phone calls: Comments | Appended note content | Comments on Wealthbox phone calls are appended to the imported phone-call note. |
| Opportunities | Opportunities | Opportunities from the JSON export are imported when they can be linked to a household. Turn on **Import opportunities** during setup to also retrieve current Wealthbox pipeline and stage data. |
| Opportunities: Related contact | Opportunity related record | If the opportunity is linked to a person, Slant uses that person's household. The additional opportunity import can also preserve standalone opportunities and links to other supported records. |
| Opportunities: Fields | Opportunity fields | Includes opportunity name and probability. Probability defaults to 0 when blank. |
| Opportunities: Description | Opportunity description | HTML descriptions are preserved; plain text is formatted as opportunity content. |
| Opportunities: Amounts | Opportunity value | Slant uses first amount when available, otherwise the first amount listed. Negative values are imported as 0. |
| Opportunities: Pipeline | Opportunity pipeline | The JSON export does not include Wealthbox pipeline definitions, so JSON-only opportunities use a matching Slant pipeline when possible. When **Import opportunities** is enabled, Slant creates pipelines and stages from current Wealthbox data. |
| Opportunities: Stage | Opportunity stage | The JSON export uses the closest matching stage in the selected Slant pipeline when possible. The additional opportunity import preserves the Wealthbox pipeline and stage structure. |
| Opportunities: Target close date | Opportunity target close date | Imported as the target close date when it can be parsed as a valid date. |
| Opportunities: Closed date / closed by / manager / next step / visibility fields | Not imported | |
| Comments | Comments / note content | Comments are imported as Slant comments when they can be attached to an imported task, opportunity, project, or project task. |
| Comments: Task comments | Task comments | Attached to the imported Slant task. |
| Comments: Event comments | Event-note appended content | Appended to the Slant note created from the Wealthbox event. Re-importing preserves the appended comments without creating duplicates. |
| Comments: Opportunity comments | Opportunity comments | Attached to the imported Slant opportunity. |
| Comments: Contact comments | Not imported | |
| Comments: Note/status update comments | Not imported | |
| Comments: Phone call comments | Phone-call note appended comments | Appended to the Slant note created from the Wealthbox phone call. |
| Comments: Stream item / data file / meeting comments | Not imported | |
| Comments: Content | Comment content | HTML content is preserved; plain text is formatted as comment content. |
| Comments: Creator | Comment author | Matched to a Slant user by the Wealthbox creator's email address when possible. If no match is found, the author is left blank. |
| Workflows | Projects | Turn on **Import workflows as projects** during setup to retrieve workflows through the additional Wealthbox import. |
| Projects | Not imported | |
| Manual investment accounts | Not imported | |
| Dropbox emails | Not imported | |
| Restricted user groups | Not imported | |
| Files | Not imported | |
| Stream items | Not imported | |
| Visibility restrictions across records | Not imported | |
| External system IDs across records | Not imported | |
| Original created date across imported records | Original created date | Slant preserves the original Wealthbox created date for imported households, people, businesses, tasks, notes, event notes, phone-call notes, opportunities, and comments. |
| Updated date across records | Not imported | |
| Custom address types | Not imported | |
| Custom contact types | Not imported | |
| Custom email types | Not imported | |
| Custom phone types | Not imported | |
| Custom website types | Not imported | |
| Financial Account types | Not imported | |
| File categories | Not imported | |
| Investment objectives | Not imported | |
| Mail merge templates | Not imported | |
### From the Wealthbox workflow import
| Wealthbox field/concept | Slant field/concept | Notes |
| ----------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| workflows | Projects | Wealthbox workflows are imported as Slant projects when **Import workflows as projects** is enabled during import setup. |
| workflows: workflow\_template\_id | Project template related record | Slant creates project templates from Wealthbox workflow templates and uses them when creating imported workflow projects. |
| workflows: name | Project name input | The final Slant project name combines the household name and project template title. |
| workflows: fields | Project fields | Mapped fields: description to project description. |
| workflows: completed\_at | Project status/completed\_at | Completed Wealthbox workflows become completed Slant projects. Incomplete workflows become in-progress projects. |
| workflows: active\_workflow\_step\_id / current\_step / workflow\_steps | Current milestone and task generation | Used to determine the current project milestone and to generate project tasks from workflow steps and subtasks. |
| workflows: workflow\_steps subtasks | Project tasks | Workflow steps and subtasks become Slant tasks under the appropriate project milestones. |
| workflows: assigned\_to\_id / assigned\_to\_email on workflow steps | Project/task assignee | Matched to Slant users by email when possible. When an email is not available, Slant uses the Wealthbox user ID to identify the corresponding Wealthbox user and then match by email. |
| comments: resource\_type = Workflow / WorkflowStep / SelectedOutcome | Project/workflow comments | Workflow-step comments may attach to the corresponding project task. |
## FAQ
Processing your data typically takes a few minutes depending on the size of your account. The final import step also runs in the background — you'll see a progress bar showing the percentage complete.
The import continues in the background. You can check its progress by returning to **Settings** → **Data import** and clicking on the import.
Yes. Each import is tracked separately on the **Data import** page. Be aware that running multiple imports from the same Wealthbox account may create duplicate records.
If you chose to filter contacts, only contacts matching your filters are included. On the mapping step, any contacts that don't match the client, past client, or prospect filters are imported as either other contacts or prospects, depending on the option you select.
Slant matches Wealthbox users to Slant users by email address. A contact's Wealthbox assigned user is only used to filter which records get imported — it isn't stored as an owner on the imported record. Wealthbox contact roles are imported separately as user-reference custom fields on the household.
# Overview
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/overview
Bring your existing client data into Slant from another CRM or a CSV file.
Slant can import your existing data so you don't have to start from scratch. Whether you're switching from another CRM or working from a spreadsheet, the import tool walks you through mapping and reviewing your data before anything is created.
## Getting to data import
Go to **Settings** → **Data import**.
## Import options
Slant supports three ways to bring in your data:
* **Redtail** — Import directly from a Redtail database backup file. Slant extracts your households, [people](/records/people), tasks, notes, and more. See [importing from Redtail](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/from-redtail).
* **Wealthbox** — Import from a Wealthbox data export. Slant maps your contacts, tasks, notes, and other records automatically. See [importing from Wealthbox](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/from-wealthbox).
* **CSV** — Upload a spreadsheet (CSV, XLSX, XLS, and other formats) to import clients, prospects, other contacts, or notes. Best for custom data or when switching from a CRM that Slant doesn't directly support. See [CSV import](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/csv-import).
## What gets imported
Depending on the source, Slant can import:
* Clients and prospects (as households with [people](/records/people))
* Other contacts (professional relationships like CPAs and attorneys)
* Tasks and notes
* Meetings and events
* Opportunities
During the import process, you'll choose how to categorize each record and review everything before it's created in Slant.
## How CRM imports work
When importing from Redtail or Wealthbox, a guided wizard walks you through five steps:
1. **Select CRM source** — Choose Redtail or Wealthbox.
2. **Upload export file** — Upload the backup or export file from your previous CRM.
3. **Filter contacts** — Choose which records to include based on criteria like assigned advisor or tags.
4. **Map contact types** — Decide how each record should be categorized in Slant (client, prospect, or other contact).
5. **Review all data** — Preview everything before the import runs. Fix any warnings or exclude records you don't want.
You can also access CSV upload directly from the **Data import** page by clicking **CSV upload** next to the **New import** button.
# Black Diamond
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/integrations/black-diamond
Connect Black Diamond to view reporting households, account activity, and portfolio allocations in Slant.
Connect Black Diamond to bring your firm's authorized portfolio reporting data into Slant. The integration adds a **Reporting** tab to client households.
A Slant representative must enable Reporting for your company. After it is
enabled, only company admins can connect or disconnect Black Diamond.
## Connect Black Diamond
Use a Black Diamond firm user who can access every relationship and account you want to import. Slant only receives data available to that user.
Go to **Settings** → **Reporting**.
Click **Connect Black Diamond**.
Sign in to Black Diamond with the firm user and approve access. Black
Diamond returns you to Slant when authorization is complete.
Slant displays **Importing Black Diamond data** while it retrieves
authorized households, supervised accounts, portfolios, and allocation
targets. **Available households** updates when the import finishes.
After the first import, Slant refreshes Black Diamond data nightly. If the connection expires, syncing pauses. Click **Reconnect Black Diamond** and authorize Slant again.
## Link reporting households to clients
Slant attempts to match imported Black Diamond relationships to existing clients. Use either method below when a relationship remains unlinked or needs a different match.
### Link from reporting settings
Go to **Settings** → **Reporting**.
Search **Available households** by household name.
In **Linked household**, select the client household that matches the Black
Diamond relationship.
The client's **Reporting** tab displays the linked Black Diamond data.
### Link from a client
Open a client household and click **Reporting**.
Click **Link reporting household**.
Search for the reporting household, select it, and click **Link household**.
To change a link, click **Adjust link**. Select another reporting household and click **Update link**, or click **Unlink household**. An unlinked relationship remains in Black Diamond and stays available for manual linking in Slant. Nightly syncs do not automatically relink it.
## Create a Black Diamond relationship
If the client does not exist in Black Diamond, open the client's **Reporting** tab and click **Link reporting household** → **Create in Black Diamond**. Review the relationship and contact names, then click **Create**.
This creates a new Black Diamond contact for every named person in the Slant
client household and creates a new relationship. Slant does not reuse matching
Black Diamond records during this action.
## View reporting data
The client's **Reporting** tab shows portfolio information from Black Diamond:
* **Actual and target allocations** — Compare the current asset-class allocation with its Black Diamond target.
* **Portfolio selector** — Switch between portfolios when the relationship has more than one.
* **Supervised accounts** — Review market value, starting value, contributions, withdrawals, and fees for each included account.
* **Black Diamond links** — Open the relationship, allocation, or account directly in Black Diamond.
The **Updated at** timestamp shows when Slant last imported the relationship. Only supervised Black Diamond accounts appear in Slant reporting.
## Disconnect Black Diamond
Go to **Settings** → **Reporting**.
Click the trash icon on the **Black Diamond** card.
Click **Disconnect**.
Disconnecting deletes all Black Diamond households, accounts, portfolio data,
and client links imported into Slant. It does not delete clients from Slant or
data from Black Diamond.
Slant displays **Disconnecting** while it removes the imported data. You can leave the page while cleanup finishes.
# Linking custodian accounts
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/linking
Connect custodian accounts to client households and trusts using auto-linking or manual linking.
Linking a custodian account to a client household or trust is what connects portfolio data to the right client record. Once linked, the client's [Custodian tab](/records/clients/portfolio) shows portfolio balances, holdings, transactions, and performance — and the account's market value counts toward the client's AUM.
Slant supports two ways to link accounts: automatic matching and manual linking.
## Auto-linking
Slant automatically links custodian accounts to client households when it finds a matching tax ID. This happens in three situations:
* **When a new custodian account syncs** — If the account's tax ID matches a person in one of your client households, Slant creates the link automatically.
* **When you add a tax ID to a person** — If the person's household has a matching custodian account, the link is created.
* **When an advisor code is assigned to a book** — Slant scans existing custodian accounts under that code and links any that match a tax ID in the book's client households.
Auto-linking only works when the custodian account's advisor codes match the book principal's advisor codes. If the codes don't overlap, the account won't auto-link even if the tax IDs match.
Auto-linking depends on tax ID data from your custodian. If your custodian doesn't provide tax IDs for an account, you'll need to link it manually.
## Manual linking
You can link any custodian account to a client household or trust directly from the [custodian accounts list](/records/accounts/custodian-accounts).
Click **Accounts** → **Custodian** in the sidebar.
Search by account name or number, or use the **Link status** filter to show only unlinked accounts.
Click the **Linked household** cell for the account you want to link and select the household from the dropdown. To link to a trust instead, select a trust in the **Linked trust** column — if the column isn't visible, add it using the column toggle in the top-right corner.
If the cell already shows another book's name or **Assigned in another book**, the account is linked elsewhere in your company. You can still link it in the current book — each book manages its own link.
If other unlinked accounts have the same primary related-party name, **Link matching accounts?** opens before anything is linked. The account you chose stays selected, and suggested accounts start selected. Clear any accounts you do not want to link, then select **Link *N* accounts**. Closing the dialog cancels the original link too.
If Slant does not find other accounts to suggest, the link takes effect immediately. The account's market value is added to the client's AUM, and portfolio data becomes available on the client's [Custodian tab](/records/clients/portfolio).
Matching-account suggestions compare the primary related party's name and help you link several accounts to the household you selected. This is separate from automatic tax-ID matching. Review every suggestion before linking.
## Unlink an account
To remove a link between a custodian account and a household or trust:
Click **Accounts** → **Custodian** in the sidebar.
Click the **Linked household** (or **Linked trust**) cell for the account and clear the selection.
The account remains in Slant but is no longer associated with that client. Its market value is removed from the client's AUM.
## FAQ
Yes. A custodian account can be linked to one household and one trust at the same time. The account's market value counts toward the linked client's AUM.
Auto-linking requires a tax ID match between the custodian account and a person in your client household. Check that the person's tax ID is set correctly and that the account's advisor codes match your book principal's codes. If the custodian doesn't provide tax ID data for the account, you'll need to link it manually.
Portfolio data is removed from the client's Custodian tab and the account's market value is subtracted from their AUM. The custodian account itself stays in Slant and can be re-linked at any time.
Yes. Each book manages its own links independently. The same custodian account can be linked to different households in different books.
## Next steps
View balances, holdings, and performance for linked clients
Browse, filter, and manage all custodian accounts
# Custodian integrations
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/overview
Connect your custodians to sync account data, track portfolio performance, and calculate AUM automatically.
Custodian integrations connect Slant to the financial institutions that hold your clients' assets — like Schwab, Fidelity, or Pershing — so you can view portfolio data, track holdings, and calculate assets under management (AUM) without manual entry.
Once connected, Slant syncs account data from your custodian on a nightly basis. Accounts are matched to your clients automatically when possible, and you can link any remaining accounts manually.
## How it works
Slant connects to your custodian through **advisor codes** — the unique identifiers your custodian assigns to you as an advisor. When you add an advisor code in Slant, the system begins pulling account data for all accounts associated with that code.
After adding your advisor code, your custodian needs to authorize data access — a process that is typically fulfilled within 10 business days. Each custodian has a step-by-step release data guide (see the table below) that walks you through authorizing access. Once authorized, data syncs every night and keeps your account data, balances, and holdings up to date. New accounts that appear under your advisor code are picked up automatically during the next sync.
## What you can do
* **[Set up custodian integrations](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/setup)** — Add your advisor codes and choose which books can access the data.
* **[Link accounts to clients](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/linking)** — Slant auto-links accounts to clients using tax ID matching. You can also link or unlink accounts manually from the [custodian accounts list](/records/accounts/custodian-accounts).
* **[View portfolio analytics](/records/clients/portfolio)** — See portfolio balances, asset composition, holdings, transactions, and balance history on each client's detail page.
* **[Browse custodian accounts](/records/accounts/custodian-accounts)** — Search, filter, and manage all synced custodian accounts from a single list.
## Supported custodians
| Custodian | ROI request | Release data guide |
| ------------------- | ----------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Fidelity | No | [Fidelity guide](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-fidelity) |
| Schwab | No | [Schwab guide](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-schwab) |
| Betterment | No | Provided by Betterment |
| Pershing | No | [Pershing guide](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-pershing) |
| Interactive Brokers | Yes | [Interactive Brokers guide](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-interactive-brokers) |
| DST | No | [DST guide](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-dst) |
| RBC | No | Contact support |
| SEI | No | Contact support |
Custodians marked with ROI (records of interest) request support let you send a request directly from Slant to authorize data access. See [setting up custodian integrations](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/setup#send-an-roi-request) for details.
## FAQ
Account data syncs every night. New accounts, updated balances, and position changes are reflected in Slant the following morning. Position data for newly synced accounts may take up to 24 hours to appear.
No. You can add advisor codes at the company level and enable them for specific books — a single advisor code can be shared across multiple books. You can also add advisor codes at the book level if they only apply to one book.
No. The custodian tab and portfolio analytics are only available on client households and trusts. Prospect households do not display custodian data.
Removing an advisor code stops syncing accounts associated with that code. Any account that was only accessible through that code — along with its positions, balances, transactions, and client links — is removed from Slant. Accounts that also match another advisor code in your firm are preserved and continue to sync.
## Next steps
Add advisor codes and connect your custodians
Connect custodian accounts to client households
# Release DST data to Slant
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-dst
Authorize Slant to receive DST account data through DST FANmail and DST Vision.
After you add your DST advisor code in Slant, you need to set up DST FANmail and DST Vision so that Slant can receive your account data daily.
ROI processing timeline: **7–10 business days** after submission.
Your DST FANmail credentials must stay active continuously for Slant to receive your DST data. If you update your password or your credentials change, **email [hannah@slant.app](mailto:hannah@slant.app) in advance** so we can prevent a gap in your data feed.
## Activate DST FANmail
Go to [DST FANmail](https://filetransfer.financialtrans.com/tf/FANMail?tx=FANMailStartup\&cz=415171403) and select **Enroll in FAN Mail**. Accept the terms and conditions.
Work through the enrollment flow:
1. Select your role (most commonly **Representative**).
2. Select your broker/dealer.
3. Under **Customer Management Software Vendor**, choose **Proprietary**.
4. Set your password reset questions. Screenshot the answers for your records.
5. Sign in to DST Vision to pull your fund information and **Add to List**.
6. Add any Variable Annuities. Skip if none.
7. Add any Variable Universal Life companies. Skip if none.
8. Add any Alternative Investments. Skip if none.
9. Add any Program Manager companies. Skip if none.
10. Verify all information and click **Submit Enrollment**.
For help on steps 1 and 2, call DST support at **800-435-4112**.
Once your FANmail account is verified, email your FANmail credentials to [hannah@slant.app](mailto:hannah@slant.app). We'll set up the daily download of your data files.
## Enroll in DST Vision
DST Vision is the portal where you grant Slant access to your accounts.
Go to the [DST Vision homepage](https://www3.financialtrans.com/tf/Vision) and click **New User**. Select your service level and broker-dealer, then enter your profile information.
Continue through the prompts. To finalize your account you'll need:
* Branch name and number
* Representative name and number
* Client account number for each client being requested
Enrollment processing takes about 1–2 business days. For errors or questions, call **DST Vision Support** at **1-800-435-4112**.
Once your DST Vision account is active, go to **Administration → Enroll Affiliate IDs** and add Slant as a user. Enter your Security Keyword and click **Continue**, then review and **Submit**.
Alternatively, you can call DST Support at **1-800-435-4112** to add Slant as a user.
Once Slant is added as an affiliate user, email your DST Vision credentials to [hannah@slant.app](mailto:hannah@slant.app) so we can complete the integration.
Data should start flowing into Slant within 7–10 business days of credentials being received.
## Related
* [Set up custodian integrations](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/setup)
## Contact support
Stuck on a step or need help with the form? Email [hannah@slant.app](mailto:hannah@slant.app).
# Release Fidelity data to Slant
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-fidelity
Authorize Slant to receive Fidelity Investments account data on your behalf.
After you add your Fidelity advisor code (G Number) in Slant, you need to authorize Fidelity to release your account data. Fidelity handles this through an **Outbound Transmission Request** in the Integration Xchange portal.
ROI processing timeline: **5–8 business days** after submission.
## Prerequisites
To submit the request you need two entitlements from your Fidelity admin or the Fidelity Client Service Team:
* **Integration Xchange\_OutboundTransmissionsRulesManagement**
* **Integration Xchange Admin Outbound Transmission Rules Management**
Your firm's user admin or the Fidelity Client Service Team can add these for you.
## Submit the outbound transmission request
From Wealthscape, go to **Resources → Integration Xchange → My Firm's Integrations → Outbound Transmission Rules**. You'll see the list of your firm's current G Number rules.
Click **Add Rule**.
Complete the following fields:
* **Entity Name:** Slant CRM
* **Header Field:** click **+Add Header**, then enter the **G Number** (or **Broker Dealer number `3030#`**)
* **G Number Field:** enter the same **G Number** (or **Broker Dealer number `3030#`**)
The G Number must be entered *twice* — once in the Header field and once in the G Number field. Otherwise Fidelity won't deliver the data.
If you're using a Broker Dealer number (`3030#`), you'll also need to add **every Registered Rep Number** (3-digit alphanumeric code) as a separate advisor code in Slant. Otherwise the data tied to those reps won't show up.
Set the masking fields to **No** so that account identifiers aren't redacted in the data sent to Slant.
Review the rule details, enter your full name, and click **Confirm**.
If you have multiple G Numbers, repeat these steps for each one.
Data should start flowing into Slant within 5–8 business days.
## Related
* [Set up custodian integrations](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/setup)
## FAQ
Email Fidelity at [NFTRANS@fmr.com](mailto:NFTRANS@fmr.com).
In Wealthscape, go to **Menu → Resources → Fidelity Integration Xchange**, then select **FinTech Marketplace** in the top menu. For unlisted firms, contact [transmissioninstalls@fmr.com](mailto:transmissioninstalls@fmr.com) to confirm eligibility.
In Fidelity Integration Xchange, go to **My Firm's Integrations → Outbound Transmission Rules**.
For Fidelity-related questions outside of Slant, contact your Fidelity Client Manager.
## Contact support
Stuck on a step or need help with the form? Email [hannah@slant.app](mailto:hannah@slant.app).
# Release Interactive Brokers data to Slant
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-interactive-brokers
Send a records-of-interest request to Interactive Brokers directly from Slant.
Interactive Brokers accepts release-of-information (ROI) requests via email. After you save your Interactive Brokers advisor code in Slant, you can send the ROI request on your behalf directly from the custodian settings — no separate email template, no copy-paste.
ROI processing timeline: **5–10 business days** after Interactive Brokers receives the request.
## Send the ROI request
Go to **Settings → Custodian**, find the Interactive Brokers row, and click it to open the dialog.
In the dialog, click **Send ROI request**. A form expands inline.
Enter:
* **Advisor name** — appears as the signature on the request email.
* **Advisor email** — used as the reply-to address so Interactive Brokers' response comes back to you.
* **CC emails** — anyone else on your team who should receive the response. Slant pre-fills our internal CCs.
Click **Send request**.
Interactive Brokers' reporting integration team will reply to the email to confirm receipt and process the authorization against the advisor code(s) you saved in Slant.
Once the feed is activated, data starts flowing into Slant on the next nightly sync.
In the Slant custodian settings, the Interactive Brokers row now shows a green **ROI sent** pill so you know the request is in motion.
## Related
* [Set up custodian integrations](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/setup)
## Contact support
Stuck or didn't get an Interactive Brokers reply? Email [hannah@slant.app](mailto:hannah@slant.app).
# Connect Pershing to Slant
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-pershing
Slant receives your BNY Pershing accounts directly from Pershing's nightly data files.
Slant connects to BNY Pershing through Pershing's standard data files, delivered to Slant every night. Pershing needs to authorize the transmission for your firm before data can flow, and we handle that request with Pershing on your behalf.
Setup timeline: Pershing typically enables a new transmission within **2–3 weeks** of the request.
## Connect your Pershing accounts
Go to **Settings → Custodian**, click **Other custodians**, and choose **Pershing**. Enter your Investment Professional (IP) number together with your broker-dealer's IBD number in the form `IBD-IP` — for example `6NM-F87`. Both appear on your Pershing statements and in NetX360.
Slant's team files the transmission request with Pershing for your firm. Pershing may ask your firm to confirm the request; if they do, please approve it promptly.
Once Pershing enables the transmission, your accounts appear in Slant within one business day and update every night after that. We confirm with you by email when the feed is live.
## What syncs
* Accounts, account holders, and account registrations
* Positions, balances, and daily market values
* Transactions and trades
* Open and closed tax lots (cost basis and realized gains)
Where Pershing provides tax IDs, Slant matches accounts to your clients automatically. Any accounts that aren't matched can be linked in a couple of clicks from the [custodian accounts list](/records/accounts/custodian-accounts).
## Related
* [Set up custodian integrations](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/setup)
* [Link accounts to clients](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/linking)
## Contact support
Questions about your Pershing feed? Email [hannah@slant.app](mailto:hannah@slant.app).
# Release Schwab data to Slant
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-schwab
Authorize Slant to receive Charles Schwab account data on your behalf.
After you add your Schwab advisor code in Slant, you need to authorize Schwab to release your account data. Schwab handles this through a **Request for Data Access Agreement** in the Schwab Institutional portal.
ROI processing timeline: **5–8 business days** after submission.
## Submit the data access request
Log in at [login.si2.schwabinstitutional.com](https://login.si2.schwabinstitutional.com/) and select **Account Management** at the top of the page.
Go to [Forms library](https://si2.schwabinstitutional.com/SI2/Home/Utilities/AccountManagement.aspx/?route=forms-lib) inside Account Management.
Search for **Request for Data Access Agreement**. To the right of that form, click **Submit Request**.
Fill in Advisor & Firm Information, Master Accounts, and the Third-party data recipient section with the following:
* **Recipient and Signer:** Slant CRM
* **Email:** [max@slant.app](mailto:max@slant.app)
In the comments section, add: *"This authorization is for Slant CRM. Please include Slant in the DocuSign email to authorized signers."*
Then click **Submit request**.
Within three business days, you, your service provider, and the service provider's agent (if applicable) receive a DocuSign notification email. Open it and sign.
Once all signatures are collected, Schwab assigns the master account to Slant and emails confirmation. Account data starts flowing into Slant the night after activation.
If you have questions about the data access setup process, call Schwab Advisor Platform Support at **800-647-5465**.
## Firm-level ROI (optional)
If your firm operates under a single umbrella master account, you can complete one ROI at the firm level to cover every advisor code beneath it. Schwab calls this a Firm Level ROI and delivers it via a FAM file.
This must be configured with Schwab in advance — call Schwab Advisor Platform Support at **800-647-5465** and reference your firm's SL Master to request that the FAM file be generated for your feeds.
Once configured, the FAM file is added to the Slant data feed and includes the Client-to-Advisor (Master #) relationship for every account.
## Request SSN / Tax ID release (optional)
Schwab masks SSN and Tax ID information in the standard data feed. If you need unmasked tax identifiers to match accounts to households automatically in Slant, you can request release separately.
Call Schwab Advisor Platform Support at **800-647-5465** and ask them to unmask SSN/Tax ID information and include it in the data feed sent to Slant.
Schwab requires a separate request for each new master account. If you authorize multiple master accounts, repeat the request for each one.
For more on how Slant uses tax IDs for account matching, see [Linking accounts to clients](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/linking).
## Related
* [Set up custodian integrations](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/setup)
* Schwab's reference: [How to request account data download access](https://si2.schwabinstitutional.com/SI2/ASK/Content/secure/ask/online-tools/tools/how-to-request-account-data-download-access.html)
## Contact support
Stuck on a step or need help with the form? Email [max@slant.app](mailto:max@slant.app).
# Setting up custodian integrations
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/setup
Add advisor codes to connect your custodians and start syncing account data.
Adding your advisor codes is the first step to connecting custodian data in Slant. An advisor code is the unique identifier your custodian assigns to you — once you add it, Slant begins syncing all accounts associated with that code on a nightly basis.
You can manage advisor codes at two levels: **company-wide** (across all books) or **per-book** (for a single book).
## Add an advisor code (company)
Only admins can add or remove company-level advisor codes.
Go to **Settings** → **Custodian**. Make sure the **Company** tab is selected.
Click your custodian's row. Schwab, Fidelity, Altruist, and Betterment appear first — click **Other custodians** to show Pershing, Interactive Brokers, DST, RBC, and SEI.
For Betterment, the field is labeled **Advisor ID**.
Select the books that should have access to accounts under this code from the **Enabled books** dropdown.
The code appears on the custodian's row with a green check.
You can save a new Altruist advisor code without waiting for a separate verification step. Slant still needs to register the feed before Altruist account data begins syncing.
After adding your advisor code, you need to request data access authorization from your custodian. Follow your custodian's release data guide — [Schwab](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-schwab), [Fidelity](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-fidelity), [Pershing](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-pershing), [Interactive Brokers](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-interactive-brokers), or [DST](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/release-dst) — also available from the **How to release data** link when you open the custodian's row. This is an external process that is typically fulfilled within 10 business days. Once authorized, Slant begins syncing account data during the next nightly sync and accounts will appear on the [custodian accounts list](/records/accounts/custodian-accounts).
## Add an advisor code (book)
Book principals can add advisor codes directly to their own book. These codes only apply to that specific book.
Go to **Settings** → **Custodian**, then select your book's tab (e.g., **David's Book**).
Click your custodian's row, enter your advisor code, and click **Save**.
## Manage advisor codes
Once an advisor code is added, it appears on the custodian's row with a green check. Click the row to manage its codes or add another code for the same custodian.
### Enable or disable books
On the **Company** tab, click the custodian's row. Each advisor code shows its **Enabled books**. Click the **x** next to a book name to remove it, or use the **Add book...** dropdown to enable the code for additional books.
When you remove a book from an advisor code, any custodian account links that depended on that code are automatically cleaned up.
When you enable a book on an advisor code, Slant automatically links any existing custodian accounts under that code to client households whose tax IDs match. See [auto-linking](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/linking#auto-linking) for details.
### Delete an advisor code
Click the custodian's row, then click the icon next to the code and confirm by clicking **Remove**. This stops syncing accounts associated with that code.
Removing an advisor code deletes any custodian accounts that were only accessible through that code, along with their positions, balances, transactions, and client links. Accounts that also match another advisor code in your firm are preserved.
## Send an ROI request
Some custodians require a records of interest (ROI) authorization before Slant can access your account data. If your custodian supports ROI requests, you can send one directly from Slant.
Supported custodians: **Interactive Brokers**.
Go to **Settings** → **Custodian** and click the custodian's row to open its codes.
Enter your **Advisor name** and **Advisor email**. Optionally adjust the **CC emails** recipients.
Click **Send request**.
The form is replaced by an **ROI request sent** confirmation, and the custodian's row shows an **ROI sent** badge.
## FAQ
Company-level advisor codes are managed by admins and can be shared across multiple books. Book-level advisor codes are managed by the book principal and only apply to that specific book. Both work the same way for syncing data.
After adding an advisor code, you need to complete a data access authorization with your custodian. This process is typically fulfilled within 10 business days. Once authorized, accounts will appear after the next nightly sync. Position and balance data may take an additional 24 hours after the initial account sync.
Yes. On the Company tab, enable multiple books for a single advisor code. Each book will see the same custodian accounts and can link them to their own clients independently.
No. Each advisor code can only be claimed by one Slant firm at a time. If you try to add a code that another firm has already claimed — usually because an advisor moved firms and brought their book — Slant rejects the new claim. Contact support to resolve the conflict.
## Next steps
Connect synced accounts to client households
Browse and manage all custodian accounts
# DocuSign
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/integrations/docusign
Connect DocuSign to send documents for electronic signature directly from Slant.
Send documents for electronic signature without leaving Slant. When you fill a PDF using the [document filler](/records/households/document-filler/overview), you can route it to DocuSign for signing — Slant handles signer assignment, email delivery, and status tracking automatically.
## How it works
Slant includes a shared DocuSign account that works out of the box — no setup required. Connecting your firm's own DocuSign account is optional and lets signing emails come from your firm instead of Slant.
Here's what happens when you send a document to DocuSign:
1. You [fill a PDF](/records/households/document-filler/filling-documents) from a household record using the document filler.
2. After the document is filled, you choose **Send to DocuSign** and assign signers to each role (head of household, spouse, advisor, etc.).
3. Slant creates a DocuSign envelope and sends signing emails to each signer.
4. If you are one of the signers, you are redirected to sign immediately in DocuSign.
5. When all signers complete the document, Slant stores the signed PDF and notifies you.
## Connect your firm's DocuSign account
Connecting your own account is optional. Without it, documents are sent through Slant's shared DocuSign account.
Go to **Settings** → **DocuSign**. Select the **Company** tab.
Click **Connect account**. You'll be redirected to DocuSign to authorize access.
Sign in to your DocuSign account and grant Slant permission to send envelopes on your behalf.
After authorization, you'll be redirected back to Slant. The settings page shows your connected DocuSign email and account name.
When your firm's account is connected, signing request emails are sent with your advisor's name as the sender and their email as the reply-to address.
### Require phone verification
Under **Envelope security**, turn on **Require phone verification** and click **Save settings** to require every signer to verify by SMS or phone through DocuSign.
Every signer needs a phone number when this setting is on. Slant stops the envelope from being sent if a signer does not have one.
## Disconnect your account
Go to **Settings** → **DocuSign**. Select the **Company** tab.
Click **Disconnect** and confirm.
Future envelopes will be sent from Slant's shared DocuSign account. Existing envelopes already sent to DocuSign are not affected.
## Configure the signed documents folder
When a document is signed, Slant can automatically save the completed PDF to the household's cloud storage folder. You can set a subfolder name so signed documents are organized separately from other files.
Go to **Settings** → **DocuSign**. Select a **book** tab.
Type the subfolder name in the text field. Leave it empty to save signed documents to the root of the household's storage folder.
The folder name saves automatically when you click away from the field.
Automatic storage of signed documents requires a [file storage integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage) to be connected and the household to have a linked storage folder.
## Send a document for signing
You send documents to DocuSign from within the document filler flow on a household record.
Open a client or prospect, click **Fill PDF**, select a template, and fill in the fields. Click **Fill PDF** to generate the completed document.
After the document is generated, click **Send to DocuSign**.
For each signing role in the document, select a signer from the household members or book users. If a signer doesn't have an email address on file, you'll be prompted to enter one.
Click **Send to DocuSign**. Signing emails are sent to each signer. If you are assigned as a signer, you'll be redirected to DocuSign to sign immediately.
The **Send to DocuSign** option only appears for templates that have signature roles configured. It is not available for Schwab document templates.
## After signing
Slant notifies you when an envelope is completed, declined, or voided. For completed documents, the signed PDF is automatically attached to the envelope record. If the household has a linked storage folder, the signed document is also uploaded to cloud storage.
## FAQ
No. Slant includes a shared DocuSign account that works without any setup. Connecting your firm's account is optional and lets signing emails come from your firm's name.
Not currently. Schwab document templates cannot be sent to DocuSign from Slant.
When assigning signers, Slant prompts you to enter an email address for any signer who doesn't have one on file. An email is required for each signer.
Yes. When assigning signers, select **N/A** for any role you want to skip. That role's signature fields will be omitted from the envelope.
Signed documents are attached to the envelope record in Slant. If the household has a linked storage folder and your book has a [file storage integration](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage), the signed PDF is also uploaded to cloud storage automatically.
Each signer receives an email with a link to sign the document in DocuSign. If you are one of the signers, you are redirected to sign immediately after sending.
## Next steps
Manage PDF templates that auto-fill with client data
Connect cloud storage for automatic document saving
# Email and calendar
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar
Connect your email and calendar to sync messages, events, and contacts with Slant.
Connecting your email and calendar lets Slant sync your emails to household timelines, display calendar events across your books, and send emails directly from Slant.
Slant supports Google, Microsoft (Outlook/Office 365), and Microsoft Exchange accounts. Each user can connect up to two email accounts.
## Connect an account
Go to **Settings** → **Email and calendar**.
Click **Connect Google Account**, **Connect Microsoft Account**, or **Connect Microsoft Exchange**.
Sign in to your email provider and grant Slant permission to access your email and calendar. You'll be redirected back to Slant when the connection is complete.
### What gets synced
Slant begins syncing immediately after you connect. The initial sync usually takes up to 24 hours depending on the size of your mailbox — you can keep working while it runs.
* **Emails** — Slant pulls in up to 7 years of email history. Emails from [blacklisted addresses](#blacklisted-emails) and internal-only emails (messages where every participant is within your organization) are excluded.
* **Calendar events** — Slant syncs events from 18 months ago through 1 year into the future, from your primary calendar only. All event types are included — private events are synced but can be [hidden from creating meetings](#hide-private-events).
### Track sync progress
While the first sync is running, a progress badge appears in the top bar showing the connected email address, a calendar status ring, and an email status ring. Hover the badge for a breakdown — calendar syncs first, then email fills in by percentage. If multiple accounts are syncing, the badge shows a `+N` chip for the extras. The badge disappears once the sync finishes.
## Manage connected accounts
Each connected account appears as a card on the **Email and calendar** settings page. Click the icon to open the account's detail page, or click the **⋮** (three-dot menu) for quick actions:
* **Edit** — opens the account detail page where you can configure calendar sharing, email permissions, and your signature
* **Reauthenticate** — reconnects to your email provider if the connection has been lost
* **Disconnect** — removes the account and all synced data from Slant
Disconnecting an account removes all synced emails and calendar events from Slant. This cannot be undone.
### Set a primary account
If you have two connected accounts, one is marked as your **primary** account. Slant uses your primary account as the default when sending emails. To change your primary account, click the **⋮** menu on the account you want and select **Set as primary**.
## Calendar sharing
Calendar sharing controls which of your books can see events from your connected calendar.
To configure calendar sharing, click the icon on a connected account, then select the **Calendar sharing** tab.
### Expose your calendar to a book
Under **Expose your primary calendar**, toggle the switch next to each book to start or stop sharing your calendar events with that book.
When you expose a calendar to a book, events begin syncing immediately. Other users in that book can see your events on the shared calendar and Slant can create [meetings](/activity/meetings/overview) from your calendar events.
### Share your calendar with your own book
If you're the principal of a book, that book's row controls whether your primary calendar is visible to everyone on the book. Toggling it off applies across all of your connected email accounts — it hides your primary calendar from your book members regardless of which account the events come from.
Only the book's principal sees this toggle for their own book.
Turning off sharing for your own book destroys future meetings that were created from your calendar and cancels any notetakers scheduled for them. Past meetings are preserved.
### Hide private events
The **Hide private events** toggle prevents private calendar events from creating meetings or notetakers in Slant. Private events are still synced, but they won't trigger any automated workflows.
Turn this on if your calendar contains personal appointments marked as private that you don't want Slant to act on.
### Calendar edit access
By default, teammates who can see your calendar can only view events. Use **Calendar edit access** to let specific teammates create, update, reschedule, and delete events on your behalf — useful for assistants or paraplanners who manage your schedule.
Granted teammates can act on events directly from Slant. The original calendar owner — you — stays the owner of every event, so changes still sync through your connected calendar provider.
Go to **Settings** → **Email and calendar**, click the icon on the connected account, and stay on the **Calendar sharing** tab.
Scroll to **Calendar edit access** and click **Grant access**.
Under **Grant calendar edit access**, check the box next to each teammate you want to grant access to. Teammates who already have access appear as disabled.
Click **Grant access** to confirm. The selected teammates can now create and edit events on this calendar.
To revoke a teammate's access, find them in the **Calendar edit access** table and click **Revoke access**.
Only teammates who can already see this calendar appear as eligible. If a teammate isn't listed, expose your calendar to one of their books first under **Expose your primary calendar** above.
If you stop exposing this calendar to all of a teammate's books, their edit access is automatically removed.
## Email permissions
Click the icon on a connected account and select the **Email permissions** tab to manage your blacklist and sharing settings.
### Blacklisted emails
Emails from blacklisted addresses or domains won't appear in Slant. This is useful for filtering out newsletters, marketing emails, or other messages you don't want on household timelines.
To add entries, type an email address or domain pattern into the input field and click **Save changes**. Use wildcard patterns to block entire domains (e.g., `*@example.com`).
Your company admin can also maintain a company-wide blacklist that applies to all users. Company-wide entries appear as read-only on this page.
### Share your email access
You can grant teammates permission to view email from your connected inbox, and optionally to send and reply from it. This is helpful when an assistant or team member manages correspondence for your email address.
Each shared teammate has one of two access levels:
* **Read only** — the teammate can view email from this inbox.
* **Read and send** — the teammate can also send and reply from this inbox.
On the **Email permissions** tab, click **Grant access**.
Check the box next to each teammate you want to grant access to. Teammates who already have access appear as disabled.
Click **Grant access** to confirm. The selected teammates can now see email from this inbox.
New shares default to **Read only**. To change a teammate's level, use the **Access level** dropdown on their row and choose **Read only** or **Read and send**. The change takes effect immediately.
To revoke a teammate's access, find them in the shared access table and click **Revoke**.
Only inboxes you own or have **Read and send** access to appear when choosing which inbox to send from — in the email composer, bulk email, sequences, and task email drafts.
Sharing access also controls what teammates see in the [team activity feed](/dashboard/team-activity#activity-feed). Email entries only appear for inboxes the viewer owns or has been granted access to here.
## Email signature
Your email signature is automatically appended to emails you send from Slant. Each connected account has a **Default signature**, and you can add a separate signature for each sendable alias.
Click the icon on a connected account and select the **Signature** tab to set up your signature.
Type or paste the default into **Default signature**. Click **Add another signature** to choose a sendable alias and give it its own signature. Slant uses the alias signature when the message's **From** address matches it, and falls back to the default otherwise.
Click **Save signature** after editing. Use the formatting toolbar for font family and size, bold, italic, underline, strikethrough, text color, links, lists, and images.
You can also import your existing signature by sending an email to `signatures@mail.slant.app` from your connected account. Slant will extract the signature automatically.
To remove your signature, click **Clear**.
## Unsubscribed emails
If any contacts have unsubscribed from your emails, you'll see a count at the bottom of the **Email and calendar** settings page. Click **view here** to see a list of unsubscribed email addresses and when they unsubscribed.
Slant automatically prevents you from sending emails to unsubscribed contacts.
## FAQ
Each user can connect up to two email accounts. Both accounts sync emails and calendar events independently, and you choose which one is your primary account for sending.
All synced emails and calendar events from that account are removed from Slant. This includes emails on household timelines and calendar events shared with your books. This cannot be undone.
A warning icon means Slant has lost its connection to your email provider. This can happen if your password changed, your organization revoked access, or your OAuth token expired. Click **Reauthenticate** from the **⋮** menu to reconnect.
Yes. Granting a teammate access lets them view all emails synced from that inbox in Slant, not just emails related to specific households. Only share access with teammates who should see your full email history.
You do. The original calendar owner stays the owner of every event, even when a teammate with edit access creates, updates, reschedules, or deletes it. Changes still sync through your connected calendar provider.
# File storage
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage
Connect a cloud storage provider to manage client and prospect documents directly from Slant.
Connecting a file storage provider lets you link cloud storage folders to your households, browse and upload documents, and manage files without leaving Slant.
Slant supports six cloud storage providers:
* **Google Drive**
* **OneDrive** (with optional SharePoint access)
* **Box**
* **Dropbox**
* **ShareFile**
* **Egnyte**
Each book can connect one account per provider. Only the active integration is used when linking folders to households.
## Connect a storage provider
Go to **Settings** → **File storage**.
Click **Connect** on the provider you want to use.
Sign in to your storage provider and grant Slant permission to access your files. You'll be redirected back to Slant when the connection is complete.
Your connected account appears as a card showing the email address you authorized and the provider name.
### Egnyte setup
When connecting Egnyte, Slant prompts you to enter your Egnyte subdomain before redirecting to the authorization page. Enter the subdomain portion of your Egnyte URL (for example, if your URL is `acme.egnyte.com`, enter `acme`).
### Enable SharePoint
If your organization uses SharePoint alongside OneDrive, you can enable SharePoint access on your existing OneDrive connection.
Click the **⋮** (three-dot menu) on your OneDrive connection.
Click **Enable SharePoint**. A confirmation message explains that SharePoint requires additional permissions from your Microsoft 365 administrator.
Click **Continue** and complete the Microsoft authorization flow. If your admin hasn't pre-approved the permissions, you may need to request approval before proceeding.
## Manage a connected provider
Each connected provider appears as a card on the **File storage** settings page. Click the card or the icon to open the provider's detail page. Click the **⋮** (three-dot menu) for quick actions:
* **Reauthenticate** — reconnects to your storage provider if the connection has been lost or your credentials have changed
* **Disconnect** — removes the integration and unlinks all household folders connected through this provider
Disconnecting a storage provider removes storage access for all linked households. The files in your cloud storage are not deleted, but Slant can no longer browse or manage them.
### Reconnect an expired connection
Storage connections can expire when your provider's sign-in is no longer valid. When this happens, the connected account shows a warning icon, and the icon is replaced by a **Reauthenticate** button. The card displays the message "This storage integration needs to be reauthenticated before Slant can browse linked folders." You can also choose **Reauthenticate** from the **⋮** (three-dot menu).
In the folder picker, you'll see a banner titled **Storage connection needs reauthentication** with the message "Reauthenticate this integration to browse existing folders and link new ones." The folder list shows "Reauthenticate this integration to load folders." until you reconnect.
To reconnect, click **Reauthenticate** and sign back in to your storage provider. For Egnyte, your subdomain is reused automatically.
Browsing and linking folders for this provider are paused until you reconnect. This applies to Box, Dropbox, OneDrive, ShareFile, and Egnyte.
## Share storage access with teammates
By default, only the person who connected the storage provider can link folders to households. You can grant other teammates permission to link folders from the same storage account.
On the **File storage** settings page, click the connected provider card or its icon.
Click **Grant access**, then select the teammates you want to share with.
Click **Grant access** to save. The selected teammates can now link household folders from this storage account.
Shared teammates appear in a table showing their name and the date access was granted. To remove a teammate's access, click **Revoke access** next to their name and confirm.
Revoking a teammate's access prevents them from linking new folders, but does not unlink folders they have already linked to households.
## FAQ
Yes. Each book can connect one account per provider. However, only one provider is active at a time for linking folders to households.
Your files remain in your cloud storage — Slant never deletes files from your storage provider. Disconnecting only removes Slant's ability to browse and manage those files. All household folder links through that provider are removed.
Yes. Teammates with shared storage access can browse your full folder tree when selecting folders to link. Only share access with teammates who should be able to see your storage contents.
Click the **⋮** menu on the affected provider and select **Reauthenticate**. This refreshes your connection with the storage provider. If the issue persists, disconnect and reconnect the provider.
## Next steps
Link storage folders to households and manage files
Connect your email and calendar to sync messages and events
# GoTo Connect
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/integrations/go-to
Connect GoTo to sync SMS messages, calls, voicemails, recordings, and transcripts with Slant.
Connect your GoTo Connect account to send SMS messages, start calls, and keep supported phone activity on the matching record in Slant.
## Before you connect
Each advisor connects their own GoTo user to each Slant book where they work. Before connecting, confirm that your GoTo user has:
* An active GoTo Connect license
* A direct phone number assigned to its line or extension
* Permission to send text messages from that number if you plan to send SMS
* Access to call reports and recordings if you want Slant to import them
Your GoTo administrator manages these settings in [GoTo Admin](https://admin.goto.com/). GoTo's developer portal and personal access tokens are not used for the Slant connection.
A GoTo Connect **Super Admin** must be the first person from your GoTo organization to connect. [GoTo requires a Super Admin](https://developer.goto.com/guides/GoToConnect/18_HOW_useMessagingV2Api/) to create the organization-wide subscription that sends SMS activity to Slant. Other advisors can connect their own GoTo users after that subscription exists.
The SMS subscription is tied to the Super Admin who created it. If GoTo deactivates that user, removes their Super Admin role, or the user disconnects GoTo from Slant, new SMS activity may stop syncing. Have an active Super Admin reconnect GoTo to restore the subscription.
## Prepare GoTo
In **GoTo Admin**, assign the advisor a GoTo Connect license, extension, and direct phone number. Confirm that the number appears under **Phone system** → **Phone numbers** and is assigned to the advisor. See GoTo's [SMS setup tutorial](https://developer.goto.com/guides/GoToConnect/12_Send_SMS/) for the same number-assignment requirement.
Route the advisor's GoTo line to the device or personal number they use to answer calls. When an advisor starts a call from Slant, GoTo rings the advisor first and then bridges the call to the contact.
[Grant the advisor texting permission](https://developer.goto.com/guides/GoToConnect/18_HOW_useMessagingV2Api/) for their assigned number. GoTo may require carrier registration before the number can send SMS to US numbers. If you only need inbound SMS, use GoTo's receive-only option when it is available for your account.
Give the advisor permission to view call reports. To import call recordings, also grant access to call recordings and enable recording for the calls you want captured.
GoTo features and admin labels can vary by plan and account configuration. Contact your GoTo administrator or GoTo Support if texting, recordings, or voicemail are not available in your account.
## Connect GoTo to Slant
In Slant, go to **Settings** → **Phone and SMS**.
On the **GoTo Connect** card, click **Connect GoTo**.
Sign in as the GoTo user you want to connect and approve the requested permissions. GoTo redirects you to Slant when authorization finishes.
Wait for the card to show the advisor's name followed by **Connected**. The assigned GoTo phone number appears below the account.
Authorization may take a few seconds to finish after GoTo redirects you to Slant. Keep the page open while the **GoTo Connect** card updates.
If the card says **No SMS-enabled phone number returned by GoTo**, confirm that a direct number is assigned to the connected user and that the user can text from it. Then click **Reconnect** on the card and authorize the account again.
## What Slant syncs
Slant supports the following GoTo activity:
* Incoming and outgoing SMS, including delivery-status updates
* Group SMS
* Incoming, outgoing, completed, and missed call logs
* Voicemails and available voicemail transcriptions
* Available call recordings and transcripts
Slant associates an item with a client, prospect, other contact, or business only when the external phone number matches a phone number on that record in the current book.
### Initial history sync
After the first connection, Slant requests up to seven years of available SMS messages, calls, and voicemails. GoTo's retention and API limits can shorten the history returned:
* Detailed Call Events Reports are available for up to 13 months, according to GoTo's [Developer Center changelog](https://developer.goto.com/changelog). Slant uses these reports for recent calls and their available recording or transcript details.
* For older calls, Slant falls back to GoTo's standard call history. These older entries may contain only the call log.
* Recordings and transcripts appear only when GoTo recorded the call and makes the media available to the connected user.
The initial history sync runs in the background and may take time for an account with a large call or message history. New phone numbers added to a record and phone numbers added by a completed CRM import also trigger a history check.
## Test the connection
Use a contact whose phone number is saved on a Slant record.
Open the record's **Phone** tab, select the GoTo account and recipient, enter a message, and send it. Confirm that the message appears in both Slant and the GoTo inbox.
Reply from the contact's phone. Confirm that the reply appears on the same record in Slant.
Click **Call** for the contact. Answer when GoTo rings the connected advisor's line and confirm that GoTo bridges the call to the contact.
Call the advisor's GoTo number from the contact's phone. Complete one call and leave another unanswered, then confirm that both appear on the record's **Phone** tab with the correct status.
Leave a voicemail for the connected extension. Confirm that the voicemail call log and audio appear in Slant. If GoTo creates a transcription, it may arrive after the audio.
## Troubleshoot GoTo
The connected GoTo user needs a direct phone number assigned to their line or extension and permission to text from that number. Update the assignment in **GoTo Admin**, then click **Reconnect** in Slant and authorize GoTo again.
GoTo starts the call by ringing the connected advisor's GoTo line before it calls the contact. Confirm that the advisor has an assigned line and that the line routes to the GoTo device or personal number they answer.
Receiving SMS does not confirm that your number is approved for outbound messaging. Confirm that the user has texting permission for the number and complete any carrier registration GoTo requires. A permissions or resource error from GoTo usually means the connected user cannot send from the selected number.
Confirm that an active Super Admin remains connected to Slant. GoTo stops organization-wide messaging notifications if the user who created the subscription is deactivated or loses Super Admin access. Also confirm that the sender's phone number is saved on a record in the current Slant book.
Confirm that GoTo recorded the call and that the connected user can access call reports and recordings. Detailed recording and transcript metadata is limited to GoTo's 13-month Call Events Report window. A voicemail transcription can arrive after the voicemail audio.
Existing GoTo activity remains visible in Slant, but new calls, messages, and voicemails stop syncing. If the disconnected account created the organization's SMS subscription, inbound and outbound SMS notifications can also stop for other connected users until an active Super Admin reconnects.
## Next steps
Send messages, place calls, and work with recordings in Slant
Open a client record and test the Phone tab
# Integration requests
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/integrations/integration-requests
Request new integrations and vote on what Slant should build next.
Integration requests let you tell the Slant team which integrations matter most to your firm. Browse existing requests, vote on the ones you want, and submit new ideas — votes help prioritize what gets built next.
## Open integration requests
Click your company name in the sidebar, then select **Integration requests**.
You'll see a list of requested integrations sorted by vote count, with a search bar to filter by name. Each card shows the integration name, description, vote count, comment count, and current status (if set).
## Vote on a request
Voting signals demand to the Slant team and helps prioritize which integrations get built.
Browse the list or use the search bar to find the integration you want.
Click the upvote button on the left side of the integration card. A menu appears with two options:
* **I am a current user** — You already use this software.
* **I am not a user yet** — You're interested but don't use it today.
Select the option that applies to you.
The vote count updates immediately. You can vote once per integration.
To remove your vote, click the vote button again and select **Remove vote**.
## Submit a new request
If the integration you want isn't listed, submit a request directly from the integration requests page.
In the **Request an integration** panel on the left side of the page, enter:
* **Title** — The name of the integration (required).
* **Details** — Any additional context, such as how long you've been using the software, what it does, or how much you spend on it (required).
Click **Submit**.
Your request is sent to the Slant team for review. Once reviewed, it appears in the integration requests list where other users can vote on it.
## View request details
Click any integration card to open its detail page. The detail page shows:
* The full description and a link to the integration's website (if available).
* The current vote count and vote button.
* A comment section where you can discuss the request with other users.
## Statuses
Each integration request has a status that reflects where it is in the review process.
| Status | Meaning |
| --------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- |
| *(no badge)* | Proposed — the request is open for votes. |
| **Prioritized** | The Slant team has prioritized this integration for development. |
| **Completed** | The integration has been built and is available. |
| **Rejected** | The request was reviewed and will not be built. |
Hover over any status badge to see additional context from the Slant team, when available.
## FAQ
Yes. You can vote on as many integrations as you want, but only once per integration.
Remove your existing vote first, then vote again with the other option.
Submitted requests are sent directly to the Slant team for review. Once approved, they appear in the public list for all users to vote on.
Integration requests are shared across all Slant users. Votes from every firm contribute to the same totals.
# Integrations
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/integrations/overview
Connect email, calendar, file storage, phone, and other services to Slant.
Slant integrates with the tools your firm already uses so you can manage client relationships from one place.
* **[Email and calendar](/setting-up-slant/integrations/email-and-calendar)** — Sync emails to household timelines, display calendar events, and send emails from Slant. Supports Google, Microsoft, and Exchange.
* **[File storage](/setting-up-slant/integrations/file-storage)** — Connect Google Drive, OneDrive, Box, Dropbox, ShareFile, or Egnyte to browse and manage client documents directly from household records.
* **[Phone and SMS](/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone)** — Make calls and send text messages from Slant.
* **[Scheduling](/setting-up-slant/integrations/scheduling)** — Connect Calendly, OnceHub, Cal.com, or Zoom Scheduler so respondents can book live appointment times inside intake forms.
* **[Custodian](/setting-up-slant/integrations/custodian/overview)** — Connect your custodians (Schwab, Fidelity, Pershing, and more) to sync account data, track portfolio performance, and calculate AUM automatically.
* **[Black Diamond](/setting-up-slant/integrations/black-diamond)** — Import authorized reporting households, supervised accounts, and portfolio allocations from Black Diamond.
* **[Zapier](/setting-up-slant/integrations/zapier)** — Connect Slant to thousands of apps to automate workflows like creating records, syncing data, and reacting to changes.
* **[DocuSign](/setting-up-slant/integrations/docusign)** — Send documents for electronic signature directly from Slant.
* **[Integration requests](/setting-up-slant/integrations/integration-requests)** — Request new integrations and vote on what Slant should build next.
Looking for data import or export? See [Importing your data](/setting-up-slant/importing-your-data/overview) and [Exporting your data](/setting-up-slant/exporting-your-data).
# Phone and SMS
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/integrations/phone
Connect a phone integration to sync SMS messages, call logs, and recordings with Slant.
Connecting a phone integration can let you send and receive SMS messages, view call history, log calls manually, and listen to call recordings — all from within Slant. Available features depend on the provider.
Slant supports eight phone providers:
* **MyRepChat** — purpose-built compliant texting for financial advisors. Connects with API keys.
* **RingCentral** — full-featured business phone system with SMS, calling, and call recording. Connects via OAuth.
* **CurrentClient** — advisor-focused compliant texting and calling with built-in 10DLC handling. Connects via OAuth.
* **Dialpad** — AI-powered business phone system with SMS, calling, and call recording. Connects via OAuth.
* **GoTo Connect** — business phone system with SMS, calling, voicemail, and call recording. Connects via OAuth. See [Set up GoTo Connect](/setting-up-slant/integrations/go-to).
* **Intulse** — VoIP business phone system with SMS and calling. Connects via OAuth, and an Intulse admin has to authorize the connection.
* **Vonage Business Communications** — company-level call history and recording sync for selected extensions. Connects with credentials from a dedicated VBC API application.
* **Zoom Phone** — Zoom's business phone system with SMS and calling. Connects via OAuth.
Once connected, supported SMS messages and call logs sync automatically to the **Phone** tab on your [clients](/records/clients/overview), [prospects](/records/prospects), [other contacts](/records/other-contacts), and [businesses](/records/businesses).
## Set up on the provider's side
Each provider requires setup in their admin console before you click **Connect** in Slant. Complete these steps first so your connection works on the first try.
### MyRepChat
Before connecting MyRepChat, finish onboarding in MyRepChat and generate API keys.
If your broker-dealer (Osaic, LPL, Cambridge, etc.) mandates MyRepChat, use the firm-branded sign-up link from your home office. Otherwise start a [free 2-week trial](https://myrepchat.com/free-trial/) or pick a [paid plan](https://myrepchat.com/pricing/) starting at \$25/user/month.
In the sign-up wizard, either pick a new dedicated number by area code or text-enable your existing office line via Hosted SMS. Text-enabling an existing landline requires a signed Letter of Authorization.
Text-enabling an existing line takes 1–2 business days for carrier processing. You must be near the phone during verification.
Complete profile info, auto-responses, opt-in/opt-out keywords, and message templates per the [MyRepChat onboarding guide](https://myrepchat.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MyRepChat-Onboarding-Guide-Q1-2025.pdf). STOP/START handling is automatic.
In **Account Settings → Integration**, connect your firm's archiver (Smarsh, Global Relay, Erado, Patrina, Page Freezer, OpenText, Veritas, Intradyn, Proofpoint, Vault America, OneSecure, AWS, or Archive Intel). Coordinate with your compliance lead or MyRepChat support if you're unsure which to pick.
Open **Settings → Profile → API Access → Generate**. Copy the **Public Key** and **Secret Key** — you'll paste both into Slant.
Each user generates their own key pair and connects it on their own Slant account.
**TODO — needs input before publishing:**
* Does MyRepChat register each advisor as a separate 10DLC brand (requiring your EIN), or does it cover all customers under a single platform-level brand? MyRepChat publishes no public documentation on its 10DLC posture.
* If per-customer brand registration is required, what's the realistic timeline before the first SMS can send?
* Does MyRepChat pass through TCR fees, or are they bundled into the \$25/mo base?
**Expected timeline:** Same-day for a new dedicated number; 1–2 business days if text-enabling an existing line.
### RingCentral
Before connecting RingCentral, register your business with The Campaign Registry (TCR) through your RingCentral admin portal. Carriers block unregistered numbers from sending SMS.
Go to [service.ringcentral.com](https://service.ringcentral.com/). You need Super Admin or Phone System Admin to register a brand and enable SMS.
Any RingEX plan (Core, Advanced, Ultra) supports SMS and the Slant connection. Automatic call recording — required by most advisor compliance programs — needs **Advanced** or higher. SMS allotment varies: Core \~25/user/mo, Advanced \~100/user/mo, Ultra unlimited.
TCR reviewers verify your privacy policy discloses SMS data collection, states that consent is not shared with third parties, and includes opt-in plus "Reply STOP to opt out; Reply HELP for support" language. A missing or non-compliant policy is the #1 reason TCR rejects campaigns.
Open **Phone System → Business SMS → [SMS Registration](https://service.ringcentral.com/application/company/enhancedBusinessSMS/smsTcrRegistration)**. Submit your EIN (exact SS4 match), legal business name, DBA, physical address, website URL, privacy policy URL, sample message copy, opt-in flow description, and use case (typically Customer Care or Account Notifications).
RingCentral guidance says TCR approval may take up to four weeks. Brand vetting is usually 1–3 business days; campaign approval is typically 3–7 business days but routinely runs longer. Plan on 2–4 weeks.
Once TCR approves your campaign, return to **Phone System → Business SMS** and assign the DIDs you want to text from. Only numbers attached to an approved campaign can send to US carriers.
Open **Users → Users with Extensions → \[select user] → Phones & Numbers → Direct Numbers** and confirm SMS is enabled with at least one direct number. The user who completes Slant's OAuth flow is the extension Slant sends from.
Open **Phone System → Auto-Receptionist → General Settings → Call Recording → Automatic Call Recording**. Toggle on and assign users. Requires Advanced or Ultra. RingCentral plays a disclaimer automatically — verify your state's two-party consent rules still apply. See [RingCentral's call recording guide](https://support.ringcentral.com/article-v2/Turning-on-on-demand-or-automatic-call-recording-.html?brand=RingCentral\&product=RingEX\&language=en_US).
For FINRA archiving, provision **RingCentral Archiver** or a third-party connector (Smarsh, Global Relay, Nuclei) from **Admin Portal → More → Archiver** or the RingCentral App Gallery before you connect Slant.
**Showstopper:** Unregistered numbers will be silently blocked by US carriers. Complete TCR registration before you start texting clients from Slant.
**Expected timeline:** 2–4 weeks end-to-end, gated by TCR brand and campaign approval.
### CurrentClient
Before connecting CurrentClient, finish carrier registration inside CurrentClient. CurrentClient submits your 10DLC brand and campaign to TCR on your behalf — you don't deal with carriers directly.
Start an account at [app.currentclient.com](https://app.currentclient.com/auth/signup). No contract required.
* **Text Plan** (\$24/user/month) — compliant texting, CRM sync, archiving.
* **Text and Phone Plan** (\$44/user/month) — adds a dedicated business number, calling, IVR.
See [CurrentClient pricing](https://www.currentclient.com/pricing) for add-ons like AI Transcription, Outreach Engine, and AI Voice Agent.
Pay the one-time **\$50 carrier registration fee** and submit your business identity (legal name, EIN, address, contact, website). CurrentClient handles brand and campaign submission to TCR for you.
Carrier approval typically takes 5–7 business days. You can't send SMS until approval lands.
Choose a new local or toll-free number, or port your existing business line into CurrentClient.
In **Integrations**, connect Hadrius, Greenboard, Archive Intel, MessageWatcher, Global Relay, or Smarsh.
Add each advisor in the team management area and assign each a dedicated line. Enable MFA per CurrentClient's SOC 2 guidance.
**TODO — needs input before publishing:**
* Is the \$50 10DLC fee per workspace (firm) or per advisor seat? CurrentClient's pricing page doesn't specify the unit.
* What exact OAuth scopes does CurrentClient request when an advisor authorizes Slant?
* Does CurrentClient offer a sandbox for testing the Slant connection before going live?
**Expected timeline:** 5–7 business days, gated by CurrentClient's carrier registration.
### Vonage Business Communications
Your VBC account must have **more than 50 users**. Vonage creates the API application Slant needs to ingest your data only for clients above this threshold.
A Slant admin connects Vonage with a dedicated VBC API application and integration user. Complete this setup with your Vonage account representative before opening Slant.
Contact your Vonage Business Communications account representative. Vonage must provide a [VBC developer account](https://developer.vonage.com/en/vonage-business-cloud/getting-started/create-a-developer-account) and create the application Slant will use.
In the Business Communications Developer Portal, subscribe the application to **Call Recording**, **Provisioning**, and **Reports**. These provide recordings, account users and extensions, and call logs.
Enable the **Password**, **Refresh Token**, and **Client Credentials** grants. Generate production OAuth keys, then save the **Consumer key** and **Consumer secret** securely.
Follow Vonage's [integration-user instructions](https://developer.vonage.com/en/vonage-business-cloud/getting-started/create-a-vbc-integration-user). Make the user an **Account Administrator**, choose **User does not need an extension**, and disable SSO for this user if your VBC account uses SSO. Save the integration username and password securely.
The integration user can access company call data. Use a dedicated account and protect its credentials.
### Zoom Phone
Before connecting Zoom Phone, confirm your plan includes SMS, enable SMS at the account and user level, and register a 10DLC brand and campaign. SMS will not send until all four are in place.
You need a Zoom Workplace account on **Pro, Business, Enterprise, or Education** tier, plus a Zoom Phone license assigned to each advisor.
The base Zoom Phone **US/CA Unlimited Calling** and **Metered** plans do NOT include SMS. You need a Pro Plus / Workplace bundle that includes Zoom Phone with SMS, or an SMS add-on. If the account-level SMS/MMS toggle is greyed out or missing, your plan doesn't include SMS — call your Zoom rep before continuing. See Zoom's [SMS setup guide (KB0069635)](https://support.zoom.com/hc/en/article?id=zm_kb\&sysparm_article=KB0069635).
In the Zoom Web Portal, open **Account Management → Account Settings → Zoom Phone tab → General** and toggle **SMS/MMS** on. Confirm in the verification dialog. The user-level toggle stays locked until this is enabled.
Open **Phone System Management → Users & Rooms → Users → \[select the advisor] → Policy tab → General** and toggle **SMS/MMS** on. Repeat for every advisor who will text through Slant.
If the toggle is greyed out, it's locked at the site or account level — fix the higher scope first.
Go to **Phone (admin) → Number Management → SMS Campaigns → Brands → Create Brand**, or jump straight to [zoom.us/account/phonesystem/sms\_campaigns](https://zoom.us/account/phonesystem/sms_campaigns). Sole proprietors without an EIN can use the sole-proprietor brand type (capped at 1 number per campaign, US/CA only).
Brand approval usually completes in 1–2 hours. Additional brands beyond the first incur a monthly cost — check with your Zoom account manager.
From your Brand, click **Initiate Brand Vetting**. Zoom passes a one-time \*\*$40 fee** to The Campaign Registry per attempt — a failed vetting requires another $40 to resubmit. Vetting score raises T-Mobile daily caps: 25–49 → 10,000/day; 50–74 → 40,000/day; 75–100 → 200,000/day. See Zoom's [brand vetting guide (KB0081388)](https://support.zoom.com/hc/en/article?id=zm_kb\&sysparm_article=KB0081388).
Open **SMS Campaigns → Campaigns → Create Campaign** and tie it to your approved Brand. Provide a campaign name, use case (Account Notifications or Customer Care for most advisors), consent method with website URL, sample messages including brand name and STOP/HELP language (`"To stop receiving messages reply STOP, for help reply HELP"`), and disclose whether content includes URLs, phone numbers, age-gated content, or loans/mortgages. See Zoom's [10DLC registration guide (KB0058283)](https://support.zoom.com/hc/en/article?id=zm_kb\&sysparm_article=KB0058283).
Carrier review averages a minimum of four weeks end-to-end.
Once the Campaign shows **Approved**, open **SMS Campaigns → Campaigns → \[your campaign] → Assign Phone Numbers** and attach every Zoom Phone number you want to text from.
As of Feb 3, 2025, Zoom blocks SMS from any number not assigned to an approved campaign. See [KB0010208](https://support.zoom.com/hc/en/article?id=zm_kb\&sysparm_article=KB0010208).
Slant's **Call** button uses the `zoomphonecall://` URL scheme to deep-link the Zoom Workplace desktop app into a dial action. Zoom Phone has no server-side dial API, so the desktop client must be installed and registered as the default handler for `zoomphonecall://` on the advisor's OS.
Open **Account Management → Account Settings → Zoom Phone tab → Automatic Call Recording** and toggle it on. Pick inbound, outbound, or both, and accept Zoom's terms. Slant pulls each finished recording in via Zoom's `phone.recording_completed` webhook, attaches the audio to the matching call log, and runs it through transcription so you can read or replay the call from the household's Phone tab.
If your account has Multiple Sites enabled, the equivalent toggle lives at **Phone System Management → Company Info → \[site] → Policy tab → Automatic Call Recording**. Either way, individual users can still override the setting under **Phone System Management → Users & Rooms → Users → \[advisor] → Policy tab**.
Recording laws vary by state — many require two-party consent. Confirm your compliance obligations before turning this on, and use Zoom's built-in recording disclaimer prompt where required. See [Zoom's automatic call recording guide (KB0069692)](https://support.zoom.com/hc/en/article?id=zm_kb\&sysparm_article=KB0069692).
**TODO — needs input before publishing:**
* Does Zoom currently charge a recurring monthly fee for the **first** 10DLC brand, or only for additional brands? Zoom's docs only mention "additional brands beyond the first incur a monthly cost."
* Exact list of Zoom Phone calling plan SKUs that include SMS vs. require an add-on as of 2026 — Zoom's pricing page no longer enumerates this cleanly.
**Expected timeline:** Roughly 4+ weeks, gated by 10DLC campaign approval. Brand approval and plan/toggle changes are same-day; carrier campaign review is the slow part.
## Connect a phone integration
All phone integrations are managed from **Settings** → **Phone and SMS**.
### MyRepChat
Go to **Settings** → **Phone and SMS**.
Enter your **Public key** and **Secret key** from your MyRepChat account, then click **Save**.
Your MyRepChat phone number appears on the integration card once the initial sync completes.
### RingCentral
Go to **Settings** → **Phone and SMS**.
Sign in to your RingCentral account and grant Slant permission. You'll be redirected back to Slant when the connection is complete.
RingSense transcripts and AI call notes require RingCentral to grant RingSense access. The connected RingCentral user must also have permission to read company call recordings. If you connected before Slant requested RingSense access, a **RingCentral requires re-authentication** banner prompts you to click **Re-authenticate**.
Click the gear icon on your RingCentral card to open **RingCentral settings**, which holds the following options.
**Forwarding number** — your personal phone number that RingCentral calls first before connecting to the client. If no forwarding number is set, clicking **Call** on a record opens your phone dialer instead.
**Sender labels** — "Add labels to make your RingCentral numbers easier to identify when sending messages." Each texting-capable number gets its own label field, up to 50 characters. Labels appear alongside the number wherever you pick a sender, so **Team line — (202) 555-0120** is easier to recognize than the number alone.
**Default phone number** — Star the number Slant should select first when you send a message. Your default is personal to you and applies to that connected integration. If you do not set one, Slant uses the first available number.
Click **Save** to apply your changes.
When you choose who to text, the recipient list shows the person's name before their number, so you can tell a client's mobile from their office line at a glance.
### CurrentClient
Go to **Settings** → **Phone and SMS**.
Sign in to your CurrentClient account and grant Slant permission. You'll be redirected back to Slant when the connection is complete.
### Zoom Phone
Go to **Settings** → **Phone and SMS**.
Sign in to your Zoom account and review the requested phone and user scopes. Click **Authorize** to return to Slant with your connection live.
Outbound calls from Slant open your Zoom desktop app via the `zoomphonecall://` deep link — Zoom Phone does not support in-Slant call initiation, so your Zoom Workplace desktop client must be installed and signed in on the device you're calling from.
CurrentClient, MyRepChat, and Zoom Phone all support multiple accounts. To add another account, click **Add account** on the provider's card. RingCentral does not — its card shows the accounts you have already connected, with no way to add another from Slant.
### Dialpad
Before connecting, a Dialpad company admin needs to enable call recording for the office so Slant can ingest recordings and transcripts. In Dialpad, go to **Office-wide settings** → **Making Calls** and turn on **Enable Automatic Call Recordings** ("Automatically record all calls in the office, except for those users you exclude below"). This applies to every user in the office; individual users can be excluded from the same screen. Without this setting on, calls will still sync but recordings and transcripts will not be available.
Go to **Settings** → **Phone and SMS**.
Sign in to your Dialpad account and grant Slant permission. You'll be redirected back to Slant when the connection is complete.
Dialpad supports multiple accounts. To add another, click **Add account** on the Dialpad card.
### GoTo Connect
GoTo requires one Super Admin from your organization to connect first so Slant can create the organization-wide SMS subscription. Each advisor then connects their own GoTo user and assigned line.
See [Set up GoTo Connect](/setting-up-slant/integrations/go-to) for account requirements, GoTo configuration, connection steps, and troubleshooting.
### Intulse
Connecting Intulse requires an Intulse admin. Complete SMS sync also requires an Organization API Key, which only a Slant company admin can configure.
Go to **Settings** → **Phone and SMS**.
Sign in to your Intulse account and grant Slant permission. You'll be redirected back to Slant when the connection is complete.
On the connected account, click **SMS history settings**. Enter the **Organization API Key** from [Organization API Keys](https://app.intulse.com/secure/integrations/api) in Intulse, then click **Enable SMS history**. Slant uses the key to sync outbound messages, attribute incoming messages to the correct account, and recover missed messages.
Intulse supports multiple accounts. To add another, click **Add account** on the Intulse card.
### Vonage Business Communications
Only Slant admins can see or configure Vonage. One credential connects Slant to the company's VBC account; each book syncs only the extensions selected for that book.
Go to **Settings** → **Phone and SMS**.
Enter the application's **Consumer key** and **Consumer secret**, plus the dedicated user's **Integration username** and **Integration password**. Click **Verify account**. Slant uses the username and password only to establish the connection and does not store them.
Select the extensions whose calls should sync into the current book, then click **Connect Vonage**. Slant shows available names, extension numbers, phone numbers, and email addresses to help you identify each extension. If Vonage does not return the extension, you can enter its number manually.
### What gets synced
Slant begins syncing immediately after you connect. How far back the initial sync reaches depends on the provider — up to 7 years for RingCentral, CurrentClient, Dialpad, GoTo Connect, and Vonage, 12 months of call history for Intulse, 6 months for Zoom Phone, and all available history for MyRepChat. After a company admin enables Intulse SMS history, Slant also imports up to 12 months of incoming and outgoing SMS history. GoTo's detailed Call Events Reports are limited to 13 months, so older GoTo calls may include only the call log. The initial sync may take some time depending on the volume of messages and calls.
The RingCentral history window applies to call logs. RingSense transcripts and AI call notes begin syncing from new RingSense events after the connection is authorized; Slant does not backfill older RingSense insights.
Vonage syncs call logs and available recordings, not SMS. Slant imports calls for the selected extensions when the other phone number matches a person in the current book. The available history may be shorter than seven years if Vonage no longer retains older data.
After the initial sync, new messages and calls sync automatically.
## The Phone tab
The **Phone** tab displays a unified conversation view of SMS messages and calls for a specific record. It's available on [clients](/records/clients/overview), [prospects](/records/prospects), [other contacts](/records/other-contacts), and [businesses](/records/businesses).
Messages and calls appear in chronological order. Incoming messages appear on the left, outgoing messages on the right. Calls appear as cards showing the phone number, direction, status, timestamp, and duration. When RingSense provides AI call notes, they appear beneath the call details.
Slant shows RingSense AI call notes only when it can safely associate the phone number with the record you're viewing. If the same number belongs to records in different households or businesses, the notes remain hidden to avoid exposing them on the wrong record.
### Create meetings from transcribed calls
On the book tab in **Settings** → **Phone and SMS**, turn on **Automatically create meetings for transcribed phone calls**. Slant creates one meeting for a settled, transcribed call when it can match the other phone number to exactly one person in that book.
The setting is off by default and applies only to calls in the selected book. Ambiguous or unmatched calls remain in the **Phone** tab without creating a meeting.
Incoming image attachments (MMS) display inline within the message bubble — click an image to preview it full-size or download it. This works across all SMS-capable providers and supports GIF, HEIC, HEIF, JPEG, PNG, and WEBP images. Image-only messages with no text appear in the conversation too. Non-image attachments (video, audio, PDF) are not shown.
### Filter the conversation
If multiple integrations or phone numbers are available, use the selectors at the top of the Phone tab to filter the conversation:
* **Phone account** — switch between connected integrations (only shown if you have more than one)
* **Sending from** — choose which of your phone numbers to send from (only shown if the integration has multiple numbers)
* **Recipient** — filter by a specific phone number on the record
## Send an SMS
Go to a client, prospect, other contact, or business and click the **Phone** tab.
Use the **Recipient** selector to choose the phone number you want to message.
Type your message in the compose area at the bottom of the tab, or [apply an SMS template](#apply-an-sms-template). Messages can be up to 1,000 characters.
Press **Enter** to send, or click the send button. Use **Shift+Enter** to add a new line without sending.
The compose area shows which number you're sending from and how many characters remain (when over 900 characters).
If the compose area already contains text, applying a template opens **Replace message?** before Slant replaces it.
If a message fails to send, click **Retry** in the failed message bubble to send it again.
Messages you send from Slant are text-only — there's no way to attach an image. You can still **receive** image attachments (MMS), which appear inline in the conversation.
### Apply an SMS template
[SMS templates](/account-settings/customization/sms-templates) fill the composer with a reusable, personalized message. Company-wide templates and templates from the current book appear in the picker.
Click **Apply template** beside the message field.
Search by template name or message, then select the template you want to use.
Slant fills supported variables using the current record. Edit the finished text as needed before sending.
If you already typed a message, Slant asks before replacing it. Click **Replace** to apply the template or **Cancel** to keep your draft.
A personalized message cannot exceed 1,000 characters. If a template becomes too long after its variables fill, shorten the template before applying it again.
### SMS consent
The first time you send a message to a phone number, Slant asks you to confirm that you have consent to send SMS messages to that number. Click **Confirm and send** to proceed. This confirmation is only required once per phone number per book.
### Opt-out handling
If a recipient replies with STOP, END, QUIT, CANCEL, or UNSUBSCRIBE, Slant automatically marks that phone number as opted out and prevents further messages. If they reply with START, the number is resubscribed.
## Log a call
You can manually log calls that happened outside of your phone integration.
On the **Phone** tab, click **Log call** in the top-right corner.
Select a **Phone number**, **Direction** (outgoing or incoming), **Status** (completed, missed, failed, or voicemail), **Date**, and **Time**.
Enter the call duration in **Minutes**, add a **Note**, or click **Add recording** to attach an audio or video file.
Click **Log call**. The call appears in the conversation timeline.
If your book has multiple users, a **User** field appears so you can attribute the call to the correct team member.
Only manually logged calls can be deleted. Calls synced from an integration cannot be removed.
## Call recordings and transcripts
Call cards show what is available:
* **Recording** — open the call's audio and transcript together
* **Transcript** — open a RingSense transcript when no recording is available
Click **View transcript** on a card with either badge to open it.
A recording includes:
* **Audio player** — play, pause, and scrub through the recording
* **Transcript** — a searchable, timestamped transcript of the call. Click any line to jump to that point in the recording. The current line is highlighted as the audio plays.
* **Search transcript** — filter transcript entries by keyword
A transcript-only RingSense call opens in the **Call transcript** dialog. You can search the timestamped transcript, but there is no audio to play or seek through.
### Convert a recording to a meeting
If a recording has a completed transcript, you can convert it into a [meeting](/activity/meetings/overview) to generate a summary and action items.
Click a call card that has a **Recording** badge.
Click **Convert to meeting**. Slant creates a meeting, syncs the transcript, and generates a summary.
Once the meeting is created, the call card shows **View meeting** instead of **View transcript**.
Transcript-only RingSense calls cannot be converted to meetings because they do not include a recording.
## Manage integrations
### Disconnect an integration
On **Settings** → **Phone and SMS**, click **Disconnect** on the integration you want to remove. SMS and call history is archived and remains viewable on the Phone tab, but no new messages or calls sync.
If you visit the Phone tab while viewing archived activity from a disconnected integration, a banner indicates the integration is disconnected with a link to reconnect.
### Reconnect an integration
To reconnect a disconnected integration, click **Reconnect** on the integration card. For RingCentral, CurrentClient, Dialpad, and GoTo Connect, this re-opens the authorization flow. For MyRepChat, this opens the API key form. For Vonage, this opens extension selection. If the connected Vonage card then says reauthentication is required, click **Reauthenticate**.
### Delete integration history
To permanently remove a disconnected integration and all its call and SMS history, click **Delete history** on the disconnected integration card.
Deleting an integration permanently removes all associated call logs and SMS messages. This cannot be undone.
## FAQ
Yes. You can connect accounts across every provider Slant supports. If you have multiple integrations, use the **Phone account** selector on the Phone tab to switch between them.
Your existing SMS and call history is archived. You can still view it on the Phone tab, but no new messages or calls sync until you reconnect.
No. You can only send from phone numbers associated with your connected integration. If your integration has multiple numbers, use the **Sending from** selector to choose which one to use.
You can **receive** images. Incoming image attachments (MMS) display inline within the message bubble on the Phone tab — click one to preview it full-size or download it. This works across all SMS-capable providers and supports GIF, HEIC, HEIF, JPEG, PNG, and WEBP. Sending from Slant is text-only — there's no way to attach an image to an outgoing message.
The Phone tab is available on client, prospect, other contact, and business records. It shows all SMS messages and calls associated with the phone numbers on that record.
Three settings must all be on, in order: your Zoom plan must include SMS, the account-level SMS/MMS toggle must be on (**Account Management → Account Settings → Zoom Phone tab → General**), and the user-level SMS/MMS toggle must be on (**Phone System Management → Users → \[user] → Policy tab → General**). Your sending number must also be assigned to an approved 10DLC campaign at [zoom.us/account/phonesystem/sms\_campaigns](https://zoom.us/account/phonesystem/sms_campaigns). If the account-level toggle is greyed out, your plan doesn't include SMS — contact your Zoom rep.
Zoom Phone does not expose a server-side dial API, so Slant cannot place the call for you. Instead, Slant's **Call** button uses the `zoomphonecall://` deep link to hand the number to your Zoom Workplace desktop app, which then places the call. Install Zoom Workplace and sign in on the computer you're calling from. RingCentral supports server-initiated outbound calls (RingOut), which is why it rings your phone directly.
It depends on the provider. **RingCentral** and **Zoom Phone** require you to register your own brand and campaign with The Campaign Registry through their admin portal — plan on 2–4 weeks (RingCentral) or 4+ weeks (Zoom) for carrier approval. **CurrentClient** registers on your behalf for a one-time \$50 fee and typical 5–7 business day turnaround. **MyRepChat's** 10DLC posture is not publicly documented — ask MyRepChat support whether your firm needs to register a brand before your first send.
## Next steps
Convert call recordings into meetings with transcripts and summaries
Connect your email and calendar to sync messages and events
# Scheduling integrations
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/integrations/scheduling
Connect Calendly, OnceHub, Cal.com, or Zoom Scheduler so respondents can book appointments inside Slant intake forms.
Scheduling integrations let respondents choose a live appointment time without leaving a Slant intake form. Slant supports Calendly, OnceHub, Cal.com, and Zoom Scheduler.
Each connection belongs to one book. Select the book at the top of **Scheduling integrations** before connecting or changing settings.
## Connect Zoom Scheduler
The Zoom user you connect needs a Zoom Scheduler license. If Zoom reports that the user does not have a license, ask your Zoom administrator to assign one, then try again.
Go to **Settings** → **Scheduling**.
Choose the book that will use the Zoom Scheduler connection.
Click **Connect Zoom Scheduler**, sign in to Zoom, and authorize Slant.
Confirm that the schedules you want to use are listed under **Event types**.
If your firm already connected the same Zoom account for Zoom Phone, Slant reuses that secure Zoom authorization. Zoom may ask you to authorize again when new Scheduler permissions are required.
Slant imports the personal and accessible team schedules returned for the connected Zoom user. A Zoom Scheduler event type can be used in an intake form when it:
* Is active.
* Allows one attendee per time slot. Multi-host team schedules are supported, but group bookings are not.
* Uses a Zoom Meeting location.
* Does not require answers to custom Zoom Scheduler questions.
Slant labels other schedules **Not available for intake forms** and displays the reason. After changing a schedule in Zoom, click **Refresh event types**.
Respondents can choose from the available times Zoom returns within Slant's 30-day booking window. Slant sends their name, email address, and time zone to Zoom when it creates the booking.
Zoom Scheduler cancellation and rescheduling activity is delivered to Slant through signed Zoom webhooks. Slant updates the normalized booking and preserves the provider's cancellation details and booking-form responses. Zoom's current event-update API does not change an event's start time, so invitee rescheduling continues through Zoom's manage flow.
For technical details, see Zoom's official [Scheduler API overview](https://developers.zoom.us/docs/api/rest/zoom-scheduler-api/), [Scheduler API reference](https://developers.zoom.us/docs/api/scheduler/), [Scheduler webhook reference](https://developers.zoom.us/docs/api/scheduler/events/), and [OAuth scope reference](https://developers.zoom.us/docs/integrations/oauth-scopes-granular/).
## Connect OnceHub
You need an active OnceHub API key. In OnceHub, create one under **API & Webhooks Integration**.
Go to **Settings** → **Scheduling**.
Choose the book that will use the OnceHub connection.
Click **Connect OnceHub**.
Paste the key into **API key**, then click **Connect**.
The OnceHub card displays the connected account and imports its booking calendars as scheduling event types. Slant also creates the webhook needed to receive new bookings.
Treat the API key like a password. Enter it only in Slant's **Connect OnceHub** dialog. Slant does not display the key after connection.
## Manage scheduling event types
Slant uses the same event type controls for every scheduling provider. Calendly and Cal.com event types, OnceHub booking calendars, and Zoom Scheduler schedules appear as **Event types** under their connection.
* Click **Refresh event types** after adding or changing an event type in your scheduling provider.
* Click the external-link icon to preview the provider's scheduling page.
* Event types marked **Inactive** or **Not available for intake forms** cannot accept native intake form bookings.
## Create CRM records from bookings
Slant first matches each booking to an existing person in the selected book by email address.
Turn on **Create record** for an event type to create a record when no match exists. Choose the record type: **Prospect**, **Client**, or **Contact**.
Bookings with multiple possible email matches remain unlinked for review. Slant does not create a duplicate record.
## Use scheduling in intake forms
When a scheduling provider is connected, the intake form builder can add an appointment field and use one of its imported event types. Respondents see live availability in their time zone and schedule before the form is submitted.
If a selected time becomes unavailable before submission, the form asks the respondent to choose another time. If Slant cannot tell whether a provider accepted a booking request, it confirms the existing request before allowing another attempt, preventing duplicate appointments.
## Reconnect or disconnect
* **Reconnect** — Click the reconnect icon. For OnceHub or Cal.com, enter a current API key. For Calendly or Zoom Scheduler, authorize the account again.
* **Disconnect** — Click the trash icon, then confirm **Disconnect**.
Disconnecting stops new intake form appointments for that connection. Existing bookings, imported event types, and event-type CRM settings remain in Slant.
## Connect Calendly
Go to **Settings** → **Scheduling**.
Choose the book that will use the Calendly connection.
Click **Connect Calendly**, sign in to Calendly, and authorize Slant.
The Calendly card displays the connected account and its compatible event types. Event-type record creation and intake form scheduling work the same way as OnceHub.
## Connect Cal.com
Go to **Settings** → **Scheduling**.
Choose the book that will use the Cal.com connection.
Click **Connect Cal.com**, sign in to Cal.com, and authorize Slant.
The Cal.com card displays the connected account and imports compatible personal and team event types. Slant creates a signed webhook to receive bookings, reschedules, and cancellations.
Cal.com provides availability for up to 31 days at a time. Hidden event types remain available when they can still be booked. Event types that require payment, host confirmation, recurring bookings, seats, attendee verification, or required booking questions are marked **Not available for intake forms**.
## Reconnect or disconnect Cal.com
* **Reconnect** — Click the reconnect icon, sign in to Cal.com, and authorize Slant again.
* **Disconnect** — Click the trash icon, then confirm **Disconnect**.
Disconnecting removes Slant's Cal.com webhook and stops new intake form appointments. Existing bookings, imported event types, and event-type CRM settings remain in Slant.
# Zapier
Source: https://docs.slant.app/setting-up-slant/integrations/zapier
Connect Slant to thousands of apps with Zapier to automate your workflows.
Zapier lets you connect Slant to thousands of other apps so you can automate repetitive work. When something happens in Slant — like a new client being created — Zapier can automatically take action in another app, and vice versa.
With the Slant Zapier integration, you can:
* **React to changes in Slant** — Trigger automations when [clients](/records/clients/overview), [prospects](/records/prospects), [other contacts](/records/other-contacts), or [people](/records/people) are created or updated, or when a tag is added.
* **Create and update records from other apps** — Add new clients, prospects, other contacts, [people](/records/people), notes, [tasks](/activity/tasks/overview), and [opportunities](/activity/opportunities/overview) in Slant when something happens in another app.
* **Look up existing records** — Search for clients and prospects by name, email, or phone number to use their data in subsequent Zap steps.
* **Manage contact details** — Add or update email addresses, phone numbers, addresses, and employment records on [people](/records/people) in Slant.
* **Manage tags** — Add or remove tags from clients, prospects, and other contacts.
## Connect to Zapier
Go to **Settings** → **API connections**, then select the **Zapier** tab.
Click **Connect to Zapier**. You'll be redirected to Zapier to accept a shared app invite. Sign in to your Zapier account (or create one) and accept the invite.
When you create your first Zap with Slant, Zapier asks you to authorize access to your Slant account. Sign in and grant permission.
Once authorized, Slant appears as an available app when building Zaps.
## Triggers
Triggers fire when something happens in Slant, starting your Zap automatically.
### Record created
| Trigger | Fires when |
| -------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Client created** | A new [client](/records/clients/overview) is created |
| **Prospect created** | A new [prospect](/records/prospects) is created |
| **Contact created** | A new [other contact](/records/other-contacts) is created |
Created triggers include the record's ID, name, status, and the head of household's (or contact's) name, email, and phone number.
### Record updated
| Trigger | Fires when |
| -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Client updated** | A [client](/records/clients/overview) record is changed |
| **Prospect updated** | A [prospect](/records/prospects) record is changed |
| **Contact updated** | An [other contact](/records/other-contacts) record is changed |
| **Person updated** | Any [person](/records/people) record is changed |
Updated triggers include the full record data plus a list of which fields changed, so you can build Zaps that only act on specific changes.
Update triggers are slightly delayed (about 60 seconds) to batch rapid consecutive edits into a single event.
### Tag added
| Trigger | Fires when |
| ------------- | -------------------------------------- |
| **Tag added** | A tag is added to a client or prospect |
Includes the household's name, email, phone number, type (client or prospect), and the tag name.
## Actions
Actions let Zapier create or modify records in Slant.
### Create records
| Action | What it creates |
| --------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Create client** | A new [client](/records/clients/overview) with a head of household |
| **Create prospect** | A new [prospect](/records/prospects) with a head of household |
| **Create contact** | A new [other contact](/records/other-contacts) |
| **Add person to household** | A new [person](/records/people) on an existing client or prospect |
| **Create note** | A note on a client or prospect |
| **Create task** | A [task](/activity/tasks/overview) in a book |
| **Create opportunity** | An [opportunity](/activity/opportunities/overview) on a client or prospect |
#### Client and prospect fields
When creating a client or prospect, you can set:
* **Household details** — Household name, tags
* **Head of household** — First name (required), middle name, last name, preferred name, email, phone, salutation, suffix, gender, designations, date of birth, job title
* **Address** — Street address, apartment/suite, city, state (two-letter code), ZIP, country code, address type (home, work, mailing, or other)
* **Employment** — Business name, role, start date, end date, actively employed
* **Custom fields** — Any custom fields configured for your book
Clients also support **tier**, **became client at** date, **SSN**, and **driver's license number**.
At least one of email or phone is required when creating a client, prospect, or other contact.
#### Add person to household fields
When adding a [person](/records/people) to an existing client or prospect, you can set first name (required), middle name, last name, preferred name, email, phone, salutation, suffix, gender, designations, date of birth, job title, SSN, driver's license number, household role (head of household, spouse, partner, dependent child, other adult, other dependent, deceased, or unknown), an address, employment, and custom fields.
#### Other contact fields
When creating an other contact, you can set first name (required), last name, preferred name, email, phone, salutation, suffix, gender, designations, tags, and an address.
#### Note fields
* **Client or prospect ID** (required) — The record to attach the note to
* **Content** (required) — Markdown or plain text
#### Task fields
* **Title** (required)
* **Description**, **deadline**, **all day**, **status** (to-do or done), **priority** (low, medium, high, or urgent)
* **Client or prospect ID** or **contact ID** — Associate the task with a record
* **Assigned to user** or **assigned to team** — Assign the task (you can set one but not both)
#### Opportunity fields
* **Client or prospect ID** (required)
* **Opportunity name** (required)
* **Value**, **probability** (0–100), **target close date**
### Update records
| Action | What it updates |
| ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Update client** | Household name, tier, became client at, and custom fields |
| **Update prospect** | Household name and custom fields |
| **Update person** | Name, contact details, role, date of birth, job title, SSN, driver's license, and custom fields |
| **Update opportunity** | Name, value, probability, target close date, household, pipeline stage, owner, and custom fields |
Update actions only change the fields you provide — empty inputs are ignored so they can't overwrite existing values.
Moving an opportunity between pipelines isn't supported. The pipeline stage dropdown is scoped to the opportunity's current pipeline.
### Manage contact details on a person
| Action | What it adds |
| ---------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Add email to person** | Email address with type (personal, business, school, or other) and primary flag |
| **Add phone to person** | Phone number with type (mobile, work, home, fax, or other) and primary flag |
| **Add address to person** | Address with street, city, state, ZIP, country, type, and primary flag |
| **Add employment to person** | Employment record with business name, role, dates, and active status |
| Action | What it updates |
| ------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Update email on person** | Any field on an existing email — address, type, or primary flag |
| **Update phone on person** | Any field on an existing phone — number, type, or primary flag |
| **Update address on person** | Any field on an existing address — street, city, state, ZIP, country, type, or primary flag |
| **Update employment on person** | Any field on an existing employment — business name, role, dates, or active status |
Update actions require the person ID and the specific record ID. Only the fields you provide are changed.
### Manage tags
| Action | What it does |
| --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Add tags** | Adds one or more tags to a client, prospect, or other contact |
| **Remove tags** | Removes one or more tags from a client, prospect, or other contact |
Both actions require you to select the record type (client, prospect, or other contact) and the specific record.
## Searches
Searches let you look up existing Slant records to use in subsequent Zap steps.
| Search | How it finds records |
| ----------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Find client by email or phone** | Matches a [client](/records/clients/overview) by email address or phone number (at least one required) |
| **Find prospect by email or phone** | Matches a [prospect](/records/prospects) by email address or phone number (at least one required) |
| **Find client by name** | Matches a [client](/records/clients/overview) by first name, last name, or full name |
| **Find prospect by name** | Matches a [prospect](/records/prospects) by first name, last name, or full name |
All searches require you to select a book. Results include the record's ID, name, and book — client searches also return the tier and became client at date.
Use a search step before an update action to find the record ID you need. For example, search for a client by email, then use the returned ID to update their tier.
## FAQ
Yes. When creating or updating clients, prospects, or people, any custom fields configured in your book appear as additional fields in the Zapier action. Custom fields are not available for other contacts.
Slant automatically prevents duplicate records from repeated Zapier requests. Each action includes an idempotency key, so retries create or update the same record rather than creating duplicates.
Created triggers (client created, prospect created, contact created, tag added) fire immediately. Updated triggers (client updated, prospect updated, contact updated, person updated) are batched with a 60-second delay to consolidate rapid edits.
Not currently. Searches are available for clients and prospects only. You can search by name, email, or phone number.
## Next steps
Build automations directly in Slant without Zapier
Connect email, calendar, phone, and file storage
# Support
Source: https://docs.slant.app/support
Get help, report bugs, and request features from inside Slant.
Slant has a built-in help menu for getting answers, reporting bugs, requesting features, and finding documentation. You can open it from anywhere in the app.
## Need help?
Click the icon in the top right of Slant to open **Slant Assistant**. It's our AI support agent — available 24/7 — and can answer most functionality questions directly. If you'd rather talk to a person, pick **Talk to a human** and our team will pick up the thread between 9am–5pm Mountain Time.
From the home screen you can also:
* **Send us a message** — starts a conversation with Slant Assistant
* **Read our docs** — opens this documentation site
* **Request an integration** — let us know about a tool you'd like Slant to connect with
## Report a bug or request a feature
Open Slant Assistant and pick **Report a bug** or **Request a feature**. You'll be walked through a short form, and the ticket goes straight to the Slant team. Use the attachment icon in the message input to add screenshots or screen recordings — they help us track down issues faster.
## Prefer video?
Check out our [**YouTube channel**](https://www.youtube.com/playlist?list=PLsDk7ie183G-jpKlEqiJuhmj_7ifZlLva) for walkthroughs and tutorials.
## FAQ
Yes. Slant Assistant is our AI support agent. It handles most questions on its own using our documentation. If you want a human, select **Talk to a human** and a teammate will jump in during business hours (9am–5pm Mountain Time).
They go straight to the Slant team. Someone will follow up through Slant Assistant or by email.
Yes. Use the attachment icon in the message input to upload screenshots or videos.
Open the help menu and click **Messages** at the bottom of the panel to see your conversation history.
Open the help menu and click **Read our docs** on the home screen.